(Catalogue) TB2 MCCB Marine Sept'10 PDF

&
The Ultimate Safety Breaker
Molded Case Circuit Breaker
Catalogue No.’10–!43Ec
www.terasaki.co.jp
! Safety Notice
Carefully read instruction manual to ensure proper installation,
connection, operation, handling and maintenance of the product.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. General …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………1-1
¡Features ……………………………………………………………1-2 ¡Selection Chart………………………………………………………1-4
2. Ratings and Specifications …………………………………………………………………………………………………2-1

Molded Case Circuit Breakers
zEconomical series …………………………………………………2-2
xStandard series ……………………………………………………2-3
mNon-automatic trip breakers ……………………………………2-13
,TB series for distribution boards …………………………………2-14
1
cHigh-fault level series ………………………………………………2-6 .Current limiting series (planned to be released) ………………2-15
vCurrent limiting series………………………………………………2-8 ⁄0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities
bMotor protection series……………………………………………2-10 (approved by ship classification societies) ……………………2-16
nSwitch-disconnectors ……………………………………………2-11
3. Selection …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………3-1 2
zCombination of breakers for cascade breaking …………………3-2 xSelection of breakers for selectivity coordination ………………3-4
4. Special Breakers ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………4-1

zInstantaneous trip only breakers …………………………………4-2 xSpecial instantaneous trip breakers ………………………………4-3
5. Mounting and Connection ……………………………………………………………………………………………………5-1

3
zType of connections and mountings ……………………………5-2 vInsulation distance from the line side……………………………5-20
xCompression terminals …………………………………………5-14 bReverse connection ………………………………………………5-22
cTerminal screw sizes and standard torques ……………………5-16 nLists of breaker mounting screws ………………………………5-23
6. Accessories ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………6-1
zOCR for electronic breakers ………………………………………6-2 cExternally mounted accessories …………………………………6-20 4
1. TemBreak2 Electronic OCR ……………………………………6-2 1. Overview ………………………………………………………6-20
2. TemBreak Electronic OCR ……………………………………6-6 2. Toggle extension (HA) …………………………………………6-21
xInternally mounted accessories …………………………………6-10 3. Toggle holder (HH) and toggle lock (HL) ……………………6-22
1. Overview ………………………………………………………6-10 4. Motor operators (MC) …………………………………………6-24
2. Connection diagrams and terminal numbers ………………6-11 5. External operating handles ……………………………………6-30
3. Possible combinations …………………………………………6-12
4. Ratings and operation data of auxiliary and alarm switches…6-15
5. Shunt trip device (SHT) ………………………………………6-16
(1) Breaker-mounted (field installable)(HB) …………………6-30
(2) Breaker-mounted (HB) ……………………………………6-38
(3) Door-mounted (depth adjustable) (HP) …………………6-43
5
6. Undervoltage trip device (UVT) ………………………………6-17 (4) Door-mounted (depth fixed) (HP) …………………………6-55
6. Terminal covers CF/CR/CS……………………………………6-56
(1) CF for front-connected breakers …………………………6-56
(2) CR for rear-connected and plug-in breakers
CS for front-connected breakers with cable clamps ……6-58
7. Interpole barriers (BA) …………………………………………6-60
8. Terminal blocks (TF) …………………………………………6-61
6
9. Mechanical interlock ……………………………………………6-68
･ Slide interlock (MS) …………………………………………6-68
10. Door Flange (DF) ……………………………………………6-85
7. Characteristics and Outline Dimensions …………………………………………………………………………………7-1

7
8. Handling and maintenance …………………………………………………………………………………………………8-1
zTransportation and storage ………………………………………8-2 cInstallation and connection ………………………………………8-2
xEnvironmental operating conditions………………………………8-2 vMaintenance and inspection ………………………………………8-4
9. Appendix …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………9-1
zHandle operation and dimensions ………………………………9-2 vStandard arrangement for plug-in type auxiliary
8
xMounting positions for trip button …………………………………9-3 circuit terminals (for standard type) ………………………………9-5
cStandard arrangement for plug-in type auxiliary bInternal resistance and power consumptions of breakers ……9-8
circuit terminals (for high-performance type) ……………………9-4
9
1
1
General
General
Features ……………………………………………………1-2
Selection Chart ……………………………………………1-4
Approvals by ship classification societies
NK NIPPON KAIJI KYOKAI
LR Lloyd’s Register of Shipping
ABS The American Bureau of Shipping
GL Germanischer Lloyd
BV Bureau Veritas
CCS China Classification Society
KR Korean Register of Shipping
RINA Registro Italiano Navale
Based Standards
IEC 60947-2 International Electrotechnical Commission
EN 60947-2 European Standard
1-1
Safety Breaker
2 Isolation capability
Tem
The isolation capability means that, as long as the main contact

is closed, the toggle is not in the OFF position and cannot be
locked at the OFF position.
The toggle being in the OFF position hence shows the main con- Not in the OFF position
tact is open and personnel are not exposed to electrical shock Cannot be locked OFF
Main contact
hazard when working in the load side. closed
2 Direct Opening Action

Tem
Under the heading “Measures to minimize the risk in the event of

failure”, IEC 60204-1 Safety of Machinery-Electrical Equipment
of Machinery includes the following recommendation:
“-the use of switching devices having positive (or direct) opening
operation.”
2 Safety lock for Plug-in versions

Tem
Opening force is
There are three plug-in types available according to applications, transmitted directly
from the toggle
switch.
[For switchboards]
■Standard type
Suitable for angle-mounted or rear-connected application
■High-performance type
Suitable for angle-mounted, front
panel-mounted or rear panel- ENING
OP A
mounted application. The plug-in
T
CT
DIREC
MCCB is locked to the base

ION
when the toggle is ON. It cannot

be removed unless the toggle is
OFF or TRIPPED. The safety
lock prevents a trip occurring as
the MCCB is being removed
from the base.
[For distribution boards]

Suitable for front-connected application where the breaker
depth is smaller than for switchboards
2 Enhanced Insulation
Tem
The risk of touching live parts has been minimized by design.

If the toggle is broken by accident or misuse, no live part is ex-
posed.
Double Insulation
1-2
Hi-Technology
2 Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics)

Tem 1
The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics) is the maximum short-circuit current defined by IEC 60947-2 which
a circuit breaker can break in accordance with a sequence of opening and closing operations (O-CO-CO).
General
TemBreak2 has greatly been improved in its rated service short-circuit capacity, thereby providing more safety.
[225AF Standard series]

Rated breaking capacity
Icu / Ics=25/13kA Icu / Ics=25/25kA
25kA
13kA Icu Ics

Icu Ics
TemBreak2
Smaller size and higher breaking capacity,

2
Tem allowing a downsizing of switchboards
TemBreak2 current limiting breakers are reduced in size to at least one-half and enhanced in breaking capacity.
• Smaller in size than existing models
50 % 30 % 50 %
TL-100C L100-NF TL-225B L225-NF TL-400 L400-NE

(100A frame) (225A frame) (400A frame)
1-3
Selection Chart
Molded Case Frame size (A)

Circuit Breakers 30 50 100 125 225 250 400 600 630 800 1000 1200 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000
Economical series E50-SF E100-SF E250-SF

10kA/5kA 10kA/5kA 15kA/12kA
② Electronic
1
XS2000NE
85kA/-
General
S400-CF S630-CF S800-CF
30kA/30kA 30kA/30kA 30kA/30kA
Standard series
S50-SF S125-SF S250-SF S400-NF S630-NF S800-NF
25kA/13kA 25kA/13kA 30kA/15kA 45kA/45kA 50kA/50kA 50kA/50kA
Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic

S100-NF S125-NF S225-NF S250-NF S400-NE S630-NE S800-NE S1250-NE S1600-NE
25kA/25kA 25kA/25kA 25kA/25kA 25kA/25kA 45kA/45kA 50kA/50kA 50kA/50kA 65kA/50kA 85kA/65kA
S50-GF S100-GF S125-GF S225-GF S250-GF S400-GF S630-RF S800-RF

50kA/25kA 50kA/25kA 50kA/25kA 50kA/25kA 50kA/25kA 65kA/50kA 65kA/50kA 65kA/50kA
Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic

S225-GE S400-GE S630-RE S800-RE S1250-GE
50kA/25kA 65kA/50kA 65kA/50kA 65kA/50kA 85kA/65kA
High-fault level series
S400-PF
80kA/80kA
Electronic
S400-PE
80kA/80kA
③ Electronic ③ Electronic
TL-1000NE TL-1200NE
125kA/- 125kA/-
Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic

Current limiting series H100-NF H125-NF H225-NF H400-NE H630-NE H800-NE H1250-NE
120kA/80kA 120kA/80kA 120kA/80kA 120kA/80kA 125kA/94kA 125kA/94kA 125kA/65kA
Electronic Electronic Electronic

L100-NF L125-NF L225-NF L400-NE L630-NE L800-NE
180kA/135kA 180kA/135kA 180kA/135kA 180kA/135kA 180kA/135kA 180kA/135kA
Motor protection series E50-CM S100-NM S225-NM

2.5kA/1.3kA 25kA/25kA 25kA/25kA
Non-automatic trip breakers XS2000NN
S125-SN S250-SN S630-GN S800-NN S1250-NN S1600-NN

Switch-disconnectors
S100-NN S125-NN S400-NN
④
TB-5S
5kA/-
④
TB series for distribution
TB-5P S100-NF
boards 5kA/- 25kA/25kA
④ AC450V Icu(NK) AC450V Ics (NK)

TB-5D
5kA/-
Notes: ① For breaking capacity, see pages 2-2 to 2-15 Planned to be released.
② For AC500V Contact us for the release date.
③ For AC460V
④ For AC250V
1-4 1-5
2 Ratings and
Specifications 2
Ratings and Specifications

zEconomical series ………………………………………………………2-2
xStandard series …………………………………………………………2-3
cHigh-fault level series …………………………………………………2-6
vCurrent limiting series …………………………………………………2-8
bMotor protection series ………………………………………………2-10
nSwitch-disconnectors …………………………………………………2-11
mNon-automatic trip breakers …………………………………………2-13
,TB series for distribution boards ……………………………………2-14
.Current limiting series (planned to be released) …………………2-15
⁄0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities
(approved by ship classification societies) ………………………2-16
2-1
2
zEconomical series
Frame size (A) 50 100 250

Type E50-SF E100-SF E250-SF
Number of poles ２３２３ 2＊ 3 2＊ 3
■Ratings
Rated current, A 10 40 10 40 100 125 250
Calibrated at 45°C 15 50 15 50 150
20 20 60 175
30 30 75 200
225
＊center pole omitted

Rated insulation voltage〔Ui〕 V AC 690 690 690 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage 〔U imp〕 kV 6 6 8 8
■Rated breaking capacity, kA
NK AC 690V ― ― ― ―
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 10/- !3 10/- !3 15/12 15/12
240V 25/- !4 25/- !4 35/27 35/27
① DC 250V 7.5/- 7.5/- ― ―
IEC60947-2 AC 690V ― ― ― ―
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 7.5/3.8 7.5/3.8 10/7.5 10/7.5
440V 10/5 10/5 15/12 15/12
415V 10/5 10/5 25/19 25/19
380V 16/8 16/8 25/19 25/19
240V 25/13 25/13 35/27 35/27
① DC 250V 7.5/3.8 7.5/3.8 15/12 15/12
125V 15/7.5 15/7.5 25/19 25/19
■Rated short time withstand current, kA ― ― ― ―
■External dimensions, mm
a d a 50 75 50 75 105 105 105 105
c
b 130 130 165 165
b c 68 68 68 68
d 87 87 95 95
Weight (' marked standard type) kg 0.48 0.74 0.48 0.74 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
■Connections and Mountings
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ' ' ' '
With extension bars ― ― ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR)
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ○ ○ ― ―
Flat bar studs ― ― ○ ○
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ○ ― ○ ― ○
High-performance (PMB) ― ― ― ―
For distribution boards (PMC) ○ ○ ― ―
Flush-mounted (FP) Bolt studs ○ ○ ― ―
Flat bar studs ― ― ○ ○
Draw-out type (DR) ― ― ― ―
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ― ― ○ ― ○
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― ― ―
DIN rail mount ― ― ― ―
Clip-in chassis mount ― ― ― ―
■Accessories (optional) Symbol
Auxiliary switch ＡＸ ● ● ● ●
Internally
mounted
Alarm switch ＡＬ ● ● ● ●
Shunt trips ＳＨ ● ● ● ●
Undervoltage trips ＵＶ ●⑥ ●⑥ ● ●
Motor operator ＭＣ ― ● ― ● ● ●
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ― ● ― ● ● ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ― ● ― ● ● ●
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ― ― ― ―
Mechanical interlock Slide type ＭＳ ― ● ― ● ● ●
Toggle holder ＨＨ ● ● ● ●
Toggle lock ＨＬ ● ● ● ●
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● ● ●
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ● ● ● ●
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ● ● ●③ ●③
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● ● ● ●
Door flange ＤＦ ● ● ● ●
■Standard specifications
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic ⑦ Thermal-magnetic ⑦ Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button (color) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red)
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Suitability for isolation Non Non Yes Yes
CE marking Non Non Yes Yes
Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown 7-2 7-4 7-16 7-16
Notes:
' : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. ○ : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. ● : “yes” or “available”. ― : “no” or “not available”.
① : DC rating available on request. ③ : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only)
⑥ : The UVT controller is installed externally, when provided with AC UVT. ⑦ : Hydraulic-magnetic type for below 10A rating. !3 : at 500V AC. !4 : at 250V AC.
2-2
2
xStandard series
Frame size (A) 50 100 125 125 225 250

Type S50-SF S100-NF S125-SF S125-NF S225-NF S250-SF
Number of poles ２３２３４ 2 3 4 2 3 4 ２３４ 2＊ 3 4 2＊ 3 4 2＊ 3 4
■Ratings
Rated current, A 15 15 50 15 50 125 125 125 200 125 250
Calibrated at 45°C 20 20 60 20 60 150 225 150
30 30 75 30 75 175 175
40 40 100 40 100 200
50 225
＊center pole omitted

Rated insulation voltage〔Ui〕 V AC 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage 〔U imp〕 kV
NK
Icu/Ics(sym)
AC 690V
450V
8
―
25/13
8
6/6
25/25
8
―
25/13
8
―
25/13
8
6/6
25/25
8
7.5/7.5
25/25
8
―
30/15
8
―
30/15
2
240V 50/25 50/50 50/25 50/25 50/50 65/65 85/43 85/43
① DC 250V 25/13 25/19 25/13 25/13 25/19 40/40 25/13 25/13
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 6/3 6/6 6/3 6/3 6/6 7.5/7.5 4/2 4/2

Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 12/6 22/22 12/6 12/6 22/22 25/25 25/13 25/13
440V 25/13 25/25 25/13 25/13 25/25 25/25 30/15 30/15
415V 30/15 30/30 30/15 30/15 30/30 35/35 40/20 40/20
380V 30/15 30/30 30/15 30/15 30/30 35/35 40/20 40/20
240V 50/25 50/50 50/25 50/25 50/50 65/65 85/43 85/43
① DC 250V 25/13 25/19 25/13 25/13 25/19 40/40 25/13 25/13
125V 40/20 40/30 40/20 40/20 40/30 40/40 40/20 40/20
■Rated short time withstand current, kA ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
a d a 50 75 60 90 120 50 75 100 50 75 100 60 90 120 105 105 140 105 105 140 105 105 140
c
b 130 155 130 130 155 165 165 165
b c 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68
d 95 92 95 95 92 92 95 95
Weight (' marked standard type) kg 0.6 0.8 0.7 1.1 1.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 0.6 0.8 1.0 0.7 1.1 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.9 1.5 1.5 1.9 1.5 1.5 1.9
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ' ' ' ' ' ' ' '
With extension bars ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR)
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ― ○ ― ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ○ ―
High-performance (PMB) ― ○ ― ― ○ ○ ― ―
For distribution boards (PMC) ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ― ―
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ ― ○ ― ○ ○ ○ ○
Draw-out type (DR) ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ○ ○ ― ― ― ○ ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ○ ―
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
DIN rail mount ― ○⑪ ― ○⑪ ― ○⑪ ― ○⑪ ― ○⑪ ― ― ―
Clip-in chassis mount ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Auxiliary switch ＡＸ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Internally
mounted
Alarm switch ＡＬ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Shunt trips ＳＨ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Undervoltage trips ＵＶ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Motor operator ＭＣ ― ― ● ― ― ― ● ● ● ●
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ― ● ― ● ― ● ― ● ― ● ● ● ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ― ● ― ● ― ● ― ● ― ● ● ● ●
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Mechanical interlock Slide type ＭＳ ― ● ― ● ― ● ― ● ― ● ● ● ●
Toggle holder ＨＨ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Toggle lock ＨＬ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●③ ●③ ●③ ●③ ●③ ●③ ●③ ●③
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Door flange ＤＦ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button (color) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red)
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Suitability for isolation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
CE marking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown 7-6 7-10 7-8 7-8 7-12 7-14 7-16 7-16
Notes:
' : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. ○ : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. ▲ : Semi-standard. ● : “yes” or “available”. ― : “no” or “not available”.
① : DC rating available on request. ③ : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only)
⑥ : The UVT controller is installed externally, when provided with AC UVT. ⑦ : Hydraulic-magnetic type for below 10A rating. ⑪ : Provided with DIN rail adaptor.
2-3
2
xStandard series
Frame size (A) 250 400 400 400 630 630 630
Type S250-NF S400-CF S400-NF S400-NE S630-CF S630-NF S630-NE
Number of poles 2＊ 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
■Ratings
Rated current, A 250 125 250 125 250 (Adjustable) (Adjustable) 500 500 (Adjustable)
Calibrated at 45°C 150 300 150 300 125 175 600 600 250 500
175 350 175 350 150 200 630 630 300 600
200 400 200 400 175 225 350 630
225 225 200 250 400
225 300
350
＊center pole omitted 400
Rated insulation voltage〔Ui〕 V AC 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage 〔U imp〕 kV 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
NK AC 690V 7.5/7.5 15/15 20/15 20/15 10/10 20/20 20/20
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 25/25 30/30 45/45 45/45 30/30 50/50 50/50
240V 65/65 50/50 85/85 85/85 50/50 85/85 85/85
① DC 250V 40/40 40/40 ― ― ― ― ―
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 7.5/7.5 15/15 20/15 20/15 10/10 20/20 20/20
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 25/25 22/22 30/30 30/30 15/15 30/30 30/30
440V 25/25 30/30 45/45 45/45 30/30 45/45 45/45
415V 35/35 36/36 50/50 50/50 36/36 50/50 50/50
380V 35/35 36/36 50/50 50/50 36/36 50/50 50/50
240V 65/65 50/50 85/85 85/85 50/50 85/85 85/85
① DC 250V 40/40 40/40 40/40 ― 50/50 50/50 ―
125V 40/40 40/40 40/40 ― 50/50 50/50 ―
■Rated short time withstand current, kA ― ― ― 5（0.3sec） ― ― 10（0.3sec）
a d a 105 105 140 140 185 140 185 140 185 210 280 210 280 210 280
c
b 165 260 260 260 273 273 273
b c 68 103 103 103 103 103 103
d 92 145 145 145 145 145 145
Weight (' marked standard type) kg 1.5 1.5 1.9 4.2 5.6 4.2 5.6 4.3 5.7 8.0 11.0 8.0 11.0 8.7 11.9
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ' ' ' ' ― ― ―
With extension bars ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ' ' '
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ―
High-performance (PMB) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
For distribution boards (PMC) ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Draw-out type (DR) ― ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ―
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
DIN rail mount ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Clip-in chassis mount ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Auxiliary switch ＡＸ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Internally
mounted
Alarm switch ＡＬ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Shunt trips ＳＨ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Undervoltage trips ＵＶ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Motor operator ＭＣ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ― ― ― ― ● ● ●
Mechanical interlock⑨ Slide type ＭＳ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Toggle holder ＨＨ ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
Toggle lock ＨＬ ●
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●③ ●③ ●e ●e ●e ●e ●e
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Door flange ＤＦ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Electronic ⑯ Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) Electronic ⑯
Trip button (color) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red)
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Suitability for isolation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
CE marking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown 7-18 7-20 7-20 7-30 7-34 7-34 7-36
Notes:
① : DC rating available on request. ③ : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) ⑨ : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).
⑯ : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request.
2-4
2
xStandard series
Frame size (A) 800 800 800 1250 1600 2000

Type S800-CF S800-NF S800-NE S1250-NE S1600-NE XS2000NE
Number of poles ３４３４３４３４３４３４
■Ratings
Rated current, A 700 700 (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable)
Calibrated at 45°C 800 800 350 600 500 1000 700 1200 1000 1600
400 700 600 1200 800 1400 1200 1800
450 800 700 1250 900 1600 1400 2000
500 800 1000
Rated insulation voltage〔Ui〕 V AC 690 690 690 690 690 690

NK
Icu/Ics(sym)
AC 690V
450V
8
10/10
30/30
8
20/20
50/50
8
20/20
50/50
8
25/20 ⑫
65/50 ⑫
8
45/34 ⑫
85/65 ⑫
8
―
85/- !3
2
240V 50/50 85/85 85/85 100/75 ⑫ 125/94 ⑫ ―
① DC 250V ― ― ― ― ― ―
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 10/10 20/20 20/20 25/20 45/34 45/42

Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 15/15 30/30 30/30 45/34 65/50 65/50
440V 30/30 45/45 45/45 65/50 85/65 85/65
415V 36/36 50/50 50/50 70/50 85/65 85/65
380V 36/36 50/50 50/50 85/65 100/75 100/75
240V 50/50 85/85 85/85 100/75 125/94 125/94
① DC 250V 50/50 50/50 ― ― ― ―
125V 50/50 50/50 ― ― ― ―
■Rated short time withstand current, kA ― ― 10（0.3sec） 15（0.3sec） 20（0.3sec） 42（0.3sec）
a d a 210 280 210 280 210 280 210 280 210 280 320 429
c
b 273 273 273 370 370 450
b c 103 103 103 120 140 185
d 145 145 145 171 191 245
Weight (' marked standard type) kg 8.5 11.5 8.5 11.5 9.1 12.3 19.8 25.0 27.0 35.0 54.0 67.0
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ― ― ― ― ― ―
With extension bars ' ' ' ' ○ ○
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ― ― ― ― ―
Flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ ○ ' '
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ―
High-performance (PMB) ○ ○ ○ ― ― ―
For distribution boards (PMC) ― ― ― ― ― ―
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Draw-out type (DR) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ○ ○
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ― ― ― ― ―
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― ― ― ― ―
DIN rail mount ― ― ― ― ― ―
Clip-in chassis mount ― ― ― ― ― ―
Auxiliary switch ＡＸ ● ● ● ● ● ●
Internally
mounted
Alarm switch ＡＬ ● ● ● ● ● ●
Shunt trips ＳＨ ● ● ● ● ● ●
Undervoltage trips ＵＶ ● ● ● ● ● ●⑥
Motor operator ＭＣ ● ● ● ● ● ●
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ● ● ● ● ● ―
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ● ● ● ● ● ^3
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ● ● ● ● @4 ● @4 ●②
Mechanical interlock⑨ Slide type ＭＳ ● ● ● ● ● ●
Toggle holder ＨＨ
● ● ● ● ● ●
Toggle lock ＨＬ
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● ● ● ― ―
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ● ● ● ― ― ―
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●e ●e ●e ●e ●e ―
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● ● ● ● ● ●
Door flange ＤＦ ● ● ● ● ● ●
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) Electronic ⑯ Electronic ⑯ Electronic ⑯ Electronic ⑯
Trip button (color) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red)
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Suitability for isolation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Non
CE marking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Non
Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown 7-40 7-40 7-42 7-46 7-48 7-76
Notes:
1 : DC rating available on request. 2 : Supplied as standard. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 6 : The UVT controller is installed externally,
when provided with AC UVT. 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). !2 : Being or will be applied. !3 : at 500V AC. !6 : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault
trip function available on request. @4 : One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are required. ^3 : Fixed depth, not adjustable.
2-5
2
cHigh-fault level series
Frame size (A) 50 100 125 225 250 225 400 400
Type S50-GF S100-GF S125-GF S225-GF S250-GF S225-GE S400-GF S400-GE
Number of poles ３４２３４２３４ 2＊ 3 4 2＊ 3 4 ３４３４３４
■Ratings
Rated current, A 15 15 60 125 125 250 (Adjustable) 125 250 (Adjustable) (Adjustable)
Calibrated at 45°C 20 20 75 150 125 150 300 125 175
30 30 100 175 150 175 350 150 200
40 40 200 175 200 400 175 225
50 50 225 200 225 200 250
225 225 300
350
Rated impulse withstand voltage 〔U imp〕 kV 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
NK AC 690V 6/6 6/6 6/6 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 ⑫ 20/15 20/15
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 50/25 50/25 50/25 50/25 50/25 50/25 ⑫ 65/50 65/50
240V 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 ⑫ 100/85 100/85
① DC 250V 40/40 40/40 40/40 40/40 40/40 ― ― ―
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 6/6 6/6 6/6 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 20/15 20/15
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 25/22 25/22 25/22 25/25 25/25 25/25 30/30 30/30
440V 50/25 50/25 50/25 50/25 50/25 50/25 65/50 65/50
415V 65/33 65/33 65/33 65/35 65/35 65/35 70/50 70/50
380V 65/33 65/33 65/33 65/35 65/35 65/35 70/50 70/50
240V 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 100/85 100/85
① DC 250V 40/40 40/40 40/40 40/40 40/40 ― 40/40 ―
125V 40/40 40/40 40/40 40/40 40/40 ― 40/40 ―
■Rated short time withstand current, kA ― ― − ― ― ― ― 5（0.3sec）
a d a 90 120 60 90 120 60 90 120 105 105 140 105 105 140 105 140 140 185 140 185
c
b 155 155 155 165 165 165 260 260
b c 68 68 68 68 68 103 103 103
d 92 92 92 92 92 127 145 145
Weight (' marked standard type) kg 1.1 1.4 0.7 1.1 1.4 0.7 1.1 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.9 1.5 1.5 1.9 2.3 3.1 4.2 5.6 4.3 5.7
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ' ' ' ' ' ' ' '
With extension bars ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR)
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ―
High-performance (PMB) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
For distribution boards (PMC) ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ― ― ― ―
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Draw-out type (DR) ― ― ― ― ― ― ▲ ▲
TemPlug70 (PG) ○ ― ○ ○ ― ○ ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ○ ― ▲ ― ○ ― ○ ―
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
DIN rail mount ○⑪ ― ○⑪ ― ○⑪ ― ― ― ― ―
Internally
mounted
Motor operator ＭＣ ● ― ● ― ● ● ● ● ● ●
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ● ― ● ― ● ● ● ● ● ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ― ● ― ● ● ● ● ● ●
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Mechanical interlock⑨ Slide type ＭＳ ● ― ● ― ● ● ● ● ● ●
Toggle holder ＨＨ ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ●
Toggle lock ＨＬ ● ● ● ● ● ●
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●e ●e ●e ●e ●e ●e ●e ●e
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Electronic ⑳ Thermal-magnetic Electronic ⑯
Notes:
⑪ : Provided with DIN rail adaptor. ⑫ : Being or will be applied. ⑯ : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. ⑳ : Optional pretrip alarm function available on
request.
2-6
2
cHigh-fault level series
Frame size (A) 400 400 630 630 800 800 1250
Type S400-PF S400-PE S630-RF S630-RE S800-RF S800-RE S1250-GE
Number of poles ３４３４３４３４３４３４３４
■Ratings
Rated current, A 250 (Adjustable) (Adjustable) 500 (Adjustable) 700 (Adjustable) (Adjustable)
Calibrated at 45°C 300 125 175 600 250 500 800 350 600 500 1000
350 150 200 630 300 600 400 700 600 1200
400 175 225 350 630 450 800 700 1250
200 250 400 500 800
225 300
350
400
Rated insulation voltage〔Ui〕 V AC 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
NK
Icu/Ics(sym)
AC 690V
450V
8
20/15
80/80
8
20/15
80/80
8
25/20 ⑫
65/50 ⑫
8
25/20 ⑫
65/50 ⑫
8
25/20 ⑫
65/50 ⑫
8
25/20 ⑫
65/50 ⑫
8
45/34 ⑫
85/65 ⑫
2
240V 100/85 100/85 100/75 ⑫ 100/75 ⑫ 100/75 ⑫ 100/75 ⑫ 125/94 ⑫
① DC 250V ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 20/15 20/15 25/20 25/20 25/20 25/20 45/34

Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 30/30 30/30 45/34 45/34 45/34 45/34 65/50
440V 80/80 80/80 65/50 65/50 65/50 65/50 85/65
415V 85/85 85/85 70/50 70/50 70/50 70/50 85/65
380V 85/85 85/85 70/50 70/50 70/50 70/50 100/75
240V 100/85 100/85 100/75 100/75 100/75 100/75 125/94
① DC 250V 40/40 ― 50/50 ― 50/50 ― ―
125V 40/40 ― 50/50 ― 50/50 ― ―
■Rated short time withstand current, kA ― 5（0.3sec） ― 10（0.3sec） ― 10（0.3sec） 15（0.3sec）
a d a 140 185 140 185 210 280 210 280 210 280 210 280 210 280
c
b 260 260 273 273 273 273 370
b c 103 103 103 103 103 103 120
d 145 145 145 145 145 145 171
Weight (' marked standard type) kg 4.2 5.6 4.3 5.7 8.0 11.0 8.7 11.9 8.5 11.5 9.1 12.3 19.8 25.0
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ' ' ― ― ― ― ―
With extension bars ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ' ' ' ' '
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○
High-performance (PMB) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ―
For distribution boards (PMC) ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Draw-out type (DR) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
TemPlug70 (PG) ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ― ― ―
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
DIN rail mount ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Clip-in chassis mount ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Auxiliary switch ＡＸ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Internally
mounted
Alarm switch ＡＬ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Shunt trips ＳＨ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Undervoltage trips ＵＶ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Motor operator ＭＣ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ― ― ● ● ● ● ● @4
Mechanical interlock⑨ Slide type ＭＳ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Toggle lock ＨＬ
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ● ● ● ● ● ● ―
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●e ●e ●e ●e ●e ●e ●e
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Door flange ＤＦ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic Electronic ⑯ Thermal-magnetic Electronic ⑯ Thermal-magnetic Electronic ⑯ Electronic ⑯
Trip button (color) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red)
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Suitability for isolation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
CE marking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown 7-20 7-30 7-34 7-36 7-40 7-42 7-46
Notes:
⑫ : Being or will be applied. ⑯ : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. @4 : One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are required.
2-7
2
vCurrent limiting series
Frame size (A) 100 125 225 400 630 800 1000 1200
Type H100-NF H125-NF H225-NF H400-NE H630-NE H800-NE TL-1000NE TL-1200NE
Number of poles ３４３４３４３４３４３４３４３４
■Ratings
Rated current, A 15 50 125 125 (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable)
Calibrated at 45°C 20 60 150 125 175 250 500 350 600 500 800 600 1000
30 75 175 150 200 300 600 400 700 600 900 700 1200
40 100 200 175 225 350 630 450 800 700 1000 800
225 200 250 400 500
225 300
350
400
NK AC 690V 20/15 20/15 20/15 35/35 25/20 25/20 ― ―
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 120/80 120/80 120/80 120/80 125/94 125/94 125/- @3 125/- @3
240V 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 ― ―
① DC 250V ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 20/15 20/15 20/15 35/35 25/20 25/20 45/34 45/34
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 45/45 45/45 45/45 45/45 45/34 45/34 75/57 75/57
440V 120/80 120/80 120/80 120/80 125/94 125/94 125/65 125/65
415V 125/85 125/85 125/85 125/85 125/94 125/94 125/65 125/65
380V 125/85 125/85 125/85 125/85 125/94 125/94 125/65 125/65
240V 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/113 150/113
① DC 250V 40/40 40/40 40/40 ― ― ― ― ―
125V 40/40 40/40 40/40 ― ― ― ― ―
■Rated short time withstand current, kA ― ― ― 5（0.3sec） 10（0.3sec） 10（0.3sec） 15（0.3sec） 15（0.3sec）
a d a 105 140 105 140 105 140 140 185 210 280 210 280 210 280 210 280
c
b 165 165 165 260 273 273 370 370
b c 103 103 103 140 140 140 140 140
d 127 127 127 182 182 182 191 191
Weight (' marked standard type) kg 2.4 3.2 2.4 3.2 2.4 3.2 7.1 9.4 13.5 19.6 14.3 20.3 26.0 33.7 26.0 33.7
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ' ' ' ' ― ― ― ―
With extension bars ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ' ' ' '
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ○
High-performance (PMB) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ― ―
For distribution boards (PMC) ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Draw-out type (DR) ― − ― ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
TemPlug70 (PG) ▲ ― ▲ ― ▲ ― ― ― ― ― ―
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
DIN rail mount ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Internally
mounted
Undervoltage trips ＵＶ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●⑥ ●⑥
Motor operator ＭＣ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ― ― ― ― ● ● ● @4 ● @4
Mechanical interlock⑨ Slide type ＭＳ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Toggle holder ＨＨ ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ●
Toggle lock ＨＬ ● ● ●
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● ● ● ● ● ― ―
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ● ● ● ● ● ● ― ―
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Electronic ⑯ Electronic ⑯ Electronic ⑯ Electronic ⑯ Electronic ⑯
Trip button (color) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Brown) Yes (Brown)
Suitability for isolation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Non Non
CE marking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Non Non
Notes:
① : DC rating available on request. ③ : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) ⑥ : The UVT controller is installed externally, when provided with AC UVT.
⑨ : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). ⑯ : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. @3 : at 460V AC.
@4 : One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are required.
2-8
2
vCurrent limiting series
Frame size (A) 100 125 225 400 630 800

Type L100-NF L125-NF L225-NF L400-NE L630-NE L800-NE
Number of poles ３４３４３４３４３４３４
■Ratings
Rated current, A 15 50 125 125 (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable)
Calibrated at 45°C 20 60 150 125 175 250 500 350 600
30 75 175 150 200 300 600 400 700
40 100 200 175 225 350 630 450 800
225 200 250 400 500
225 300
350
400
Rated insulation voltage〔Ui〕 V AC 690 690 690 690 690 690
NK
Icu/Ics(sym)
AC 690V
450V
8
25/20
180/135
8
25/20
180/135
8
25/20
180/135
8
50/50
180/135
8
25/20
180/135
8
25/20
180/135
2
240V 200/150 #1 200/150 #1 200/150 #1 200/150 #1 200/150 200/150
① DC 250V ― ― ― ― ― ―
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 25/20 25/20 25/20 50/50 25/20 25/20

Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 65/65 65/65 65/65 65/65 45/34 45/34
440V 180/135 180/135 180/135 180/135 180/135 180/135
415V 200/150 200/150 200/150 200/150 200/150 200/150
380V 200/150 200/150 200/150 200/150 200/150 200/150
240V 200/150 200/150 200/150 200/150 200/150 200/150
① DC 250V 40/40 40/40 40/40 ― ― ―
125V 40/40 40/40 40/40 ― ― ―
■Rated short time withstand current, kA ― ― ― 5（0.3sec） 10（0.3sec） 10（0.3sec）
a d a 105 140 105 140 105 140 140 185 210 280 210 280
c
b 165 165 165 260 273 273
b c 103 103 103 140 140 140
d 127 127 127 182 182 182
Weight (' marked standard type) kg 2.4 3.2 2.4 3.2 2.4 3.2 7.1 9.4 13.5 19.6 14.3 20.3
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ' ' ' ' ― ―
With extension bars ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ' '
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ― ― ― ― ―
Flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ―
High-performance (PMB) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
For distribution boards (PMC) ― ― ― ― ― ―
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Draw-out type (DR) ― ― ― ▲ ▲ ▲
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ― ― ― ― ―
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― ― ― ― ―
DIN rail mount ― ― ― ― ― ―
Clip-in chassis mount ― ― ― ― ― ―
Auxiliary switch ＡＸ ● ● ● ● ● ●
Internally
mounted
Alarm switch ＡＬ ● ● ● ● ● ●
Shunt trips ＳＨ ● ● ● ● ● ●
Undervoltage trips ＵＶ ● ● ● ● ● ●
Motor operator ＭＣ ● ● ● ● ● ●
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ● ● ● ● ● ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ● ● ● ● ●
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ― ― ― ― ● ●
Mechanical interlock⑨ Slide type ＭＳ ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● ● ● ● ●
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ● ● ● ● ● ●
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●e ●e ●e ●e ●e ●e
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● ● ● ● ● ●
Door flange ＤＦ ● ● ● ● ● ●
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Electronic ⑯ Electronic ⑯ Electronic ⑯
Trip button (color) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red)
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Suitability for isolation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
CE marking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown 7-22 7-24 7-26 7-32 7-38 7-44
Notes:
⑯ : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. #1 : Also applicable to AC415V.
2-9
2
bMotor protection series

Type E50-CM S100-NM S225-NM
Number of poles ３３３
■Ratings
Motor rated capacity (kW)
（kW）（kW）（kW）
and breaker rated current (A) (A) (A) (A)
200/220V 400/440V 200/220V 400/440V 200/220V 400/440V
Calibrated at 45℃
0.7 ― 0.2 16 3.7 7.5 125 30 ―
1.4 0.2 0.4 24 5.5 11 150 37 75
2 ― 0.75 32 7.5 15 175 45 90
2.6 0.4 ― 40 ― 18.5 225 55 110
4 0.75 1.5 45 11 22
5 ― 2.2 60 15 30
8 1.5 3.7 75 18.5 37
10 2.2 ― 90 22 45
12 ― 5.5 100 ― 55
16 3.7 7.5
25 5.5 11
32 7.5 15
Note: Select an appropriate one depending on the total
40 ― 18.5
load current of the motor operator.
45 11 22
Rated insulation voltage〔Ui〕 V AC 690 690 690

Rated impulse withstand voltage 〔U imp〕 kV 6 8 8
NK AC 690V ― ― ―
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 2.5/- !3 25/25 25/25
240V 5/- !4 50/50 65/65
DC 250V ― ― ―
IEC 60947-2 AC 440V 2.5/1.3 25/25 25/25
Icu/Ics(sym) 415V 2.5/1.3 30/30 35/35
380V 2.5/1.3 30/30 35/35
240V 5/2.5 50/50 65/65
DC 250V ― ― ―
a d a 75 90 105
c
b 130 155 165
b c 68 68 68
d 87 92 92
Weight (' marked standard type) kg 0.74 1.1 1.5
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ' ' '
With extension bars ― ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR)
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ○ ― ―
Flat bar studs ― ○ ○
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ― ―
High-performance (PMB) ― ― ―
For distribution boards (PMC) ○ ― ―
Flush-mounted (FP) Bolt studs ○ ― ―
Flat bar studs ― ○ ○
Draw-out type (DR) ― ― ―
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ○ ○
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― ―
DIN rail mount ― ○⑪ ―
Clip-in chassis mount ― ― ―
Auxiliary switch ＡＸ ● ● ●
Internally
mounted
Alarm switch ＡＬ ● ● ●
Shunt trips ＳＨ ● ● ●
Undervoltage trips ＵＶ ― ● ●
Motor operator ＭＣ ― ● ●
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ● ● ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ● ●
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ― ― ―
Mechanical interlock Slide type ＭＳ ● ● ●
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● ●
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ● ● ●
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ● ●e ●e
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● ● ●
Door flange ＤＦ ● ● ●
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic @7 Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button (color) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red)
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes Yes Yes
Suitability for isolation Non Yes Yes
CE marking Non Yes Yes
Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown 7-50 7-52 7-54
Notes:
' : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. ○ : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. ● : “yes” or “available”. ― : “no” or “not available”.
3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) !1 : Provided with DIN rail adaptor. !3 : at 500V AC. !4 : at 250V AC.
@7 : Hydraulic-magnetic type for below 5A rating.
2-10
2
nSwitch-disconnectors
Frame size (A) 100 125 125 250 400 630

Type S100-NN S125-SN S125-NN S250-SN S400-NN S630-GN
Number of poles ３４ 3 4 3 4 ３４３４３４ 3 4 3 4
■Ratings
Rated current, A 100 100 125 125 225 250 400 630
Rated operational voltage V AC 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
DC 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250
Rated short circuit making capacity, kA peak 3.6 2.8 2.8 3.6 6 6 9 17
Rated short time withstand current, kA 2（0.3sec） 2（0.3sec） 2（0.3sec） 2（0.3sec） 3（0.3sec） 3（0.3sec） 5（0.3sec） 10（0.3sec）
■Performance
Utilization category AC 690V AC-23A AC-23A AC-23A AC-23A AC-23A AC-23A AC-23A AC-23A
IEC 60947-3
Upstream breaker (OCPD) @9
a d
DC 250V
a
DC-22A
S100-NF
90 120
DC-22A
S125-SF
75 100
DC-22A
S125-SF
75 100
DC-22A
S125-NF
90 120
DC-22A
S250-SF
105 140
DC-22A
S250-SF
105 140
DC-22A
S400-NF
140 185
DC-22A
S630-NF
210 280
2
c
b 155 130 130 155 165 165 260 273
b c 68 68 68 68 68 68 103 103
d 92 95 95 92 95 95 145 145

Weight (' marked standard type) kg 1.1 1.4 0.7 0.9 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.4 1.5 1.9 1.5 1.9 4.2 5.6 8.0 11.0
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ―
With extension bars ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) '
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ―
High-performance (PMB) ○ ― ― ○ ― ― ○ ○
For distribution boards (PMC) ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ― ― ― ―
Draw-out type (DR) ― ― ― ― ― ― ▲ ▲
TemPlug70 (PG) ○ ― ― ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ―
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
DIN rail mount ○⑪ ○⑪ ○⑪ ○⑪ ― ― ― ―
Internally
mounted
Motor operator ＭＣ ● ― ― ● ● ● ● ●
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ●
Mechanical interlocko Slide type ＭＳ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Toggle holder ＨＨ ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ●
Toggle lock ＨＬ ● ● ● ● ● ●
Notes:
③ : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) ⑨ : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). ⑪ : Provided with DIN rail adaptor.
@9 : Required for overcurrent protection. Rated conditional short-circuit current [Icc] will be the same as Rated short-circuit breaking capacity of upstream breaker.
2-11
2
nSwitch-disconnectors
Frame size (A) 800 1250 1600

Type S800-NN S1250-NN S1600-NN
Number of poles 3 4 3 4 3 4
■Ratings
Rated current, A 800 1250 1600
Rated operational voltage V AC 690 690 690
DC 250 250 250
Rated short circuit making capacity, kA peak 17 32 45
Rated short time withstand current, kA 10（0.3sec） 15（0.3sec） 20（0.3sec）
■Performance
Utilization category AC 690V AC-23A AC-23A AC-23A
IEC 60947-3 DC 250V DC-22A DC-22A DC-22A
Upstream breaker (OCPD) @9 S800-NF S1250-NE S1600-NE
a d a 210 280 210 280 210 280
c
b 273 370 370
b c 103 120 140
d 145 171 191
Weight (' marked standard type) kg 8.0 11.5 18.2 23.4 24.9 32.9
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ― ― ―
With extension bars ' ' ○
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ― ―
Flat bar studs ○ ○ '
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ― ○ ― ―
High-performance (PMB) ○ ― ―
For distribution boards (PMC) ― ― ―
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ ○ ○
Draw-out type (DR) ▲ ▲ ○
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ― ―
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― ―
DIN rail mount ― ― ―
Auxiliary switch ＡＸ ● ● ●
Internally
mounted
Alarm switch ＡＬ ● ● ●
Shunt trips ＳＨ ● ● ●
Undervoltage trips ＵＶ ● ● ●
Motor operator ＭＣ ● ● ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ● ●
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ● ● @4 ● @4
Mechanical interlocko Slide type ＭＳ ● ● ●
● ● ●
Toggle lock ＨＬ
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● ―
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ● ― ―
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●e ●e ●e
Suitability for isolation Yes Yes Yes
CE marking Yes Yes Yes
Notes:
③ : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) ⑨ : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).
2-12
2
mNon-automatic trip breakers
Frame size (A) 2000

Type XS2000NN
Number of poles ３４
■Ratings
Rated current, A 2000
Rated insulation voltage〔Ui〕 V AC 690
Rated operational voltage V AC 690
DC 250
Rated short circuit making capacity, kA peak 90
Rated short time withstand current, kA 35（0.3sec）
Rated impulse withstand voltage 〔U imp〕 kV 8
■Performance
Max switching current A AC 12000
IEC 60947-2 Ann.L CBI-Y
Endurance Number of operating cycles with current
Number of operating cycles without current
Upstream breaker (OCPD) @9
DC 5000
500
2500
XS2000NE
2
a d a 320 429
c
b 450

b c 185
d 245
Weight (' marked standard type) kg 51.8 64.8
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ―
With extension bars ○
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ―
Flat bar studs '
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ―
High-performance (PMB) ―
For distribution boards (PMC) ―
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○
Draw-out type (DR) ○
TemPlug70 (PG) ―
TemPlug45B (PG4) ―
DIN rail mount ―
Clip-in chassis mount ―
Auxiliary switch ＡＸ ●
Internally
mounted
Alarm switch ＡＬ ●
Shunt trips ＳＨ ●
Undervoltage trips ＵＶ ●⑥
Motor operator ＭＣ ●
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ―
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ^3
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ●②
Mechanical interlock⑨ Slide type ＭＳ ●
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ―
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ―
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ―
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ●
Door flange ＤＦ ●
Trip button (color) Yes (Red)
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes
Suitability for isolation Non
CE marking Non
Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown 7-78
Notes:
② : Supplied as standard. ⑥ : The UVT controller is installed externally, when provided with AC UVT. ⑨ : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).
^3 : Fixed depth, not adjustable.
2-13
2
,TB series for distribution boards

Type TB-5S TB-5P TB-5D
Number of poles １２３４１２２
■Ratings
Rated current, A 10 30 30 10 30 10 30
Calibrated at 45°C 15 40 50 15 40 15 40
20 50 20 50 20 50
Rated voltage V AC 265 460 460 460 265 460 250
DC 125 125 ― ― ― 125 125
NK AC 250Ｖ ― 5 $4 ― ― ― 5 $4 5 $4
（sym） 125Ｖ ― 42 ― ― ― 42 42
DC 125Ｖ ― 5 ― ― ― 5 5
a d ａ 25 50 75 100 25 50 50
c
ｂ 95 74.5 74.5
b ｃ 60 60 60
ｄ 77 79 77 79 79
Weight kg 0.16 0.34 0.5 0.66 0.13 0.28 0.28
■Connecting scheme
Front-connected both on the line and load sides ● ― ―
Plug-in on the line side and front-connected on the load side ― ● ―
Plug-in both on the line and load sides ― ― ●
■Mounting scheme (optional)
Clip-in chassis ● ― ―
Single mounting base ― ● $7 ● $7
Double mounting base ― ● $7 ● $7
Toggle lock ＨＬ ● ― ● ― ―
Toggle cap ＨＣ ● ― ● ― ―
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ― ● ― ● ●
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button (color) Non Non Non
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Non Non Non
Suitability for isolation Non Non Non
CE marking Non Non Non
Notes:
● : “yes” or “available”. ― : “no” or “not available”.
$4 : 2.5kA for 10A.
$7 : Specify the branch bars when ordering.
2-14
2
.Current limiting series (planned to be released)
Frame size (A) 1250

Type H1250-NE
■Ratings
Rated current, A (Adjustable)
Calibrated at 45°C 500 1000
600 1200
700
800

NK
Icu/Ics(sym)
AC 690V
450V
8
25/20 ⑫
125/65 ⑫
2
240V 150/113 ⑫
DC 250V ―
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 25/20

Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 45/34
440V 125/65
415V 125/65
380V 125/65
240V 150/113
DC 250V
125V
■Rated short time withstand current, kA
a d a 210 280
c
b 370
b c 140
d 191
With extension bars '
Flat bar studs ○
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ―
Draw-out type (DR) ▲
TemPlug70 (PG) ―
DIN rail mount ―
Auxiliary switch ＡＸ ●
Internally
mounted
Alarm switch ＡＬ ●
Shunt trips ＳＨ ●
Undervoltage trips ＵＶ ●
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ●
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ● @4
●
Toggle lock ＨＬ
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ●
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●e
Overcurrent trip mechanism Electronic ⑯
Suitability for isolation Yes
CE marking Yes
Notes:
③ : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) ⑨ : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). ⑫ : Being or will be applied.
⑯ : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. @4 : One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are required.
2-15
2
⁄0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities (approved by ship classification societies)
Rated Rated breaking capacities, kA (sym.) Values enclosed in square brackets “[ ]” represent the making current, kA.
Frame ＮＫＬＲＡＢＳＧＬ
Type Rated current(A) Poles voltage
size (V) Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
50 E50-SF 10,15,20, 2 AC450 10[18.5]⑬ − 10[18.5]⑬ − 10[18.5]⑬ − 10[18.5] 5[7.65]
30,40,50 3 AC240 25[53.2]⑭ − 25[53.2]⑭ − 25[53.2]⑭ − 25[52.5] 13[26]
AC115 42[95.6]⑮ − 42[95.6]⑮ − 42[95.6]⑮ − 42[95.6]③ 21[44.1]③
DC250 7.5[7.5] − 7.5[7.5] − 7.5[7.5] − 7.5[7.5] −
E50-CM 0.7,1.4,2, 3 AC450 2.5[3.8]⑬ − 2.5[3.8]⑬ − 2.5[3.8]⑬ − − −
2.6,4,5,8,
10,12,16,25, AC240 5[8.7]⑭ − 5[8.7]⑭ − 5[8.7]⑭ − − −
32,40,45
S50-SF 15,20,30, 2 AC690 − − − − − − − −
40,50 3 AC450 25[54.4] 13[29.6] 25[54.4] 13[29.6] 25[54.4] 13[29.6] 25[54.4] 13[29.6]
AC240 50[117] 25[56.9] 50[117] 25[56.9] 50[117] 25[56.9] 50[117] 25[56.9]
DC250 25[25] 13[13] 25[25] 13[13] 25[25] 13[13] 25[25] 13[13]
S50-GF 15,20,30, 3 AC690 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29]
40,50 AC500 − − 25[52.5] 22[46.2] 25[52.5] 22[46.2] 25[52.5] 22[46.2]
AC450 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 65[143] 33[69.3] 65[143] 33[69.3] 65[143] 33[69.3]
AC240 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
S50-GFL 15,20,30, 3 AC690 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29]
40,50 AC500 − − 25[52.5] 22[46.2] 25[52.5] 22[46.2] 25[52.5] 22[46.2]
AC450 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 65[143] 33[69.3] 65[143] 33[69.3] 65[143] 33[69.3]
AC240 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
S50-GFH 15,20,30, 3 AC690 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29]
40,50 AC500 − − 25[52.5] 22[46.2] 25[52.5] 22[46.2] 25[52.5] 22[46.2]
AC450 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 65[143] 33[69.3] 65[143] 33[69.3] 65[143] 33[69.3]
AC240 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
100 E100-SF 10,15,20, 2 AC450 10[18.5]⑬ − 10[17.2] 5[8.4] 10[18.5]⑬ − 10[18.5] 5[7.5]
30,40,50, 3 AC240 25[53.2]⑭ − 25[60.5] 13[26.1] 25[53.2]⑭ − 25[52.5] 13[26]
60,75,100 AC115 42[95.6]⑮ − 42[97.9]③ − 42[95.6]⑮ − 42[95.6]③ 21[44.1]③
DC250 7.5[7.5] − − − 7.5[7.5] − 7.5[7.5] −
S100-NF 15,20,30, 2 AC690 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29]
40,50,60, 3 AC500 − − 22[46.2] 22[46.2] 22[46.2] 22[46.2] 22[46.2] 22[46.2]
75,100 AC450 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63]
AC240 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115]
DC250 25[25] 19[19] 25[25] 19[19] 25[25] 19[19] 25[25] 19[19]
S100-NFL 15,20,30, 2 AC690 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29]
40,50,60, 3 AC500 − − 22[46.2] 22[46.2] 22[46.2] 22[46.2] 22[46.2] 22[46.2]
75,100 AC450 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63]
AC240 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115]
DC250 25[25] 19[19] 25[25] 19[19] 25[25] 19[19] 25[25] 19[19]
S100-NFH 15,20,30, 2 AC690 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29]
40,50,60, 3 AC500 − − 22[46.2] 22[46.2] 22[46.2] 22[46.2] 22[46.2] 22[46.2]
75,100 AC450 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63]
AC240 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115]
DC250 25[25] 19[19] 25[25] 19[19] 25[25] 19[19] 25[25] 19[19]
S100-NM 16,24,32, 3 AC450 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4]
40,45,60, AC415 − − − − 30[63] 30[63] − −
75,90,100 AC240 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115]
S100-GF 15,20,30, 2 AC690 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29]
40,50,60, 3 AC500 − − 25[52.5] 22[46.2] 25[52.5] 22[46.2] 25[52.5] 22[46.2]
75,100 AC450 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 65[143] 33[69.3] 65[143] 33[69.3] 65[143] 33[69.3]
AC240 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
S100-GFL 15,20,30, 2 AC690 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29]
40,50,60, 3 AC500 − − 25[52.5] 22[46.2] 25[52.5] 22[46.2] 25[52.5] 22[46.2]
75,100 AC450 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 65[143] 33[69.3] 65[143] 33[69.3] 65[143] 33[69.3]
AC240 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
Notes: 1 : at 450V AC. 2 : at 240V AC. 3 : at 120V AC. 4 : at 660V AC. 5 : at 525V AC. !2 : Being or will be applied.
7 : at 220V AC. 8 : at 110V AC. 9 : at 225V AC. !0 : at 440V AC. !3 : at 500V AC. !4 : at 250V AC. !5 : at 125V AC.
2-16
2
Frame ＢＶＣＣＳＫＲＲＩＮＡ
50 E50-SF 10,15,20, 2 AC450 10[17]⑫ 5[7.65]⑫ 10[18.5] 5[7.65] 10[18.5]⑬ − ⑫ ⑫
30,40,50 3 AC240 25[52.5]⑫ 13[26]⑫ 25[53.2] 13[26] 25[53.2]⑭ − ⑫ ⑫
AC115 − − 42[95.6]⑮ − 42[95.6]⑫ − − −
DC250 − − 7.5[7.5] − 7.5[7.5] − ⑫ −
E50-CM 0.7,1.4,2, 3 AC450 − − − − 2.5[3.8]⑬ − − −
2.6,4,5,8,
10,12,16,25, AC240 − − − − 5[8.7]⑭ − − −
32,40,45
S50-SF 15,20,30,
40,50
2
3
AC690
AC450
−
25[54.4]⑫
−
13[29.6]⑫
−
25[54.4]
−
13[29.6]
−
25[54.4]
−
13[29.6]
−
⑫
−
⑫
2
AC240 50[117]⑫ 25[56.9]⑫ 50[117] 25[56.9] 50[117] 25[56.9] ⑫ ⑫
DC250 25[25]⑫ 13[13]⑫ 25[25] 13[13] 25[25] 13[13] ⑫ ⑫
S50-GF 15,20,30, 3 AC690 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] − −

40,50 AC500 25[52.5] 22[46.2] − − 25[52.5] 22[46.2] − −
AC450 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] − −
AC415 65[143] 33[69.3] − − 65[143] 33[69.3] − −
AC240 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] − −
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] − −
S50-GFL 15,20,30, 3 AC690 6[9.29]⑫ 6[9.29]⑫ − − 6[9.29] 6[9.29] − −
40,50 AC500 25[52.5]⑫ 22[46.2]⑫ − − 25[52.5] 22[46.2] − −
AC450 50[112]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ − − 50[112] 25[54.4] − −
AC415 65[143]⑫ 33[69.3]⑫ − − 65[143] 33[69.3] − −
AC240 85[201]⑫ 85[201]⑫ − − 85[201] 85[201] − −
DC250 40[40]⑫ 40[40]⑫ − − 40[40] 40[40] − −
S50-GFH 15,20,30, 3 AC690 6[9.29]⑫ 6[9.29]⑫ − − 6[9.29] 6[9.29] − −
40,50 AC500 25[52.5]⑫ 22[46.2]⑫ − − 25[52.5] 22[46.2] − −
AC450 50[112]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ − − 50[112] 25[54.4] − −
AC415 65[143]⑫ 33[69.3]⑫ − − 65[143] 33[69.3] − −
AC240 85[201]⑫ 85[201]⑫ − − 85[201] 85[201] − −
DC250 40[40]⑫ 40[40]⑫ − − 40[40] 40[40] − −
100 E100-SF 10,15,20, 2 AC450 10[17.2]⑫ 5[7.86]⑫ 10[18.5] 5[7.65] 10[18.5]⑬ − ⑫ ⑫
30,40,50, 3 AC240 25[59.0]⑫ 13[27.7]⑫ 25[53.2] 13[26] 25[53.2]⑭ − ⑫ ⑫
60,75,100 AC115 − − 42[95.6]⑮ − 42[95.6]⑮ − − −
DC250 − − 7.5[7.5] − 7.5[7.5] − ⑫ −
S100-NF 15,20,30, 2 AC690 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9] 6[9]
40,50,60, 3 AC500 22[46.2] 22[46.2] − − 22[46.2] 22[46.2] − −
75,100 AC450 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[52.5] 25[52.5]
AC415 30[63] 30[63] − − 30[63] 30[63] − −
AC240 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[105] 50[105]
DC250 25[25] 19[19] 25[25] 19[19] 25[25] 19[19] 25[25] 19[19]
S100-NFL 15,20,30, 2 AC690 6[9.29]⑫ 6[9.29]⑫ − − 6[9.29] 6[9.29] − −
40,50,60, 3 AC500 22[46.2]⑫ 22[46.2]⑫ − − 22[46.2] 22[46.2] − −
75,100 AC450 25[54.4]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ − − 25[54.4] 25[54.4] − −
AC415 30[63]⑫ 30[63]⑫ − − 30[63] 30[63] − −
AC240 50[115]⑫ 50[115]⑫ − − 50[115] 50[115] − −
DC250 25[25]⑫ 19[19]⑫ − − 25[25] 19[19] − −
S100-NFH 15,20,30, 2 AC690 6[9.29]⑫ 6[9.29]⑫ − − 6[9.29] 6[9.29] − −
40,50,60, 3 AC500 22[46.2]⑫ 22[46.2]⑫ − − 22[46.2] 22[46.2] − −
75,100 AC450 25[54.4]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ − − 25[54.4] 25[54.4] − −
AC415 30[63]⑫ 30[63]⑫ − − 30[63] 30[63] − −
AC240 50[115]⑫ 50[115]⑫ − − 50[115] 50[115] − −
DC250 25[25]⑫ 19[19]⑫ − − 25[25] 19[19] − −
S100-NM 16,24,32, 3 AC450 25[54.4]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ − − 25[54.4] 25[54.4] − −
40,45,60, AC415 − − − − 30[63] 30[63] − −
75,90,100 AC240 50[115]⑫ 50[115]⑫ − − 50[115] 50[115] − −
S100-GF 15,20,30, 2 AC690 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9] 6[9]
40,50,60, 3 AC500 25[52.5] 22[46.2] − − 25[52.5] 22[46.2] − −
75,100 AC450 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[105] 25[52.5]
AC415 65[143] 33[69.3] − − 65[143] 33[69.3] − −
AC240 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[187] 85[187]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
S100-GFL 15,20,30, 2 AC690 6[9.29]⑫ 6[9.29]⑫ − − 6[9.29] 6[9.29] − −
40,50,60, 3 AC500 25[52.5]⑫ 22[46.2]⑫ − − 25[52.5] 22[46.2] − −
75,100 AC450 50[112]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ − − 50[112] 25[54.4] − −
AC415 65[143]⑫ 33[69.3]⑫ − − 65[143] 33[69.3] − −
AC240 85[201]⑫ 85[201]⑫ − − 85[201] 85[201] − −
DC250 40[40]⑫ 40[40]⑫ − − 40[40] 40[40] − −
2-17
2
100 S100-GFH 15,20,30, 2 AC690 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29]
40,50,60, 3 AC500 − − 25[52.5] 22[46.2] 25[52.5] 22[46.2] 25[52.5] 22[46.2]
75,100 AC450 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 65[143] 33[69.3] 65[143] 33[69.3] 65[143] 33[69.3]
AC240 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
H100-NF 15,20,30, 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6]
40,50,60, AC500 − − 45[94.5]⑤ 45[94.5]⑤ 45[94.5] 45[94.5] 45[94.5] 45[94.5]
75,100 AC450 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191]
AC415 − − 125[275] 85[187] 125[275] 85[187] 125[275] 85[187]
AC240 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350]
L100-NF 15,20,30, 3 AC690 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0]
40,50,60, AC500 − − 65[143]⑤ 65[143]⑤ 65[143] 65[143] 65[143] 65[143]
75,100 AC450 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315]
AC415 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345]
AC240 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350]
125 S125-SF 15,20,30, 2 AC690 − − − − − − − −
40,50,60, 3 AC450 25[54.4] 13[29.6] 25[54.4] 13[29.6] 25[54.4] 13[29.6] 25[54.4] 13[29.6]
75,100, AC240 50[117] 25[56.9] 50[117] 25[56.9] 50[117] 25[56.9] 50[117] 25[56.9]
125 DC250 25[25] 13[13] 25[25] 13[13] 25[25] 13[13] 25[25] 13[13]
S125-NF 125 2 AC690 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29]
3 AC500 − − 22[46.2] 22[46.2] 22[46.2] 22[46.2] 22[46.2] 22[46.2]
AC450 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63]
AC240 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115]
DC250 25[25] 19[19] 25[25] 19[19] 25[25] 19[19] 25[25] 19[19]
S125-GF 125 2 AC690 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29]
3 AC500 − − 25[52.5] 22[46.2] 25[52.5] 22[46.2] 25[52.5] 22[46.2]
AC450 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 65[143] 33[69.3] 65[143] 33[69.3] 65[143] 33[69.3]
AC240 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
H125-NF 125 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6]
AC500 − − 45[94.5]⑤ 45[94.5]⑤ 45[94.5] 45[94.5] 45[94.5] 45[94.5]
AC450 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191]
AC415 − − 125[275] 85[187] 125[275] 85[187] 125[275] 85[187]
AC240 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350]
L125-NF 125 3 AC690 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0]
AC500 − − 65[143]⑤ 65[143]⑤ 65[143] 65[143] 65[143] 65[143]
AC450 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315]
AC415 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345]
AC240 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350]
225 S225-NF 125,150, 2＊ AC690 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1]
175,200, 3 AC500 − − 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5]
225 AC450 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 35[73.5] 35[73.5] 35[73.5] 35[73.5] 35[73.5] 35[73.5]
AC240 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
S225-NFL 125,150, 2＊ AC690 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1]
175,200, 3 AC500 − − 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5]
225 AC450 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 35[73.5] 35[73.5] 35[73.5] 35[73.5] 35[73.5] 35[73.5]
AC240 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
S225-NFH 125,150, 2＊ AC690 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1]
175,200, 3 AC500 − − 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5]
225 AC450 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 35[73.5] 35[73.5] 35[73.5] 35[73.5] 35[73.5] 35[73.5]
AC240 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
S225-NM 125,150, 3 AC450 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4]
175,225 AC415 − − − − 35[73.5] 35[73.5] − −
AC240 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148]
S225-GF 125,150, 2＊ AC690 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1]
175,200, 3 AC500 − − 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5]
225 AC450 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 65[143] 35[73.5] 65[143] 35[73.5] 65[143] 35[73.5]
AC240 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
Notes: ① : at 450V AC. ② : at 240V AC. ③ : at 120V AC. ④ : at 660V AC. t : at 525V AC. ⑫ : Being or will be applied.
⑦ : at 220V AC. ⑧ : at 110V AC. ⑨ : at 225V AC. !0 : at 440V AC. !3 : at 500V AC. !4 : at 250V AC. !5 : at 125V AC.
＊center pole omitted.
2-18
2
100 S100-GFH 15,20,30, 2 AC690 6[9.29]⑫ 6[9.29]⑫ − − 6[9.29] 6[9.29] − −
40,50,60, 3 AC500 25[52.5]⑫ 22[46.2]⑫ − − 25[52.5] 22[46.2] − −
75,100 AC450 50[112]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ − − 50[112] 25[54.4] − −
AC415 65[143]⑫ 33[69.3]⑫ − − 65[143] 33[69.3] − −
AC240 85[201]⑫ 85[201]⑫ − − 85[201] 85[201] − −
DC250 40[40]⑫ 40[40]⑫ − − 40[40] 40[40] − −
H100-NF 15,20,30, 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[40] 15[30]
2
40,50,60, AC500 45[94.5]⑤ 45[94.5]⑤ − − 45[94.5] 45[94.5] − −
75,100 AC450 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191] 120[264] 80[176]
AC415 125[275] 85[187] − − 125[275] 85[187] − −
AC240 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[330] 150[330]
L100-NF 15,20,30, 3 AC690 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[52.5] 19[38]
40,50,60, AC500 65[143]⑤ 65[143]⑤ − − 65[143] 65[143] − −

75,100 AC450 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[396] 135[297]
AC415 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345] − −
AC240 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[440] 150[330]
125 S125-SF 15,20,30, 2 AC690 − − − − − − − −
40,50,60, 3 AC450 25[54.4]⑫ 13[29.6]⑫ 25[54.4] 13[29.6] 25[54.4] 13[29.6] ⑫ ⑫
75,100, AC240 50[117]⑫ 25[56.9]⑫ 50[117] 25[56.9] 50[117] 25[56.9] ⑫ ⑫
125 DC250 25[25]⑫ 13[13]⑫ 25[25] 13[13] 25[25] 13[13] ⑫ ⑫
S125-NF 125 2 AC690 6[9.29]⑫ 6[9.29]⑫ 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] − −
3 AC500 22[46.2]⑫ 22[46.2]⑫ − − 22[46.2] 22[46.2] − −
AC450 25[54.4]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] − −
AC415 30[63]⑫ 30[63]⑫ − − 30[63] 30[63] − −
AC240 50[115]⑫ 50[115]⑫ 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] − −
DC250 25[25]⑫ 19[19]⑫ 25[25] 19[19] 25[25] 19[19] − −
S125-GF 125 2 AC690 6[9.29]⑫ 6[9.29]⑫ 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] 6[9.29] − −
3 AC500 25[52.5]⑫ 22[46.2]⑫ − − 25[52.5] 22[46.2] − −
AC450 50[112]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] − −
AC415 65[143]⑫ 33[69.3]⑫ − − 65[143] 33[69.3] − −
AC240 85[201]⑫ 85[201]⑫ 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] − −
DC250 40[40]⑫ 40[40]⑫ 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] − −
H125-NF 125 3 AC690 20[43.0]⑫ 15[32.6]⑫ 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] − −
AC500 45[94.5]⑤⑫ 45[94.5]⑤⑫ − − 45[94.5] 45[94.5] − −
AC450 120[283]⑫ 80[191]⑫ 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191] − −
AC415 125[275]⑫ 85[187]⑫ − − 125[275] 85[187] − −
AC240 150[350]⑫ 150[350]⑫ 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] − −
L125-NF 125 3 AC690 25[53.8]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] − −
AC500 65[143]⑤⑫ 65[143]⑤⑫ − − 65[143] 65[143] − −
AC450 180[430]⑫ 135[315]⑫ 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] − −
AC415 200[484]⑫ 150[345]⑫ 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345] − −
AC240 200[484]⑫ 150[350]⑫ 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] − −
225 S225-NF 125,150, 2＊ AC690 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[12.75] 7.5[12.75]
175,200, 3 AC500 25[52.5] 25[52.5] − − 25[52.5] 25[52.5] − −
225 AC450 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[52.5] 25[52.5]
AC415 35[73.5] 35[73.5] − − 35[73.5] 35[73.5] − −
AC240 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[143] 65[143]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
S225-NFL 125,150, 2＊ AC690 7.5[13.1]⑫ 7.5[13.1]⑫ − − 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] − −
175,200, 3 AC500 25[52.5]⑫ 25[52.5]⑫ − − 25[52.5] 25[52.5] − −
225 AC450 25[54.4]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ − − 25[54.4] 25[54.4] − −
AC415 35[73.5]⑫ 35[73.5]⑫ − − 35[73.5] 35[73.5] − −
AC240 65[148]⑫ 65[148]⑫ − − 65[148] 65[148] − −
DC250 40[40]⑫ 40[40]⑫ − − 40[40] 40[40] − −
S225-NFH 125,150, 2＊ AC690 7.5[13.1]⑫ 7.5[13.1]⑫ − − 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] − −
175,200, 3 AC500 25[52.5]⑫ 25[52.5]⑫ − − 25[52.5] 25[52.5] − −
225 AC450 25[54.4]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ − − 25[54.4] 25[54.4] − −
AC415 35[73.5]⑫ 35[73.5]⑫ − − 35[73.5] 35[73.5] − −
AC240 65[148]⑫ 65[148]⑫ − − 65[148] 65[148] − −
DC250 40[40]⑫ 40[40]⑫ − − 40[40] 40[40] − −
S225-NM 125,150, 3 AC450 25[54.4]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ − − 25[54.4] 25[54.4] − −
175,225 AC415 − − − − 35[73.5] 35[73.5] − −
AC240 65[148]⑫ 65[148]⑫ − − 65[148] 65[148] − −
S225-GF 125,150, 2＊ AC690 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[12.75] 7.5[12.75]
175,200, 3 AC500 25[52.5] 25[52.5] − − 25[52.5] 25[52.5] − −
225 AC450 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[105] 25[52.5]
AC415 65[143] 35[73.5] − − 65[143] 35[73.5] − −
AC240 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[187] 85[187]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
2-19
2
225 S225-GFL 125,150, 2＊ AC690 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1]
175,200, 3 AC500 − − 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5]
225 AC450 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 65[143] 35[73.5] 65[143] 35[73.5] 65[143] 35[73.5]
AC240 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
S225-GFH 125,150, 2＊ AC690 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1]
175,200, 3 AC500 − − 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5]
225 AC450 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 65[143] 35[73.5] 65[143] 35[73.5] 65[143] 35[73.5]
AC240 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
S225-GE 125∼225 3 AC690 7.5[13.1]⑫ 7.5[13.1]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(125,150, AC450 50[121]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
175,200,225) AC240 85[211]⑫ 85[211]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
H225-NF 125,150, 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6]
175,200, AC500 − − 45[94.5]⑤ 45[94.5]⑤ 45[94.5] 45[94.5] 45[94.5] 45[94.5]
225 AC450 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191]
AC415 − − 125[275] 85[187] 125[275] 85[187] 125[275] 85[187]
AC240 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350]
L225-NF 125,150, 3 AC690 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0]
175,200, AC500 − − 65[143]⑤ 65[143]⑤ 65[143] 65[143] 65[143] 65[143]
225 AC450 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315]
AC415 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345]
AC240 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350]
250 E250-SF 125,150, 2＊ AC690 − − − − − − − −
175,200, 3 AC450 15[32.6] 12[27.3] 15[32.6] 12[27.3] 15[32.6] 12[27.3] 15[32.6] 12[27.3]
225,250 AC240 35[83.6] 27[62.2] 35[83.6] 27[62.2] 35[83.6] 27[62.2] 35[83.6] 27[62.2]
DC250 − − − − − − − −
S250-NF 250 2＊ AC690 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1]
3 AC500 − − 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5]
AC450 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 35[73.5] 35[73.5] 36[75.6] 36[75.6] 35[73.5] 35[73.5]
AC240 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
S250-SF 125,150, 2＊ AC690 − − − − − − − −
175,200, 3 AC450 30[70.8] 15[32.6] 30[70.8] 15[32.6] 30[70.8] 15[32.6] 30[70.8] 15[32.6]
225,250 AC240 85[211] 43[103] 85[211] 43[103] 85[211] 43[103] 85[211] 43[103]
DC250 25[25] 13[13] 25[25] 13[13] 25[25] 13[13] 25[25] 13[13]
S250-GF 250 2＊ AC690 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1]
3 AC500 − − 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5] 25[52.5]
AC450 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4]
AC415 − − 65[143] 35[73.5] 65[143] 36[75.6] 65[143] 35[73.5]
AC240 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201]
DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
400 S400-CF 125,150, 3 AC690 15[32.6] 15[32.6] 15[32.6] 15[32.6] 15[32.6] 15[32.6] 15[32.6] 15[32.6]
175,200, AC450 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8]
225,250, AC415 − − 36[75.6] 36[75.6] 36[75.6] 36[75.6] 36[75.6] 36[75.6]
300,350, AC240 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121]
400 DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
S400-NF 125,150, 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6]
175,200, AC450 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109]
225,250, AC415 − − 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105]
300,350, AC240 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211]
400 DC250 − − 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
S400-NE 100∼400 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6]
(125,150, AC525 − − 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63]
175,200, AC450 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109]
225,250, AC415 − − 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105]
300,350,400) AC240 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211]
S400-NEH 100∼400 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6]
(125,150, AC525 − − 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63]
175,200, AC450 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109]
225,250, AC415 − − 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105]
300,350,400) AC240 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211]
＊center pole omitted.
2-20
2
225 S225-GFL 125,150, 2＊ AC690 7.5[13.1]⑫ 7.5[13.1]⑫ − − 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] − −
175,200, 3 AC500 25[52.5]⑫ 25[52.5]⑫ − − 25[52.5] 25[52.5] − −
225 AC450 50[112]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ − − 50[112] 25[54.4] − −
AC415 65[143]⑫ 35[73.5]⑫ − − 65[143] 35[73.5] − −
AC240 85[201]⑫ 85[201]⑫ − − 85[201] 85[201] − −
DC250 40[40]⑫ 40[40]⑫ − − 40[40] 40[40] − −
S225-GFH 125,150, 2＊ AC690 7.5[13.1]⑫ 7.5[13.1]⑫ − − 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] − −
2
175,200, 3 AC500 25[52.5]⑫ 25[52.5]⑫ − − 25[52.5] 25[52.5] − −
225 AC450 50[112]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ − − 50[112] 25[54.4] − −
AC415 65[143]⑫ 35[73.5]⑫ − − 65[143] 35[73.5] − −
AC240 85[201]⑫ 85[201]⑫ − − 85[201] 85[201] − −
DC250 40[40]⑫ 40[40]⑫ − − 40[40] 40[40] − −
S225-GE 125∼225 3 AC690 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ − −

(125,150, AC450 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ − −
175,200,225) AC240 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ − −
H225-NF 125,150, 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[40] 15[30]
175,200, AC500 45[94.5]⑤ 45[94.5]⑤ − − 45[94.5] 45[94.5] − −
225 AC450 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191] 120[264] 80[176]
AC415 125[275] 85[187] − − 125[275] 85[187] − −
AC240 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[330] 150[330]
L225-NF 125,150, 3 AC690 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[52.5] 19[38]
175,200, AC500 65[143]⑤ 65[143]⑤ − − 65[143] 65[143] − −
225 AC450 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[396] 135[297]
AC415 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345] − −
AC240 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[440] 150[330]
250 E250-SF 125,150, 2＊ AC690 − − − − − − − −
175,200, 3 AC450 15[32.6]⑫ 12[27.3]⑫ 15[32.6] 12[27.3] 15[32.6] 12[27.3] ⑫ ⑫
225,250 AC240 35[83.6]⑫ 27[62.2]⑫ 35[83.6] 27[62.2] 35[83.6] 27[62.2] ⑫ ⑫
DC250 − − − − − − − −
S250-NF 250 2＊ AC690 7.5[13.1]⑫ 7.5[13.1]⑫ 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] − −
3 AC500 25[52.5]⑫ 25[52.5]⑫ − − 25[52.5] 25[52.5] − −
AC450 25[54.4]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] 25[54.4] − −
AC415 36[75.6]⑫ 36[75.6]⑫ − − 36[75.6] 36[75.6] − −
AC240 65[148]⑫ 65[148]⑫ 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] 65[148] − −
DC250 40[40]⑫ 40[40]⑫ 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] − −
S250-SF 125,150, 2＊ AC690 − − − − − − − −
175,200, 3 AC450 30[70.8]⑫ 15[32.6]⑫ 30[70.8] 15[32.6] 30[70.8] 15[32.6] ⑫ ⑫
225,250 AC240 85[211]⑫ 43[103]⑫ 85[211] 43[103] 85[211] 43[103] ⑫ ⑫
DC250 25[25]⑫ 13[13]⑫ 25[25] 13[13] 25[25] 13[13] ⑫ ⑫
S250-GF 250 2＊ AC690 7.5[13.1]⑫ 7.5[13.1]⑫ 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] 7.5[13.1] − −
3 AC500 25[52.5]⑫ 25[52.5]⑫ − − 25[52.5] 25[52.5] − −
AC450 50[112]⑫ 25[54.4]⑫ 50[112] 25[54.4] 50[112] 25[54.4] − −
AC415 65[143]⑫ 36[75.6]⑫ − − 65[143] 36[75.6] − −
AC240 85[201]⑫ 85[201]⑫ 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] 85[201] − −
DC250 40[40]⑫ 40[40]⑫ 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] − −
400 S400-CF 125,150, 3 AC690 15[32.6] 15[32.6] 15[32.6] 15[32.6] 15[32.6] 15[32.6] − −
175,200, AC450 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] − −
225,250, AC415 36[75.6] 36[75.6] − − − − − −
300,350, AC240 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] − −
400 DC250 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] − −
S400-NF 125,150, 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[40] 15[30]
175,200, AC450 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[94.5] 45[94.5]
225,250, AC415 50[105] 50[105] − − − − − −
300,350, AC240 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[187] 85[187]
400 DC250 40[40] 40[40] − − − − 40[40] 40[40]
S400-NE 100∼400 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] ⑫ ⑫
(125,150, AC525 30[63] 30[63] − − − − − −
175,200, AC450 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] 45[109] ⑫ ⑫
225,250, AC415 50[105] 50[105] − − − − − −
300,350,400) AC240 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] ⑫ ⑫
S400-NEH 100∼400 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] − − 20[43.0] 15[32.6] ⑫ ⑫
(125,150, AC525 30[63] 30[63] − − − − − −
175,200, AC450 45[109] 45[109] − − 45[109] 45[109] ⑫ ⑫
225,250, AC415 50[105] 50[105] − − − − − −
300,350,400) AC240 85[211] 85[211] − − 85[211] 85[211] ⑫ ⑫
2-21
2
400 S400-GF 125,150, 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6]
175,200, AC450 65[157] 50[121] 65[157] 50[121] 65[157] 50[121] 65[157] 50[121]
225,250, AC415 − − 70[154] 50[105] 70[154] 50[105] 70[154] 50[105]
300,350, AC240 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211]
400 DC250 − − 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40] 40[40]
S400-GE 100∼400 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6]
(125,150, AC525 − − 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63]
175,200, AC450 65[157] 50[121] 65[157] 50[121] 65[157] 50[121] 65[157] 50[121]
225,250, AC415 − − 70[154] 50[105] 70[154] 50[105] 70[154] 50[105]
300,350,400) AC240 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211]
S400-GEH 100∼400 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6]
(125,150, AC525 − − 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63]
175,200, AC450 65[157] 50[121] 65[157] 50[121] 65[157] 50[121] 65[157] 50[121]
225,250, AC415 − − 70[154] 50[105] 70[154] 50[105] 70[154] 50[105]
300,350,400) AC240 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211]
S400-PF 250,300, 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6]
350,400 AC525 − − 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63]
AC450 80[191] 80[191] 80[191] 80[191] 80[191] 80[191] 80[191] 80[191]
AC415 − − 85[187] 85[187] 85[187] 85[187] 85[187] 85[187]
AC240 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211]
DC250 − − − − − − − −
S400-PE 100∼400 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6]
(125,150, AC525 − − 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63]
175,200, AC450 80[191] 80[191] 80[191] 80[191] 80[191] 80[191] 80[191] 80[191]
225,250, AC415 − − 85[187] 85[187] 85[187] 85[187] 85[187] 85[187]
300,350,400) AC240 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211]
H400-NE 100∼400 3 AC690 35[77.8] 35[77.8] 35[77.8] 35[77.8] 35[77.8] 35[77.8] 35[77.8] 35[77.8]
(125,150, AC525 − − 45[94.5] 45[94.5] 45[94.5] 45[94.5] 45[94.5] 45[94.5]
175,200, AC450 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191]
225,250, AC415 − − 125[275] 85[187] 125[275] 85[187] 125[275] 85[187]
300,350,400) AC240 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350]
L400-NE 100∼400 3 AC690 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115]
(125,150, AC525 − − 65[143] 65[143] 65[143] 65[143] 65[143] 65[143]
175,200, AC450 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315]
225,250, AC415 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345]
300,350,400) AC240 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350]
630 S630-CF 500,600, 3 AC690 10[21.1] 10[21.1] 10[21.1] 10[21.1] 10[21.1] 10[21.1] 10[21.1] 10[21.1]
630 AC525 − − 15[30] 15[30] 15[30] 15[30] 15[30] 15[30]
AC450 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8]
AC415 − − 36[75.6] 36[75.6] 36[75.6] 36[75.6] 36[75.6] 36[75.6]
AC240 50[117] 50[117] 50[117] 50[117] 50[117] 50[117] 50[117] 50[117]
DC250 − − − − − − − −
S630-NF 500,600, 3 AC690 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0]
630 AC525 − − 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63]
AC450 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121]
AC415 − − 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105]
AC240 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211]
DC250 − − − − − − − −
S630-NE 250∼630 3 AC690 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0]
(250,300, AC525 − − 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63]
350,400, AC450 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121]
500,600,630) AC415 − − 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105]
AC240 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211]
S630-NEH 250∼630 3 AC690 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0]
(250,300, AC525 − − 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63]
350,400, AC450 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121]
500,600,630) AC415 − − 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105]
AC240 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211]
S630-RF 500,600, 3 AC690 25[53.8]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
630 AC450 65[157]⑫ 50[121]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
AC240 100[233]⑫ 75[181]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
DC250 − − − − − − − −
S630-RE 250∼630 3 AC690 25[53.8]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(250,300,350,400, AC450 65[157]⑫ 50[121]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
500,600,630) AC240 100[233]⑫ 75[181]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
H630-NE 250∼630 3 AC690 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0]
(250,300, AC525 − − 45[94.5] 34[71.4] 45[94.5] 34[71.4] 45[94.5] 34[71.4]
350,400, AC450 125[295] 94[225] 125[295] 94[225] 125[295] 94[225] 125[295] 94[225]
500,600,630) AC415 − − 125[275] 94[206.8] 125[275] 94[206.8] 125[275] 94[206.8]
AC240 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350]
L630-NE 250∼630 3 AC690 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0]
(250,300, AC525 − − 45[94.5] 34[71.4] 45[94.5] 34[71.4] 45[94.5] 34[71.4]
350,400, AC450 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315]
500,600,630) AC415 − − 200[440] 150[330] 200[440] 150[330] 200[440] 150[330]
AC240 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350]
2-22
2
400 S400-GF 125,150, 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[40] 15[30]
175,200, AC450 65[157] 50[121] 65[157] 50[121] 65[157] 50[121] 65[143] 49[102.9]
225,250, AC415 70[154] 50[105] − − − − − −
300,350, AC240 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211] 100[220] 75[165]
400 DC250 40[40] 40[40] − − − − 40[40] 40[40]
S400-GE 100∼400 3 AC690 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] ⑫ ⑫
(125,150, AC525 30[63] 30[63] − − − − − −
175,200, AC450 65[157] 50[121] 65[157] 50[121] 65[157] 50[121] ⑫ ⑫
S400-GEH
225,250,
300,350,400)
100∼400 3
AC415
AC240
AC690
70[154]
100[233]
20[43.0]
50[105]
85[211]
15[32.6]
−
100[233]
−
−
85[211]
−
−
100[233]
20[43.0]
−
85[211]
15[32.6]
−
⑫
−
−
⑫
−
2
(125,150, AC525 30[63] 30[63] − − − − − −
175,200, AC450 65[157] 50[121] − − 65[157] 50[121] − −
225,250, AC415 70[154] 50[105] − − − − − −

300,350,400) AC240 100[233] 85[211] − − 100[233] 85[211] − −
S400-PF 250,300, 3 AC690 20[43.0]⑫ 15[32.6]⑫ 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] ⑫ ⑫
350,400 AC525 30[63]⑫ 30[63]⑫ − − 30[63] 30[63] ⑫ ⑫
AC450 80[191]⑫ 80[191]⑫ 80[191] 80[191] 80[191] 80[191] ⑫ ⑫
AC415 85[187]⑫ 85[187]⑫ − − 85[187] 85[187] ⑫ ⑫
AC240 100[233]⑫ 85[211]⑫ 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211] ⑫ ⑫
DC250 − − − − − − − −
S400-PE 100∼400 3 AC690 20[43.0]⑫ 15[32.6]⑫ 20[43.0] 15[32.6] 20[43.0] 15[32.6] ⑫ ⑫
(125,150, AC525 30[63]⑫ 30[63]⑫ − − 30[63] 30[63] ⑫ ⑫
175,200, AC450 80[191]⑫ 80[191]⑫ 80[191] 80[191] 80[191] 80[191] ⑫ ⑫
225,250, AC415 85[187]⑫ 85[187]⑫ − − 85[187] 85[187] ⑫ ⑫
300,350,400) AC240 100[233]⑫ 85[211]⑫ 100[233] 85[211] 100[233] 85[211] ⑫ ⑫
H400-NE 100∼400 3 AC690 35[77.8] 35[77.8] 35[77.8] 35[77.8] 35[77.8] 35[77.8] ⑫ ⑫
(125,150, AC525 45[94.5] 45[94.5] − − − − − −
175,200, AC450 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191] 120[283] 80[191] ⑫ ⑫
225,250, AC415 125[275] 85[187] − − − − − −
300,350,400) AC240 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] ⑫ ⑫
L400-NE 100∼400 3 AC690 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] 50[115] ⑫ ⑫
(125,150, AC525 65[143] 65[143] − − − − − −
175,200, AC450 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] ⑫ ⑫
225,250, AC415 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345] 200[484] 150[345] ⑫ ⑫
300,350,400) AC240 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] ⑫ ⑫
630 S630-CF 500,600, 3 AC690 10[21.1]⑫ 10[21.1]⑫ 10[21.1] 10[21.1] 10[21.1] 10[21.1] ⑫ ⑫
630 AC525 15[30]⑫ 15[30]⑫ − − 15[30] 15[30] ⑫ ⑫
AC450 30[70.8]⑫ 30[70.8]⑫ 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] ⑫ ⑫
AC415 36[75.6]⑫ 36[75.6]⑫ − − 36[75.6] 36[75.6] ⑫ ⑫
AC240 50[117]⑫ 50[117]⑫ 50[117] 50[117] 50[117] 50[117] ⑫ ⑫
DC250 − − − − − − − −
S630-NF 500,600, 3 AC690 20[43.0]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] ⑫ ⑫
630 AC525 30[63]⑫ 30[63]⑫ − − 30[63] 30[63] ⑫ ⑫
AC450 50[121]⑫ 50[121]⑫ 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] ⑫ ⑫
AC415 50[105]⑫ 50[105]⑫ − − 50[105] 50[105] ⑫ ⑫
AC240 85[211]⑫ 85[211]⑫ 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] ⑫ ⑫
DC250 − − − − − − − −
S630-NE 250∼630 3 AC690 20[43.0]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] ⑫ ⑫
(250,300, AC525 30[63]⑫ 30[63]⑫ − − 30[63] 30[63] ⑫ ⑫
350,400, AC450 50[121]⑫ 50[121]⑫ 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] ⑫ ⑫
500,600,630) AC415 50[105]⑫ 50[105]⑫ − − 50[105] 50[105] ⑫ ⑫
AC240 85[211]⑫ 85[211]⑫ 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] ⑫ ⑫
S630-NEH 250∼630 3 AC690 20[43.0]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] ⑫ ⑫
(250,300, AC525 30[63]⑫ 30[63]⑫ − − 30[63] 30[63] ⑫ ⑫
350,400, AC450 50[121]⑫ 50[121]⑫ 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] ⑫ ⑫
500,600,630) AC415 50[105]⑫ 50[105]⑫ − − 50[105] 50[105] ⑫ ⑫
AC240 85[211]⑫ 85[211]⑫ 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] ⑫ ⑫
S630-RF 500,600, 3 AC690 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
630 AC450 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
AC240 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
DC250 − − − − − − − −
S630-RE 250∼630 3 AC690 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(250,300,350,400, AC450 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
500,600,630) AC240 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
H630-NE 250∼630 3 AC690 25[53.8]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] ⑫ ⑫
(250,300, AC525 45[94.5]⑫ 34[71.4]⑫ − − 45[94.5] 34[71.4] ⑫ ⑫
350,400, AC450 125[295]⑫ 94[225]⑫ 125[295] 94[225] 125[295] 94[225] ⑫ ⑫
500,600,630) AC415 125[275]⑫ 94[206.8]⑫ − − 125[275] 94[206.8] ⑫ ⑫
AC240 150[350]⑫ 150[350]⑫ 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] ⑫ ⑫
L630-NE 250∼630 3 AC690 25[53.8]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] ⑫ ⑫
(250,300, AC525 45[94.5]⑫ 34[71.4]⑫ − − 45[94.5] 34[71.4] ⑫ ⑫
350,400, AC450 180[430]⑫ 135[315]⑫ 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] ⑫ ⑫
500,600,630) AC415 200[440]⑫ 150[330]⑫ − − 200[440] 150[330] ⑫ ⑫
AC240 200[484]⑫ 150[350]⑫ 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] ⑫ ⑫
2-23
2
800 S800-CF 700,800 3 AC690 10[21.1] 10[21.1] 10[21.1] 10[21.1] 10[21.1] 10[21.1] 10[21.1] 10[21.1]
AC525 − − 15[30] 15[30] 15[30] 15[30] 15[30] 15[30]
AC450 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8]
AC415 − − 36[75.6] 36[75.6] 36[75.6] 36[75.6] 36[75.6] 36[75.6]
AC240 50[117] 50[117] 50[117] 50[117] 50[117] 50[117] 50[117] 50[117]
DC250 − − − − − − − −
S800-NF 700,800 3 AC690 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0]
AC525 − − 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63]
AC450 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121]
AC415 − − 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105]
AC240 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211]
DC250 − − − − − − − −
S800-NE 350∼800 3 AC690 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0]
(350,400, AC525 − − 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63]
450,500, AC450 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121]
600,700,800) AC415 − − 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105]
AC240 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211]
S800-NEH 350∼800 3 AC690 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0]
(350,400, AC525 − − 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63] 30[63]
450,500, AC450 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121]
600,700,800) AC415 − − 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105] 50[105]
AC240 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211]
S800-RF 700,800 3 AC690 25[53.8]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
AC450 65[157]⑫ 50[121]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
AC240 100[233]⑫ 75[181]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
DC250 − − − − − − − −
S800-RE 350∼800 3 AC690 25[53.8]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(350,400,450,500, AC450 65[157]⑫ 50[121]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
600,700,800) AC240 100[233]⑫ 75[181]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
H800-NE 350∼800 3 AC690 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0]
(350,400, AC525 − − 45[94.5] 34[71.4] 45[94.5] 34[71.4] 45[94.5] 34[71.4]
450,500, AC450 125[295] 94[225] 125[295] 94[225] 125[295] 94[225] 125[295] 94[225]
600,700,800) AC415 − − 125[275] 94[206.8] 125[275] 94[206.8] 125[275] 94[206.8]
AC240 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350]
L800-NE 350∼800 3 AC690 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0]
(350,400, AC525 − − 45[94.5] 34[71.4] 45[94.5] 34[71.4] 45[94.5] 34[71.4]
450,500, AC450 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315]
600,700,800) AC415 − − 200[440] 150[330] 200[440] 150[330] 200[440] 150[330]
AC240 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350]
1250 S1250-NE 500∼1250 3 AC690 25[53.8]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(500,600,700, AC450 65[157]⑫ 50[121]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
800,1000,1200) AC240 100[233]⑫ 75[181]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
S1250-NEH 500∼1250 3 AC690 25[53.8]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(500,600,700, AC450 65[157]⑫ 50[121]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
800,1000,1200) AC240 100[233]⑫ 75[181]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
S1250-GE 500∼1250 3 AC690 45[100]⑫ 34[75.6]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(500,600,700, AC450 85[203]⑫ 65[157]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
800,1000,1200) AC240 125[306]⑫ 94[227]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
H1250-NE 500∼1200 3 AC690 25[53.8]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(500,600,700, AC450 125[295]⑫ 65[157]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
800, 1000,1200) AC240 150[350]⑫ 113[267]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
1600 S1600-NE 700∼1600 3 AC690 45[100]⑫ 34[75.6]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(700,800,900,1000, AC450 85[203]⑫ 65[157]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
1200,1400,1600) AC240 125[306]⑫ 94[227]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
S1600-NEH 700∼1600 3 AC690 45[100]⑫ 34[75.6]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(700,800,900,1000, AC450 85[203]⑫ 65[157]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
1200,1400,1600) AC240 125[306]⑫ 94[227]⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
2-24
2
800 S800-CF 700,800 3 AC690 10[21.1]⑫ 10[21.1]⑫ 10[21.1] 10[21.1] 10[21.1] 10[21.1] ⑫ ⑫
AC525 15[30]⑫ 15[30]⑫ − − 15[30] 15[30] ⑫ ⑫
AC450 30[70.8]⑫ 30[70.8]⑫ 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] 30[70.8] ⑫ ⑫
AC415 36[75.6]⑫ 36[75.6]⑫ − − 36[75.6] 36[75.6] ⑫ ⑫
AC240 50[117]⑫ 50[117]⑫ 50[117] 50[117] 50[117] 50[117] ⑫ ⑫
DC250 − − − − − − − −
S800-NF 700,800 3 AC690 20[43.0]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] ⑫ ⑫
2
AC525 30[63]⑫ 30[63]⑫ − − 30[63] 30[63] ⑫ ⑫
AC450 50[121]⑫ 50[121]⑫ 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] ⑫ ⑫
AC415 50[105]⑫ 50[105]⑫ − − 50[105] 50[105] ⑫ ⑫
AC240 85[211]⑫ 85[211]⑫ 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] ⑫ ⑫
DC250 − − − − − − − −
S800-NE 350∼800 3 AC690 20[43.0]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] ⑫ ⑫

(350,400, AC525 30[63]⑫ 30[63]⑫ − − 30[63] 30[63] ⑫ ⑫
450,500, AC450 50[121]⑫ 50[121]⑫ 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] ⑫ ⑫
600,700,800) AC415 50[105]⑫ 50[105]⑫ − − 50[105] 50[105] ⑫ ⑫
AC240 85[211]⑫ 85[211]⑫ 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] ⑫ ⑫
S800-NEH 350∼800 3 AC690 20[43.0]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] 20[43.0] ⑫ ⑫
(350,400, AC525 30[63]⑫ 30[63]⑫ − − 30[63] 30[63] ⑫ ⑫
450,500, AC450 50[121]⑫ 50[121]⑫ 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] 50[121] ⑫ ⑫
600,700,800) AC415 50[105]⑫ 50[105]⑫ − − 50[105] 50[105] ⑫ ⑫
AC240 85[211]⑫ 85[211]⑫ 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] 85[211] ⑫ ⑫
S800-RF 700,800 3 AC690 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
AC450 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
AC240 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
DC250 − − − − − − − −
S800-RE 350∼800 3 AC690 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(350,400,450,500, AC450 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
600,700,800) AC240 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
H800-NE 350∼800 3 AC690 25[53.8]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] ⑫ ⑫
(350,400, AC525 45[94.5]⑫ 34[71.4]⑫ − − 45[94.5] 34[71.4] ⑫ ⑫
450,500, AC450 125[295]⑫ 94[225]⑫ 125[295] 94[225] 125[295] 94[225] ⑫ ⑫
600,700,800) AC415 125[275]⑫ 94[206.8]⑫ − − 125[275] 94[206.8] ⑫ ⑫
AC240 150[350]⑫ 150[350]⑫ 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] 150[350] ⑫ ⑫
L800-NE 350∼800 3 AC690 25[53.8]⑫ 20[43.0]⑫ 25[53.8] 20[43.0] 25[53.8] 20[43.0] ⑫ ⑫
(350,400, AC525 45[94.5]⑫ 34[71.4]⑫ − − 45[94.5] 34[71.4] ⑫ ⑫
450,500, AC450 180[430]⑫ 135[315]⑫ 180[430] 135[315] 180[430] 135[315] ⑫ ⑫
600,700,800) AC415 200[440]⑫ 150[330]⑫ − − 200[440] 150[330] ⑫ ⑫
AC240 200[484]⑫ 150[350]⑫ 200[484] 150[350] 200[484] 150[350] ⑫ ⑫
1250 S1250-NE 500∼1250 3 AC690 ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(500,600,700, AC450 ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
800,1000,1200) AC240 ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
S1250-NEH 500∼1250 3 AC690 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(500,600,700, AC450 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
800,1000,1200) AC240 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
S1250-GE 500∼1250 3 AC690 ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(500,600,700, AC450 ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
800,1000,1200) AC240 ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
H1250-NE 500∼1200 3 AC690 ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(500,600,700, AC450 ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
800, 1000,1200) AC240 ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
1600 S1600-NE 700∼1600 3 AC690 ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(700,800,900,1000, AC450 ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
1200,1400,1600) AC240 ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
S1600-NEH 700∼1600 3 AC690 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
(700,800,900,1000, AC450 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
1200,1400,1600) AC240 ⑫ ⑫ − − ⑫ ⑫ ⑫ ⑫
2-25
2
size (V) O-CO O-CO-CO O-CO O-CO-CO O-CO O-CO-CO O-CO O-CO-CO
50 TB-5S 10 2 AC250 2.5[4.1] − 2.5[4.1] − − − 2.5[3.57]⑦ −
AC125 42[99.3] − 43.5[101.6] − − − 42[102]⑧ −
DC125 5.0[5.0] − 5.0[5.0] − − − − −
15,20,30, 2 AC250 5.0[8.0] − 5.0[8.0] − − − 5[7.98]⑦ −
40,50 AC125 42[99.3] − 43.5[101.6] − − − 42[102]⑧ −
DC125 5.0[5.0] − 5.0[5.0] − − − − −
TB-5P 10 2 AC250 2.5[4.1] − 2.5[4.1] − 2.5[4.1] − 2.5[3.57]⑦ −
AC125 42[99.3] − 43.5[101.6] − 42[99.3] − 42[102]⑧ −
DC125 5.0[5.0] − 5.0[5.0] − 5.0[5.0] − − −
15,20,30, 2 AC250 5.0[8.0] − 5.0[8.0] − 5.0[8.0] − 5[7.98]⑦ −
40,50 AC125 42[99.3] − 43.5[101.6] − 42[99.3] − 42[102]⑧ −
DC125 5.0[5.0] − 5.0[5.0] − 5.0[5.0] − − −
TB-5D 10 2 AC250 2.5[4.1] − 2.5[4.1] − 2.5[4.1] − 2.5[3.57]⑦ −
AC125 42[99.3] − 43.5[101.6] − 42[99.3] − 42[102]⑧ −
DC125 5.0[5.0] − 5.0[5.0] − 5.0[5.0] − − −
15,20,30, 2 AC250 5.0[8.0] − 5.0[8.0] − 5.0[8.0] − 5[7.98]⑦ −
40,50 AC125 42[99.3] − 43.5[101.6] − 42[99.3] − 42[102]⑧ −
DC125 5.0[5.0] − 5.0[5.0] − 5.0[5.0] − − −
1000 TL-1000NE 500∼1000 3 AC690 − − 45[93.8] 34[71.6] − − 45[92] 34[71.4]
（500,600, AC500 − − 75[163] 57[124] − − 75[165] 57[125.4]
700,800, AC460 125[295] − 125[295]① 65[153]① 125[295] − 125[298]① 65[153]①
900,1000） AC240 − − 150[345] 113[263] − − 150[347] 113[248.6]
1200 TL-1200NE 600∼1200 3 AC690 − − 45[93.8] 34[71.6] − − 45[92] 34[71.4]
（600,700, AC500 − − 75[163] 57[124] − − 75[165] 57[125.4]
800,1000, AC460 125[295] − 125[295]① 65[153]① 125[295] − 125[298]① 65[153]①
1200） AC240 − − 150[345] 113[263] − − 150[347] 113[248.6]
2000 XS2000NE 1000∼2000 3 AC500 85[195] − 87.1[194.9] − 85[195] − 85[187]① 64[140.8]①
（1000,1200,1400,
1600,1800,2000）
2-26
2
size (V) O-CO O-CO-CO O-CO O-CO-CO O-CO O-CO-CO O-CO O-CO-CO
50 TB-5S 10 2 AC250 − − − − 2.5[4.1] − − −
AC125 − − − − 42[99.3] − − −
DC125 − − − − 5.0[5.0] − − −
15,20,30, 2 AC250 − − − − 5.0[8.0] − − −
40,50 AC125 − − − − 42[99.3] − − −
DC125 − − − − 5.0[5.0] − − −
TB-5P 10 2 AC250 2.5[3.57]⑨ − 2.5[4.1] − 2.5[4.1] − − −
2
AC125 42[102]⑧ − 42[99.3] − 42[99.3] − − −
DC125 − − 5.0[5.0] − 5.0[5.0] − − −
15,20,30, 2 AC250 5[7.98]⑨ − 5.0[8.0] − 5.0[8.0] − − −
40,50 AC125 42[102]⑧ − 42[99.3] − 42[99.3] − − −
DC125 − − 5.0[5.0] − 5.0[5.0] − − −
TB-5D 10 2 AC250 2.5[3.57]⑨ − − − 2.5[4.1] − − −

AC125 42[102]⑧ − − − 42[99.3] − − −
DC125 − − − − 5.0[5.0] − − −
15,20,30, 2 AC250 5[7.98]⑨ − − − 5.0[8.0] − − −
40,50 AC125 42[102]⑧ − − − 42[99.3] − − −
DC125 − − − − 5.0[5.0] − − −
1000 TL-1000NE 500∼1000 3 AC690 45[93.8] 34[71.6] − − − − 45[94.5] 34[71.4]
（500,600, AC500 − − − − − − − −
700,800, AC460 125[295]① 65[153]① − − − − 125[275]① 63[138.6]①
900,1000） AC240 − − − − − − − −
1200 TL-1200NE 600∼1200 3 AC690 45[93.8] 34[71.6] − − − − 45[94.5] 34[71.4]
（600,700, AC500 − − − − − − − −
800,1000, AC460 125[295]① 65[153]① − − − − 125[275]① 63[138.6]①
1200） AC240 − − − − − − − −
2000 XS2000NE 1000∼2000 3 AC500 − − − − 85[195] − − −
（1000,1200,1400,
1600,1800,2000）
2-27
3 Selection
zCombination of breakers for cascade breaking ……………………3-2
xSelection of breakers for selectivity coordination …………………3-4 3
Selection
3-1
3
Selection
zCombination of breakers for cascade breaking
Cascade breaking system Breaker combination table for cascade breaking for 240V AC circuit (approved by NK, LR, AB)
The following table shows possible combinations of backup and backed-up Backup MCCB Backup breaker
S100-NFH
S225-NFH
S100-NFL
S225-NFL
breakers (conforming to Appendix A, IEC 60947-2) as well as the cascade Ra
S100-NF
S125-NF
S225-NF
S250-NF
S125-SF
E100-SF
ted
E50-SF
bre
ak
breaking capacity (kA sym.) of each combination. ing
ca
Backed-up pa
cit
MCCB Backed-up y
breaker sym.
（kA） 25 25 50 50 65
25 25 25 25
TB-5S 5② [58.3] [58.3] [55.6] [55.6] −
Short-circuit point
25 25 25 25
TB-5D 5② [58.3] [58.3] [55.6] [55.6] −
25 25 25 25
TB-5P 5② [58.3] [58.3] [55.6] [55.6] − Notes:
50 50 50 ① Values enclosed in square brackets
E50-SF 25 − − [115] [115] [115] “[ ]” represent the making current.
50 50 50 ② If the rated current is 10A, the rated
E100-SF 25 − − [115] [115] [115] breaking capacity is 2.5 kA.
Breaker combination table for cascade breaking for 450V AC circuit (approved by NK, LR, AB)
Backup breaker
S100-NFH
S225-NFH
S400-NEH
S100-GFH
S225-GFH
S630-NEH
S800-NEH
S400-GEH
Ra
S100-NFL
S225-NFL
S100-GFL
S225-GFL
S50-GFH
H100-NF
H125-NF
H225-NF
H400-NE
H630-NE
H800-NE
S100-NF
S125-NF
S225-NF
S250-NF
S400-NF
S400-NE
S100-GF
S125-GF
S50-GFL
S225-GF
S250-GF
S630-NF
S630-NE
S800-NF
S800-NE
S400-GF
S400-GE
ted
S125-SF
S250-SF
S400-CF
S630-CF
S800-CF
S400-PF
S400-PE
L100-NF
L125-NF
L225-NF
L400-NE
L630-NE
L800-NE
E250-SF
S50-GF
bre
ak
ing
Backed-up
breaker
E50-SF
ca
pa
cit
y
sym.
（kA） 15
15
25
22
25
22
25
15
30
15
30 30 30 45 50
22
50
15
50 50 65 80 120
22
120 120 125 125 180
180
180 180 180 180 3
10 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
[32.6] [51.9] [51.9] [32.6] [32.6] [51.9] [32.6] [51.9] [430]
E100-SF 15 22 22 15 15 22 15 22 180
10 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
[32.6] [51.9] [51.9] [32.6] [32.6] [51.9] [32.6] [51.9] [430]
Selection
E250-SF 25 25 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 50 50 30 30 70 70 30 30
15 − − − − − −
[56.2] [56.2] [70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [121] [121] [65.2] [65.2] [165] [165] [70.8] [70.8]
S50-SF 30 30 30 30 42 42 30 30 30 30 50 50 50 30 30 180 70 70 30 30
25 − − − − −
S125-SF [70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [96.7] [96.7] [70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [121] [121] [121] [70.8] [70.8] [430] [165] [165] [70.8] [70.8]
S100-NF
S125-NF
S100-NFL 25 30 30 30 30 42 42 30 30 30 30 50 50 50 30 30 180 70 70 30 30
− − − − − [70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [96.7] [96.7] [70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [121] [121] [121] [65.2] [65.2] [430] [165] [165] [70.8] [70.8]
S100-NFH
S100-NM
S225-NF
S250-NF
S225-NFL 25 30 30 30 42 42 42 42 42 42 70 70 70 70 130 130 85 85
− − − − − [70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [96.7] − [96.7] [96.7] [96.7] [96.7] [96.7] − [165] [165] [165] [165] − [311] [311] [203] [203]
S225-NFH
S225-NM
S250-SF 30 30 30 42 42 42 42 42 42 70 70 70 70 130 130 85 85
30 − − − − − − − −
[70.8] [70.8] [70.8] [96.7] [96.7] [96.7] [96.7] [96.7] [96.7] [165] [165] [165] [165] [311] [311] [203] [203]
S400-CF 45 50 50 50 50 100 70 70 130 100 100
30 − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
[109] [117] [117] [121] [121] [230] [165] [165] [311] [230] [230]
S630-CF 50 50 100 100 130 130
30 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
[117] [117] [230] [230] [311] [311]
S800-CF 50 100 130
30 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
[117] [230] [311]
S400-NF
S400-NE 45 100 100 100 130 130 130
− − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − [230] [230] [230] − − [311] [311] [311]
S400-NEH
S50-GF
S100-GF
S125-GF
S50-GFL 50 70 70 70 180 85 85
− − − − − − − − − − − − − − − [165] [165] [165] − − [430] [203] [203] − −
S50-GFH
S100-GFL
S100-GFH
S225-GF
S250-GF 70 70 130 130 85 85
50 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
S225-GFL [165] [165] [311] [311] [203] [203]
S225-GFH
S630-NF
S630-NE 50 100 100 130 130
− − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − [230] [230] − − − [311] [311]
S630-NEH
S800-NF
S800-NE 50 100 130
− − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − [230] − − − − [311]
S800-NEH
S400-GF
S400-GE 65 100 100 100 130 130 130
− − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − [230] [230] [230] − − [311] [311] [311]
S400-GEH
S400-PF 100 100 100 130 130 130
80 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
S400-PE [230] [230] [230] [311] [311] [311]
H100-NF 180
120 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
H125-NF [430]
H225-NF 120 130

− − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − [311] − − −
H400-NE 120 180 180 180

− − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − [396] [396] [396]
Notes: ① Values enclosed in square brackets “[ ]” represent the making current.
3-2 3-3
3
Selection
xSelection of breakers for selectivity coordination
Selectivity coordination
The following table shows possible combinations of main circuit breakers and branch circuit
breakers capable of selectivity coordination with the main circuit breakers as well as the breaking Main circuit breaker
capacity (kA sym.) of each combination at the points where the branch circuit breaker is installed.
Power supply Branch circuit
continued breaker
vital load Short-circuit point
Breaker combination table for selectivity coordination for 450V AC circuit

Main circuit breaker
TL-1000NE
XS2000NE
Ra
S1250-NEH
S1600-NEH
TL-1200NE
S630-NEH
S800-NEH
S400-NEH
S400-GEH
ted
H400-NE
H630-NE
H800-NE
S400-NE
S400-GE
L400-NE
S630-NE
S800-NE
bre
ak
ing ※
ca ※
pa
cit
y
sym.（kA）
Branch circuit breaker 45 45 65 65 120 180 50 50 125 50 50 125 125 125 65 85 85
E50-SF
10 5 6 5 6 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
E100-SF
E225-NEL
E225-NFH
15 5 6 5 6 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
E250-NF
E250-SF
S50-SF
S100-NF
S100-NFH
25 5 6 5 6 5 5 22 25 25 22 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
S100-NFL
S125-NF
S125-SF
S225-NF
S225-NFH
25 5 6 5 6 5 5 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
S225-NFL
S250-NF
S250-SF 30 5 6 5 6 5 5 25 30 30 25 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
S400-CF 30 − − − − − − − 25 − 25 25 25 25 30 30 30 30
S630-CF 30 − − − − − − − − − − − − − 30 30 30 30
S800-CF 30 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 20 30
S50-GF
S50-GFH 50 5 6 5 6 5 5 42 45 50 42 45 50 50 50 50 50 50
S50-GFL
S100-GF
S100-GFH
50 5 6 5 6 5 5 42 45 50 42 45 50 50 50 50 50 50
S100-GFL
S125-GF
S225-GF
S225-GFH
50 5 6 5 6 5 5 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
S225-GFL
S250-GF
S400-PF 80 − − − − − − − − − 25 25 25 − 50 − − 50
S400-NE
S400-NEH 45 − − − − − − − 25 − 25 25 25 45 45 45 45 45
S400-NF
S400-GE
S400-GEH 65 − − − − − − − 25 − 25 25 25 50 50 50 50 50
S400-GF
S400-PE 80 − − − − − − − − − 25 25 25 − 50 − − 50
S630-NE
S630-NEH 50 − − − − − − − − − − − − 12 30 30 30 35
S630-NF
S800-NE
S800-NEH 50 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 20 35
S800-NF
H100-NF
120 − − − − − − − − 30 − − 50 − 120 − − 85
H125-NF
H225-NF 120 − − − − − − − − 15 − − 15 − 25 − − 75
H400-NE 120 − − − − − − − − − − − − − 25 − − 35
L100-NF
180 − − − − − − − − 60 − − 125 − 125 − − 85
L125-NF
L225-NF 180 − − − − − − − − − − − 20 − 35 − − 85
L400-NE 180 − − − − − − − − − − − − − 25 − − 85
H630-NE 125 − − − − − − − − − − − − − 15 − − 35
L630-NE 180 − − − − − − − − − − − − − 15 − − 35
H800-NE 125 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 35
L800-NE 180 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 35
Note: The table assumes that:
The trip pickup current of the main circuit breakers is set to the maximum;
The main circuit breakers are provided with the long time delay, short time delay and instantaneous trip functions;
For CCS, the values are being or will be applied. Contact us for the details.
The main circuit breakers marked with ※ are high instantaneous trip breakers.
3-4
4 Special Breakers
zInstantaneous trip only breakers………………………………………4-2
xSpecial instantaneous trip breakers …………………………………4-3
1. High Instantaneous Trip ……………………………………………4-3
2. Low Instantaneous Trip ……………………………………………4-4
Special Breakers
4-1
4
Special Breakers
zInstantaneous trip only breakers
These are standard breakers without the thermal overload trip. They have the instantaneous tripping characteristic, normally used when short
circuit protection only is required. Other ratings and specifications and outline dimensions of these breakers are the same as those of standard
breakers of the same types.
Category Type For AC/DC Rated current, A Code number Instantaneous trip current, A
15I I18 180
20I I24 240
S50-GF 30I I36 360
40I I48 480
Fixed instantaneous trip q
50I I60 600

15I I18 180
20I I24 240
S100-NF 30I I36 360
S100-GF 40I I48 480
H100-NF 50I I60 600
L100-NF I72 720
100I I90 900
I120 1200
AC or DC I162 1625
S225-NF
S225-GF ⎡ If the DC version is ⎡ I195 1950
225I 2275
H225-NF ⎢ required, please state so ⎢ I227
2600
L225-NF ⎢ when ordering. The AC ⎢ I260
I292 2925
⎢ version is provided ⎢
⎢ unless otherwise stated
when ordering.
⎢ Code number
Dial position 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
⎣ ⎣ V125 1500 1375 1250 1125 1000 875 750 8 10
V150 1800 1650 1500 1350 1200 1050 900
Adjustable instantaneous trip w
S400-CF V175 2100 1925 1750 1575 1400 1225 1050

S400-NF 400I V200 2400 2200 2000 1800 1600 1400 1200
S400-GF V225 2700 2475 2250 2025 1800 1575 1350 6 12
V250 3000 2750 2500 2250 2000 1750 1500
V300 3600 3300 3000 2700 2400 2100 1800
V350 4200 3850 3500 3150 2800 2450 2100 Selector dial
V400 4800 4400 4000 3600 3200 2800 2400
Dial position 10 9 8 7 6 5
S630-CF Code number
S630-NF 630I V500 5000 4500 4000 3500 3000 2500
S630-RF V600 6000 5400 4800 4200 3600 3000
V630 6300 5670 5040 4410 3780 3150 5 10
S800-CF V700 7000 6300 5600 4900 4200 3500
S800-NF 800I
S800-RF V800 8000 7200 6400 5600 4800 4000 Selector dial
¡The instantaneous trip current values shown in the table above are standard settings. Contact us if you require other settings.
Notes: INST TRIP ONLY

q Setting tolerance: ±20% (Please specify the code number). INST ＊＊＊＊ A
w For AC:
Nameplate installed on the
The selector dial is factory set to position “12” unless the instantaneous trip current is specified. Setting tolerance: ±20% (Please specify the code magnetic breakers only
number).
For DC:
The instantaneous trip current cannot be adjusted by the customer. The instantaneous trip current is factory set to the value specified by the customer.
Setting tolerance: ±10% (State the version (DC), code number and instantaneous trip current you require).
4-2
4
Special Breakers
xSpecial instantaneous trip breakers
1. High Instantaneous Trip

High instantaneous trip breakers are the breakers having a high instantaneous trip pickup current. Use these breakers in order to achieve selective
coordination or to provide protection on the primary side of transformer.
Category Type (Reference type e) Rated current, A Instantaneous trip pickup current, A
15 300
20 400
S50-GFH（S50-GF） 30 600
40 800
Thermal -Magnetic type q
50 1000
15 300
20 400
30 600
S100-NFH（S100-NF） 40 800
S100-GFH（S100-GF） 50 1000
60 1200
75 1500
100 1800
125 2250
150 2700
S225-NFH（S225-NF）
175 3150
S225-GFH（S225-GF）
200 3600
225 4050
CT rated current (ICT), A Rated current (IR), A
175
200
S400-NEH（S400-NE） 225 6300
S400-GEH（S400-GE） 400 250
300
350
400
250
300
S630-NEH（S630-NE） 350 10000
630 400
500
600
630
4
350
400
Special Breakers
S800-NEH（S800-NE） 450 10000
800 500
Electronic type w
600
700
800
500
600
S1250-NEH（S1250-NE） 700 15000
1250 800
1000
1200
1250
700
800
900
S1600-NEH（S1600-NE） 1000 19200
1600
1200
1400
1500
1600
1000
1200
XS2000NE④ 1400 35000
2000
1600
1800
2000
Notes:
q Setting tolerance: ±10%. w Setting tolerance: ±20%. e Ratings and specifications, except for the instantaneous trip pickup current, and outline dimensions
of the High-Inst breakers are the same as those of the reference breakers enclosed in parentheses.
HIGH INST
INST ＊＊＊＊ A
r An optional trip indicator cannot be added.
Nameplate of High-Inst breakers
4-3
4
Special Breakers
xSpecial instantaneous trip breakers
2. Low Instantaneous Trip

Low instantaneous trip breakers are the breakers having a low instantaneous trip pickup current. Use these breakers in order to achieve selective
coordination with a high-voltage fuse located on the primary side of the breakers.
Category Type (Reference type w) Rated current, A Instantaneous trip pickup current, A
15 90
20 120
S50-GFL（S50-GF） 30 180
40 240
50 300
Thermal -Magnetic q
15 90
20 120
30 180
S100-NFL（S100-NF） 40 240
S100-GFL（S100-GF） 50 300
60 360
75 450
100 600
125 750
150 900
S225-NFL（S225-NF）
175 1050
S225-GFL（S225-GF）
200 1200
225 1350
Notes:
q Setting tolerance: ±10%.
w Ratings and specifications, except for the instantaneous trip pickup current, and outline dimensions of the Low-Inst breakers are the same as those of the LOW INST
INST ＊＊＊＊ A
reference breakers enclosed in parentheses.
Nameplate of Low-Inst breakers
4-4
5 Mounting and
Connection
zType of connections and mountings …………………………………5-2
List of connecting type …………………………………………………5-2
Connecting parts ………………………………………………………5-6
Plug-in type (PM) ………………………………………………………5-8
1. For switchboards …………………………………………………5-8
2. For distribution boards……………………………………………5-9
xCompression terminals ………………………………………………5-14
cTerminal screw sizes and standard torques ………………………5-16
vInsulation distance from the line side ………………………………5-20
bReverse connection ……………………………………………………5-22 5
nLists of breaker mounting screws …………………………………5-23
Mounting and Connection
5-1
1
5
zType of connections and mountings
List of Connecting Types

Front-connected (FC) Rear-connected (RC) Plug-in (PM) Plug-in (PM) Flush Plate (FP)
Connecting types Draw-out type TemPlug
For compression Flat bar studs For switchboards For distribution boards
(Abbreviation) With extension bars With cable clamps Flat bar studs (DR) (PG)(PG4)2
terminals/flat bars Stud can be turned 45° or 90° Stud can be tured 90° 3 14
Outer view
Breaker
S50-SF,S125-SF,S125-SN ' ○ ― ○＊ ― ○ ○ ○ ― ―
S50-GF,S100-NF,S100-GF,S100-NN
S125-NF,S125-GF,S125-NN ' ○ △ ○ ― ○ ○ ○ ― ○
S100-NM
H100-NF,H125-NF,H225-NF,H225-GE ' ○ △ ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ▲
L100-NF,L125-NF,L225-NF ' ○ △ ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ―
S225-NF,S225-GF
S250-NF,S250-GF ' ○ △ ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○
S225-NM
E250-SF,S250-SF,S250-SN ' ○ △ ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○5
S400-CF,S400-NF,S400-NE
S400-GF,S400-GE,S400-PF ' ○ △ ○ ― ○ ― ○ ▲ ○
S400-PE,S400-NN
H400-NE,L400-NE ' ○ △ ○ ― ○ ― ○ ▲ ―
S630-CF,S630-NF,S630-NE,S630-RF '
― △ ― ○ ○ ― ○ ▲ ○
S630-RE,S630-GN
H630-NE,L630-NE ― ' △ ― ○ ○ ― ○ ▲ ―
S800-CF,S800-NF,S800-NE,S800-RF
S800-RE,S800-NN
H800-NE,L800-NE
―
―
'
'
―
―
―
―
○
○
○
○
―
―
○
○
▲
▲
―
―
5
• Connect compression • Extension bars are • Cable clamps are • Flat bar studs will be factory installed in the horizontal • To make connection, • Plug-in type with front • Install the mounting • To make connection, • Simply plugging
terminals or flat bars attached to breaker attached to breaker position unless otherwise specified. push the breaker into connection suitable for frame directly to a panel. push the breaker into TemPlug onto the main
directly to breaker terminals. terminals. Connect wires the mounting base the small depth. the draw-out cradle busbars in a

terminals. Connect compression directly to cable clamps. • Flat bar studs in the vertical position are available on already wired to the • Use the flat bar studs in already wired to the switchboard completes
terminals or flat bars to request. Please select a position code from those main and control the same manner as for main and control the connection of the
the extension bars. shown in the table below: circuits. The breaker can rear-connected circuits. The draw-out breaker to a power
be fixed by the mounting breakers. cradle has two positions distribution line. Use
screws. “Connected” and plug-in base mounting
Position Position of flat bar studs
• The plate is painted in “Isolated”. screws to secure the
code Line side Load side
• High-performance Munsell 5Y 7/1. breaker. Direct coupling
RC-A Vertical Horizontal models have a safety • The breakers have a of the plug-in base to
RC-B Horizontal Vertical mechanism that safety mechanism that the main busbars
RC-C Vertical Vertical prevents them from prevents them from reduces the lead time
RC-D Horizontal Horizontal being mounted or being mounted or involved in completing a
removed as long as they removed as long as they power distribution
are in the ON state. are in the ON state. system.
Remarks ✽: The studs are horizontal direction only.
• Models meeting • Models meeting • If the frame size or rated

protection grade IP20 protection grade IP20 current of the breakers
are available as options. are available as options. is changed, all you have
IEC 60529 specifies that IEC 60529 specifies that to do is to replace the
IP20-compliant devices IP20-compliant devices TemPlug.
be designed and be designed and
constructed so that live constructed so that live
parts of the devices parts of the devices
cannot be touched by cannot be touched by
hand. When ordering hand. When ordering
the products, please the products, please
specify as “IP20 applied specify as “IP20 applied
products”. products”.
See pages 5-16 and 5-17 for dimensions and tightening torques of terminal screws. ' : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified.
Notes: ○ : Optional standard. Specify when ordering.
q. Except 4-pole breakers. e. See page 5-8 for details. ▲ : Semi-standard.
w. May not be applied to 2 or 4-pole breakers of some types. r. See page 5-8 and 5-9 for details. △ : Custom-built. Contact us for details.
t. TemPlug 45B (PG4) is not applicable. ― : “no” or “not available”.
5-2 5-3
5
List of Connecting Types

Rear-connected (RC)
Connecting types Front-connected (FC) Plug-in (PM) Draw-out type (DR) Flush Plate (FP)
Flat bar studs
(Abbreviation)
For compression Bolt studs
Breaker With extension bars Stud can be turned 90° Fixed 1 For switchboards ⑥ For distribution boards Two-position type Three-position type Flat bar studs
terminals/flat bars
TB-5S ' ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
TB-5P ' (Load side) ― ― ― ― ― ' (Line side) ― ― ―
TB-5D ― ― ― ― ― ― ' ― ― ―
E50-SF, E100-SF, E50-CM ' ― ― ― ○ ― ○ ― ― ―
S1250-NE, S1250-GE, S1250-NN ― ' ― ○ 2 ― ○ ― ▲ ― ○ 2 4
TL-1000NE, TL-1200NE ― ' ― ○ 2 ― ○ ― ▲ ― ○ 2 4
S1600-NE, S1600-NN ― ○ ― ' 3 ― ― ― ― ― ○ 3 4
XS2000NE, XS2000NN ― ○ ― ' 3 ― ― ― ― ○ ○ 3 5
• Connect • Extension bars are • To make connection, push • Plug-in type with front • To make connection, push • To make connection, push • The plate is painted in
compression attached to breaker the breaker into the plug-in connection suitable for the the breaker into the draw-out the breaker into the draw-out Munsell 5Y 7/1.
terminals directly to terminals. Connect base cradle already wired to small depth. cradle already wired to the cradle already wired to the
breaker terminals. compression the main and control circuits. main and control circuits. main and control circuits.
terminals or flat bars Use breaker mounting The draw-out cradle has two The draw-out cradle has
to the extension bars. screws to secure the positions “Connected” and three positions “Connected”,
breaker. “Isolated”. “Test” and “Isolated”.
• The breakers have a safety • The breakers are fitted with • The breakers are fitted with
mechanism that prevents a safety trip. If an attempt is a safety trip. If an attempt is
them from being mounted or made to remove the made to remove the
removed as long as they are breakers while ON position it breakers while ON position it
in the ON state. will automatically trip. will automatically trip.
• Models meeting protection • Models meeting protection • Safety shutters are available
grade IP20 are available as grade IP20 are available as as option which
options. IEC 60529/JIS C options. IEC 60529/JIS C automatically cover the live
0920 specify that IP20- 0920 specify that IP20- parts on the cradle side in
compliant devices be compliant devices be the isolated position.
Remarks designed and constructed so designed and constructed so
that live parts of the devices that live parts of the devices • The auxiliary circuit is
cannot be touched by hand. cannot be touched by hand. connected or isolated
When ordering the products, automatically by the
please specify as “IP20 disconnector.
applied products”. Connected on “CONN” and
• The auxiliary circuit is

connected or isolated
“TEST” position. Isolated on
“ISOLATED” position. 5
automatically through the
auxiliary circuit terminals of a
plug-in breaker. (When the
motor operator is mounted,

the auxilary circuit is
connected or isolated
manually.)
See pages 5-18 and 5-19 for dimensions and tightening torques of terminal screws. 3. Vertical installation only ' : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified.
Notes: 4. The breakers can be installed on the panel door using mounting frame supplied as õ : Optional standard. Specify when ordering.
1. Breakers are mounted on angles. standard. ▲ : Semi-standard.
2. Flat bar studs will be factory installed in the horizontal position unless otherwise specified. 5. The breakers can be installed on the mounting angle as well as Rear-connected breakers. ¢ : Custom-built. Contact us for details.
If vertical installation is required, please state when ordering. 6. See page 5-8 for details. — : “no” or “not available”.
Position Position of flat bar studs

code Line side Load side
RC-A Vertical Horizontal
RC-B Horizontal Vertical
RC-C Vertical Vertical
RC-D Horizontal Horizontal
5-4 5-5
5
Connecting parts
There are the following connecting/mounting hardware available as options:
1. Extension bars for front conection
Number Min Constituent parts
Type Applicable breakers Remarks
of poles order qty Extension bar Screw B Screw C
T2FB12L2SH 2 1/2 2 2 2
S50-SF Straight extension bars
T2FB12L3SH 3 1 3 3 3
T2FB12L2SB 2 4 4 4
S50-SF Straight extension bars 1
T2FB12L3SB 3 6 6 6
T2FB12L2SH 2 2 2 2
1/2
T2FB12L3SH 3 S125-SF,S125-SN Straight extension bars 3 3 3
1
T2FB12L4SH 4 4 4 4
T2FB12L2SB 2 4 4 4
T2FB12L3SB 3 S125-SF,S125-SN Straight extension bars 1 6 6 6
T2FB12L4SB 4 8 8 8
T2FB122H 2 S50-GF,S100-NF,S100-GF 2 2 2
1/2
T2FB123H 3 S100-NM,S100-NN Straight extension bars 3 3 3
1
T2FB124H 4 S125-NF,S125-GF,S125-NN 4 4 4
T2FB122B 2 S50-GF,S100-NF,S100-GF 4 4 4
T2FB123B 3 S100-NM,S100-NN Straight extension bars 1 6 6 6
T2FB124B 4 S125-NF,S125-GF,S125-NN 8 8 8
H100-NF,L100-NF
T2FB25L3WH 3 3 3 3
H125-NF,L125-NF 1/2
Spread extension bars
S225-NF,S225-GF,S225-GE,S225-NM,H225-NF,L225-NF 1
T2FB25L4WH 4 4 4 4
S250-NF,S250-GF,E250-SF,S250-SF,S250-SN
H100-NF,L100-NF
T2FB25L3WB 3 6 6 6
H125-NF,L125-NF
Spread extension bars 1
S225-NF,S225-GF,S225-GE,S225-NM,,H225-NF,L225-NF
T2FB25L4WB 4 8 8 8
S250-NF,S250-GF,E250-SF,S250-SF,S250-SN
T2FB25L2SH 2 H100-NF,L100-NF 2 2 2
H125-NF,L125-NF
1/2
T2FB25L3SH 3 S225-NF,S225-GF,S225-GE,S225-NM Straight extension bars 3 3 3
1
H225-NF,L225-NF
T2FB25L4SH 4 S250-NF,S250-GF,E250-SF,S250-SF,S250-SN 4 4 4
T2FB25L2SB 2 H100-NF,L100-NF 4 4 4
H125-NF,L125-NF
T2FB25L3SB 3 S225-NF,S225-GF,S225-GE,S225-NM Straight extension bars 1 6 6 6
H225-NF,L225-NF
T2FB25L4SB 4 S250-NF,S250-GF,E250-SF,S250-SF,S250-SN 8 8 8
T2FB402H 2 S400-CF,S400-NF,S400-PF,S400-NN 2 2 2
1/2
T2FB403H 3 S400-NE,S400-GF,S400-GE,S400-PE Spread extension bars 3 3 3
1
T2FB404H 4 H400-NE,L400-NE 4 4 4
T2FB402B 2 S400-CF,S400-NF,S400-PF,S400-NN 4 4 4
T2FB403B 3 S400-NE,S400-GF,S400-GE,S400-PE Spread extension bars 1 6 6 6
T2FB404B 4 H400-NE,L400-NE 8 8 8
¡See page 5-16 for screws B and C.
Note q: Two sets, one for the line side and one for the load side, are required per breaker.
2. Flat bar stud for rear connection

Constituent parts
Number Min
Type Applicable breakers Remarks
of poles order qty Stud bar Screw D Screw E
T2RP05L2S 2 4 4 4
S50-SF,S125-SF（15-50A） 1
T2RP05L3S 3 6 6 6
T2RP12L2S 2 4 4 4
T2RP12L3S 3 S125-SF,S125-SN（60-125A） 1 6 6 6
T2RP12L4S 4 8 8 8
T2RP122S 2 S50-GF,S100-NF,S100-GF 4 4 4
1
T2RP123S 3 S100-NM,S100-NN 6 6 6
1
T2RP124S 4 S125-NF,S125-GF,S125-NN 8 8 8
T2RP252S 2 4 4 4
S225-NF,S225-GF,S225-GE,S225-NM
T2RP253S 3 1 6 6 6
H225-NF,L225-NF
1
T2RP254S 4 S250-NF,S250-GF 8 8 8
T2RP25L2S 2 4 4 4
1
T2RP25L3S 3 E250-SF,S250-SF,S250-SN 6 6 6
1
T2RP25L4S 4 8 8 8
T2RP253L 3 H100-NF,L100-NF 6 6 6
1
H125-NF,L125-NF
T2RP254L 4 1 8 8 8
H225-NF,L225-NF
T2RO403S 3 S400-CF,S400-NF,S400-PF,S400-NN 1 6 6 6
T2RP404S 4 S400-NE,S400-GF,S400-GE,S400-PE 1 8 8 8
T2RP403L 3 1 6 6 6
H400-NE,L400-NE
T2RP404L 4 1 8 8 8
¡See page 5-16 for screws D and E.
Note q: The studs can be rotated to four angular positions: 0 (horizontal), 45, 90 (vertical) and 135 degrees.
5-6
3. Plug-in base
Number Min Constituent parts
Type IP20 Applicable breakers Remarks
of poles order qty Plug-in base Nut J
XDM1-2 2 E50-SF,E100-SF 1 1 4
XDM1-3 3 E50-SF,E100-SF,E50-CM 1 1 6
T2PM12E3 3 S50-GF,S100-NF,S100-GF,S100-NN,S125-NF,S125-GF,S125-NN 1 1 6
T2PM12LT3 3 S50-SF,S125-SF,S125-SN 1 1 6
S225-NF,S225-GF,S225-GE
T2PM25E3 3 S250-NF,S250-GF 1 1 6
H100-NF,L100-NF,H125-NF,L125-NF,H225-NF,L225-NF
T2PM25LE3 3 E250-SF,S250-SF,S250-SN 1 1 6
Non S400-CF,S400-NF,S400-NE,S400-NN,S400-GF
T2PM40E3 3 1 1 6
S400-GE,S400-PF,S400-PE,H400-NE,L400-NE
S630-CF,S630-NF,S630-NE,S630-RF,S630-RE,S630-GN
T2PM80E3 3 1 1 6
S800-CF,S800-NF,S800-NE,S800-RF,S800-RE,S800-NN
T2PM80M3 3 H630-NE,L630-NE,H800-NE,L800-NE 1 1 6
T2PMX3E3 3 S1250-NE,S1250-GE,S1250-NN 1 1 6
T2PMX3E4 4 S1250-NE,S1250-GE 1 1 8
XDM8-3 3 TL-1000NE,TL-1200NE 1 1 6
XDM8-4 4 TL-1000NE,TL-1200NE 1 1 8
Standard
XDM1-2 ① 2 E50-SF,E100-SF 1 1 4
XDM1-3 ① 3 E50-SF,E100-SF,E50-CM 1 1 6
T2PM12LC3 3 S50-SF,S125-SF,S125-SN 1 1 6
T2PM12C3 3 S50-GF,S100-NF,S100-GF,S100-NN,S125-NF,S125-GF,S125-NN 1 1 6
S225-NF,S225-GF,S225-GE
T2PM25C3 3 S250-NF,S250-GF 1 1 6
H100-NF,L100-NF,H125-NF,L125-NF,H225-NF,L225-NF
T2PM25LC3 3 E250-SF,S250-SF,S250-SN 1 1 6
It is recommended to
Compliant S400-CF,S400-NF,S400-NE,S400-NN,S400-GF
TPM40C3 3 1 1 6 order plug-in base
along with breakers.
S630-CF,S630-NF,S630-NE,S630-RF, S630-RE,S630-GN
T2PM80C3 3 1 1 6 Separately available
S800-CF,S800-NF,S800-NE,S800-RF,S800-RE,S800-NN
plug-in base are for the
T2PM80N3 3 H630-NE,L630-NE,H800-NE,L800-NE 1 1 6
convenience of
T2PMX3C3 3 S1250-NE,S1250-GE,S1250-NN 1 1 6
customers who want to
T2PMX3C4 4 S1250-NE,S1250-GE 1 1 8
make wiring of the
XDM8-3 ② 3 TL-1000NE,TL-1200NE 1 1 6
mounts in advance.
XDM8-4 ② 4 TL-1000NE,TL-1200NE 1 1 8
T2PM12B2 2 1 4
T2PM12B3 3 1 1 6
S125-NF,S125-GF,S125-NN
T2PM12B4 4 1 8
S225-NF,S225-GF,S225-GE
T2PM25B3 3 1 6
S250-NF,S250-GF
1
H100-NF,L100-NF,H125-NF,L125-NF
T2PM25B4 4 Non 1 8
T2PM40B3
T2PM40B4
T2PM80B3
3
4
3
H225-NF,L225-NF
S400-CF,S400-NF,S400-NE,S400-NN,S400-GF
S630-CF,S630-NF,S630-NE,S630-RF,S630-RE,S630-GN
1 1
1
6
8
6
5
S800-CF,S800-NF,S800-NE,S800-RF,S800-RE,S800-NN 1
High- T2PM80B4 4 H630-NE,L630-NE,H800-NE,L800-NE 1 8
performance T2PM12P2 2 1 4

T2PM12P3 3 1 1 6
S125-NF,S125-GF,S125-NN
T2PM12P4 4 1 8
S225-NF,S225-GF,S225-GE
T2PM25P3 3 1 6
S250-NF,S250-GF
1
H100-NF,L100-NF,H125-NF,L125-NF
T2PM25P4 4 Compliant 1 8
H225-NF,L225-NF
T2PM40P3 3 S400-CF,S400-NF,S400-NE,S400-NN,S400-GF 1 6
1
T2PM40P4 4 S400-GE,S400-PF,S400-PE,H400-NE,L400-NE 1 8
T2PM80P3 3 S630-CF,S630-NF,S630-NE,S630-RF,S630-RE,S630-GN 1 6
S800-CF,S800-NF,S800-NE,S800-RF,S800-RE,S800-NN 1
T2PM80P4 4 H630-NE,L630-NE,H800-NE,L800-NE 1 8
¡See page 5-17 or 5-19 for Nut J.

Notes: 1 Please order 1 piece IP cover for 1 piece plug-in base. IP cover codes: IPC12 for 2 poles, IPC13 for 3 poles.
2 When ordering the products, please specify as “IP20 applied products”.
4. Flush Plate (with flat bar studs)

Constituent parts
Number Connection Min Flush plate 2 Frame
Type Applicable breakers Flush-mounting Panel mounting Remarks
of poles q order qty Stud bar mounting
Molded Iron frame screw
screw
T2FP12S2 2 S50-GF 2
T2FP12S3 3 ① S100-NF,S100-GF,S100-NN 1 ― 1 1 ― 4 4
T2FP12S4 4 S125-NF,S125-GF,S125-NN 4
T2FP25S3 3 S225-NF,S225-GF
① S225-GE,S250-NF 1 ― 1 1 ― 4 4
T2FP25S4 4 S250-GF
T2FP25L3 3 H100-NF,L100-NF,H125-NF,L125-NF
① 1 ― 1 1 ― 4 4
T2FP25L4 4 H225-NF,L225-NF,H250-NF,L250-NF
T2FP40S3 3 S400-CF,S400-NF,S400-GF
① 1 ― 1 1 ― ―③ 4
T2FP40S4 4 S400-GE,S400-NN
T2FP40L3 3
① H400-NE,L400-NE 1 ― 1 1 ― ―③ 4
T2FP40L4 4
Notes:
1. Possible mounting positions include four angular ones: 0 (horizontal), 45, 90 (vertical) and 135 degrees.
2. The flash plate is painted in Munsell 5Y 7/1.
3. Use the breaker mounting screws (supplied with the breaker) to secure the breaker in the flush-mounting frame.
4. Stud bars are not supplied with the flush-mounting frame. See “2. Studs for rear connection” on page 5-6 to select and order suitable studs.
5-7
5
Plug-in type (PM)

1.For switchboards
(Standard) Warnig
Terminal
Warnig
Terminal
Conductor Conductor
Plug-in base Nut Nut
Terminal bolt Plug-in base Mounting angle Terminal bolt

(Not supplied) Secure the conductor with the
Secure the conductor with the
correct nut and washer to correct nut and washer to
ensure full contact of ensure full contact of
conductor with terminal on the conductor with terminal on the
plug-in base, so that the steel plug-in base, so that the steel
stud bolt is not used as the stud bolt is not used as the
Conductor current path. current path.
(Not supplied)
Auxiliary circuit terminals to be
mounted on the plug-in base. Auxiliary circuit terminal
blocks for XDM8 are to
Mounting angle be mounted on the
(Not supplied) Conductor (Not supplied) plug-in base.
Auxiliary circuit Auxiliary circuit
terminals terminals
mounted on Terminal leads mounted on Terminal leads
breaker body for internally breaker body for internally
mounted mounted
accessories accessories
Lead wires from
switchboard
Lead wires from
switchboard
(High-performance)
Plug-in base
Conductor
(Not supplied)
Mounting angle
(Not supplied)
Auxiliary circuit
terminals
(See page 9-4)
5-8
2. For distribution boards
Plug-in base
Frame No. of Order codes for
size (A) Breaker
poles Plug-in bases
50 S50-SF For double T2PM12LD2
2
For single T2PM12LS2
For double T2PM12LD3
3
S50-GF For double XDA2D-3
3
For single XDA2S-3
E50-SF, E100-SF For double XDA1D-2
2
For single XDA1S-2
For double XDA1D-3
3
For single XDA1S-3
100 S100-NF, S100-GF, S100-NN For double XDA2D-3
3
For single XDA2S-3
125 S125-SF For double T2PM12LD2
2
For double T2PM12LD3
3
S125-SN For double T2PM12LD3
3
5-9
5
■ Components / Parts to be purchased

Components / Parts to be purchased Mounting/connecting screws
Breaker Remarks
Name Type Qty Size Qty Remarks
E50-SF For Plug-in base XDA1D-2 2 M4×30 2 For breaker mounting For 2-pole breaker
E50-CM double XDA1D-3 2 M4×30 4 For breaker mounting For 3-pole breaker
E100-SF Branching bar 2RT-LD（t=2） M5×12 2 For busbar connection For 10 – 50A
(thickness) 2
M4×8 4 For Mounting base installation
22S-LD（t=2） M5×12 1 For busbar connection
1
2RT-LD10（t=3） M5×12 2 For busbar connection For 60 – 100A
2
22S-LD10（t=3） M5×12 1 For busbar connection
1
Connecting plate Connecting plate 2 (for 2-pole breaker) 1 M4×35 4
Connecting plate 3PD (for 3-pole breaker) 1 M4×35 4
Insulator for arc Arc guard 2PD (for 2-pole breaker) 1
Arc guard 3PD (for 3-pole breaker) 1
Branching bar barrier Busbar barrier D 2
For Plug-in base XDA1S-2 1 M4×30 2 For breaker mounting For 2-pole breaker
single For breaker mounting For 3-pole breaker
XDA1S-3 1 M4×30 4
Branching bar 1R-LD（t=2） 1 M5×12 For busbar connection For 10 – 50A
3
(thickness)
1S-LD（t=2） 1
M4×8 For Mounting base installation
1T-LD（t=2） 1 3
1R-LD10（t=3） 1 M5×12 For busbar connection For 60 – 100A
3
1S-LD10（t=3） 1
1T-LD10（t=3） 1 3
S50-SF For Plug-in base T2PM12LD2 2 M4×30 2 For 2-pole breaker
S125-SF double For 3-pole breaker
T2PM12LD3 2 M4×30 4
S125-SN Branching bar 2RT-LDB（t=2） M5×12 2 For busbar connection For 15 – 50A
(thickness) 2
22S-LDB（t=2） M5×12 1 For busbar connection
1
2RT-LD10B（t=3） M5×12 2 For busbar connection For 60 – 125A
2
22S-LD10B（t=3） M5×12 1 For busbar connection
1
Connecting plate Connecting plate 2 (for 2-pole breaker) 1 M4×35 4
Connecting plate 3PD (for 3-pole breaker) 1 M4×35 4
Insulator for arc Arc guard 2PD (for 2-pole breaker) 1
Arc guard 3PD (for 3-pole breaker) 1
Branching bar barrier Busbar barrier D 2
For Plug-in base T2PM12LS2 1 M4×30 2 For breaker mounting For 2-pole breaker
single For breaker mounting For 3-pole breaker
T2PM12LS3 1 M4×30 4
Branching bar 1R-LDB（t=2） 1 M5×12 For busbar connection For 15 – 50A
3
(thickness)
1S-LDB（t=2） 1
1T-LDB（t=2） 1 3
1R-LD10B（t=3） 1 M5×12 For busbar connection For 60 – 125A
3
1S-LD10B（t=3） 1
1T-LD10B（t=3） 1 3
S50-GF For Plug-in base XDA2D-3 2 M5×25 4 For breaker mounting For 3-pole breaker
S100-NF double Branching bar For busbar connection For 10 – 50A
2RT-LE（t=2） M5×12 2
S100-GF (thickness) 2
S100-NN For busbar connection
22S-LE（t=2） M5×12 1
S125-NF 1
S125-GF
S125-NN 2RT-LE10（t=3） M5×12 2 For busbar connection For 60 – 125A
2
22S-LE10（t=3） M5×12 1 For busbar connection
1
Connecting plate Connecting plate 3P (for 3-pole breaker) 1 M4×35 4
Insulator for arc Arc guard 3P (for 3-pole breaker) 1
Branching bar barrier Busbar barrier E 2
For Plug-in base XDA2S-3 1 M4×30 4 For breaker mounting For 3-pole breaker
single Branching bar For busbar connection For 10 – 50A
1R-LE（t=2） 1 M5×12 3
(thickness)
1S-LE（t=2） 1
1T-LE（t=2） 1 3
1R-LE10（t=3） 1 M5×12 For busbar connection For 60 – 125A
3
1S-LE10（t=3） 1
1T-LE10（t=3） 1 3
Notes:
1. The number required to form either single or double plug-in base for 3-pole construction.
2. Branch bars for 10 - 50A and 60 - 125A differ in thickness only. The conductor for 10 - 50A (2 mm thick) can be used for applications where the breaker rated current is 50A or less.
5-10
Outline dimensions
XDA1D-2, XDA1S-2, XDA1D-3, XDA1S-3
Applicable breaker types
E50-SF E50-CM E100-SF
■ XDA1D-2, XDA1D-3 (3 poles only for E50-CM)
Insulation plate,
Drilling plan ✽
t = 1.6
2P 3P (Not supplied) 2P 3P
CL CL 13 10 21 C C
L L
22.5 28.5
M5X0.8 tapped hole Mounting angle
for connection of Load (not supplied)
8
2RT-LD, 2RT-LD10 end terminal
25
ASL Branch bar barrier
50
83
(Installed under branching
bar 2R-LD, 2RT-LD10)
M5X0.8 tapped
hole for Insulator
22.5
61
connection of for arc

360
320
175
22S-LD,
320
C C C
22.5 47
L L L
22S-LD10 Connecting plate
Busbar
61
(Not supplied)
ASL
83
50
M4X0.7 tapped 1
M5X0.8 tapped hole 25 holes for fixing
for connection of branching bar
2RT-LD 2RT-LD10
28.5 22.5
8
M6 Screw Insulation plate,
ø4.8 mounting holes t = 1.6
10
50 13 25
50 (Not supplied)
75 36 25
19 106 M4X0.7 tapped holes
■ XDA1S-2, XDA1S-3 (3 poles only for E50-CM)
M5X0.8 tapped hole

for connection of Insulation plate
2P 3P t = 1.6
1T-LD, 1T-LD10
CL CL 46 (Not supplied) Drilling plan ✽
Busbar
M5X0.8 tapped hole
for connection of
1S-LD, 1S-LD10 Mounting angle 5
35
10 2P 3P
(Not supplied) (not supplied) CL CL
21
10
22.5 23.5
86
M4X0.7 tapped
8
Busbar holes for fixing
77.5

(Not supplied) branching bar
26.5
ASL
150
150
180
83
50
1 ASL ASL
25
72.5
M5X0.8 tapped hole ø4.8 mounting holes

28.5 22.5
for connection of
8
1R-LD, 1R-LD10 Insulation plate

10 10
M6 t = 1.6
25 50 screw 13 (Not supplied) 25
50 75 Load end terminal 36 25 M4X0.7 tapped holes
19 106
✽ Allow a clearance of 5 mm from the adjacent breaker if optional internally mounted accessories are installed.
'Branching bar 'Insulator for arc

M5✕12R
M4✕8R M4✕8R
2RT-LD M5✕12R 1S-LD M5✕2R
2RT-LD10 M4✕8R 1S-LD10
M4✕8R M4✕8R
M5✕12R M4✕8R
M5✕12R
1R-LD M4✕8R
1R-LD10
22S-LD
22S-LD10 1T-LD
1T-LD10
'Branching bar barrier 'Connecting plate
✽ Screws are not supplied.
5-11
5
Outline dimensions
T2PM12LD2, T2PM12LD3, T2PM12LS2, T2PM12LS3
T Applicable breaker types
S50-SF S125-SF S125-SN
■ T2PM12LD2, T2PM12LD3
Insulation plate,
Drilling plan
t = 1.6
2P 3P (Not supplied) 2P 3P
CL CL 13 21 C C
10
L L
22.5 28.5
M5✕0.8 tapped hole for Mounting angle
connection of 2RT-LDB, Load (not supplied)
8
2RT-LD10B end terminal
25 Branch bar barrier
ASL (Installed under branching
45
83
bar 2RT-LDB, 2RT-LD10B)
M5✕0.8 tapped Insulator
22.5
61
hole for for arc

360
320
175
connection of
320
C C C
22.5 47
L L L
22S-LDB, 22S-LD10B Connecting plate
Busbar
61
(Not supplied)
ASL
83
45
M5✕0.8 tapped hole 25 M4✕0.7 tapped 1

for connection of holes for fixing
2RT-LDB, 2RT-LD10B branching bar
28.5 22.5
8
M6 Screw Insulation plate,
ø4.8 mounting holes t = 1.6
10
50 13 25
50 (Not supplied)
75 36 25
24.5 106 M4✕0.7 tapped holes
■ T2PM12LS2, T2PM12LS3
M5✕0.8 tapped hole

for connection of Insulation plate
2P 3P 1T-LDB, 1T-LD10B t = 1.6
CL CL (Not supplied) Drilling plan
M5✕0.8 tapped hole 46
for connection of Mounting angle
Busbar 1S-LDB, 1S-LD10B (not supplied)
35
10 2P 3P
(Not supplied) CL CL
M4✕0.7 tapped 21
10
holes for fixing

22.5 23.5
branching bar
86
8
Busbar
77.5
(Not supplied)
26.5
ASL
150
150
180
83
45
1 ASL ASL
25
72.5
M5✕0.8 tapped hole ø4.8 mounting holes

28.5 22.5
for connection of
8
Insulation plate
10 10
1R-LDB, 1R-LD10B M6 t = 1.6

25 50 screw 13 (Not supplied) 25
50 75 Load end terminal 36 25 M4✕0.7 tapped holes
24.5 106

M5 x 12r
M4 x 8r M4 x 8r
2RT-LDB M5 x 12r 1S-LDB M5 x 12r
2RT-LD10B M4 x 8r 1S-LD10B
M4 x 8r M4 x 8r
M5 x 12r M4 x 8r
M5 x 12r
1R-LDB M4 x 8r
1R-LD10B
22S-LDB
22S-LD10B 1T-LDB
1T-LD10B
5-12
Outline dimensions
XDA2D-3, XDA2S-3
S50-GF S100-NF S100-GF S100-NN S125-NF S125-GF S125-NN
■ XDA2D-3
Drilling plan
3P for connection of 3P
15 C 2RT-LE, 2RT-LE10 C 4-M5✕0.7
10
L 116 L
59.5
for connection of
16
22S-LE, 22S-LE10
Insulator for arc
6.5
21.5
T
65
Connecting plate
194
269
296
CL CL
388
37
S
65
Branch bar barrier

(Installed under branching
R
21.5
bar 2RT-LE, 2RT-LE10)
155
102
45
6.5
for connection of M4✕0.7
16
2RT-LE,2RT-LE10 tapped holes for
fixing branching
59.5
10
bar
Mounting angle
4 112 22 (not supplied)
M6 load end terminal 30 30 30
132
90
■ XDA2S-3
M5✕0.8 tapped holes M5✕0.8 tapped

for connection of holes for 116
1S-LE,1S-LE10 3P connection of 46
C 1T-LE, 1T-LE10 10.5 Insulation plate Drilling plan
L
M5✕0.8 tapped
holes for
t = 1.6
(Not supplied)
3P 5
T
connection of
35
1R-LE,1R-LE10 C
L
S
21.5
90
6.5

R
32
194
155
174
102
45
ASL ASL
15 4
Mounting angle
6.5
M4✕0.7
10
tapped holes (not supplied)

for fixing
branching 13.5
30 30 30 4-M4✕0.7
M6 Load end terminal bar 4 112 22
90 132 Insulation plate
t = 1.6
(Not supplied)

M5 x 12r
M4 x 8r M4 x 8r
2RT-LE M5 x 12r 1S-LE M5 x 12r
2RT-LE10 M4 x 8r 1S-LE10
M4 x 8r M4 x 8r
M5 x 12r M4 x 8r
M5 x 12r
1R-LE M4 x 8r
1R-LE10
22S-LE
22S-LE10 1T-LE
1T-LE10
5-13
5
xCompression terminals
Front connected type (without extension bar)

Nominal wire size (mm2)
Frame size (A) Breaker
2 5.5 8 14 22 38 60 80 100 150
50 E50-SF,S50-SF R2-5 R5.5-5 R8-5 R14-5 NTMCB22-5S
(R2-6) (R5.5-6) (R8-6) AMP33114
S50-GF R2-8 R5.5-8 R8-8 R14-8 R22-8 AMP322870 60-2BA
JST38-S8 Note 3
100 S100-NF, S100-GF, S100-NM NTK-R38-8-1

NTM38-8S
S100-NN CB60-8
H100-NF, L100-NF
125 E100-SF, S125-SF, S125-SN, S125-NN (15-50A) R2-5 R5.5-5 R8-5 R14-5 NTMCB22-5S
(R2-6) (R5.5-6) (R8-6) AMP33114
(60-125A) R8-8 R14-8 R22-8 AMP322870 60-2BA
JST38-S8 Note 3
NTM38-8S
H125-NF, L125-NF R2-8 R5.5-8 R8-8 R14-8 R22-8 AMP322870 60-2BA

JST38-S8 Note 3
NTK-R38-8-1 CB60-8
NTM38-8S
225 S225-NF, S225-GF, S225-GE, S225-NM R38-8 R60-8 80-3BA 100-3BA CB150-8
H225-NF, L225-NF Note 3 Note 3
250 S250-NF, S250-GF, E250-SF CB80-8 CB100-8

S250-SF, S250-SN
400 S400-CF, S400-NF, S400-NE R38-10 R60-10 80-4B 100-4B 150-4B

S400-GF, S400-GE, S400-NN Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2
S400-PF, S400-PE
CB80-10 CB100-10 CB150-10
H400-NE, L400-NE Note 2 Note 2 Note 2
Front connected type (with extension bar)

Nominal wire size (mm2)
Frame size (A) Breaker
38 60 80 100 150 200 325
225, 250 S225-NF, S225-GF, S225-GE, S225-NM 3P R38-10 R60-10 R80-10 R100-10 R150-10
H225-NF, L225-NF
S250-NF, S250-GF, E250-SF
S250-SF, S250-SN
4P CB150-10
400 S400-CF, S400-NF, S400-NE R38-12 R60-12 R80-12 R100-12 R150-12 R200-12 JST325-12
S400-GF, S400-GE, S400-NN
S400-PF, S400-PE
H400-NE, L400-NE
630 S630-CF, S630-NF, S630-NE, S630-RF, S630-RE R60-12 R80-12 R100-12 R150-12 R200-12 JST325-12
S630-GN RD60-12 RD80-12 RD100-12 RD150-12 RD200-12 SD325-12
H630-NE,L630-NE
800 S800-CF, S800-NF, S800-NE, S800-RF, S800-RE

S800-NN
H800-NE, L800-NE
1250 S1250-NE, S1250-GE, S1250-NN R80-12 R100-12 R150-12 R200-12 JST325-12

RD80-12 RD100-12 RD150-12 RD200-12 SD325-12
1000 TL-1000NE R80-12 R100-12 R150-12 R200-12 JST325-12
RD80-12 RD100-12 RD150-12 RD200-12 SD325-12
1200 TL-1200NE R80-12 R100-12 R150-12 R200-12 JST325-12
RD80-12 RD100-12 RD150-12 RD200-12 SD325-12
Notes:
q. Commercially made compression terminals can be used (refer to boxes)
R/RD : JIS-compliant
CB : JEM 1399-compliant
AMP : Made by Nippon AMP Co., Ltd.
JST : Made by Japan Solderless Terminal Manufacturing Co., Ltd.
NTK : Made by Nippon Tanshi Co., Ltd.
NTM : Made by Nichifu Terminal Industries Co., Ltd.
w. Only a single terminal can be connected.
e. Compression terminals in box cells are made by us at Terasaki. They are available from us or our authorized agents.
r. Compression terminals enclosed in parentheses are to be used as the lower terminal when two terminals are connected.
5-14
Connection (two terminals)
If a shortage of insulating occurs between the
mounting plate and a terminal, use a
recommended taping or insulator.
When a single
terminal is
connected
Second
terminal when
two terminals
are connected
Terasaki made compression terminals are used (refer to box)

60-2BA 80-3BA 80-4B
ø12
ø9
±0.3
ø8.4 +0.4
+0.5
15.5 –0.2
±0.3
ø14.5
ø19.5
–0
ø14.5
ø19.5
ø11.4
22.5
28
16.0
14
20.7 18.0 9 22 20 11 20 20
46.7 51 51
2.0
2.3
2.3
Nominal size engraved

Nominal size engraved
100-3BA 100-4B 150-4B

ø12 ø12
5
+0.7
–0.5
+0.4
±0.5
±0.4
ø8.4 –0
ø22.3
ø19.5
ø26.5
ø16.4
ø16.4
28
28
22.3
22.5
14 14
21.5 21.0 10.5 19.5 22 11 20 27

51.5 52 58

2.6
3.2
2.6
Nominal size engraved Nominal size engraved
Connection (one electric cable) Connection (two electric cables)
If a shortage of insulating If a shortage of insulating

occurs, use a recommended occurs, use a recommended
taping or insulator. typing or insulator.
➤
⎛ Make connection so ⎛ ⎛ Make connection so ⎛

⎜ that the screw heads ⎜ ⎜ that the screw heads ⎜
⎜ face toward the ⎜ ⎜ face toward the ⎜
⎝ mounting surface. ⎝ ⎝ mounting surface. ⎝
5-15
5
cTerminal screw sizes and standard torques
Front connection (FC) Rear connection (RC) (Flat bar stud) Flush Plate (FP) Plug-in (PM) Draw-out (DR)
Screw E
Connecting Nut K
2
types Screw F
Screw B Screw C Screw D 2
Nut J
Screw A
Type Screw G
Frame size Compression terminal Extension bar With flat bar stud
Breaker
(A) Screw size (A) Torque (N . m) Screw size (B) Torque (N . m) Screw size (C) Torque (N . m) Screw size (D) Torque (N . m) Screw size (E) Torque (N . m) Screw size (F) Torque (N . m) Screw size (G) Torque (N . m) Nut size (J) Torque (N . m) Nut size (K) Torque (N . m)
50 S50-SF Wire clamping M5×14 2.3∼3.4 Wire clamping M5×14 2.3∼3.4 Hex head M8×22 11.8∼18.6 Pan head M5×14 2.3∼2.8 Hex head M6×22 2.7∼4.5 Pan head M5×14 2.3∼2.8 Hex head M6×22 2.7∼4.5 Hex. nut M6 3.6∼6.0 ― ―
S50-GF Pan head M8×16 4.9∼6.9 Pan head M8×16 4.9∼6.9 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex. nut M6 3.6∼6.0 ― ―
100 S100-NF,S100-GF Pan head M8×16 4.9∼6.9 Pan head M8×16 4.9∼6.9 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex. nut M6 3.6∼6.9 ― ―
S100-NN
S100-NM Pan head M8×16 4.9∼6.9 Pan head M8×16 4.9∼6.9 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 ― ― ― ―
H100-NF,L100-NF Hex socket head M8×20 7.8∼12.7 Hex socket head M8×20 7.8∼12.7 Hex head M10×25 22.5∼37.2 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex. nut M8 8.8∼14.7 ― ―
125 S125-SF Wire clamping M5×14 2.3∼3.4 Wire clamping M5×14 2.3∼3.4 Hex head M8×22 11.8∼18.6 Pan head M5×14 2.3∼2.8 Hex head M8×23 2.7∼4.5 Pan head M5×14 2.3∼2.8 Hex head M6×22 2.7∼4.5 Hex. nut M6 3.6∼6.0 ― ―
15∼50A
S125-SF Pan head M8×14 4.9∼6.9 Pan head M8×14 4.9∼6.9 Hex head M8×22 11.8∼18.6 Hex socket head M6×18 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×23 11.8∼18.6 Hex socket head M6×18 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×23 11.8∼18.6 Hex. nut M6 3.6∼6.0 ― ―
60∼125A
S125-SN Pan head M8×14 4.9∼6.9 Pan head M8×14 4.9∼6.9 Hex head M8×22 11.8∼18.6 Hex socket head M6×18 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×23 11.8∼18.6 Hex socket head M6×18 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×23 11.8∼18.6 Hex. nut M8 8.8∼14.7 ― ―
S125-NF,S125-GF Pan head M8×16 4.9∼6.9 Pan head M8×16 4.9∼6.9 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex. nut M6 3.6∼6.9 ― ―
S125-NN
H125-NF,L125-NF Hex socket head M8×20 7.8∼12.7 Hex socket head M8×20 7.8∼12.7 Hex head M10×25 22.5∼37.2 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex. nut M8 8.8∼14.7 ― ―
225 S225-NF,S225-GF Hex socket head M8×20 7.8∼12.7 Hex socket head M8×20 7.8∼12.7 Hex head M10×25 22.5∼37.2 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex. nut M8 8.8∼14.7 ― ―
S225-GE
H225-NF,L225-NF
250
S225-NM
E250-SF,S250-SF
S250-SN
Hex socket head M8×20 7.8∼12.7
Hex head M10×25 22.5∼37.2 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8
Hex head M10×25 22.5∼37.2 Hex socket head M6×18 7.8∼11.8
Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6
Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6
Hex head M8×25
Hex head M8×25
11.8∼18.6 ―
11.8∼18.6 Hex. nut M8
―
8.8∼14.7
―
―
―
― 5
S250-NF,S250-GF Hex socket head M8×20 7.8∼12.7 Hex socket head M8×20 7.8∼12.7 Hex head M10×25 22.5∼37.2 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex socket head M6×20 7.8∼11.8 Hex head M8×25 11.8∼18.6 Hex. nut M8 8.8∼14.7 ― ―
400 S400-CF,S400-NF Hex socket head M10×25 13.7∼22.5 Hex socket head M10×25 13.7∼22.5 Hex head M12×35 40.2∼65.7 Special hex socket 18.6∼29.4 Hex head M12×35 40.2∼65.7 Special hex socket 18.6∼29.4 Hex head M12×35 40.2∼65.7 Hex. nut M10 18.6∼29.4 Hex. nut M10 18.6∼29.4

S400-NES400-GF head M10×20 head M10×40
S400-GE,S400-PF
S400-PE,S400-NN
H400-NE,L400-NE Hex socket head M10×30 13.7∼22.5 Hex socket head M10×30 13.7∼22.5
630 S630-CF,S630-NF ― ― Hex socket head Extension Hex head M12×40 40.2∼65.7 Special hex socket 18.6∼29.4 Hex head M12×40 40.2∼65.7 Special hex socket 18.6∼29.4 Hex head M12×40 40.2∼65.7 Hex. nut M12 32.3∼51.9 Note ①
S630-NE,S630-RF M8×25×2 bars are head M10×27 head M10×27
fitted as
S630-RE,S630-GN
standard.
H630-NE,L630-NE
800 S800-CF,S800-NF ― ― Hex socket head Extension Hex head M12×40 40.2∼65.7 Special hex socket 18.6∼29.4 Hex head M12×40 40.2∼65.7 Special hex socket 18.6∼29.4 Hex head M12×40 40.2∼65.7 Hex. nut M12 32.3∼51.9 Noto ①
S800-NE,S800-RF M8×25×2 bars are head M10×27 head M10×27
fitted as
S800-RE,S800-NN
standard.
H800-NE,L800-NE
Wire clamping screw Pan head screw Hex socket head bolt Hex head bolt
Notes: Terminal
1. Connecting method and standard
torques are same as plug-in (PM).
Conductor
2. Secure the conductor with the cor-
rect nut and washer to ensure full
contact of conductor with terminal Nut
on the plug-in base, so that the
steel terminal bolt is not used as the
current path. Terminal bolt
5-16 5-17
5
cTerminal screw sizes and standard torques
Front connection (FC) Rear connection (RC) (Flat bar stud) Rear connection (RC) (Bolt stud) Plug-in (PM) Draw-out (DR)
Screw A Screw D Screw E
Connecting
types Screw C
Screw F
Screw K
Nut J
Screw B
1
Type
Nut G
Frame size Compression terminal Extension bar

Breaker
(A) Screw size (A) Torque (N . m) Screw size (B) Torque (N . m) Screw size (C) Torque (N . m) Screw size (D) Torque (N . m) Screw size (E) Torque (N . m) Screw size (F) Torque (N . m) Nut size (G) Torque (N . m) Nut size (J) Torque (N . m) Screw size (K) Torque (N . m)
50 TB-5S,TB-5P Pan head M5×12 2.3∼3.4 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Wire clamping screw
TB-5D ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― Pan head M5×8 2.2∼3.5 ― ―
(screw)1
E50-SF Pan head M5×12 2.3∼3.4 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― Pan head M4×12 1.1∼1.7 Hex. nut M6 2.7∼4.5 Hex. nut M6 3.6∼6.0 ― ―
Wire clamping screw
100 E100-SF Pan head M5×12 2.3∼3.4 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― Pan head M4×14 1.1∼1.7 Hex. nut M6 2.7∼4.5 Hex. nut M6 3.6∼6.0 ― ―
(10∼50A) Wire clamping screw
E100-SF Pan head M8×14 4.9∼6.9 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― Hex head M6 nut 2.7∼4.5 Hex. nut M8 6.9∼10.8 Hex. nut M6 3.6∼6.0 ― ―
(60∼100A)
1000 TL-1000NE ― ― Hex head M12×55 40.2∼65.7 ― ― ― ― Hex head M12×47 40.2∼65.7 ― ― ― ― Hex. nut M12×47 (screw) 40.2∼65.7 ― ―
1200 TL-1200NE ― ― Hex head M12×55 40.2∼65.7 ― ― ― ― Hex head M12×47 40.2∼65.7 ― ― ― ― Hex. nut M12×47 (screw) 40.2∼65.7 ― ―
1250 S1250-NE,S1250-GE ― ― Hex head M12×55 40.2∼65.7 ― ― ― ― Hex head M12×47 40.2∼65.7 ― ― ― ― Hex. nut M12×47 (screw) 40.2∼65.7 ― ―
S1250-NN
1600 ② S1600-NE ― ― Hex head M12×60 40.2∼65.7 ― ― ― ― Hex head M10×45 22.5∼37.2 ― ― ― ― ― ― Hex head M10×45 22.5∼37.2
S1600-NN
2000 ② XS2000NE
XS2000NN
― ― Hex head M10×60 22.5∼37.2
Note 2: Terminal screws for 1600AF and over are not provided as standard.
― ― ― ― Hex head M10×60 22.5∼37.2 ― ― ― ― ― ― Hex head M10×60 22.5∼37.2
5
Terminal
Note:
q. Secure the conductor with the
correct nut and washer to Conductor

ensure full contact of conductor
with terminal on the plug-in
Nut
base, so that the steel terminal
bolt is not used as the current
path. Terminal bolt
5-18 5-19
5
vInsulation distance from the line side
The insulation distance between the breaker and earthed metal parts and insulators shown in the table on the next page must be maintained to
prevent arcing faults occurring due to conductive ionised gas. In addition, completely cover exposed conductors, to their roots at the breaker or
to below the height protected by interpole barriers, on the line side of the breaker using insulation tube or tape, in order to provide positive
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
protection against short circuit or ground fault due to metal chipping, surge voltage, dust particles or salt. Be sure to install the interpole
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
barriers supplied with the breaker.
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Insulating Sheathed wire

tube or tape
Interpole barrier Interpole barrier

Exposed Compression
conductor terminal
Line side
Load side
Insulation plate Top plate (earthed metal) Interpole barrier

(Insulation tube or tape
is also acceptable)
Side plate
B1 B1 B1
E
B2 B2 B2
A
D
A
A Insulation tube
or tape
Front connection, Front connection, Rear connection,

C
terminal screw extension bar Plug-in
A . Distance from lower breaker to exposed live part of upper breaker terminal (front connection) or distance from lower breaker to end face of
upper breaker (rear connection).
B1 . Distance from end face of breaker to top plate.
B2 . Distance from end face of breaker to insulation plate.
C . Gap between breakers.
D . Distance from side of breaker to side plate (earthed metal).
E . Dimension of insulation over exposed conductors.
5-20
Insulation distance, mm (AC 460 V or less) Note q
A
Series Breaker B1 B2 C D Ｅ
Note②
E50-SF E100-SF 30 10 10 ✽ Possible to set close 25 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
Economical
E250-SF 50 40 40 ✽ Possible to set close 50 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
S50-SF 30 30 10 ✽ Possible to set close 25 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
S100-NF S125-NF 50 50 10 ✽ Possible to set close 25 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
S225-NF S250-NF 50 50 40 ✽ Possible to set close 50 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
Standard
S400-CF S400-NF S400-NE 100 80 60 ✽ Possible to set close 80 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
S630-CF S630-NF S630-NE
120 100 80 Possible to set close 80 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
S800-CF S800-NF S800-NE
S1250-NE 150 120 80 Possible to set close 80 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
S1600-NE 150 150 100 Possible to set close 100 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
S50-GF S100-GF S125-GF 75 60 25 ✽ Possible to set close 25 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
S225-GF S225-GE S250-GF 100 80 60 ✽ Possible to set close 50 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
S400-GF S400-GE 100 80 60 ✽ Possible to set close 50 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
High-fault
S400-PF S400-PE 120 120 80 ✽ Possible to set close 80 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
Level
S600-RF S600-RE
150 120 80 Possible to set close 80 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
S800-RF S800-RE
S1250-GE 150 150 100 Possible to set close 100 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
H100-NF H125-NF H225-NF 100 80 60 ✽ Possible to set close 50 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
H400-NE 120 120 80 ✽ Possible to set close 80 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
H630-NE H800-NE 120 120 80 Possible to set close 80 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
Current-limiting TL-1000NE TL-1200NE 150 150 100 Possible to set close 100 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
L100-NF L125-NF L225-NF 100 80 60 ✽ Possible to set close 50 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
L400-NE 120 120 80 ✽ Possible to set close 80 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
L630-NE L800-NE 120 120 80 Possible to set close 80 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
S100-NM 50 50 10 ✽ Possible to set close 25 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
Motor protection
S225-NM 50 50 40 ✽ Possible to set close 50 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3
Notes:
q. Required to allow free and uninterrupted flow of arc gases. Ensure additional clearance or insulation distance if required to perform wiring, barrier installation or electrical work or to meet
the need for more insulation distance between bare live parts and grounded metal members in a switchboard or the like.
w. The figures are for lower breakers.
e. For front connection breakers, insulate all exposed conductors of the line side until the breaker end. If interpole barriers are packed, be sure to use the barriers; more over, insulate all
5
exposed conductors by insulating tape or the like so that the tape overlaps with the barriers.
✽. If using extension bars (optional), ensure the insulation distance specified for the application.
5-21
5
bReverse connection
The breakers are available for normal connection by default. Reverse connection is optionally allowed. See the tables below.
Breaker AC240V AC415V AC450V Line side Load side

E50-SF, E100-SF, E250-SF
S50-SF, S50-GF, S100-NF, S100-GF
S100-NM, S100-NN
S125-SF, S125-NF, S125-GF l (ON) l (ON)
S125-NN, S125-SN
H100-NF, L100-NF
H125-NF, L125-NF (OFF) (OFF)
S225-NF, S225-GF, S225-GE, S225-NM
H225-NF, L225-NF
S250-SF, S250-NF, S250-GF, S250-SN
S400-CF, S400-NF, S400-NE, S400-NN
Load side Line side
S400-GF, S400-GE, S400-PF, S400-PE ◎ ◎ ◎
H400-NE, L400-NE
S630-CF, S630-NF, S630-NE, S630-RF
Normal connection Reverse connection
S630-RE, S630-GN
S800-CF, S800-NF, S800-NE, S800-RF
S800-RE, S800-NN
H630-NE, L630-NE, H800-NE, L800-NE
S1250-NE, S1250-GE, S1250-NN
S1600-NE, S1600-NN
TB-5S, TB-5P, TB-5D
XS2000NE, XS2000NN
TL-1000NE, TL-1200NE
5-22
5
nLists of breaker mounting screws
Plug-in (PM) for switchboards

Number Front-connected (FC) Rear-connected (RC)
Series Breaker Standard High-fault Level
of poles
Screw size Qty Screw size Qty Screw size Qty Screw size Qty
Economical E50-SF 2,3 Pan head M4×35 2 Pan head M4×35 2 Pan head M4×35 2 ― ―
E100-SF 2,3 Pan head M4×65 2 Pan head M4×65 2 Pan head M4×65 2 ― ―
E250-SF 2,3 Pan head M4×55 2 Pan head M4×55 2 Pan head M4×65 2 ― ―
Standard S50-SF 2,3 Pan head M4×61 2 Pan head M4×61 2 Pan head M4×75 2 ― ―
S50-GF 3 Pan head M4×55 2 Pan head M4×55 2 Pan head M4×58 2 Pan head M4×80 2
4 Pan head M4×55 4 Pan head M4×55 4 Pan head M4×58 4 Pan head M4×80 4
S100-NF, S100-GF 2,3 Pan head M4×55 2 Pan head M4×55 2 Pan head M4×58 2 Pan head M4×80 2
S125-SF 2,3 2
Pan head M4×61 2 Pan head M4×61 2 Pan head M4×75 ― ―
4 4
S100-NM 3 Pan head M4×55 2 Pan head M4×55 2 ― ― ― ―
S250-NF, S250-GF 4 Pan head M4×55 4 Pan head M4×55 4 Pan head M4×65 4 Pan head M4×80 4
S250-SF 2,3 Pan head M4×55 2 Pan head M4×55 2 Pan head M4×65 2 ― ―
4 Pan head M4×55 4 Pan head M4×55 4 Pan head M4×65 4 ― ―
S225-GE 3 Pan head M4×90 2 Pan head M4×90 2 Pan head M4×100 2 Pan head M4×115 4
S225-NM 3 Pan head M4×55 2 Pan head M4×55 2 ― ― ― ―
S400-CF, S400-NF
S400-GF
3,4 Pan head M6×100 4 Pan head M6×100 4 Pan head M6×100 4 Pan head M6×120 4
S400-NE, S400-GE
S400-PF, S400-PE
S630-CF, S630-NF, S630-RF

S630-NE, S630-RE
3,4 Pan head M8×45 4 Pan head M8×45 4 Cap nut ✽ 4 Pan head M8×45 4
S800-CF, S800-NF, S800-RF
S800-NE,S800-RE
S1250-NE,S1250-GE 3,4 Pan head M8×50 4 Pan head M8×50 4 Cap nut ✽ 4 ― ―
S1600-NE 3,4 Pan head M8×50 4 Pan head M8×50 4 ― ― ― ―
Current limiting H100-NF, H125-NF, H225-NF 3 Pan head M4×90 2 Pan head M4×90 2 Pan head M4×100 2 Pan head M4×115 4
L100-NF, L125-NF, L225-NF 4 Pan head M4×90 4 Pan head M4×90 4 Pan head M4×100 4 Pan head M4×115 4
H400-NE, L400-NE 3,4 Pan head M6×140 4 Pan head M6×140 4 Pan head M6×140 4 Pan head M6×160 4
H630-NE, L630-NE
H800-NE, L800-NE 3,4 Pan head M8×85 4 Pan head M8×85 4 Cap nut ✽ 4 Pan head M8×85 4
Switch
disconnector
S125-SN
S100-NN, S125-NN
3
4
3
Pan head M4×61
Pan head M4×55

2
2
Pan head M4×61
Pan head M4×55

2
2
Pan head M4×80
Pan head M4×58

2
4
2
―
Pan head M4×80

―
2
5
S250-SN 3 Pan head M4×55 2 Pan head M4×55 2 Pan head M4×55 2 ― ―
4 Pan head M4×55 4 Pan head M4×55 4 Pan head M4×55 4 ― ―

S400-NN 3,4 Pan head M6×100 4 Pan head M6×100 4 Pan head M6×100 4 Pan head M6×120 4
S630-GN, S800-NN 3,4 Pan head M8×45 4 Pan head M8×45 4 Cap nut ✽ 4 Pan head M8×45 4
S1250-NN 3,4 Pan head M8×50 4 Pan head M8×50 4 Cap nut ✽ 4 ― ―
S1600-NN 3,4 Pan head M8×50 4 Pan head M8×50 4 ― ― ― ―
✽. Width across flats of hex socket: 8 mm (M10), thread size: M8
Plug-in (PM) for switchboards

Front-connected (FC) Rear-connected (RC)
Series Breaker Number of poles Standard
Screw size Qty Screw size Qty Screw size Qty
Standard XS2000NE 3,4 Hex socket head M10×160 4 Hex socket head M10×120 4 ― ―
Current limiting TL-1000NE,TL-1200NE 3,4 Pan head M8×50 4 Pan head M8×50 4 Cap nut ✽ 4
Non-automatic XS2000NN
trip breaker 3,4 Hex socket head M10×160 4 Hex socket head M10×120 4 ― ―
Notes:
q. The length of mounting screws may differ from the standard one if the breaker is equipped with external accessories (motor operator, external operation handle, etc.)
Consult the operating Instructions of external accessories for details.
✽. Width across flats of hex socket: 8 mm (M10), thread size: M8
5-23
6 Accessories
zOCR for electronic breakers ………………………………………………6-2
1. TemBreak2 Electronic OCR ………………………………………………6-2
2. TemBreak Electronic OCR ………………………………………………6-6
xInternally mounted accessories …………………………………………6-10
1. Overview……………………………………………………………………6-10
2. Connection diagrams and terminal numbers ………………………6-11
3. Possible combinations …………………………………………………6-12
4. Ratings and operation data of auxiliary and alarm switches ……6-15
5. Shunt trip device (SHT) …………………………………………………6-16
6. Undervoltage trip device (UVT) ………………………………………6-17
cExternally mounted accessories …………………………………………6-20
1. Overview……………………………………………………………………6-20
2. Toggle extension (HA) …………………………………………………6-21
3. Toggle holder (HH) and toggle lock (HL) ……………………………6-22
4. Motor operators (MC) ……………………………………………………6-24 6
5. External operating handles ……………………………………………6-30
(1) Breaker-mounted (field installable)(HB) …………………………………6-30 Accessories
(2) Breaker-mounted (HB)……………………………………………………6-38
(3) Door-mounted (depth adjustable) (HP) …………………………………6-43
(4) Door-mounted (depth fixed) (HP) ………………………………………6-55
6. Terminal covers CF/CR/CS ……………………………………………6-56
(1) CF for front-connected breakers …………………………………………6-56
……………………6-58
CS for front-connected breakers with cable clamps
7. Interpole barriers (BA) …………………………………………………6-60
8. Terminal blocks (TF) ……………………………………………………6-61
9. Mechanical interlock ……………………………………………………6-68
• Slide interlock (MS) …………………………………………………………6-68
10. Door Flange (DF) ………………………………………………………6-85
6-1
6
Accessories
zOCR for electronic breakers
1. TemBreak2 Electronic OCR (Standard type)

(1) Overcurrent trip characteristics
■ TemBreak2 electronic OCR for S400-NE ■ Applicable breakers
Frame size
T PTA GF NP Type of breaker
(A)
I CT 400 A
I R(A) Characteristics 7
225 S225-GE
6
300 350 5 5
S400-NE, S400-GE, S400-PE
250 4 6 400
4
1 H400-NE, L400-NE
225 400 3 7
2
5,6,7 630 S630-NE, S630-RE, H630-NE, L630-NE
200 2 3
1 800 S800-NE, S800-RE, H800-NE, L800-NE
175 GF
ON 1,2 3 4 1250 S1250-NE, S1250-GE
I
1600 S1600-NE
OFF
PICK UP TEST IN R-3-APG/B01
TemBreak2 electronic OCR allows you to
achieve a wide range of protection simply by
setting two dials located on the front of the
■ TemBreak2 OCR Specifications breakers; one for selecting the rated current and
Long time, Preferential Ground Neutral the other for selecting a protection characteris-
CT rated current Protection Short time, trip alarm falut trip protection
(ICT) poles code Instantaneous (PTA) (GF) (NP) tic.
A P G N Coming standard with seven protection charac-
250 3 A ● ― ― ―
teristics, the OCR provides optimum selective
3 AP ● ● ― ―
4 A ● ― ― ―
coordination between upstream breakers and
4 AP ● ● ― ― downstream breakers and/or loads.
4 AN ● ― ― ● (5 protection characteristics for S225-GE)
4 APN ● ● ― ●
400 3 A ● ― ― ―
630 3 AP
Characteristic 1: For generator protection
● ● ― ―
800 3 AG ● ― ● ―
1000 3 APG Characteristics 2, 3 and 4: For general feeder
● ● ● ―
1250
4 A ● ― ― ― protection. The possibility of selecting one
1600
4 AP ● ● ― ―
from three options makes it easy to achieve
4 AN ● ― ― ●
4 APN ● ● ― ●
selective coordination with upstream or down-
4 AGN ● ― ● ● stream breakers.
4 APGN ● ● ● ●
Characteristics 5, 6 and 7: For motor protec-
■ OCR characteristics for S400-NE tion. The selection of the option best suited to
Characteristics No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
motor startup characteristics provides an opti-
CT rated current : (ICT) = 250A mum protection solution to motors.
125, 150, 175, 200, 225
Long time-delay pick-up current (A) : (IR)
CT rated current : (ICT) = 400A
175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
11 21 21 5 10 19 29 Time/Current characteristic curves

Long time-delay time settings (s) : (tR) at 200%×(IR) at 600%×(IR) 3
hour
Setting tolerance ±20% 2 T IR

Ip
Short time-delay (IR)× 2.5 2.5 5 10 10 10 10 1
40 tR
pick-up current (A) : (Isd) Setting tolerance ±15% tp
30
20 Ig Isd
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2 tsd
minute
Short time-delay time settings (s) : (tsd) 10 7 tg

Total clearing time +50ms, resettable time –20ms Ii
6 I
4 6
Instantaneous trip pick-up current (A) : (Ii) (IR)×1400% Max: (ICT)×1300%
Setting tolerance ±20% 2
Preferential trip alarm 1 5
Pick-up current (A) : (Ip) (IR)×80% Setting tolerance ±10% 40
T rip pin g Ti me
30
Definite time-delay characteristic, 40sec. 20
Time-settings (s) : (tp)
Setting tolerance ±10%
10
Ground falut trip 6 1
Option
Pick-up current (A) : (Ig) (ICT)×20% Setting tolerance ±15%1 4

2 2
Time-settings (s) : (tg) Difinite time-delay characteristic, 0.2sec.
Total tripping time +50ms, resettable time –20ms. 5,6,7
1
second
Neutral protection 0.6

Pick-up current (A) : (IN) (IR)×100% or 50% selectable 2 0.4
Time-settings (s) : (tN) (tN)=(tR) Same as Long time-delay time settings 0.2
3
Notes: 0.1
1. Ground fault trip is not available when (ICT) is 250A. 0.06
0.04
2. In case of (IR)＜(ICT), the setting tolerance becomes big when (IN) is set at (IR)×50%. 4 4
Characteristic No.4 will be applied as standard setting unless otherwise specified. 0.02 1,2 3
0.01
0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
Percent Rated Current

Ex.S400-NE
6-2
(2) Optional OCR functions
■ Pretrip alarm (PTA)
The pretrip alarm function causes the alarm LED to flash when the load current exceeds 80% of the rated current (IR) and, after 40 seconds,
provides a contact output (1a). The contact output can be used to provide an alarm. The PTA function uses RMS sensing and hence does
not suffer a malfunction due to harmonics. Control power and the OCR controller (supplied by Terasaki) are required to use this function.
Note ① : When the OCR controller is installed on the breaker, the breaker cannot be equipped with a terminal block for connection to the shunt trip device and undervoltage trip device.
¡Specifications of OCR controller

Control voltage ② AC100 – 120 V or AC200 – 240 V Operating time (s) [tP] 40 secs (fixed definite time-delay) setting tolerance is ± 10%.
(Rated voltage) Output contact Normally open contact, (1a) Integral lead is standard. length (450mm)
Current consumption, VA 2VA Resistive load Inductive load
Note ② : The control voltage must be 85 to 110% of the rated voltage. Rating of 250V AC 125V A (2A max) 20V A (2A max)
Please state the rated voltage when ordering. contact 220V DC 60W (2A max) 10W (2A max)
Tripped indication Pick-up LED flickers
NOTE: the pick-up LED flickers at a higher current than [IP].
When higher current flows continuously for 40 secs, the contact (1a) automatically resets.
¡OCR controller connection diagram
Applicable breakers: S225-GE
ON
Control OP1
power OP2
PALc PTA
PALa output 1a
OFF
Note ③ : Separate installation of the OCR controller is not available.
Applicable breakers: S400-NE, S400-GE, S400-PE, H400-NE, L400-NE

S630-NE, S630-RE, H630-NE, L630-NE
6
S800-NE, S800-RE, H800-NE, L800-NE
S1250-NE, S1250-GE, S1600-NE
Accessories
OCR controller installed on the breaker OCR controller installed external to the breaker
Lead wire (600 mm long)

Factory wired
ON ON
Control OP1 Control OP1
power OP2 power OP2
OS1 OS1
OS2 OS2
Red Red
White White
OFF OFF
PALc PTA PALc PTA
PALa output 1a PALa output 1a
Lead wire (450 mm long) Lead wire (450 mm long)
Note 4 : Standard installation of the OCR controller is on the right side of the breaker.
Separate installation is standard for the flush-mounted breakers.
6-3
6
Accessories

¡ Mounting dimensions and terminal arrangement of the ¡ Outline of the OCR controller installed external
OCR controller installed on the breaker to the breaker
Applicable breakers: S225-GE Applicable breakers:
S400-NE, S400-GE, S400-PE
16.2
H400-NE, L400-NE
34
S630-NE, S630-RE, H630-NE

L630-NE
16
ON OP1 S800-NE, S800-RE, H800-NE

15 18 15
OP2 L800-NE
80
PALc
PALa
S1250-NE, S1250-GE
S1600-NE
16
OFF Mounting hole

16 ø4.5
Terminal screw M3.5
10
25.2 79
16
Notes: 1. Tightening torque of terminal screws: 0.9 – 1.2 N.m
15
2. Applicable wire size: 2.0 mm2 max 100
18
88
80
7.8
Applicable breakers A（mm） B（mm） C（mm） D（mm）
15
S400-NE, S400-GE, S400-PE 3P, 4P 71 74 25.2 16.2
H400-NE, L400-NE 3P, 4P 71 111 25.2 16.2
16
S630-NE, S630-RE
3P, 4P 62.5 74 25.2 16.2
S800-NE, S800-RE
10
H630-NE, L630-NE
6
3P, 4P 62.5 111 25.2 16.2

H800-NE, L800-NE
6 22
3P 33 72 21 12
S1250-NE, S1250-GE
4P 43 72 21 12 25
3P 33 92 21 12
S1600-NE
4P 43 92 21 12 Terminal screw M3.5 9
D
A
16
59
ON
57.5
OP1
15 18 15
45
OP2
80
OS1
OS2
16
OFF
Support
Terminal screw M3.5
C B
Notes: 1. Tightening torque of terminal screws: 0.9 – 1.2 N.m

2. Applicable lead wire size: 2.0 mm2 max
■ Ground fault trip (GF)

The ground fault trip pickup current is 20% of the CT rated current (ICT). The GF function provides protection against fire that may be
caused by arcing ground fault current. The GF function is not available when ICT is 250A.
Note: Separate type neutral CT is required when the GF function is added to a 3-pole breaker used in a 3-phase, 4-wire system. Contact us
for details.
■ N-phase protection (NP)

The NP function is available on 4-pole breakers and provides protection to the neural conductor in a 3-phase, 4-wire system against
overcurrent. The NP pickup current (IN) can be selected with 1.0 or 0.5 × IR rated current. For S225 and H225, IN is 1.0 × IR only.
Characteristic of N-phase protection (tN vs IN) is identical to characteristic of phase protecion (tR vs IR).
6-4
(3) How to change the tripping characteristics
The electronic breakers are designed so that their protective functions, i.e., long time delay trip, short time delay trip, instantaneous trip,
ground fault trip and pretrip alarm functions, can be adjusted depending on a change in load or layout of power distribution lines.
Outer view
Front panel of electronic OCR (cover removed)

T PTA GF NP
Current rating sticker I CT 400 A
I R(A) Characteristics 7
6
300 350 5 5
250 4 6
4
3 7 1
225 400
2
5,6,7
200 2 3
175 1
GF
ON 1,2 3 4
I
OFF
OCR Cover PICK UP TEST IN R-3-APG/B01
Replacement sticker storage

S225-GE, S400-NE, S400-GE, S400-PE, H400-NE, L400-NE
S630-NE, S630-RE, H630-NE, L630-NE, S800-NE, S800-RE, H800-NE, L800-NE
S1250-NE, S1250-GE, S1600-NE
Long time delay trip, short time delay trip, instantaneous

Item Rated current
trip, ground fault trip, pretrip alarm
• Turn the breaker to OFF position before changing • Turn the breaker to OFF position before changing
the settings. the settings.
1. Peel the sealing sticker off and remove the cover. 1. Peel the sealing sticker off and remove the cover.
2. Rotate the “IR(A)” dial to the desired position using a flatblade 2. Rotate the “Characteristics” dial to the desired position using a
Adjusting procedure
screwdriver. flatblade screwdriver.

3. Take a sealing sticker from the replacement sticker storage.
I R(A)
225
250
300 350
400
4. Reinstall the cover and affix the replacement sealing sticker.
6
200
175
Accessories
3. Take an appropriate current rating sticker and a sealing sticker
from the replacement sticker storage.
4. Peel the existing current rating sticker off and affix the replace-
ment current rating sticker.
6-5
6
Accessories
2. TemBreak Electronic OCR

(1) Overcurrent trip characteristics
■ TemBreak electronic OCR for XS2000NE ■ Applicable breakers
T I1 LONG TIME SHORT TIME INSTANTANEOUS GROUND FAULT Frame size
Type of breaker
T1 1400 (A)
6 6 9 0.2 0.3
IG CUR. 1200 1600 4 8
1000 TL-1000NE
I2 T2 SETTING
1000 2000 2 10 3 12 0.1 0.4 1200 TL-1200NE
TG I3 I1 RATED CUR.(A) I2 x I1 I3 x ICT IG x ICT PRE TRIP ALARM
2000 XS2000NE
15 0.2 0.3
SHORT TIME I 2 t 0.8 0.9
CT RATED CUR. 10 20 0.15 0.25 0.2 0.4
TIME
Ict 2000 A SETTING 0.7 1.0
5 30 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.8
TEST IN
T1 SEC T2 SEC OFF ON TG SEC IP x I1
at 6 x I1 T2 SEC
at 10 x I1
PICK UP
Standard Protective Characteristics Adjustable LTD Ramp Characteristic [I2t], STD

The electronic type TemBreak incorporates Essential for general industrial plants and The ramp characteristic [I2t] enables precise
an adjustable long time-delay, short time- generator protection co-ordination with thermal magnetic
delay and instantaneous trips, enabling co- MCCBs or fuses. The ramp characteristic or
ordination with fuses on the high voltage the definite time-delay characteristic can be
side and down stream breakers. used by operating the OFF-ON switch (on
for[I2t] ramp characteristic).
The definite time-delay characteristic is
1000% of the rated current [I1]
■ OCR characteristics for XS2000NE Time/Current characteristic curves

CT rated current (A) (ICT) 2000
Long time-delay 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000
pick-up current (A) (I1)
Long time-delay (5–10–15–20–30) at (I1) x 600% current
time settings (S) (T1) Setting tolerance ±20%
Short time-delay (I1) x 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000%
pick-up current (A) (I2) Setting tolerance ± 15%
Short time-delay Opening time (0.1, 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3) in the definite time-delay.
time settings (S) (T2) Total clearing time is +50ms and resettable time –20ms for the time-delay
settings Fuse on high
Instantaneous trip Continuously adjustable from (ICT) x 300 ~ 1200%. voltage side
pick-up current (A) (I3) Setting tolerance ±20%
Pre-trip alarm pick-up (I1) x 70, 80, 90, 100%
current (A) (IP) (optional) Setting tolerance ±10% Ramp characteristic
t
Pre-trip alarm time setting 40 fixed definite time-delay. I2t switch “ON”
Tripping Time
(S) (TP) (optional) Setting tolerance ±10%

Ground fault trip pick-up Continuously adjustable from (ICT) x 10 ~ 40% Standard Fuse
current (A) (IG) (optional) ^4 Setting tolerance ±15% Standard MCCB
Ground fault trip-time Opening time (0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.8) in the definite time- delay.
setting (S) (TG) (optional) Total clearing time is +50ms and resettable time –20ms for the time-delay
^4 settings
NOTE: The underlined values will be applied as standard ratings unless otherwise specified when ordering
I2t switch “OFF”
Current i
6-6
■ Pretrip alarm (PTA)
The pretrip alarm function causes the alarm LED to flash when the load current exceeds the pre-set current value and, after 40 seconds,
provides a contact output (1a). The contact output can be used to provide an alarm. The PTA function uses RMS sensing and hence does
not suffer a malfunction due to harmonics. Control power and the OCR controller (supplied by Terasaki) are required to use this function.
¡PTA specifications ¡PTA Characteristics

Pick-up current (A) [IP]
Adjustable steps of 70, 80, 90, 100% of the selected rated current [I1].
0.8 0.9 PTA
Setting tolerance ± 10% characteristics
Note: The long time-delay trip does not operate 'first' when the pick-up
0.7 1.0 current is adjusted to 100% of the rated current [I1].
IP × I1 LTD characteristic
curve
Operating time (s) [TP] 40 secs (fixed definite time-delay) setting tolerance is ± 10%.
Output contact Normally open contact, (1a) Integral lead is standard length (450mm) Tripping
Resistive load Inductive load time (s)
PTA pick-up current
Rating of 250V AC 125V A (2A max) 20V A (2A max) setting range
contact 220V DC 60W (2A max) 10W (2A max)
Tripped indication ① Pick-up LED flickers
Note ①: the pick-up LED flickers at a higher current than [IP].
When higher current flows continuously for 40 secs, the contact (1a) automatically resets.
¡OCR controller (PTA and trip indication) 40
The OCR controller is installed in the left hand of the breaker (standard). This can also be
70 100 150 %X [ I1 ]
installed externally to the breaker (please specify when ordering).
¡Specifications of OCR controller

Control voltage ② AC100 - 120 V or AC200 - 240 V
(Rated voltage)
Current consumption, VA 2VA
Note ②: The control voltage must be 80 to 110% of the rated voltage. ¡Outline of the OCR controller
Please state the rated voltage when ordering. installed external to the breaker
¡OCR controller connection diagram
OCR controller installed on the breaker OCR controller installed external to the breaker
Lead wire
(600 mm long) Mounting
hole ø4.5 16
6
ON ON
6
10
OP2
Accessories
Control
16
Red WhiteOP1
OP2 Control
power
OFF PALc PTA OP1 power OFF PALc PTA
OS2
White
15
PALa output 1a OS2 PALa output 1a

OS1
Red OS1
100
18
80
88
7.8
Factory wired
15
Lead wire (450 mm long) Lead wire (450 mm long)

16
10
¡Mounting dimensions and terminal arrangement of the OCR controller 22 6

installed on the breaker 25
Terminal
9 screw M3.5
12 Dimension table (mm)

A
16
ON Type of A B
OP2
MCCB With UVT contoroller Without UVT contoroller
59
15 18 15
57.5
OP1
45
80
OS2
OFF
TL-1000NE
TL-1200NE 51 114 92
OS1
16
XS2000NE 54 180 115

OCR controller Support
Terminal screw M3.5
21 B
Remarks 1): Standard torque for the terminal screws M3.5 —— 0.9~1.2N.m
2): Connected cable size —— Max. 2.0mm2
6-7
6
Accessories

■ Ground fault trip (GF)
The ground fault trip pickup current is 10 to 40% of the CT rated current (ICT). The GF
function provides protection against fire that may be caused by arcing ground fault current.
Note that a separate type neutral CT is required when the GF function is added to a 3-pole
breaker used in a 3-phase, 4-wire system. Contact us for details.
¡GF Specifications ¡GF characteristics

Pick-up current (A): [IG] Continuously adjustable from 10 to 40% of the rated CT current [ICT].
0.2 0.3
0.1 0.4
IG X ICT
GFT pick-up
Tripping current setting range
Time-delay (S) [TG] The GFT has a definite time-delay characteristic and is adjustable in steps of 0.1, time (s)
0.2, 0.3, 0.4 and 0.8s.
0.3 Total clearing time is +50ms and resettable time is –20ms for the pre-set time-
0.2 0.4 delay.
0.1 0.8 0.8

TG SEC
0.1
■ Trip indicators
10 40 %x (ICT)
The LEDS, when lit, indicate which trip function tripped the breaker; Long time-delay (LTD),
short time-delay/instantaneous (ST/INST) or ground fault (GF) (control power required)
If a pre-trip alarm (PTA) is fitted, the LED control power can be used (common). See page 6-7
for PTA. This is not applicable to high instantaneous trip breakers (See page 4-3).
¡Trip indicator display
LED for LT LED for ST/INST tripped indication

tripped
indication LED for GF
Reset button tripped indication
pushed to turn
off the LED TRIP INDICATORS
RESET
I1 LONG TIME SHORT TIME INSTANTANEOUS GROUND FAULT

T
T1 1600 6
6 9 0.2 0.3
IG CUR. 1400 2000 4 8
I2 T2 SETTING
1200 2500 2 10 3 12 0.1 0.4
TG I3 I1 RATED CUR.(A) I2 I
x 1 I3 I
x CT IG I
x CT
15 0.2 0.3
SHORT TIME I 2 t
CT RATED CUR. 10 20 0.15 0.25 0.2 0.4
TIME
Ict 2000 A SETTING
5 30 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.8
TEST IN
T1 SEC T2 SEC OFF ON TG SEC
at 6 x I1 T2 SEC
at 10 x I1
PICK UP
Example XS2000NE
6-8
(3) How to chanege the tripping characteristics
The electronic breakers are designed so that their protective functions, i.e., long time delay trip, short time delay trip, instantaneous trip,
ground fault trip and pretrip alarm functions, can be adjusted depending on a change in load or layout of power distribution lines.
Outer view
Front panel of electronic OCR (cover removed)

2000A Current rating sticker LONG TIME SHORT TIME INSTANTANEOUS GROUND FAULT
T I1
T1 1400 6 6 9 0.2 0.3
IG CUR. 1200 1600 4 8
I2 T2 SETTING
1000 2000 2 10 3 12 0.1 0.4
TG I3 I1 RATED CUR.(A) I2 xI1 I3 Ict IG Ict PRE TRIP ALARM
15 0.2 0.3
SHORT TIME I 2 t 0.8 0.9
CT RATED CUR. 10 20 0.15 0.25 0.2 0.4
TIME
Ict 2000 A SETTING 0.7 1.0
5 30 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.8
TEST IN
T1 SEC T2 SEC OFF ON TG SEC IP xI1
at 6 x I1 T2 SEC
at 10 x I1
PICK UP
Ex.: XS2000NE
Cover
Sealing sticker
Replacement sticker storage
Long time delay trip, short time delay trip,

Item Rated current
instantaneous trip, ground fault trip, pretrip alarm
• Turn OFF the breaker before changing the settings. • Turn OFF the breaker before changing the settings.
1. Peel the sealing sticker off, loosen the cover mounting screws 1. Peel the sealing sticker off, loosen the cover mounting screws
and remove the cover. and remove the cover.
2. Rotate the “RATED CUR. (A)” dial using a flatblade screwdriv- 2. Rotate the desired dial using a flatblade screwdriver so that the
er so that the black points on the dial point the desired position. black points on the dial point the desired position.
LONG TIME The instantaneous trip and ground fault trip pickup current can
Adjusting procedure
be continuously adjusted.
1400
3. Take a sealing sticker from the replacement sticker storage.
CUR. 1200
SETTING
1000
1600
Black point
2000
6
I1 RATED CUR.(A)
(Ex.: XS2000NE) Accessories
3. Take an appropriate current rating sticker and a sealing sticker
from the replacement sticker storage.
4. Peel the existing current rating sticker off and affix the replace-
ment current rating sticker.
6-9
6
Accessories
xInternally mounted accessories
1. Overview
The following internally mounted accessories are available. See the tables of possible combinations of internally mounted
accessories on pages 6-12 to 6-14 for the number of accessories that can be installed per breaker and their locations.
Alarm switch AL
Provides an electrical indication that the
breaker is in a tripped state.
Auxiliary switch AX
Provides an electrical indication that the
breaker is in a ON or OFF state.
Shunt trip device SH

Electrically trips the breaker open from a
remote location.
Undervoltage trip device UV

Trips the breaker open when the voltage of
the power distribution line lowers. This
device can also be used to trip the breaker
open from a remote location.
Caution: Combined use of SH and UV is not available.
Termination or ending of lead wires from accessories

There are three manners in which lead wires from accessories are ended or terminated, as shown below:
Lead wires are open: Lead wires are terminated in a Lead wires are ended at auxiliary
¡Standard lead wire ending manner for terminal block: circuit (self-engaging) terminals:
front-connected, rear-connected and ¡Optional lead wire termination man- ¡Standard lead wire ending manner for
flush-mounted breakers. Lead wires ner for front-connected and rear-con- plug-in breakers.
from accessories are derived vertically, nected breakers. ¡See pages 9-4 and 9-7 for the standard
thereby enabling contact mounting. ¡There are two types of terminal blocks arrangement of auxiliary circuit termi-
¡Lead wire specifications available depending on the direction nals.
Finished
in which lead wires are derived; verti- Contact us for other arrangements.
accessory Grade Size Length Color
OD cal and horizontal. See pages 6-61 to
SH Heat 0.5mm 2
3mmø 500mm Black 6-67 for details.
UV resistant 3mmø 500mm Black
AX 1.8mmø 700mm Gray
AL 1.8mmø 700mm Black
6-10
6
Accessories
2. Connection diagrams and terminal numbers

Accessory Combination symbol Connection diagram and terminal No. Remarks
Shunt trip device
Ｓ２Ｓ１ Applicable to E50-SF, E100-SF, E50-CM,

• With anti-burn switch ∼ ∼ TL-1000NE and TL-1200NE. Shunt trips are
（−）（＋）
fitted with anti-burn switches.
(SH)
Applicable to other breakers except above

C1 C2
• Without anti-burn switch breakers. Shunt trips are continuous rating
without anti-burn switches.
For AC For DC
Undervoltage trip device
controller
ＵＣ１Ｐ１ Applicable to E50-SF, E100-SF, TL-1000NE
Ｕ１Ｕ２ and TL-1200NE. UVT controller is required
With UVT controller
ＵＣ２Ｐ２ for AC UVT. See page 6-18 for the details.
(UV)
D1 D2 Applicable to other breakers except above

breakers.
12/AXb1 14/AXa1
1pc Aux. SW installed.
11/AXc1
12/AXb1 14/AXa1 22/AXb2 24/AXa2
Auxiliary switch
2pcs Aux. SW installed.

(AX)
11/AXc1 21/AXc2
12/AXb1 14/AXa1 22/AXb2 24/AXa2 32/AXb3 34/AXa3 42/AXb4 44/AXa4
11/AXc1 21/AXc2 31/AXc3 41/AXc4

AXb1 AXa1 AXb2 AXa2 AXb3 AXa3 AXb4 AXa4 AXb5 AXa5 AXb6 AXa6
AXc1 AXc2 AXc3 AXc4 AXc5 AXc6

92/ALb1 94/ALa1
TRIP 1pc Alarm. SW installed.

Alarm switch
91/ALc1
(AL)
92/ALb1 94/ALa1 02/ALb2 04/ALa2

2pcs Alarm. SW installed. Available for
TRIP TRIP S125-SF, S250-SF, S630, S800, S1250 and
S1600.
91/ALc1 01/ALc2
6
Accessories
6-11
6
Accessories
3. Possible combinations
Economical E225-NF E250-SF

series
Standard S50-SF S50-SF S100-NF S100-NF S250-SF S400-CF S630-CF S1250-NE
series S125-SF S125-SF S125-NF S125-NF S400-NF S630-NF S1600-NE
S225-NF S400-NE S630-NE
S250-NF S800-CF
S800-NF
S800-NE
High-fault S50-GF S400-GF S630-RF S1250-GE

level series S100-GF S400-GE S630-RE
S125-GF S400-PF S800-RF
S225-GF S400-PE S800-RE
Type
S225-GE
S250-GF
Current H100-NF H400-NE H630-NE

limiting H125-NF H800-NE
series H225-NF
Current L100-NF L400-NE L630-NE

limiting L125-NF L800-NE
series
L225-NF
Motor S100-NM
protection S225-NM
series
Number of poles q 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3
AX
AL
SH
UV
AX
Combinations of accessories
AL
AX
SH
AX
UV
AL
SH
AL
UV
AX
AL
SH
AX
AL
UV
Notes:
q: The two-pole type breaker obtained by modifying a three-pole breaker by removing the conductive part of its central pole is regarded as the same as the three-pole type.
6-12
Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Motor protection series
Economical E50-SF E50-SF E100-SF E100-SF E50-CM
series Type
Standard XS2000NE Number of poles 3
series
AX
High-fault
Ty p e
level series
AL
Current TL-1000NE SH
limiting TL-1200NE
series
UV
Number of poles q 2 3 2 3 3 3
AX
AX
AL
AX
AL
SH
AX
SH
UV
2 AL
UV
SH
AX AL
AL UV
AX AX
AL
SH
SH
AX
2 AX
UV
AL
AL UV
SH
2
AL 6
UV
AX Accessories
AL
SH
AX
AL
UV
Notes:
q : The two-pole type breaker obtained by modifying a three-pole breaker by removing the conductive part of its central pole is regarded as the same as the three-pole type.
For the four-pole type, also see the column for the three-pole type.
w : A breaker with AC UVT is provided with an external UVT controller. See page 6-18.
6-13
6
Accessories
3. Possible combinations
Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Switch disconnectors Non-automatic breakers
S125-SN S100-NN S250-SN S400-NN S630-GN S1250-NN XS2000NN
S125-NN S800-NN S1600-NN
Type Type
Number of poles 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 Number of poles 3
AX AX
AL AL
SH SH
UV UV
AX AX
AL AL
AX AX
SH SH
AX AX
2
UV UV
AL AL
SH SH
AL AL
2
UV UV
AX AX
AL AL
SH SH
AX AX
AL AL
2
UV UV
Notes:
w : A breaker with AC UVT is provided with an
external UVT controller. See page 6-18.
6-14
4. Ratings and operation data of auxiliary and alarm switches
(1) Ratings of AX and AL
• The applicable load of the switch shall be no larger than the rating and no smaller than the minimum load.
Standard For microload 1

AC (V) DC (V) DC (V)
Type of breaker Current (A) Current (A) Minimum Current (A) Minimum
Voltage Voltage Voltage
Resistive Inductive Resistive Inductive load Resistive load
(V) (V) (V)
load load 2 load load 2 load
E225-NF
E250-SF
S50-SF
S125-SF
S50-GF
S100-NF,S100-GF
S125-NF, S125-GF 480 ― ― 250 ― ―
S225-NF, S225-GF
S225-GE
S250-NF, S250-GF
S400-CF, S400-NF
S400-GF, S400-GE
S400-PF, S400-PE
S630-CF, S630-NF, S630-RF
S630-NE, S630-RE
S800-CF, S800-NF, S800-RF
S800-NE, S800-RE
S1250-NE
S1600-NE DC15V DC5V
250 3 2 125 0.4 0.05 30 0.1
S250-SF 100mA 1mA
H100-NF, L100-NF
H125-NF, L125-NF
H225-NF, L225-NF
H400-NF, L400-NE
H630-NE, L630-NE
H800-NE, L800-NE
S100-NM
S225-NM
S125-SN
S250-SN
S100-NN
S125-NN 125 3 2 30 3 2
S400-NN
S630-GN
S800-NN
S1250-NN
S1600-NN
E50-SF, E100-SF, E50-CM
480 250 0.2 0.03 125 0.1
6
― ―
DC6V DC6V
100mA 5mA
250 3 2 125 0.4 0.05
DC24V DC24V
30 0.1
25mA 1.25mA
125 3 2 30 3 2
XS2000NE
480 3 2 250 0.3 0.3
Accessories
TL1000-NE, TL1200-NE DC5V DC5V
XS2000NN 160mA 1mA
250 5 5 125 0.6 0.6 30 0.1
DC30V DC30V
26.7mA 1mA
125 5 5 30 5 4
Note: 1 This is a custom-made product. When ordering for this product, specify that it is intended for minute load use.
Note: 2 The inductive load means power factor of no smaller than 0.4 and time constant of no larger than 7 ms.
(2) Operation of AX and AL

Switch Breaker status [ON] [OFF] [TRIP]
Auxiliary 12/AXb 14/AXa

11/AXc-14/AXa “Closed” 11/AXc-14/AXa “Open” 11/AXc-14/AXa “Open”
switch (AX)
11/AXc-12/AXb “Open” 11/AXc-12/AXb “Closed” 11/AXc-12/AXb “Closed”
status
91/AXc
92/ALb 94/ALa
Alarm switch 91/ALc-94/ALa “Open” 91/ALc-94/ALa “Open” 91/ALc-94/ALa “Closed”
TRIP
(AL) status 91/ALc-92/ALb “Closed” 91/ALc-92/ALb “Closed” 91/ALc-92/ALb “Open”
91/ALc
6-15
6
Accessories
5. Shunt trip device (SH)

Ratings of SHT
Peak exciting current, A
Type of breaker Rated AC (V) DC (V)
voltage 100-120 200-240 380-450 24 48 100-120 200-240
E225-NF
E250-SF
S50-GF, S50-SF
S100-NF, S100-GF
S125-NF, S125-GF
S125-SF
S225-NF, S225-GF
S225-GE
S250-NF, S250-GF
S250-SF
S400-CF, S400-NF
S400-GF, S400-GE
S400-PF, S400-PE
S630-CF, S630-NF, S630-RF
S630-NE, S630-RE
S800-CF, S800-NF, S800-RF
S800-NE, S800-RE
S1250-NE, S1250-GE 0.014 0.014 0.0065 0.03 0.03 0.011 0.011
S1600-NE
H100-NF, L100-NF
H225-NF, L225-NF
H125-NF, L125-NF
H400-NE, L400-NE
H630-NE, L630-NE
H800-NE, L800-NE
S100-NM
S225-NM
S100-NN
S125-SN
S250-SN
S400-NN
S630-GN
S800-NN
S1250-NN
S1600-NN
Peak exciting current, A

voltage 100-115 200-480 24 48 100-115 200-230
E50-SF, E100-SF, E50-CM
3.4 0.83 1.6 0.71 0.4 0.16
XS2000NE, XS2000NN
1 0.4 (AC200-240V)
1.1 2.52 1.55 0.67 0.35
0.93 (AC380-480V)
TL1000-NE, TL1200-NE
1.1 0.93 2.52 1.55 0.67 0.35
Notes:
①: Exclusive use for 200V class and 400V class.
(1) The permissible voltage range is from 85% to 110% of the rated voltage for AC or 75% to 125% thereof for DC.
Ensure that the voltage does not drop exceeding the permissible voltage range when SHT is actuated.
(2) Breaker contacts usually start opening within 30 ms after the rated voltage is applied to the breaker.
6-16
6. Undervoltage trip device (UV)
Ratings of UVT with Inst
Power supply capacity, VA 1 Exciting current, mA 1
voltage 100-120 200-240 380-450 24 100-120 200-240
E250-SF
S50-GF, S50-SF
S100-NF, S100-GF
S125-NF, S125-GF
S125-SF
S225-NF, S225-GF
S225-GE
S250-NF, S250-GF
S250-SF
S400-CF, S400-NF
S400-NE
S400-GF, S400-GE 1.4 2.8 2.3 23 10 10
S400-PF, S400-PE
H100-NF, L100-NF
H125-NF, L125-NF
H225-NF, L225-NF
H400-NE, L400-NE
S100-NM
S225-NM
S100-NN
S125-SN
S250-SN
S400-NN
Note: 1: No UVT controller is required.

voltage 100-110 115-120 200-220 230-240 380-415 440-450 24 100-120 200-240
S630-CF, S630-NF, S630-RF
S630-NE, S630-RE
S800-CF, S800-NF, S800-RF
S800-NE, S800-RE
S1250-NE, S1250-GE
S1600-NE
1.3 1.4 2.4 2.6 1.9 2.1 29 13 11
H630-NE, L630-NE
H800-NE, L800-NE
S630-GN
S800-NN
S1250-NN
S1600-NN
Note: 1: No UVT controller is required.
6
Type of breaker Rated AC (V) DC (V) Accessories
voltage 100-120 200-240 380-450 24 100-120 200-240
E50-SF, E100-SF
5 min 5 min 5 min 18.2 4.8 ―
XS2000NE, XS2000NN
5 min 5 min 5 min 22.7 6 ―
TL1000-NE, TL1200-NE
5 min 5 min 5 min 22.7 6 ―
Notes: 1: No UVT controller is required.

2: Equipped with the UVT controller. See page 6-18 for specifications of the UVT controller.
6-17
6
Accessories

UVT controller
¡See pages 6-17 for the breakers on which the UVT controller is installed.
A breaker equipped with the AC UVT need a UVT controller. The UVT controller is installed on the breaker by default. Separate installation
of the controller is also available on request. If the breaker is of flush-mounted (FP) type, the UVT controller is separately installed by default.
Also a UVT controller (type XCU1D) with a time delay of less than 500 ms is available on request.
¡UVT controller connection diagram
UVT controller installed on the breaker UVT controller installed external to the breaker
Breaker or fuse Line side Breaker or fuse Line side
ON ON
P2 P2
UVT controller
P1 P1
UC2 OFF UVT controller UC2
OFF
UC1 UC1
Note: If the UVT controller is
installed on the breaker, Lead wire
terminals UC1 and UC2 (450 mm long)
are factory wired.
¡Mounting dimensios and terminal arrangement of the UVT ¡Outline of the UVT controller installed external to the
controller installed on the breaker breaker
Mounting hole
ø4.5 16
16
12
A
16
UC1
15 18 15
ON
6
10
P2 UC2
80
15 18 15
P1 P1
16
80
UC2 P2
OFF
16
UC1 12
15
16
100
UVT controller
18
80
88
UVT controller
terminal screw M3.5 terminal screw M3.5
21 21 C
(E50-SF only)
7.8
15
16
10
Mounting dimensions
6
Frame size (A) Type of breaker A B C 22 6

50 E50-SF − 12.5 38 25
100 E100-SF 30.5 − 38
1000
TL-1000NE,TL-1200NE 114（138） − 92 9 Terminal screw M3.5
1200
2000 XS2000NE,XS2000NN 180 − 115
Notes:
1. Dimension A shown in parentheses "( )" are the case fitted with OCR controller.
2. Tightening torque of terminal screws: 0.88 – 1.18 N.m
59
3. Applicable wire size: 2.0 mm2 max

57.5
45
Support
6-18
UVT with time delays for TemBreak2
TemBreak2 UVT are available with 500±300 msec time delays.
UVT controller is installed on the breaker.
Rating of UVT with time delay Time delays: 500±300 msec.

Power supply capacity, VA Exciting current, mA
Applicable breakers Rated AC (V) DC (V)
voltage 100-110 115-120 200-220 230-240 380-415 440-450 24 100-110 115-120 200-220 230-240
S50-GF, S100, S125, E250, S225, S250,

H100, H125, H225, L100, L125, L225, 1.1 1.3 2.1 2.5 1.5 1.7 22 7.6 8.3 8.6 9.3
S400, H400, L400
Power supply capacity, VA Exciting current, mA

Applicable breakers Rated AC (V) DC (V)
voltage 100-110 115-120 200-220 230-240 380-415 440-450 24 100-110 115-120 200-220 230-240
S630, S800, H630, L630, H800, L800,

1.5 1.6 2.4 2.9 2.1 2.3 29 13 13 11 11
S1250, S1600
¡Mounting dimensios and terminal arrangement of the UVT

controller installed on the breaker
Applicable breakers A（mm） B（mm） C（mm） D（mm） Applicable breakers A（mm） B（mm） C（mm） D（mm）
S50-GF, S100, S125 2P, 3P, 4P 28.5 44 25.2 16.2
E250, S225, S250
3P, 4P 33.5 44 25.2 16.2
(except S225-GE) S1250 114 72 21 12
S225-GE
H100, H125, H225 3P, 4P 33.5 79 25.2 16.2
L100, L125, L225
S400 3P, 4P 71 74 25.2 16.2

H400, L400 3P, 4P 71 111 25.2 16.2 S1600 114 92 21 12
S630, S800 3P, 4P 62.5 74 25.2 16.2
H630, L630, H800, L800 3P, 4P 62.5 111 25.2 16.2
• The UVT controller is installed in the right hand side of the breaker • The UVT controller is installed in the left hand side of the breaker
D D
6
A
A
16
16
ON ON
15 18 15
15 18 15
80
80
D1 D1 Accessories
D2 D2
16
16
OFF OFF
UVT controller UVT controller

Terminal screw M3.5 Terminal screw M3.5
C B B C
Notes: 1. Tightening torque of terminal screws: 0.9 – 1.2 N.m Notes: 1. Tightening torque of terminal screws: 0.9 – 1.2 N.m
2. Applicable lead wire size: 2.0 mm2 max 2. Applicable lead wire size: 2.0 mm2 max
6-19
6
Accessories
cExternally mounted accessories
1. Overview
wExternal operating handle (door-mounted, depth adjustable)
wExternal operating handle (breaker-mounted) iInterpole barrier
tToggle holder
yToggle lock
rMechanical interlock
uTerminal cover
(for rear-connected
and plug-in breakers)
eToggle extension
qMotor operator
uTerminal cover
(for front-connected breakers)
①Motor operator MC ⑥Toggle lock HL

Allows electrical operation (closing, opening and resetting) of Allows the breaker to be locked on or off with commercially
the breaker. available padlocks.
②External operating handle ⑦Terminal cover

Allows the breaker installed in a switchboard or box to be oper- Prevents live parts of the breaker from being exposed.
ated from outside. For front-connected breakers CF
Breaker-mounted HB For rear-connected and plug-in breakers CR
The handle is mounted directly on the breaker. For front-connected breakers with cable clamps CS
Door-mounted (depth adjustable) HP
The handle is coupled to the breaker through a shaft. ⑧Interpole barrier BA
Enhances electrical insulation between poles and prevents short-
③Toggle extension HA circuit due to electrically conductive foreign matter.
Lessens the force require to close, open or reset the breaker.
(Applicable to breakers with a frame size of 600A or larger) ⑨Terminal block TF
Terminates lead wires from internally mounted accessories.
④Mechanical interlock
Provides an interlock that allows one of two breakers to be ⑩Door flange DF
closed. Is intended to cover the cutout of a switchboard panel from the
Slide type MS front.
⑤Toggle holder HH ⑪DIN rail adaptor

Holds the breaker on or off when simply fitted onto the breaker Allows the breaker to be mounted on DIN rails.
toggle.
6-20
2. Toggle extension (HA)
Outline dimensions XHA9B, T2HA80 XHA10

46
32
136
105
lock pin lock pin
37
48
60 26 79 40
78 115
Frame size (A) Type of breaker Toggle extension Order codes

S630-CF, S630-NF, S630-NE
• Mounting and Removal
630 S630-RF, S630-RE 1 T2HA80
S630-GN, H630-NE, L630-NE Pull lock pins out left and right in
direction of the arrows, and slot the
S800-CF, S800-NF, S800-NE
800 S800-RF, S800-RE 1 T2HA80 toggle extension in place.
S800-NN, H800-NE, L800-NE The lock pins are spring loaded.
1000 TL-1000NE Removal-Pull out left and right
2 XHA9B
1200 TL-1200NE hand lock pins and hold while
1250 S1250-NE, S1250-GE, S1250-NN removing.
2 T2HA80
1600 S1600-NE, S1600-NN
2000 XS2000NE, XS2000NN 3 XHA10
Note: 1 Optional. Specify when ordering.
2 One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are required.
3 Supplied as standard.
6
Accessories
6-21
6
Accessories
3. Toggle holder (HH) and toggle lock (HL)

Toggle holder (HH) Toggle lock (HL)
Simply fitting the toggle holder onto the The toggle lock is a tool that locks the breaker on or off. When an overcurrent occurs, the
breaker toggle disables breaker operation breaker will trip even if the breaker toggle is locked in the ON position.
without using padlocks. (Use commercially available padlocks).
Toggle holders/toggle locks

Toggle holder Toggle lock
Frame size (A) Type of breaker Figure Figure
Order codes Marking codes Order codes Marking codes
50 S50-SF T2HH25L T2HH25L 1 T2HL25L T2HL25L 2
100 S100-NF
S100-GF, S50-GF
H100-NF
T2HH25 T2HH25 1 T2HL25 T2HL25 2
L100-NF
S100-NM
S100-NN
125 S125-NF, S125-NN T2HH25 T2HH25 1 T2HL25 T2HL25 2
S125-SF, S125-SN T2HH25L T2HH25L 1 T2HL25L T2HL25L 2
S125-GF
H125-NF T2HH25 T2HH25 1 T2HL25 T2HL25 2
L125-NF
225 E225-NF
S225-NF
S225-GF, S225-GE
T2HH25 T2HH25 1 T2HL25 T2HL25 2
H225-NF
L225-NF
S225-NM
250 S250-NF T2HH25 T2HH25 1 T2HL25 T2HL25 2
E250-SF, S250-SF, S250-SN T2HH25L T2HH25L 1 T2HL25L T2HL25L 2
S250-GF T2HH25 T2HH25 1 T2HL25 T2HL25 2
400 E400-NF
S400-CF, S400-NF
S400-NE
S400-GF, S400-GE T2HL40
T2L40 3 T2HL40 T2HL40 3
S400-PF, S400-PE ①
H400-NE
L400-NE
S400-NN
630 S630-CF, S630-NF
S630-NE, S630-RF, S630-RE
T2HL40
H630-NE T2L40 3 T2HL40 T2HL40 3
①
L630-NE
S630-GN
800 S800-CF, S800-NF
S800-NE, S800-RF, S800-RE
T2HL40
H800-NE T2L40 3 T2HL40 T2HL40 3
①
L800-NE
S800-NN
1250 S1250-NE
S1250-GE T2HLX6 T2HLX6 6（l=86） T2HLX6 T2HLX6 6（l=86）
S1250-NN
1600 S1600-NE
T2HLX6 T2HLX6 6（l=86） T2HLX6 T2HLX6 6（l=86）
S1600-NN
50 TB-5S, TB-5P for 1P…TKB-50SGH for 1P…TKB-50SGH
7（a） TKB-50SG TKB-50SG 5
100 TB-5D （TAA-5CR）② （TAA-5CR）②
for 2P…TAA-52SH for 2P…TAA-52SH
7（b） ― ― ―
for 3P…TAA-53SH for 3P…TAA-53SH
E50-SF, E100-SF, E50-CM TKB-1DH ― 4 ③ ― 4
1000 TL-1000NE XKC9 XKC9 6（l=86） XKC9 XKC9 6（l=86）
1200 TL-1200NE XKC9 XKC9 6（l=86） XKC9 XKC9 6（l=86）
2000 XS2000NE
XKC10 XKC10 6（l=94） XKC10 XKC10 6（l=94）
XS2000NN
Notes: 1. Same as toggle lock.
2. Order codes shown in parentheses “( ) ” are toggle caps. The colour is Red.
3. A hole must be drilled in the breaker toggle. Please state “with toggle lock (HL)” when ordering.
6-22
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Red Red
ø5
⎞ Padlock ⎞
⎠ Up to three padlocks can be used ⎠
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
Red Red
ON
ø5 – ø8
F
OF
⎞ Padlock ⎞
Fig. 5
Red
Lock plate
⎞ Padlock ⎞
4.5ø ⎠ Up to three padlocks can be used ⎠
Fig. 6
ON Toggle holder (HH): Make sure
6
Green
Le
the ngth t the lock lever of the toggle holder
leve o
ON
r tip is in the UNLOCK position, fit the Accessories
toggle holder onto the toggle and
ø8 or less swing the lock lever to the LOCK
F position. The toggle is now locked
OF
on or off.
Toggle lock (HL): Padlock the
toggle in the ON or OFF position.
⎞ Padlock ⎞
Lock lever
Fig. 7
(a) (b) Red
6-23
6
Accessories
4. Motor operators (MC)

4-1. TemBreak2
Motor driven type Spring charged type
Key lock (optional) Manual charging lever
Manual charging
point
Voltage presence ON/OFF+TRIPPED

LED indication indicator
Key lock (optional) ON button

Operating
handle Select lever TRIP button
Lock plate Voltage presence
LED indication
Lock plate
(T2MC12 / T2MC25) (T2MC40 / T2MC80)
Ratings and Specifications Features

T2MC12 T2MC25 T2MC25L T2MC40 T2MC80 ★Installation and removal ease
Type of breaker E225-NF E250-SF
T2MC12/25/25L: Simply rotate two
S50-GF S225-NF S250-SF S400-CF,S400-NF S630-CF,S630-NF,S630-RF
S100-NF S225-GF S400-GF S630-NE,S630-RE knobs allows the motor operator to
S100-GF S225-GE S400-NE,S400-GE S800-CF,S800-NF,S800-RF be installed on or removed from the
S125-NF S250-NF S400-PF,S400-PE S800-NE,S800-RE
breaker.
S125-GF S250-GF
H100-NF H225-NF H400-NE,L400-NE H630-NE,L630-NE T2MC40/80: The compact and
L100-NF L225-NF H800-NE,L800-NE lightweight design enables easy
H125-NF installation and removal.
L125-NF
S100-NM S225-NM
S100-NN S250-SN S400-NN S630-GN ★High-speed, stable actuation
S125-NN S800-NN
The operating time as short as up to
Rated operational voltage 1 ●AC100-110V ●AC100-240V ●AC100-240V
●AC200-220V ●ADC24-48V ●ADC24-48V
0.1 second makes it possible to use
●AC230-240V ●DC100-120V ●DC100-120V the motor operators for synchronized
●DC24V closing of breakers.
●DC48V
●DC100-110V
●DC200-220V ★Silent operation
Peak AC100-110V 4.5/8 ―/1.9(ON) 1.3/3.8(OFF,RESET) ―/2.2(ON) 1.7/3.5(OFF,RESET) T2MC12/25/25L use a direct drive
steady-state/ AC200-220V 4/8 ―/3.3(ON) 0.9/3.8(OFF,RESET) ―/2.2(ON) 1.3/3.5(OFF,RESET)
starting current, A
AC230-240V 3.5/7 ―/3.3(ON) 0.9/3.8(OFF,RESET) ―/2.2(ON) 1.3/3.5(OFF,RESET)
system, providing operational
2
DC24V 18/26 ―/9.2(ON) 4.3/9.8(OFF,RESET) silence.
DC48V 12/18 ―/3.8(ON) 2.0/5.2(OFF,RESET)
DC100-110V 2.2/6 ―/1.3(ON) 1.2/2.9(OFF,RESET) ―/2.2(ON) 1.3/3.5(OFF,RESET)
DC200-220V 2.2/5.5
★“Lock-in off” capability
― ―
Operation method Motor driven (direct drive system) Spring driven Spring driven This capability allows the breaker to
Operating time, s ON 0.1 0.1 0.1 be padlocked in the OFF state.
at rated voltage OFF/RESET 0.1③④ 1.5③④ 1.5③④
Operating switch ratings
Up to thee padlocks with a 5 to 8
100V 0.1A 100V 0.1A 100V 0.1A
(Open voltage/current: 44 V/4 mA)⑤ (Open voltage/current: 48 V/1 mA) (Open voltage/current: 48 V/1 mA) mm hasp diameter can be used.
Power supply required 300VA or higher 300VA or higher 300VA or higher Padlocks are not supplied.
Dielectric withstand voltage AC1500V AC1500V AC1500V
(for one minute) (AC 1000 V for DC 24/48 V) (AC 1000 V for DC 24/48 V) (AC 1000 V for DC 24/48 V)
Weight 1.4kg 3.5kg 3.5kg ★Compact and lightweight
Notes: T2MC40/80 is of compact design
① : Permissible operating range is 85 to 110%. A power transformer is available as option for AC380V or AC400-460V. where the OCR of the breakers does
② : The currents shown are the maximum values at the maximum rated operational voltage.
not hide behind the operator, and
③ : The operating time is the value when the rated operational voltage is supplied.
Allow a longer time for the motor operator to complete the operation. thus does not need to be removed
④ : The motor operator is of a short time duty. Do not subject it to more than 10 continuous ON-OFF operations. If this occurs, allow when changes in setting of the OCR
the motor operator to cool for at least 15 minutes.
⑤ : When the rated operational voltage is DC24V the open voltage will be DC22V.
are to be made.
6-24
Motorized operation
The motor operator has an input-signal self-hold circuit; closing the ON or OFF switch (see circuit diagrams shown bellow) momentarily allows
activating the motor operator. To reset the tripped breaker to the OFF position, close the OFF (RESET) switch.
The voltage presence LED indication is on when the power is supplied to the motor operator.
■ Auto reset feature (optional)

The auto reset feature allows the breaker to be automatically reset approx. 1.5 seconds after the breaker trips open. This option contains auto-reset
switches and does not require to use auxiliary or alarm switches installed in the breaker.
Note : that after the thermal OCR trips a thermal-magnetic breaker, the breaker cannot be immediately closed though it can be auto-reset.
Wait for a few minutes after the tripping and provide a close signal to the breaker.
This option resets the tripped breaker automatically, regardless of the cause of the tripping.
Manual operation
T2MC12/25/25L: Pull the operating handle out. Rotating the handle counterclockwise turns ON the breaker and clockwise turns OFF or resets
the breaker.
T2MC40/80 : Use the spring charging handle to charge the spring and press the ON or TRIP button.
T2MC40/80 : When the TRIP button is pressed while the control power is supplied, the breaker turns OFF and if equipped with an alarm
switch, it provides an output signal.
Operation precautions
1. Ensure that the actual operation voltage ranges from 85% to 110% of the rated one.
2. Use operation switches whose ratings and power capacity is as specified in the “Ratings and Specifications” table on the previous page.
3. Use noise filters if the control power supply of the motor operator is shared by peripheral devices. Otherwise, power supply noise may cause
malfunction of the peripheral devices.
4. When the motors are used in conjunction with the mechanical interlock the electrical interlock should be provided between the motors in order
to avoid the simultaneous closing. The followings are the available electrical interlock cables.
Interlock cables Length Remarks

Order codes
T2MM25L05 500mm
for the electrical interlock between T2MC12 and T2MC25/25L.
T2MM25L15 1500mm
T2MM40L06 600mm
for the electrical interlock between T2MC40 and T2MC80.
T2MM40L21 2100mm
T2MM40S06 600mm
for the electrical interlock between T2MC40 and T2MC12/25/25L.
T2MM40S21 2100mm
Control circuit diagrams of motor operators

6
T2MC12 / T2MC25 / T2MC25L T2MC40 / T2MC80
Accessories
P1(+)
P1(+)
DS
OFF(RESET)
Control power circuit
OFF LED
Control power circuit
OFF(RESET)
ON/OFF control circuit
Motor drive circuit
OFF LED
LRC drive circuit
Motor drive circuit
ON
ON/OFF control circuit
ON
ON
ON
LRC M
COM M
+
Uc COM
+ The “+” and “–” – The “+” and “–” symbols
Uc symbols indicate the indicate the polarities of
polarities of DC-rated
– DC-rated motor operators. P2(–)
motor operators.
P2(–)
E
6-25
6
Accessories

4-2. TemBreak
Motor driven type
ON-OFF indicator
ON-OFF indicator Operating handle

mounting shaft
(XMB1) (XMB10)

XMB1 XMB10
Series/type of breaker E50-SF XS2000NE Notes: ① Ensure that the actual operation voltage is within
E100-SF XS2000NN the following range:
85% to 110% of the AC rated voltage, or
Rated operational voltage ① ●AC100-110V ●AC100-110V
75% to 110% of the DC rated voltage
●AC200-220V ●AC200-220V In case the rated operation voltage is AC 380 V or
●DC100V ●DC100-110V AC 400 to 460 V, optional power supply
●DC110V transformers are available on request.
② Auto reset require to use auxiliary switch (1b)
installed in the breaker. If the number of auxiliary
switches is insufficient, actuate an external relay
Auto reset Optional ② Optional ② via an auxiliary switch (1a) and use the relay
contact (1b) for auto reset.
Non Non ③ The currents shown are the maximum values at
the maximum rated operational voltage.
Peak steady-state/ AC100-110V 2.0/4.5 0.85/3.5 ④ The operating time assume the motor operator is
starting current, A ③ supplied with the rated operation voltage. Longer
AC200-220V 1.0/2.0 1.3/2.1
operating time will be required under actual
DC100V −⑥ 1.1/2.5 operating conditions.
DC110V −⑥ 1.2/3.0
⑤ The motor operator is short-time rated. The
Operation method Motor driven Motor driven number of continuous switching (ON-OFF) cycles
Operating time, s ON 1.2 2.0 must not exceed 10. After any 10 continuous
at rated voltage switching cycles, provide a pause of at least 15
OFF/RESET 0.85 ④⑤ 1.6 ④⑤
minutes to the motor operator for cooling.
Operating switch ratings 250V, 5A 250V, 5A
Power supply required ⑥ Can be custom-made on request. The outline
100 VA or higher 300VA or higher
dimensions of the motor operator will be larger. An
Dielectric withstand voltage (for one AC1000V AC1000V auto-reset switch cannot be used. Contact us for
minute)
details.
Weight 1.8 16
6-26
Operation mechanism
Motorized operation
■Breaker ON
Closing the ON switch throws the motor switch from contact status “1-2” to “3-2”, thereby activating the X relay and energizing the motor opera-
tor to turn the breaker ON. When the breaker turns ON, the motor switch is thrown from contact status “3-2” to “1-2”, thereby releasing the X
relay to de-energize and stop the motor operator.
■Breaker OFF
Closing the OFF/RESET switch throws the motor switch from contact status “3-2” to “1-2”, thereby activating the Y relay and energizing the
motor operator to turn the breaker OFF. When the breaker turns OFF, the motor switch is thrown from contact status “1-2” to “3-2”, thereby
releasing the Y relay to de-energize and stop the motor operator.
■Breaker RESET
To reset the tripped breaker to the OFF position, close the OFF/RESET switch.
■Breaker auto-reset (optional)
Using the AUTO RESET auxiliary switch (1b) of the breaker allows resetting the breaker automatically when the breaker trips open.
Note: Do not use a normally closed switch as the ON switch. Doing so will result in “ON-TRIP-RESET-ON” cycles repeated unless the cause of tripping is removed.
Manual operation
Mount the operating handle onto the mounting shaft located on the front of the motor operator and rotate the shaft to turn the breaker ON or
OFF. Rotating the handle anti-clockwise turns ON the breaker and clockwise turns OFF or resets the breaker. When the operating handle is
mounted, the motorized operation mechanism is disengaged. Removing the handle engages the motorized operation mechanism to enable motor-
ized operation.
■Handle switch
With the addition of a handle switch, the motor operator mechanism can be automatically brought to the manually operated position (ON or
OFF) on removal of the handle, providing that the motor operator is powered up.
Operation precautions
¡When the breaker is ON and is then tripped, the ON/OFF indicator on the motor operator will indicate ON until the breaker is reset.
Note: The breaker's condition may differ.
¡When a thermal-magnetic breaker is tripped by the thermal OCR, wait for a few minutes; then reset the breaker.
¡When a breaker equipped with the UVT device is in the OFF position and the UVT device is deenergized, the breaker cannot be closed. To
close such a breaker, perform ON and OFF (RESET) operation on the motor operator once and repeat ON operation. The breaker will be able
to closed.
(Breaker XS2000NE can be closed without the need for the ON and OFF (RESET) operation on the motor operator described above).
¡Use noise filters if the control power supply of the motor operator is shared by peripheral devices. Otherwise, power supply noise may cause
Control circuit diagrams of motor operators

XMB1 XMB10
6
• For AC and DC • For AC • For DC
Accessories
∼ ∼
SOURCE
− ＋
MOTOR M MOTOR M
OFF SW SW
RESET ON 2 5 8 2 5 8
1 3 4 6 7 9 1 3 4 6 7 9
D C B A
Y X Y X
AUTO RESET
SW
(OPTION) Xb Yb Xb Yb
Ya Ya
Xa Xa Xa Ya
Xa Ya
LIMIT HANDLE HANDLE
SW SW SW
Xa Ya Xa Ya
X
※R
AUTO RESET AUTO RESET

SW (OPTION) SW (OPTION)
X2 X1 A B C D E A B C D E
ON OFF ON OFF
E RESET RESET
Built in AC 200 – 220 V rated motor operators.
S OU R C E + SOURCE –
X: Relay, M: Motor
6-27
6
Accessories

4-3. TemBreak2, TemBreak
Spring charged type
Manual operating handle
Indicator
Lock plate
Control circuit terminal
(T2MCX6 / XMD9)
Ratings and Specifications Features

T2MCX6 XMD9 ★Clear status indication
Applicable breakers S1250-NE, S1250-GE, S1250-NN TL-1000NE, TL-1200NE
S1600-NE, S1600-NN Color indication: Red means ON, green OFF
Rated operational voltage ① ●AC100-115V and white TRIPPED.
●AC200-230V
●DC100-110V ★Quick closing
●DC24V
Energy in a charged spring closes the breaker
60 msec or less.
Peak steady-state/ AC100-115V ON —/3.1
High-speed, time-stable operation is ensured
starting current, A OFF, RESET 1.8/6.0 after multiple times of closing cycles.
2
AC200-230V ON —/1.2
OFF, RESET 1.0/3.2 ★Equipped with anti-pumping circuit
DC100-110V ON —/0.8
OFF, RESET 1.1/4.2
When the closing signal is applied, TRIP-
DC24V ON —/4.5 RESET-ON cycles are not repeated even
OFF, RESET 4.0/12.0 though the cause of tripping is in the breaker.
Operation method Spring charged
Operating time, s ON (Max) 0.06 ★Ease of manual ON-OFF operation
@ rated voltage OFF/RESET 3③
Power supply required 300VA Simply pressing the ON or OFF button closes
Dielectric withstand voltage (for one minute) AC1500V ④ or opens the breaker.
Weight 6.4kg
Notes: ★“Lock-in off” capability
1 : Permissible operating range
AC→85 to 110% This capability allows the breaker to be pad-
DC→75 to 110%
locked in the OFF state.
A power transformer is available as option for AC380V or AC400-460V.
2 : The currents shown are the maximum values at the maximum rated operational voltage. Padlocks are not supplied.
3 : The operating time is the value when the rated operational voltage is supplied. ø5.5
Allow a longer time for the motor operator to complete the operation.
4 : Dielectric withstand voltage for DC 24 V motor is AC 500 V.
6-28
Operation mechanism
Motorized operation
■Breaker ON
Closing the ON switch activates the latch release coil (LRC), thereby releasing the closing spring to turn the breaker ON.
■Breaker OFF (RESET)
Closing the OFF/RESET switch activates the (Y) control relay, thereby starting the motor to turn the breaker OFF. At the same time, the closing
spring is charged. The motor is deenergized when the breaker turns OFF (RESET).
■Breaker auto-reset (optional)
The auto-reset option uses an auto-reset switch (alarm switch) through which the closing spring is charged and the breaker is reset automatically
after the breaker trips open. This option both for XMD and T2MC will be factory wired.
Notes: 1. For S1250 and S1600, installable alarm switch will be only 1 piece.
2. When the breaker is equipped with the auto-reset option, a signal self-hold circuit is required because the signal provided by the alarm switch is a pulse.
3. Not applicable to thermal-magnetic breakers
Manual operation * Control circuit diagram (XMD series)

■Breaker ON . OFF (RESET)
Pulling down the operating lever turns the breaker ON and OFF/REST “OFF”
at
LS “ON”
at
spring
alternately. charged
spring
charged
The handle returns to the original position when released. Yc
LRC X Y
M
※With auto-charge/discharge feature: Yc
Xb Ya Ya
When manual ON operation is performed while the control power is
applied, the handle switch (HS) operates to discharge the closing spring. Xb
LS
Xa
“OFF” HS
“ON”
“ON” “OFF” at “OFF”
OFF operation causes the closing spring to be charged. at
spring
at
spring
at
MCCB:
MCCB:
ON orTRIP
at
locked
charged charged ON orTRIP Position
When manual ON or OFF operation is performed while the control power Position
is lost, and afterwards the control power is recovered, the closing spring is AUTO RESET
SWITCH
discharged or charged in the same manner as described above. ON
On
OFF (RESET)
Off (OPTION) MP1 MP2 E
Switch Switch
When the auto-charge/discharge action is in progress, mechanical noises E- E-
+ –
will be heard. The noises however do not mean a failure. HS:Handle switch
:Field coil
X:Anti-pumping relay SOURCE
Y:Motor drive relay :Resistor
LRC:Latch release coil (closing coil)
M:Motor
Operation Precautions
• Ensure that the actual operation voltage ranges from 85% to 110% for AC or 75% to 110% for DC of the rated one. 6
• The currents shown are the maximum values at the maximum rated operational voltage.
• When conducting the dielectric withstand voltage test, apply voltage between the control terminal group and ground. Ensure that the test Accessories
voltage does not exceed AC 1500 V (AC 500 V if the rated operation voltage is DC 24 V).
• If the breaker is equipped with the UVT device, ensure that the UVT device is reset before providing a closing signal to the breaker.
• It takes up to three seconds to complete motorized OFF operation. If the breaker requires to be immediately opened from a remote location in
an emergency, add the SHT or UVT device to the breaker for remote electrical tripping.
• When a thermal-magnetic breaker is tripped by the thermal OCR, wait for a few minutes; then reset the breaker.
• Make sure that the current and switching capacities of the operation switch are appropriate for the application.
• Avoid repeated and continuous applications of the operation power supply to the motor operator.
• Use noise filters if the control power supply of the motor operator is shared by peripheral devices. Otherwise, power supply noise may cause
• Be sure to apply power to control power terminal MP1. If the breaker is turned ON or OFF manually without power applied to MP1, the auto
charge/discharge feature is disabled, and thus the motor operator will not be activated next time. In such a case, applying the rated operation
voltage between control power terminals MP1 and MP2 will enable the auto charge/discharge feature.
6-29
6
Accessories
5. External operating handles

5-1. Breaker-mounted (field installable) (HB)
The external operating handle is a tool that allows the breaker installed in a switchboard to be operated from outside and complies with
IEC 60204-1.
The breaker-mounted type external operating handle is designed to be mounted directly to the breaker body.
■ Outer view
■ Mounting instructions
The external operating handle has not been mounted on the breakers.
For details on how to mount the handle, see the Operating Instructions packaged with the product.
[1] Mounting of external operating handle assembly Screw

• Make sure that the breaker is in the OFF position.
• Put the external operating handle assembly onto the breaker in
place so that the breaker handle is engaged with the handle
catch of the assembly. Slide lever
Tighten the screw to secure the handle assembly.

Breaker handle
OFF SIDE
Screw
[2] Installation of handle escutcheon and latch plate

• Drill holes in the panel according to the panel cutout Breaker
Dustproof packing (optional)
dimensions.
Sandwich the panel between the handle escutcheon and
latch plate and temporarily tighten using the supplied Handle frame
Gap
screws. Handle
• Close the panel. escutcheon
(Incorrect)
Make adjustment so that the gap between the handle
assembly and handle escutcheon is even and the assembly
is not inclined against the breaker. Handle
escutcheon
Breaker
■ Breaker mounting direction

The ON and OFF positions of the handle and the positions of drilled holes in the panel do not need to be changed depending on the breaker
mounting direction. The upper power supply type is standard. If a non-standard type is required, state the type when ordering.
R : Right U: Upper power supply type L: Left

power supply type (standard) power supply type
Power supply
Power supply
Power supply
Load
Load
Load
• For a change in mounting direction, see the Operating Instructions packaged with the product.
6-30
■ Panel lock mechanism ■ Toggle lock mechanism
The external operating handle keeps the panel door ¡Padlock (Standard) ¡Key lock (Optional)
locked when in the ‘ON’ position. There are two types, This mechanism allows the breaker Key locking is possible in the OFF
RESET, Open and OFF, Open. to be padlocked in the OFF position. Key lock is not available for
position. the breakers markde by 1 in the
(1) Reset, Open (Standard type) Padlocks are not supplied. following table.
The handle is turned to the ‘RESET/OPEN COVER’ Up to three padlocks can be
position to open the panel door. installed.
Dia. A Handle
(2) OFF, Open
The handle is turned to the OFF position to open the Panel lock release
panel door. Padlock dimensions (mm) Hook lever

Type of handle A Dia. Key lock
¡Panel lock release knob
T2HB 13 min ø5.5-8
The release knob enables the panel door to be opened
with the handle in the ‘ON’ position. To release: turn
the release knob in the direction of anti-clockwise with
a flat-bladed screwdriver.
■ Protection degree (IEC 60529)
¡Safety interlock (Standard)
IP30 standard specification
The safety interlock prevents the breaker from turning
IP50 optional, with a dust proof packing
ON as long as the panel is open. This interlock can be
IP55 special specification
released using the hook lever.
Possible combinations of breaker and external operating handle
Frame size Type of breaker Type of external operating handle Frame size Type of breaker Type of external operating handle
50 S50-SF T2HB16L ① 400 S400-CF
S50-GF T2HB12 S400-NF
100 S100-NF S400-NE
T2HB12 S400-GF
S100-GF
S400-GE
H100-NF T2HB25 T2HB40
S400-PF
L100-NF T2HB25
S400-PE
S100-NM H400-NE
T2HB12
S100-NN L400-NE
125 S125-SF T2HB16L ① S400-NN
S125-NF T2HB12 630 S630-CF
S125-GF T2HB12 S630-NF
6
H125-NF T2HB25 S630-NE
L125-NF T2HB25 S630-RF
S125-SN T2HB16L ① S630-RE
H630-NE
S125-NN T2HB12
225 L630-NE
E225-NF
S630-GN
S225-NF T2HB80
800 S800-CF
S225-GF
Accessories
S800-NF
S225-GE T2HB25 S800-NE
H225-NF S800-RF
L225-NF S800-RE
S225-NM H800-NE
250 E250-SF T2HB25L ① L800-NE
S250-SF T2HB25L ① S800-NN
1250 S1250-NE
S250-NF T2HB25
S1250-GE
S250-GF T2HB25
S1250-NN T2HBX6
S250-SN T2HB25L ① 1600 S1600-NE
S1600-NN
Note 1 : Key lock is not available.
■ To be stated when ordering

Order code T2HB12 U R 3 B T
Type of external operating handle Breaker mounting direction Panel lock Protection degree Colour Key lock
T2HB12 T2HB16L U: Upper power supply type ✽ R : RESET open ✽ 3 : IP30 ✽ B : Black handle (Light gray base) ✽ W : with key lock
T2HB25 T2HB25L R: Right power supply type F : OFF open 5 : IP50 R : Red handle (Yellow base) T : without key lock ✽
T2HB40 T2HBX6 L: Left power supply type S : IP55 (special spec.)
T2HB80
✽: standard specification
6-31
6
Accessories
5. External operating handles ASL : Arrangement Standard Line

HL : Handle Frame Centre Line
CL : Handle Centre Line
■ Outline dimensions
T2HB16L
S50-SF
S125-SF S125-SN
¡Outline dimensions ¡Panel cutout dimensions
60
75 41.5 109±2
HL HL
4-ø10
ON
Handle escutcheon
Panel lock release

ø65
60
CL CL CL
75
Hook lever
Panel
Plate thickness
1.2-3.2
• Positions of the hinge and handle as seen

from the load side of the breaker.
Ensure that the hinge is positioned
in the area.
8
22
20
6.5
22
20
65 87.5
200 200
6-32
ASL : Arrangement Standard Line
T2HB25L
E250-SF S250-SF S250-SN
75 60
41.5 109±2
HL HL
4-ø10
ON Handle escutcheon
Panel lock release

ø65
60
CL CL CL
75
Hook lever
Panel
Plate thickness
1.2-3.2

in the area.
8
22
20
6.5
22
20
65 87.5
6
200 200
Accessories
6-33
6
Accessories

T2HB12
S50-GF
S100-NF S100-GF S100-NM S100-NN
S125-NF S125-GF S125-NN

Indicator
78
105 24 51 106±2
HL HL
4-ø10
TRIP
OFF
ø85
105
Hook lever
78
CL CL C
L
OPEN
RESET
Panel lock release
Key for key lock

(optional)
Panel Plate thickness Breaker
58 1.2-3.2

in the area.
17
14 22
55
15 5
5
6
80
150 150
200 200
6-34
T2HB25
Applicable breaker types A
E225-NF
S225-NF S225-NF S225-NM 106±2
E250-NF S250-NF S250-GF
H100-NF L100-NF
H225-NF L225-NF
141±2
S225-GE
H125-NF L125-NF

Indicator
105 78
24 51 A
HL HL
4-ø10
TRIP
OFF
ø85
105
Hook lever
78
CL CL C
L
OPEN
RESET
Panel lock release
Key for key lock

(optional)
Panel
Plate thickness Breaker
58 1.2-3.2

in the area.
17
14 22
55
15 5
5
6
80
200
150 150
200
6
Accessories
6-35
6
Accessories

T2HB40
Applicable breaker types A B
S400-CF S400-NF S400-NE S400-GF
150±2 97
S400-GE S400-PF S400-PE S400-NN
H400-NE L400-NE 187±2 134
¡Outline dimensions Indicator ¡Panel cutout dimensions

130 24 50 A 105
HL H
L
1.2-3.2
M6
15 4-ø10
TRIP
OFF
ø110
130
105
CL Hook lever C
L C
L
OPEN
RESET
Panel lock release
Key for key lock

(optional)
Panel
Breaker
B
200

in the area.
5
18 22
12 9
5
90 140
200 200
6-36
T2HB80
Applicable breaker types A
S630-CF S630-NF S630-RF S630-NE S630-RE S630-GN
150±2
S800-CF S800-NF S800-RF S800-NE S800-RE S800-NN
H630-NE L630-NE
187±2
H800-NE L800-NE
¡Outline dimensions Indicator ¡Panel cutout dimensions

HL HL 4-ø10
1.2-3.2
Handle escutcheon
ø1
10
Hook lever
130
105
CL CL CL
Panel lock
release
130 10 24 50 A 105

HL
in the area.
18 22
12 9
5
6
90 140
200 200
Accessories
6-37
6
Accessories

5-2. Breaker-mounted (HB)
The external operating handle is a tool that allows the breaker installed in a switchboard to be operated from outside.
The breaker-mounted type external operating handle is designed to be mounted directly to the breaker body.
■ Outer view
ON OFF
■ Mounting instructions
The external operating handle has not been mounted on the breakers.
For details on how to mount the handle, see the Operating Instructions packaged with the product.
[1] Mounting of external operating handle assembly [2] Installation of handle escutcheon and latch plate
1.1 Secured to backing plate (TFJ21B / TFJ21XH) • Drill holes in the panel according to the panel cutout dimensions.
Sandwich the panel between the handle escutcheon and latch
• Make sure that the breaker is in the OFF position. plate and temporarily tighten using the supplied screws.
• Put the external operating handle assembly onto the breaker in • Close the panel.
place so that the breaker toggle is engaged with the slide lever of Make adjustment so that the gap between the handle assembly
the assembly. Secure the assembly together with the breaker to and handle escutcheon is even and the assembly is not inclined
the backing plate. against the breaker.
Slide lever Breaker

Panel
Breaker Toggle Handle frame

Gap
Handle
escutcheon
(Incorrect)
Handle
1.2 Secured to breaker cover (TFJ38X / T2HBX6) Hook holder escutcheon
• Make sure that the breaker is in the OFF position. Handle

• Remove the four breaker cover mounting screws at the positions escutcheon
Breaker
where the external operating handle assembly is secured.
• Put the handle assembly onto the breaker in place so that the
breaker toggle is engaged with the slide lever of the assembly.
Use the supplied mounting screws to secure the assembly to the
breaker.

The ON and OFF positions of the handle and the positions of drilled holes in the panel do not need to be changed depending on the breaker
mounting direction. The upper power supply type is standard. If a non-standard type is required, state the type when ordering.
R : Right U: Upper power supply type L: Left

power supply type (standard) power supply type
Power supply
Power supply
Power supply
Load
Load
Load
• For a change in mounting direction, see the Operating Instructions packaged with the product.
6-38
The external operating handle keeps the panel door locked when in ¡Padlock (Standard)
the ‘ON’ position. There are two types, RESET, Open and OFF, This mechanism allows the breaker to be padlocked in the ON or
Open. OFF position.
Padlocks are not supplied.
(1) Reset, Open (Standard type) Up to three padlocks can be installed.
The handle is turned to the ‘RESET/OPEN COVER’ position to
Padlock dimensions (mm)
open the panel door. Dia. A
Type of handle A Dia.
TFJ21B 13 min
(2) OFF, Open
TFJ38X ø3.5-6
The handle is turned to the OFF position to open the panel door. 19 min
T2HBX6
¡Panel lock release knob

The release knob enables the panel door to be opened with the
handle in the ‘ON’ position. To release: turn the release knob in
the direction of anti-clockwise with a flat-bladed screwdriver.
¡Safety interlock (Standard)

The safety interlock prevents the breaker from turning ON as long Padlock
as the panel is open. This interlock can be released using the hook
lever.
Handle
Panel lock release
Hook lever
■ Protection degree (IEC 60529)
IP30 standard specification

IP50 optional, with a dust proof packing
IP55 special specification
Dustoproof packing
Dustproof packing for IP50 (oprional) mm
6
Type of Type of dustproof A B C
handle packing
TFJ21B Dustproof packing /2 93 73 7
TFJ38X
Dustproof packing /3 145 117 7 B
T2HBX6 C A
Accessories
Type of external operating handle Type of breaker
TFJ21B E50-SF,E50-CM
TFJ21XH E100-SF
TFJ38X TL-1000NE,TL-1200NE
S1250-NE,S1250-GE,S1250-NN
T2HBX6
S1600-NE,S1600-NN
Order code TFJ38X U R 3 B
Type of external Breaker mounting Panel lock Protection degree Colour

operating handle direction
TFJ21B U: Upper power supply type ✽ R : RESET open ✽ 3 : IP30 ✽ B : Black handle (Black base) ✽
TFJ38X R: Right power supply type F : OFF open 5 : IP50 R : Red handle (Yellow base)
T2HBX6 L: Left power supply type
55 : IP55 (special spec.)
6-39
6
Accessories

T2HBX6
Applicable breaker types A (mm) Mounting screw ✽
S1250-NE, S1250-GE
197±2
S1250-NN M6×110, 4 pcs
S1600-NE, S1600-NN 217±2
✽ Secured to breaker cover.

150
HL HL
4-ø15
ø138
150
112
CL Hook lever CL CL
15
ASL
Panel lock release
Lock lever M8 screw

6 1.2-3.2t
51 A 18 112
77.3
83.7
210 HL
H>0
H>0
Toggle extension for T2HBX6 (optional)
Left hinge Right hinge
250
Order Code
26 T2HAX6
28
41 3H+70 3H+130
6-40
TFJ21B TFJ21XH
Applicable breaker types Mounting screw Applicable breaker types Mounting screw
E50-SF, E50-CM M4×72, 2 pcs E100-SF M4×75, 2 pcs
✽ Secured to backing plate. ✽ Secured to backing plate.
¡Outline dimensions ¡Panel cutout dimensions ¡Relative positions of the hinge

and handle as seen from the
Plate thickness1.2-3.2 load side of the breaker
105 Breaker HL
HL
HL Panel
Handle escutcheon
105
78
0
CL CL CL , ASL
H>0
0>H
Hook lever
ø9
Panel lock
release
4-ø15
Lock lever (5H+100) min (5H+100) min
61 max 43 106±2 78
6
Accessories
6-41
6
Accessories

TFJ38X
Applicable breaker types Mounting screw ✽
TL-1000NE
M6×110, 4 pcs
TL-1200NE
✽ Secured to breaker cover.

Plate thickness1.2-3.2
150 Breaker
H
L Panel H
L
Handle escutcheon
15
38
C C CL
150
112
L L
ø1
Hook lever
ASL
Panel lock release

4-ø15
Lock lever
84 max 51 217±2 112
H
L
¡Relative positions of the hinge
and handle as seen from the
load side of the breaker
Toggle extension for TFJ38X (optional)

H >0
0> H
250
Order code
26 THC5
28
41
(3H+70) min (3H+130) min
6-42
5-3. Door-mounted (depth adjustable) (HP)
Door-mounted type external operating handles allow breakers installed in control centers or switchboards to be manually operated from outside
and complies with IEC 60204-1.
This handle assembly consists of an operation mechanism section which is to be installed in the breaker body, a handle section which is to be
installed in a panel and a square shaft which couples both the sections.
■ Outer view
■ Operation direction of handles

Rotate the operating handle clockwise to turn the
breaker on.
Rotate clockwise
to turn the breaker ON

6
The ON and OFF positions of the handle and the positions of drilled holes in the panel do
not need to be changed depending on the breaker mounting direction. Accessories
Horizontal mounting / Vertical mounting / Horizontal mounting /
ON to move the breaker handle right ON to move the breaker handle up ON to move the breaker handle left
Line (ON)
ON ON ON
TRIP TRIP TRIP

Line (ON)
Line (ON)
OFF OFF OFF
OPEN OPEN OPEN
RESET RESET RESET
6-43
6
Accessories

The external operating handle keeps the panel door locked when in ¡Padlock (Standard)
the ‘ON’ position. There are two types, RESET, Open and OFF, This mechanism allows the breaker to be padlocked in the OFF
Open. position.
Padlocks are not supplied.
(1) Reset, Open (Standard type) Up to three padlocks can be installed.
The handle is turned to the ‘RESET/OPEN COVER’ position to Padlock dimensions (mm)
open the panel door. Dia A
Type of handle A Dia.
T2HP 13 min ø5.5-8
(2) OFF, Open
The handle is turned to the OFF position to open the panel door.
¡Panel lock release knob ¡Key lock (Optional)

The release knob enables the panel door to be opened with the Key locking is possible in the OFF position.
handle in the ‘ON’ position. To release: turn the release knob in
the direction of anti-clockwise with a flat-bladed screwdriver.
■ Protection degree (IEC 60529) ■ Dimensions of square shafts available

IP54 standard specification There are the following shaft dimensions available. Select an appro-
IP65 special specification priate shaft depending on the mounting position of the breaker. Cut
the shaft to an appropriate length if required. Coat the cut end faces
of the shaft with an anti-corrosion paint.
LB
LB
LA
Shafts order codes LA (mm) LB (mm)
T2PS251 121
T2PS252 221
8
T2PS253 321
T2PS254 421
T2PS401 147.5
T2PS402 247.5
14
T2PS403 347.5
T2PS404 447.5

Order code T2HP25 R 5 B T
Type of external operating handle Panel lock Protection degree Colour Key lock
T2HP12 T2HP16L R : RESET open ✽ 5 : IP54 ✽ B : Black handle (Light gray base) ✽ W : with key lock
T2HP25 T2HP25L F : OFF open 6 : IP65 R : Red handle (Yellow base) T : without key lock ✽
T2HP40 T1HP05
T2HP80 T1HP10
T2HPX6 T1HPX6
6-44
Frame Type of external

Type of breaker
size operating handle
50 E50-SF, E50-CM T1HP05

S50-SF T2HP16L
S50-GF T2HP12
100 E100-SF T1HP10X
S100-NF
T2HP12
S100-GF
H100-NF
T2HP25
L100-NF
S100-NM
T2HP12
S100-NN
125 S125-SF T2HP16L
S125-NF
T2HP12
S125-GF
H125-NF
T2HP25
L125-NF
S125-SN T2HP16L
S125-NN T2HP12
225 E225-NF
S225-NF
S225-GF
S225-GE T2HP25
H225-NF
L225-NF
S225-NM
250 E250-SF
T2HP25L
S250-SF
S250-NF
T2HP25
S250-GF
S250-SN T2HP25L
400 S400-CF
S400-NF
S400-NE
S400-GF
S400-GE
T2HP40
S400-PF
S400-PE
H400-NE
L400-NE
S400-NN
630 S630-CF
S630-NF
S630-RF
S630-NE
S630-RE
H630-NE
L630-NE
S630-GN
T2HP80
6
800 S800-CF
S800-NF
S800-RF Accessories
S800-NE
S800-RE
H800-NE
L800-NE
S800-NN
1000 TL-1000NE T1HPX6
1200 TL-1200NE T1HPX6
1250 S1250-NE
S1250-GE
S1250-NN T2HPX6
1600 S1600-NE
S1600-NN
6-45
6
Accessories

T2HP16L
¡Outline dimensions
24 51 A
105
HL 31 D
1.2-3.2
Handle escutcheon
ON
TRIP
OFF
105
CL
OPEN
RESET
Panel lock release
B
Key for key lock Panel
(optional) C
M5 (Nominal size of Allen key applicable: 2.5)

¡Panel cutout dimensions
78
HL • Positions of the hinge and handle as seen

in the area.
20
20
ø85
78
CL
12
12
28
28
100 100
150 150
4-ø10 200 200
Applicable breaker types A① B C D Square shaft applicable Shaft support

S50-SF 229 min. 56 107 186 Yes
T2PS251
S125-SF S125-SN 243 max. 70 121 186 Yes
343 max. 170 221 186 T2PS252 Yes
443 max. 270 321 186 T2PS253
Yes
543 max. 370 421 186 T2PS254
Note q:
“Min (minimum)” means the minimum possible distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface, which can be formed by cutting the square shaft.
“Max (maximum)” means the maximum distance of the same section, which is formed with no cutting of the square shaft.
A: Distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface

B: Length of the tube used to cover the square shaft
C: Length of the square shaft used
D: Distance from the tip of the shaft support to the breaker mounting surface
6-46
T2HP25L
24 51 A
105
HL 31 D
1.2-3.2
Handle escutcheon
ON
TRIP
OFF
105
CL
OPEN
RESET
Panel lock release
B
(optional) C

78
HL
in the area.
20
20
ø85
78
CL
12
12
28
28
100 100
150 150
4-ø10 200 200

6
E250-SF S250-SF S250-SN 229 min. 56 107 186 Yes
T2PS251
243 max. 70 121 186 Yes
343 max. 170 221 186 T2PS252 Yes Accessories
443 max. 270 321 186 T2PS253
Yes
543 max. 370 421 186 T2PS254
Note q:
“Min (minimum)” means the minimum possible distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface, which can be
formed by cutting the square shaft.

6-47
6
Accessories

T2HP12
¡Outline dimensions Indicator
24 51 A
105
HL 31 D
1.2-3.2
Handle escutcheon
ON
TRIP
OFF
105
CL
OPEN
RESET
Panel lock release

B
C
(optional)
78
HL
in the area.
20
20
ø85
78
CL
12
12
28
28
100 100
150 150
4-ø10 200 200

S50-GF 229 min. 56 107 186 Yes
T2PS251
S100-NF S100-GF S100-NM 243 max. 70 121 186 Yes
S100-NN S125-NF S125-GF 343 max. 170 221 186 T2PS252 Yes
S125-NN 443 max. 270 321 186 T2PS253
Yes
543 max. 370 421 186 T2PS254
Note q:

6-48
T2HP25
¡Outline dimensions Indicator
24 51 A
105
HL 31 D
1.2-3.2
Handle escutcheon
ON
TRIP
OFF
105
CL
OPEN
RESET
Panel lock release

B
C

(optional)
78
HL

in the area.
20
20
ø85
78
CL
12
12
28
28
100 100
150 150
4-ø10 200 200

6
E225-NF S225-NF S225-GF 229 min. 56 107 186 Yes
T2PS251
S250-NF S250-GF 243 max. 70 121 186 Yes
343 max. 170 221 186 T2PS252 Yes Accessories
443 max. 270 321 186 T2PS253
Yes
543 max. 370 421 186 T2PS254
S225-GE 264 min. 56 107 221 Yes
T2PS251
H100-NF L100-NF H125-NF 278 max. 70 121 221 Yes
H225-NF L225-NF L125-NF 378 max. 170 221 221 T2PS252 Yes
478 max. 270 321 221 T2PS253
Yes
578 max. 370 421 221 T2PS254
Note q:

6-49
6
Accessories

T2HP40
Indicator
A
130 24 51 34 D
HL
1.2-3.2
M6
Handle escutcheon 15
ON
TRIP
OFF
130
CL C
L
OPEN
RESET
Key for key lock
(optional)
100
Panel lock release C
M6 (Nominal size of Allen key applicable: 3)

105
H
L
in the area.
4-ø10
20
20
12
10
28
28
ø1
12
105
C
L
100 100
150 150
200 200

S400-CF S400-NF S400-NE 270 min. 12 107.5 ――
T2PS401 Non
S400-GF S400-GE S400-PF 310 max.② 52 147.5 ――
S400-PE S400-NN 340 min.② 10 177.5 261
T2PS402 Yes
410 max. 80 247.5 261
510 max. 180 347.5 261 T2PS403 Yes
610 max. 280 447.5 261 T2PS404 Yes
H400-NE 307 min. 12 107.5 ――
T2PS401 Non
L400-NE 347 max.③ 52 147.5 ――
377 min.③ 10 177.5 298
T2PS402 Yes
447 max. 80 247.5 298
547 max. 180 347.5 298 T2PS403 Yes
647 max. 280 447.5 298 T2PS404 Yes
Notes:
q. “Min (minimum)” means the minimum possible distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface, which can be formed by cutting the square shaft.
w. When dimension A is in a range of 310 mm to 340 mm, cut square shaft T2PS402 to an appropriate length and use the shaft without shaft support.
e. When dimension A is in a range of 347mm to 377mm, cut square shaft T2PS402 to an appropriate length and use the shaft without shaft support.

6-50
T2HP80
A
¡Outline dimensions 24 51 34
1.2-3.2 D
HL
Handle escutcheon Indicator
Shaft support
105
CL CL
100
C
Key for key lock
(optional)
Panel lock release

105 M6 (Nominal size of Allen key applicable: 3)
¡Panel cutout dimensions • Positions of the hinge and handle as seen

HL from the load side of the breaker.
HL 4-ø10
in the area.
12
12
ø1
10
20
20
28
28
105
CL
100 100
150 150
200 200
105
6
Accessories
S630-CF S630-NF S630-RF 270 min. 12 107.5 —
T2PS401 Non
S630-NE S630-RE S630-GN 310 max.② 52 147.5 —
S800-CF S800-NF S800-RF 340 min.② 10 177.5 261
T2PS402
S800-NE S800-RE S800-NN 410 max. 80 247.5 261
Yes
510 max. 180 347.5 261 T2PS403
610 max. 280 447.5 261 T2PS404
H630-NE L630-NE 307 min. 12 107.5 —
T2PS401 Non
H800-NE L800-NE 347 max.③ 52 147.5 —
377 min.③ 10 177.5 298
T2PS402
447 max. 80 247.5 298
Yes
547 max. 180 347.5 298 T2PS403
647 max. 280 447.5 298 T2PS404
Notes:
w. When dimension A is in a range of 310 mm to 340 mm, cut square shaft T2PS402 to an appropriate length and use the shaft without shaft support.
e. When dimension A is in a range of 347mm to 377mm, cut square shaft T2PS402 to an appropriate length and use the shaft without shaft support.

6-51
6
Accessories

T2HPX6
4P
3P
130
HL
A
24 51 34 D
1.2-3.2
Handle
escutcheon
Shaft support
130
CL C
L
100
Panel lock B
release
C
M8 mounting screw
Key for key lock
(optional) M6 (Nominal size of Allen key applicable: 3)
18

4P from the load side of the breaker.
3P Ensure that the hinge is positioned
in the area.
H
L
20
12
20
28
28
12
4-ø10
100 100
150 150
200 200
10
ø1
15
105
C
L
ASL
105

S1250-NE S1250-GE S1250-NN 367min. 52 147.5 317 T2PS401 Non
467max. 80 247.5 317 T2PS402
567max. 180 347.5 317 T2PS403 Yes
667max. 280 447.5 317 T2PS404
S1600-NE S1600-NN 387min. 52 147.5 337 T2PS401 Non
487max. 80 247.5 337 T2PS402
587max. 180 347.5 337 T2PS403 Yes
687max. 280 447.5 337 T2PS404
Note q:
A: Distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface B: Length of the tube used to cover the square shaft
C: Length of the square shaft used D: Distance from the tip of the shaft support to the breaker mounting surface
6-52
T1HP05, T1HP10X
24 51 A
105
HL 31 D
1.2-3.2
Handle escutcheon
ON
TRIP
OFF
105
CL
OPEN
RESET
Panel lock release

B
C
(optional)
78
HL
in the area.
5
ø8
20
20
78
CL
12
12
28
28
100 100
150 150
200 200
4-ø10
E50-SF, E50-CM（T1HP05）
E100-SF（T1HP10X）
Applicable breaker types A①
236min.
250max.
B
56
70
C
107
121
D
194
194
Square shaft applicable
T2PS251
Shaft support
Yes
Yes
6
350max. 170 221 194 T2PS252 Yes
450max. 270 321 194 T2PS253 Yes
Accessories
550max. 370 421 194 T2PS254 Yes
Note q:

6-53
6
Accessories

T1HPX6
4P
3P
130
HL A
24 51 34 D
1.2-3.2
Handle
escutcheon
ON
TRIP
OFF
130
CL C
L
OPEN
RESET
100
Panel lock B
release C
M8 mounting screw
Key for key lock M6 (Nominal size of Allen key applicable: 3)
(optional)
18

¡Panel cutout dimensions ¡Mounting dimensions from the load side of the breaker.
4P Ensure that the hinge is positioned
in the area.
3P
H
L 4P
3P
H
L 4-ø9
20
20
12
28
28
12
4-ø10
100 100
184
150 150
200 200
10
ø1 ASL
15
105
C
L
ASL
154
70
105

TL-1000NE TL-1200NE 387min. 52 147.5 337 T2PS401 Non
487max. 80 247.5 337 T2PS402 Yes
587max. 180 347.5 337 T2PS403 Yes
687max. 280 447.5 337 T2PS404 Yes
Notes:
A: Distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface B: Length of the tube used to cover the square shaft
C: Length of the square shaft used D: Distance from the tip of the shaft support to the breaker mounting surface
6-54
(4) Door-mounted (depth fixed) (HP)
Door-mounted type external operating handles allow breakers installed in control centers or switchboards to be manually operated from outside.
■ Outer view ■ Operation mechanism

Nameplate
ON
Turn the handle clockwise to the ‘ON’ position on the indication
plate.
Panel lock
release
Handle OFF
Turn the handle anti-clockwise to the ‘OFF’ position on the indica-
Padlock (not supplied)
tion plate.
Colour: Black
RESET
When the breaker trips, the handle indicates tripped turn the handle
anti-clockwise to the RESET position. This will reset the breaker.
OPENING THE PANEL

Turn the handle anti-clockwise to ‘OPEN COVER’. The lock is
released and the panel can be opened.
■ Panel lock mechanism

The external operating handle keeps the panel door locked when
in the ‘ON’, ‘OFF’ or ‘TRIP’ position. ■ Toggle lock mechanism
Hook holder shown in the outline dimension drawing should be
¡Padlock (Standard)
provided.
This mechanism allows the breaker to be padlocked in the ON
or OFF position.
• Panel lock release knob Padlocks are not supplied.
When the release knob is turned clockwise the panel door can be Up to three padlocks can be installed.
opened irrespective of the handle being in the ‘ON’, ‘OFF’ or
‘TRIP’ position. Padlock dimensions
ø8
6
Accessories
XFE10
XS2000NE XS2000NN
CL 180
CL
Panel
CL 20 160
130 Panel
Mounting hole ø11
Mounting plate
25

for indication plate
ø42
55
ASL Hook holder

130
220
260
CL CL CL
295
(not supplied)
57.5
Hook holder
Hook
ø13
195
Release
28
140
HL
78 80 173.2 150
(Rear type)
6-55
6
Accessories
6. Terminal covers CF/CR/CS

Terminal covers prevent live parts of the breaker from being exposed to the external environment. There are three types of terminal covers avail-
able: CF for front-connected breakers, CR for rear-connected and plug-in breakers, and CS for front-connected breakers with cable clamps. Select
appropriate terminal covers depending on the type and application of the breaker.
(1) CF for front-connected breakers
A C
Plug-in mounted version

This version can be mounted simply
B
by being plugged in the breaker body.
ø4
Hole for Megger
measurement
(at each terminal)

• Please state the order codes on the next page. One set includes one terminal cover for the ON side and one for the OFF side.
• For the terminal covers for 1250AF, please order with the breakers.
A C Screw-mounted version
The terminal covers for 630 to 800AF
D are mounted to the breakers using
tapping screws.
The terminal cover for 1250AF is
mounted to insert nuts of the breaker
cover using screws. The insert nuts do
not come standard with the breaker.
B
Please be sure to state “with terminal

cover (CF)” when ordering the
breaker.
Mounting screw
ø4
Hole for Megger
measurement
(at each terminal)
6-56
Types and dimensions of terminal covers, units in mm
CF for front-connected breakers
Frame Terminal cover A B C D Colour of cover Mounting version
size Types of breakers G:Gray Plug-in Screw-
(A) Size Note: Order codes 1 Marking codes 2 poles 3 poles 4 poles 2/3 poles 4 poles 2/3 poles 4 poles 2/3 poles 4 poles C’:Clear mounted mounted
50 E50-SF, E50-CM Large
TPR1S＊G
50 75 30 63 58.5
G
― ― ― ― ―
TPR1S＊C C’
○ ―
TPT1S＊G G
Small ― 50 75 ― 2.5 ― 63 ― 61 ―
TPT1S＊C C’
S50-SF T2CF16L＊SLNG G
Large ― 50 75 ― 50 ― 61 ― 60.3 ―
T2CF16L＊SLNC C’
○ ―
T2CF16L＊SSNG G
Small ― 50 75 ― 25 ― 61 ― 60.3 ―
T2CF16L＊SSNC C’
S50-GF T2CF12＊SLNG G
Large T2CF12＊SL ― 90 120 40 40 48 48 46 46
T2CF12＊SLNC C’
○ ―
T2CF12＊SSNG G
Small T2CF12＊SS ― 90 120 22 22 48 48 47 47
T2CF12＊SSNC C’
100 E100-SF Large
XPR1＊G
49 74 30 63 54
G
― ― ― ― ―
XPR1＊C C’
○ ―
TPT1＊G G
Small ― 49 74 ― 2 ― 63 ― 54 ―
TPT1＊C C’
S100-NF, S100-GF T2CF12＊SLNG G
Large T2CF12＊SL 60 90 120 40 40 48 48 46 46
S100-NM, S100-NN T2CF12＊SLNC C’
○ ―
T2CF12＊SSNG G
Small T2CF12＊SS 60 90 120 22 22 48 48 47 47
T2CF12＊SSNC C’
H100-NF, L100-NF T2CF25＊LLNG G
Large ② T2CF25＊LL ― 105 140 55 55 89 89 87 87 ○ ―
T2CF25＊LLNC C’
125 S125-SF, S125-SN Large
T2CF16L＊SLNG
50 75 100 50 50 61 61 60.3 60.3
G
⑥ ―
T2CF16L＊SLNC C’
○ ―
T2CF16L＊SSNG G
Small ⑥ ― 50 75 100 25 25 61 61 60.3 60.3
T2CF16L＊SSNC C’
S125-NF, S125-GF T2CF12＊SLNG G
Large T2CF12＊SL 60 90 120 40 40 48 48 46 46
S125-NN T2CF12＊SLNC C’
○ ―
T2CF12＊SSNG G
Small T2CF12＊SS 60 90 120 22 22 48 48 47 47
T2CF12＊SSNC C’
Large ② T2CF25＊LL ― 105 140 55 55 89 89 87 87 ○ ―
T2CF25＊LLNC C’
225 E225-NF, S225-NF Large
T2CF25＊SLNG
T2CF25＊SL 105 140 55 55 54 54 52 52
G
② ― ○ ―
250 S225-GF, S225-NM T2CF25＊SLNC C’
T2CF25＊SSNG G
Small ② T2CF25＊SS ― 105 140 29 29 54 54 53.5 53.5 ○ ―
T2CF25＊SSNC C’
Large ② T2CF25＊LL ― 105 140 55 55 89 89 87 87 ○ ―
S225-GE T2CF25＊LLNC C’
E250-SF T2CF25L＊SSNG G
Small T2CF25L＊SS 105 105 ― 29 ― 59 ― 57.5 ―
T2CF25L＊SSNC C’
T2CF25L＊SWNG G
Large ③ T2CF25L＊SW 147.5 147.5 ― 55 ― 59 ― 57.5 ―
T2CF25L＊SWNC C’
T2CF25L＊SLNG G
Large T2CF25L＊SL 105 105 ― 55 ― 59 ― 57.5 ―
T2CF25L＊SLNC C’
○ ―
S250-SF, S250-SN T2CF25L＊SSNG G
Small T2CF25L＊SS 105 105 140 29 29 59 59 57.5 57.5
T2CF25L＊SSNC C’
T2CF25L＊SWNG G
Large ③ T2CF25L＊SW 147.5 147.5 196 55 55 59 59 57.5 57.5
T2CF25L＊SWNC C’
T2CF25L＊SLNG G
Large T2CF25L＊SL 105 105 140 55 55 59 59 57.5 57.5
T2CF25L＊SLNC C’
S250-NF, S250-GF Large
Small
②
②
T2CF25＊SLNG
T2CF25＊SLNC
T2CF25＊SSNG
T2CF25＊SSNC
T2CF25＊SL
T2CF25＊SS
―
―
105
105
140
140
55
29
55
29
54
54
54
54
52
53.5
52
53.5
G
C’
G
C’
○
○
―
―
6
400 S400-CF, S400-NF T2CF40＊SWNG G
S400-GF Large ③ ⑥ T2CF40＊SW ― 180 240 110 114 97 98 96 98 ○ ―
T2CF40＊SWNC C’
S400-NE, S400-GE
T2CF40＊SLNG G
S400-PF, S400-PE
Accessories
Large T2CF40＊SL ― 140 185 85 85 97 97 94.5 94.5 ○ ―
S400-NN T2CF40＊SLNC C’
H400-NE, L400-NE T2CF40＊SWNG G
Large ③ ④ T2CF40＊SW ― 180 240 110 114 134 135 96 98 ○ ―
⑥ T2CF40＊SWNC C’
T2CF40＊SLNG G
Large ④ T2CF40＊SL ― 140 185 85 85 134 134 94.5 94.5 ○ ―
T2CF40＊SLNC C’
630 S630-CF, S630-NF T2CF80＊SLG G
99.5 99.5 99 99
S630-RF, S630-NE Large ⑤ TPR-5BA ― 215 285 130 130 ― ○
T2CF80＊SLC （102）（102）（101.5）（101.5） C’
S630-RE, S630-GN
H630-NE, L630-NE T2CF80＊SLG 136.5 136.5 99 99 G
Large ④ ⑤ TPR-5BA ― 215 285 130 130 ― ○
T2CF80＊SLC （139）（139）（101.5）（101.5） C’
800 S800-CF, S800-NF T2CF80＊SLG G
99.5 99.5 99 99
S800-RF, S800-NE Large ⑤ TPR-5BA ― 215 285 130 130 ― ○
T2CF80＊SLC （102）（102）（101.5）（101.5） C’
S800-RE, S800-GN
H800-NE, L800-NE T2CF80＊SLG 136.5 136.5 99 99 G
Large ④ ⑤ TPR-5BA ― 215 285 130 130 ― ○
T2CF80＊SLC （139）（139）（101.5）（101.5） C’
1250 S1250-NE, S1250-GE ― 99 99 G
Large ⑤ ⑥ TPR-5BA ― 215 285 130 130 115 115 ― ○
― （102.5）（102.5） C’
Notes:
①. The asterisk indicates the number of poles. Please state the number of poles at the ⑤. Values in parentheses indicate the distance to the head of terminal cover mounting
asterisk position when ordering. screws.
②. Not applicable to 3-pole breakers with extension bars. ⑥. For 4 poles, Gray colour only.
③. Applicable to 3-pole breakers with spread extension bars. (1) Terminal covers for motor protection breakers are 3-pole type only.
④. There will be an approx. 40 mm gap between the bottom of the terminal cover and the (2) Terminal covers for switch-disconnectors are 3-pole and 4-pole type only.
breaker mounting surface.
6-57
6
Accessories
6. Terminal covers CF/CR/CS

CS for front-connected breakers with cable clamps
C
A
D
B’
Plug-in mounted version
B
This version can be mounted simply

by being plugged in the breaker body.
ø4
Hole for Megger
measurement
(at each terminal)

• Please state “with CR” if ordering along with the breaker.
• Please state the order codes on the next page if ordering separately from the breaker.
One set includes one terminal cover for the ON side and one for the OFF side.
E C
Screw-mounted version
A
The terminal covers for 630 to 800AF
D are mounted to the breakers using
tapping screws.
ø4 Mounting
Hole for Megger screw
measurement
B
ø4
Hole for Megger
measurement
(at each terminal)
6-58
Types and dimensions of terminal covers, units in mm
CR for rear-connected and plug-in breakers
Terminal cover A B C D Mounting version
Frame size Colour of cover
Types of breakers B'
(A) Order codes 1 Marking codes 2 poles 3 poles 4 poles 2/3 poles 4 poles 2/3 poles 4 poles 2/3 poles 4 poles G: Gray Plug-in mounted Screw-mounted
50 S50-SF T2CR12L＊SG ― 50 75 ― 5.5 ― ― 61 ― 60.3 ― G ○ ―

S50-GF T2CR12＊SG T2CR12＊S ― 90 120 2 2 6 41.5 41.5 40.5 40.5 G ○ ―
100 S100-NF, S100-GF T2CR12＊SG T2CR12＊S 60 90 120 2 2 6 41.5 41.5 40.5 40.5 G
S100-NM, S100-NN ○ ―
H100-NF, L100-NF T2CR25＊SG T2CR25＊S ― 105 140 2 2 6 77.5 77.5 39.5 39.5 G ○ ―
125 S125-SF, S125-SN T2CR12L＊SG ― 50 75 100 5.5 5 ― 61 61 60.3 60.3 G ○ ―
S125-NF, S125-GF T2CR12＊SG T2CR12＊S 60 90 120 2 2 6 41.5 41.5 40.5 40.5 G ○ ―
H125-NF, L125-NF T2CR25＊SG T2CR25＊S ― 105 140 2 2 6 77.5 77.5 39.5 39.5 G ○ ―
225 E225-NF, S225-NF T2CR25＊SG T2CR25＊S ― 105 140 2 2 6 42.5 42.5 39.5 39.5 G
250 S225-GF, S225-NM ○ ―
H225-NF, L225-NF T2CR25＊SG T2CR25＊S ― 105 140 2 2 6 77.5 77.5 39.5 39.5 G
S225-GE ○ ―
E250-SF T2CR25L＊SG T2CR25L 105 105 ― 2.3 ― 5.3 58.6 ― 57.1 ― G ○ ―

S250-SF, S250-SN T2CR25L＊SG T2CR25L 105 105 140 2.3 2.3 5.3 58.6 58.6 57.1 57.1 G
○ ―
S250-NF, S250-GF T2CR25＊SG T2CR25＊S ― 105 140 2 2 6 77.5 77.5 39.5 39.5 G ○ ―
400 S400-CF, S400-NF T2CR40＊SG T2CR40＊S ― 140 185 3 3 4.5 97 97 93 93 G
S400-GF
S400-NE, S400-GE
○ ―
S400-PF, S400-PE
S400-NN
H400-NE, L400-NE T2CR40＊SG T2CR40＊S ― 140 185 3 3 4.5 134 134 93 93 G

③ ○ ―
Terminal cover A B E C② D② Mounting version

Frame size (To Colour of cover
Types of breakers
(A) Order codes 1 Marking codes 2 poles 3 poles 4 poles 2/3 poles 4 poles screw 2/3 poles 4 poles 2/3 poles 4 poles G: Gray Plug-in mounted Screw-mounted
head)
50 E50-SF, E50-CM TPS1S＊G ― 50 75 ― 2 ― 2.5 63 61
― ― G ○ ―
100 E100-SF XPS1＊G ― 49 74 ― 10 ― 2.5 63 ― 54 ― G ○ ―
630 S630-CF, S630-NF T2CR80＊SG XPS6 ― 206 280 14 18 （3.5） 101 99 100.5 98 G
S630-RF, S630-RE （103.5）（101.5）（103）（100.5） ― ○
S630-NE, S630-NN
H630-NE, L630-NE T2CR80＊LG ― ― 206 280 14 18 （3.5） 138 136 137.5 135 G
（140.5）（138.5）（140）（137.5） ― ○
800 S800-CF, S800-NF T2CR80＊SG XPS6 ― 206 280 14 18 （3.5） 101 99 100.5 98 G
S800-RF, S800-RE （103.5）（101.5）（103）（100.5） ― ○
S800-NE, S800-NN
H800-NE, L800-NE T2CR80＊LG ― ― 206 280 14 18 （3.5） 138 136 137.5 135 G
（140.5）（138.5）（140）（137.5） ― ○
Notes: (1) Terminal covers for motor protection breakers are 3-pole type only.
①. The asterisk indicates the number of poles. Please state the number of poles at the asterisk position when ordering. (2) Terminal covers for switch-disconnectors are 3-pole and 4-pole
One set includes one terminal cover fot the ON side and one for the OFF side.
②. Values in parentheses indicate the distance to the head of terminal cover mounting screws.
③. There will be an approx. 40 mm gap between the bottom of the terminal cover and the breaker mounting surface.
type only.
6
CS for front-connected with cable clamps breakers
Accessories
Terminal cover A Mounting version
Frame size Colour of cover
Types of breakers B B' C D
(A) Order codes 1 Marking codes 3 poles 4 poles G: Gray Plug-in mounted Screw-mounted
50 S50-GF T2CS12＊SG T2CS12＊S 90 120 2.5 6 61 59.5 G ○ ―

100 S100-NF, S100-GF T2CS12＊SG T2CR12＊S 90 120 2.5 6 61 59.5 G
S100-NM, S100-NN ○ ―
H100-NF, L100-NF T2CS25＊SG T2CS25＊S 105 140 2.5 6 96 59.5 G ○ ―

125 S125-NF, S125-GF T2CS12＊SG T2CS12＊S 90 120 2.5 6 61 59.5 G
S125-NN ○ ―
H125-NF, L125-NF T2CR25＊SG T2CR25＊S 105 140 2.5 6 96 5.5 G ○ ―

225 E225-NF, S225-NF T2CS25＊SG T2CS25＊S 105 140 2.5 6 61 59.5 G
S225-GF, S225-NM ○ ―
H225-NF, L225-NF T2CS25＊SG T2CS25＊S 105 140 2.5 6 96 59.5 G

S225-GE ○ ―
250 S250-NF, S250-GF T2CS25＊SG T2CS25＊S 105 140 2.5 6 61 59.5 G ○ ―

400 S400-CF, S400-NF T2CS40＊SG T2CS40＊S 140 185 3 5 97 93 G
S400-GF
S400-NE, S400-GE
○ ―
S400-PF, S400-PE
S400-NN
H400-NE, L400-NE T2CS40＊SG T2CS40＊S 140 185 3 5 134 93 G ○ ―

Notes:
①. The asterisk indicates the number of poles. Please state the number of poles at the asterisk position when ordering.
One set includes one terminal cover fot the ON side and one for the OFF side.
(1) Terminal covers for motor protection breakers are 3-pole type only.
6-59
6
Accessories
7. Interpole barriers (BA)

Interpole barriers serve to enhance electrical insulation between poles and prevent short-circuit due to electrically conductive foreign matter.
Combined use of interpole barriers and terminal covers (standard type) is not possible.
B • Slide interpole barriers into the grooves

2P 3P 4P located on the breaker.
HL HL HL
A
N
A
B
Black

Please state the type when ordering. One set contains two barriers.
Caution: Be sure to use the interpole barriers supplied with the breaker in order to prevent accidents.
Types and dimensions of interpole barriers, units in mm

Frame Interpole barrier
Types of breakers A B
size Type Code
50 E50-SF,E50-CM TQQ-2CC ― 36 50
S50-SF T2BA16L3SH ― 50 55
S50-GF T2BA123SH T2BA12S 47 53
100 E100-SF TQQ-2CC ― 36 50
S100-NF,S100-GF T2BA123SH T2BA12S 47 53
S100-NM,S100-NN
H100-NF,L100-NF T2BA253LH T2BA25L 100 88
125 S125-SF,S125-SN T2BA16L3SH ― 50 55
225 E225-NF,S225-NF T2BA253SH T2BA25S 100 53
250 S225-GF,S225-NM
S225-GE
E250-SF,S250-SF T2BA25L3SH T2BA25LS 101 53
S250-SN
400 T2BA403SH TQQ-5BA 110 95
S400-CF,S400-NF
S400-GF
S400-NE,S400-GE
S400-PF,S400-OE
H400-NE,L400-NE
630 S630-CF,S630-NF T2BA403SH TQQ-5BA 110 95
S630-RF,S630-NE
S630-RE,S630-GN
H630-NE,L630-NE
800 S800-CF,S800-NF T2BA403SH TQQ-5BA 110 95
S800-RF,S800-NE
S800-RE,S800-GN
H800-NE,L800-NE
1000 TL-1000NE TQQ-5BA TQQ-5BA 110 95
1200 TL-1200NE TQQ-5BA TQQ-5BA 110 95
1250 S1250-NE,S1250-GE T2BA403SH TQQ-5BA 110 95
S1250-NN
1600 S1600-NE,S1600-NN T2BA403SH TQQ-5BA 110 95
Note: Lime side interpole barriers are supplied as standard for all front connected breakres
except E50-SF, E50-CM and E100-SF.
6-60
8. Terminal blocks (TF)
6 terminals
Vertical leading type with 50/100A frame
Mounting position/typical terminal arrangement Dimensions, mm
Leading Frame Types of breakers A B
3/4 poles direction A size (A)
Left terminal Right terminal
arrangement arrangement 50 S50-GF 42.5 27
8 100 S100-NF,S100-GF
Ex. 1 Ex. 2 Ex. 1 Ex. 2 S100-NM,S100-NN 42.5 27
AXc1 AXc1
14.5 14.5 14.5 14.514.5
125 S125-NF,S125-GF,S125-NN 42.5 27

53
AXb1 AXb1 ON
AXa1 AXa1 C C Notes:

L L
AXc2 ALc1 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: 0.9 – 1.2 N • m
AXb2 ALb1
OFF
C1 D1 2) Applicable wire size: 1.25mm2 max
53
AXa2 ALa1 C2 D2 3) Horizontal leading type with max applicable wire size of 2.0 mm2 is
available on request. Contact us for details.
M3.5 screw
11.5 Terminal cover
Leading (clear) 40 B
direction 22
Leading
2 poles direction A
Right terminal
8 arrangement
Ex. 1 Ex. 2 Ex. 3 Ex. 4

AXc1 AXc1
14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5
53
ON AXb1 AXb1
C
L AXa1 AXa1 C
L
OFF
AXc2 ALc1
53
AXb2 ALb1 C1 D1
AXa2 ALa1 C2 D2
11.5 M3.5 screw Terminal cover

(clear) 40 B
22
11 terminals
8 Frame
6
Left terminal size (A)
Types of breakers A B C D Fig
Ａ
arrangement
Ｃ
16
3/4 poles 60 50 S50-GF (3/4 poles) 3 ― 0.5 40 1

Ex. 1 Ex. 2 3 0.5 40 2
100 S100-NF,S100-GF (2 poles) ① ―
12.5✕10
AXc1 AXc1
S100-NF,S100-GF
AXb1 AXb1 S100-NN (3/4 poles) 3 ― 0.5 40 1
AXa1 AXa1 S100-NM
145
ON
12.5
AXc2 AXc2
Accessories
125 S125-NF,S125-GF (2 poles) ① ― 3 0.5 40 2
20
AXb2 AXb2 OFF S125-NN (3/4 poles) 3 ― 0.5 40 1

AXa2 AXa2 M3.5 screw
ALc1 ALc1 7.5 Notes:
Ｄ
ALb1 ALb1 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: 0.9 – 1.2 N • m
ALa1 ALa1 24.5 2) Applicable wire size: 2.0mm2 max
Leading Fig. 1 Terminal cover 1 : Special specification. Not applicable to Plug-in (High-performance) type.
C1 D1 (clear)
direction
C2 D2
Leading Right terminal
direction 60 Ｃ arrangement
8
B
Ex. 1 Ex. 2 Ex. 3

20
2 poles
AXc1
12.5✕10
AXb1
145
AXa1
AXc2
ON
12.5
AXb2
16
AXa2
OFF Ｄ
ALc1
M3.5 screw
ALb1
ALa1
C1 D1
Fig. 2 7.5 Terminal cover C2 D2
24.5 (clear)
6-61
6
Accessories
6 terminals
46 Frame Types of breakers A
34 size (A)
3/4 poles 7 5.5 22 50 S50-SF (2/3 poles) 9

Left terminal Right terminal 125 S125-SF (2/3/4 poles) 9
arrangement arrangement
Notes:
Ex. 1 Ex. 1 Ex. 2 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: 0.9 – 1.2 N • m
ALa1 ON
ALa2 2) Applicable wire size: 2.0mm2 max
ALb1 ALb2
ALc1 C C
86.5
L ALc2 L
A
67
46
25
AXc1 OFF AXc2 C2

AXb1 AXb2
AXa1 AXa2 C1
Terminal cover
18 (clear) 55 6
2 poles 7 5.5
Right terminal
arrangement
Ex. 1 Ex. 2
ALa1
ON
ALb1
C ALc1 C
86.5
L L
67
46
25
OFF
AXc1 C2
AXb1
AXa1 C1
Terminal cover
18 (clear) 55 6
6 terminals
Vertical leading type with 250A frame
Frame Types of breakers A
size (A)
250 E250-SF (3 poles) 7
S250-SF,S250-SN (3/4 poles) 7
Notes:
46 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: 0.9 – 1.2 N • m
34 2) Applicable wire size: 2.0mm2 max
3/4 poles 7 5.5 22

Ex. 1 Ex. 2 Ex. 3

Ex. 1 Ex. 2 ALa2 ALa2
ALa1 ALa1 ON
ALb2 ALb2
ALb1 ALb1 C
86.5
L ALc2 ALc2 C
L
A
67
46
25
ALc1 ALc1 OFF AXc3 C2 AXc3 AXc4

AXc2 AXc1 AXc1
AXb3 AXb3 AXb4
AXb2 AXb1 AXb1
AXa3 C1 AXa3 AXa4
AXa2 AXa1 AXa1
Terminal cover
(clear)
18 55 6
2 pieces of terminal blocks can be fitted side by side.
6-62
6 terminals
Vertical leading type with 100/125/225/250A frame
Mounting position/typical terminal arrangement
Leading
3/4 poles direction A
8
Ex. 1 Ex. 2 Ex. 1 Ex. 2
AXc1 AXc1
14.5 14.5 14.5 14.514.5
53
AXb1 AXb1 ON
AXa1 AXa1 C C
L L
AXc2 ALc1
OFF
AXb2 ALb1 C1 D1
53
AXa2 ALa1 C2 D2
M3.5 screw
11.5 40 B
Leading
direction 22
Terminal cover
(clear)
Dimensions, mm
Notes:
Frame size Types of breakers A B
(A) 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: 0.9 – 1.2 N • m
77.5 62
2) Applicable wire size: 1.25mm2 max
100 H100-NF,L100-NF
3) Horizontal leading type with max applicable wire size of 2.0 mm2 is
125 H125-NF,L125-NF 77.5 62
225 E225-NF,S225-NF,S225-GF
S225-NM 42.5 27
S225-GE,H225-NF,L225-NF
250 S250-NF,S250-GF 42.5 27
11 terminals
Vertical leading type with 125/225/250A frame
Left terminal
arrangement
Ex. 1 Ex. 2
8 3/4 poles
60 Ｃ
6
16 Ａ
AXc1 AXc1
AXb1 AXb1
12.5✕10
AXa1 AXa1
Accessories
145
ON
AXc2 AXc2
AXb2 AXb2 OFF
12.5
AXa2 AXa2
20
ALc1 ALc1 Ｄ
ALb1 ALb1 M3.5 screw 7.5
ALa1 ALa1 24.5
Terminal cover
C1 D1 (clear)
C2 D2 Leading
direction
Dimensions, mm
Notes:
Frame size Types of breakers A C D
2 35.5 75
100 H100-NF,L100-NF
125 H125-NF,L125-NF 2 35.5 75
225 E225-NF,S225-NF,S225-GF,S225-NM 2 0.5 40
S225-GE,H225-NF,L225-NF 2 35.5 75
250 S250-NF,S250-GF 2 0.5 40
6-63
6
Accessories
6 terminals
A
3/4 poles
Leading
direction
8
Ex. 1 Ex. 2 Ex. 1 Ex. 2
AXc1 AXc1 PALc PALc
14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5
63
AXb1 AXb1 ON PALa PALa

AXa1 AXa1 k k
AXc2 ALc1 CL R R CL
AXb2 ALb1 C1 D1
43
AXa2 ALa1 OFF C2 D2
M3.5 screw
Leading
direction
11.5
40 B
23
Terminal cover
Dimensions, mm (clear)
Frame size Notes:

Types of breakers A B 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: 0.9 – 1.2 N • m
(A)
400 S400-CF,S400-NF
S400-NE,S400-GF,S400-GE,S400-PF,S400-PE 72.5 57
S400-NN
H400-NE,L400-NE 109.5 94
11 terminals
Left terminal Leading Right terminal

arrangement direction arrangement
8 3/4 poles 60 Ｃ
Ex. 1 Ex. 1 Ex. 2
16 Ａ
AXc1
20
AXb1
12.5✕10
12.5✕10
AXa1
145
ON
AXc2
AXb2 OFF
PALc PALc
12.5
12.5
AXa2 PALa PALa

20
16
ALc1 Ｄ
ALb1 M3.5 screw 7.5 7.5 k k
ALa1 24.5 24.5 R R
Terminal cover
AXc3 C1 D1 (clear)
AXb3 Leading C2 D2
direction
Dimensions, mm
Frame size Notes:
Types of breakers A C D 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: 0.9 – 1.2 N • m
(A)
400 S400-CF,S400-NF
S400-NE,S400-GF,S400-GE,S400-PF,S400-PE 39.5 30.5 70
S400-NN
H400-NE,L400-NE 39.5 67.5 107
6-64
6 terminals
A
3/4 poles
Leading
direction
8
Ex. 1 Ex. 2 Ex. 1 Ex. 2
AXc1 AXc1 PALc PALc
14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5
82.5
AXb1 AXb1 ON PALa PALa

AXa1 AXa1 k k
AXc2 ALc1 ASL R R ASL
AXb2 ALb1 C1 D1
23.5
AXa2 ALa1 OFF C2 D2
M3.5 screw
Leading
direction
11.5
40 B
24
Terminal cover
Dimensions, mm (clear)
Notes:
Frame size Types of breakers A B
72.5 57
630 S630-CF,S630-NF,S630-RF,S630-NE,S630-RE,S630-GN
H630-NE,L630-NE 109.5 94
800 S800-CF,S800-NF,S800-RF,S800-NE,S800-RE,S800-NN 72.5 57
4) Contact us for details if 2 alarm switches are required.
H800-NE,L800-NE 109.5 94
11 terminals
6
Leading
Left terminal direction Right terminal
8 3/4 poles 60 Ｃ Accessories
Ex. 1 Ex. 1 Ex. 2
16 Ａ
AXc1
20
AXb1
12.5✕10
12.5✕10
AXa1
145
ON
AXc2
AXb2 OFF
PALc PALc
12.5
12.5
AXa2 PALa PALa

20
16
ALc1 Ｄ
ALb1 M3.5 screw 7.5 7.5 k k
ALa1 24.5 24.5 R R
Terminal cover
AXc3 C1 D1 (clear)
AXb3 Leading C2 D2
direction
Dimensions, mm
Notes:
Frame size
(A) Types of breakers A C D 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: 0.9 – 1.2 N • m
31 30.5 70
630 S630-CF,S630-NF,S630-RF,S630-NE,S630-RE,S630-GN
H630-NE,L630-NE 31 67.5 107
800 S800-CF,S800-NF,S800-RF,S800-NE,S800-RE,S800-NN 31 30.5 70
H800-NE,L800-NE 31 67.5 107
6-65
6
Accessories

Frame size
Types of breakers A B C D
(A)
50 E50-SF,E50-CM 16.5 16.5 21 36
Notes:
Left terminal Leading direction Right terminal
arrangement arrangement w 40 Ｃ 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: 0.9 – 1.2 N.m
3 poles
2) Applicable wire size: 1.25mm2 max (Vinyl-coated wire)
10 Ａ
Ex. 1 Ex. 2 Ex. 3 Ex. 4

7.5
AXb1 AXb2 U２ S２
AXa1 AXa2
14.5✕5
14.5✕5
AXc1 AXc2 ON U１ S１
90
90
ALb1 AXb1
ALa1 AXa1 OFF
ALc1 AXc1
7.5
10
Ｄ
18.5 7
M3.5✕0.7 screw
Leading direction Terminal cover
(clear)
Leading direction Right terminal
arrangement 40 Ｃ
2 poles
Ｂ
Ex. 1 Ex. 2 Ex. 3 Ex. 4

7.5
U２ S２ AXb1 AXb2
AXa1 AXa2
14.5✕5
ON U１ S１ AXc1 AXc2
90
90
ALb1 AXb1
OFF ALa1 AXa1
ALc1 AXc1
10
Ｄ
7
18.5 M3.5✕0.7 screw
Terminal cover
(clear)

Frame size
(A)
100 E100-SF ① 16.5 16.5 21 36
Left terminal Leading direction Right terminal Notes:

arrangement arrangement 40 Ｃ
3/4 poles ①: Terminal block cannot be mounted on the breaker which is equipped with
the motor operator.
10 Ａ
Ex. 1 Ex. 2 Ex. 3 Ex. 4

1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: 0.9 – 1.2 N.m
7.5
U２ S２ AXb1 AXb2
AXa1 AXa2
2) Applicable wire size: 1.25mm2 max (Vinyl-coated wire)
14.5✕5
14.5✕5
U１ S１ ON AXc1 AXc2
90
90
ALb1 AXb1
OFF ALa1 AXa1
ALc1 AXc1
7.5
10
Ｄ
18.5 7
M3.5✕0.7 screw
(clear)
Left terminal
arrangement 40 Ｃ
2 poles
Ａ
Ex. 1 Ex. 2 Ex. 3 Ex. 4

10
U２ S２ AXb1 AXb2
AXa1 AXa2
14.5✕5
U１ S１ AXc1 AXc2 ON
90
90
ALb1 AXb1
ALa1 AXa1 OFF
ALc1 AXc1
7.5
Ｄ
18.5

(clear)
6-66
Horizontal leading type with 1250/1600A frame
Frame size Types of
A B C D
(A) breakers
1250 S1250-NE
114
S1250-GE 51 57 72
（124）
S1250-NN
arrangement arrangement 1600 S1600-NE
114
S1600-NN 51 77 92
21 （124）
Ex. 1 Ex. 2 Ex. 3 Ex. 4
A
C 27.5 12
AXc1 AXc1 ALc1 ALc1 Notes:
B
9.6✕5
AXb1 AXb1 ALb1 ALb1 1) Values in parentheses applies to 4-pole breakers.

62
21 2) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: 0.9 – 1.2 N.m

AXa1 AXa1 ALa1 ALa1 3) Applicable wire size: 2.0mm2 max x 2
1
AXc2 AXc2 ALc2
62
62
7.8
AXb2 AXb2 PALc ALb2

ON
AXa2 AXa2 D 12.5 PALa ALa2
M3.5✕0.7
screw OFF
AXc3 AXc3
AXb3 AXb3
AXc4 AXc4
AXb4 AXb4
D1 C1
D2 C2
Horizontal leading type with 1000 to 2000A frame

Frame size
6
(A)
1000 TL-1000NE 51 194（184） 77 92
1200 TL-1200NE 51 194（184） 77 92
arrangement arrangement 2000 XS2000NE,XS2000NN 54 208 100 115
27.5 Ｃ
Notes:
Ａ
Ex. 1 Ex. 2 Ex. 3 Ex. 4 ①

①: The terminal arrangement example shown in the figure applies to type
U２ S２
Accessories
XS2000NE breakers only.
PALa
1) Values in parentheses applies to 4-pole breakers.
9.6✕5
U１ S１ PALc
2) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: 0.9 – 1.2 N.m
62
AXb4 3) Applicable wire size: 2.0mm2 max x 2

AXa4
AXc4
1
21 ON AXb3
PALa AXa3
OFF PALc AXc3
62
M3.5✕0.7
screw AXb2 AXb2
AXa2 AXa2
AXc2 AXc2
1
AXb1 AXb1
AXa1 AXa1
AXc1 AXc1
62
ALb1 ALb1
7.8
ALa1 ALa1
ALc1 ALc1
Ｂ
12 12.5 Ｄ
6-67
6
Accessories
9. Mechanical interlock
Slide interlock (MS)
The slide interlock provides a mechanical interlock between two breakers so that only one of the two can be closed. Moving the slide on the front
of the breaker left and right allows activation or deactivation of the interlock.

Dimensions mm CL : Handle Centre Line
Frame size Number of Breaker connection Interlock
Types of breakers
(A) poles method Order codes
50 S50-SF
125 S125-SF,S125-SN 3 FC,RC T2MS16L3SF
4 FC,RC T2MS16L4SF
Panel cutout (front view)

HL 3P HL HL 4P HL
R1 R1
The cutout dimensions allow for a

CL
52
side clearance of 1.0 mm from

52
CL
the bank of the breaker.
12 120 12 12 145 12
144 169
HL HL HL HL
111
111
130
49
CL CL
60 60 85 60 94.2
120 145
195 245
HL HL HL HL
Drilling plan (front view)
HL HL HL HL
25 25 25 25
CL
111
CL
111
M4✕0.7 60 60 M4✕0.7 85 60
Tapped hole 120 Tapped hole 145
6-68
Dimensions mm
Types of breakers
50 S50-SF
125 S125-SF,S125-SN 3 PMC T2MS16L3SC

HL HL
R1
CL side clearance of 1.0 mm from
52
12 120 12
144
HL HL
49
130
CL CL
60 60 129.7
120
195
HL HL
6
Accessories
HL HL M4✕0.7
25 25
Tapped hole
2✕4-ø6
15
CL
52
80
18
Mounting plate
75 75
60 60
120
6-69
6
Accessories
9. Mechanical interlock ASL : Arrangement Standard Line

Dimensions mm
Types of breakers
50 S50-GF
100 S100-NF,S100-GF,S100-NN 3 FC,RC T2MS123SF
125 S125-NF,S125-GF,S125-NN
4 FC,RC T2MS124SF
Notes:
(1) The interlock cannot be applied to breakers equipped with a terminal block.

3P 4P
HL HL H
L H
L The cutout dimensions allow for a
1
1
R
R
CL C the bank of the breaker.
52
52
12 120 12 12 150 12
144 174
H
L H
L H
L H
L
155
132
132
C
L C
L
49
60 60 90 60
120 150
210 270 91.7
H
L H
L H
L H
L

HL HL HL HL
30 30 30 30
132
132
C
L C
L
M4✕0.7 60 60 90 60
Tapped hole
120 150
M4✕0.7
Tapped hole
6-70
Dimensions mm
Types of breakers
50 S50-GF
100 S100-NF,S100-GF,S100-NN 3 PMB T2MS123SP
125 S125-NF,S125-GF,S125-NN
4 PMB T2MS124SP

3P 4P
HL HL HL HL
R1
52
12 120 12 12 150 12
144 174
HL HL HL HL
49
155
170
190
CL CL
75
75
60 60 90 60 140
120 150
210 270
HL HL HL HL
6
Accessories
M6✕0.7
Tapped hole ø6
HL HL HL HL Mounting plate
15
105
CL
75
ø18
for accessory wiring when necessary
14 35 14 14 35 14 21 14 21 14
60 60 22.5 22.5
120 70 70
90 60
150
6-71
6
Accessories

Dimensions mm
Types of breakers
50 S50-GF
100 S100-NF,S100-GF,S100-NN 3 PMC T2MS123SC
125 S125-NF,S125-GF,S125-NN

HL HL
R1
52
12 120 12
144
HL HL
155
49
CL CL
75
60 60
132
120
210
HL HL

HL HL M4✕0.7
30 30
Tapped hole
2✕4-ø6
13
75
100
CL
27
Mounting plate
86 86
60 60
120
6-72
Dimensions mm
Types of breakers A
100 H100-NF,L100-NF 3 FC,RC T2MS253LF
125 H125-NF,L125-NF 126.7
4 FC,RC T2MS254LF
225 S225-NF,S225-GF 3 FC,RC T2MS253SF
250 S250-NF,S250-GF 91.7
4 FC,RC T2MS254SF
H225-NF,L225-NF,S225-GE 3 FC,RC T2MS253LF
126.7
4 FC,RC T2MS254LF

3P 4P
H
L H
L H
L H
L
1
1
R
R
C C the bank of the breaker.
L L
52
52
12 120 12 12 155 12
144 179
H
L H
L H
L H
L
C
126
126
165
L C
49
L
60 60 95 60
120 155
225 295 A
H
L H
L H
L H
L
6
Accessories
HL HL HL HL
35 35 35 35
CL
126
C
126
M4✕0.7 60 60 95 60
Tapped hole
M4✕0.7 120 155
Tapped hole
6-73
6
Accessories

Dimensions mm
Types of breakers A
100 H100-NF,L100-NF 3 PMB T2MS253LP
125 H125-NF,L125-NF 175
4 PMB T2MS254LP
225 S225-NF,S225-GF 3 PMB T2MS253SP
250 S250-NF,S250-GF 140
4 PMB T2MS254SP
H225-NF,L225-NF,S225-GE 3 PMB T2MS253LP
175
4 PMB T2MS254LP

3P 4P
HL HL HL HL R1 The cutout dimensions allow for a

CL CL the bank of the breaker.
52
12 120 12 12 155 12
144 179
HL HL HL HL
200
165
180
CL CL
75
75
49
60 60 95 60
140
120 155
225 295
HL HL HL HL
Drilling plan (front view) M4✕0.7

Tapped hole
ø6
HL HL HL HL Mounting plate
15
105
CL
50
75
15 15 17.5 15 17.5 15
35 35 70 70
60 60 95 60
120 155
6-74
Dimensions mm
Types of breakers A
100 H100-NF,L100-NF
125 H125-NF,L125-NF 3 PMC T2MS253LC 150
225 S225-NF,S225-GF
250 S250-NF,S250-GF 3 PMC T2MS253SC 115
H225-NF,L225-NF,S225-GE 3 PMC T2MS253LC 150
HL HL R1
52
12 120 12
144
HL HL
49
CL CL
165
180
75
A
60 60
120
225
HL HL
6
Accessories
HL HL M4✕0.7
30 30 Tapped hole
2✕4-ø6 13
CL
100
75
62
Mounting plate
86 86
60 60
120
6-75
6
Accessories

Dimensions mm
Types of breakers
225 E250-SF,S250-SF
250 S250-SN 3 FC,RC T2MS25L3SF
4 FC,RC T2MS25L4SF

HL 3P HL HL 4P HL
1
1
R
R
52
52
CL CL
12 120 12 12 155 12
144 179
HL HL HL HL
49
CL
CL CL
126
126
165
94.2
60 60 95 60
95
120 155
225 295
HL HL HL HL

HL HL HL HL
35 35 35 35
126
CL
126
CL
M4✕0.7
60 60 95 60
Tapped hole
M4✕0.7 120 155
Tapped hole
6-76
Dimensions mm
Types of breakers
225 E250-SF,S250-SF
250 S250-SN 3 PMC T2MS25L3SC

HL HL
R1
52
12 120 12
144
HL HL
180
CL CL
75
49
114.7
60 60 118
120
225
HL HL
6
Accessories
HL HL M4✕0.7
30 30 Tapped hole
2✕4-ø6 13
CL
100
75
62
Mounting plate
86 86
60 60
120
6-77
6
Accessories

Dimensions mm
Types of breakers A
400 S400-CF,S400-NF,S400-NE
S400-GF,S400-GE,S400-NN 3 FC,RC T2MS403SF
S400-PF,S400-PE 135.5
4 FC,RC T2MS404SF Notes:
(1) The interlock cannot be applied to breakers equipped with front extension bars
H400-NE,L400-NE 3 FC,RC T2MS403LF due to the shortage of the insulating distance.
172.5
4 FC,RC T2MS404LF (2) The interlock cannot be applied to breakers equipped with terminal block.
(3) A terminal cover cannot be mounted.
3P 4P
HL HL HL HL

92
92
C
L C
L the bank of the breaker.
R1 R1 R1
26.5 180 26.5 26.5 225 26.5
233 278
HL HL HL HL
214
260
214
260
C
L C
L C
L
6.5 6.5 A
70 20 20 70 115 20 20 70
320 410
HL HL HL HL

M6 M6 M6 M6
Tapped hole Tapped hole Tapped hole Tapped hole
HL HL HL HL
214
C
L C
L
214
45 45 45 45
90 135
180 225
6-78
Dimensions mm
Types of breakers A
400 S400-CF,S400-NF,S400-NE
S400-GF,S400-GE,S400-NN 3 PMB T2MS403SP
S400-PF,S400-PE 183.5
4 PMB T2MS404SP
H400-NE,L400-NE 3 PMB T2MS403LP

220.5
4 PMB T2MS404LP

3P 4P
HL HL HL HL
CL CL CL The cutout dimensions allow for a

92
92
R1 R1
R1
26.5 180 26.5 26.5 225 26.5

233 278
HL HL HL HL
140
CL CL CL
140
260
286
315
90
70 20 20 70 115 20 20 70 A
320 410
HL HL HL HL
6
Accessories

Mounting angle
HL HL HL HL
5
15
40
25
40
CL CL
140
90
70 70 10 70 10 70
25
15
2✕4-ø6
90 90 135 90 M6
180 225 Tapped hole
6-79
6
Accessories

Dimensions mm
Types of breakers A
400 S400-CF,S400-NF,S400-NE
S400-GF,S400-GE,S400-NN 3 PMC T2MS403SC 158.5
S400-PF,S400-PE
H400-NE,L400-NE 3 PMC T2MS403LC 195.5

HL HL
R1

92
26.5 180 26.5

233
HL HL
134
260
CL CL
282
90
70 20 20 70 A
180
320
HL HL
Drilling plan (front view) M6 Tapped hole

HL HL
5
40
25
40
CL
134
25
60 60
4✕2-ø9 Mounting angle
90 90
180
6-80
Dimensions mm
Types of breakers A
630 S630-CF,S630-NF,S630-RF
800 S630-NE,S630-RE,S630-GN 3 FC,RC T2MS803SF
S800-CF,S800-NF,S800-RF 135.5
S800-NE,S800-RE,S800-NN 4 FC,RC T2MS804SF
H630-NE,L630-NE 3 FC,RC T2MS803LF Notes:

H800-NE,L800-NE 172.5
4 FC,RC T2MS804LF (1) The interlock cannot be applied to breakers equipped with terminal block.

3P 4P
HL HL HL HL

92
92
ASL ASL
26.5 250 26.5 26.5 320 26.5

303 373
HL HL H
L H
L
107
107
223
273
ASL ASL ASL
107
6.5 6.5
A
105 105 175 105
20 20 2020
460 600
H
L H
L H
L H
L
6
Accessories
M8 Tapped hole M6 Tapped hole M8 Tapped hole M6 Tapped hole
HL HL H
L H
L
126
126
107
107
ASL ASL
107
117
107
117
70 70 70 70
125 195
250 320
6-81
6
Accessories

Dimensions mm
Types of breakers A
630 S630-CF,S630-NF,S630-RF
800 S630-NE,S630-RE,S630-GN 3 PMB T2MS803SP
S800-CF,S800-NF,S800-RF 187
S800-NE,S800-RE,S800-NN 4 PMB T2MS804SP
H630-NE,L630-NE 3 PMB T2MS803LP

H800-NE,L800-NE 224
4 PMB T2MS804LP

3P 4P
HL HL HL HL

92
92
ASL
26.5 250 26.5 26.5 320 26.5

303 373
HL HL HL HL
158.5
141
79.5
79.5
ASL ASL
70.5
70.5
149.5
132
6.5 6.5
105 20 20 105 175 20 20 105
460 600 A
HL HL HL HL
HL HL HL HL
ø9 M6 ø9 M6
Tapped hole Tapped hole
15
79.5
ASL
70.5
15
100 100 50 195 50

125 170 170
250 320
6-82
Dimensions mm
Types of breakers A
630 S630-CF,S630-NF,S630-RF
800 S630-NE,S630-RE,S630-GN
S800-CF,S800-NF,S800-RF 3 PMC T2MS803SC 153.5
S800-NE,S800-RE,S800-NN
H630-NE,L630-NE
H800-NE,L800-NE 3 PMC T2MS803LC 190.5

3P
HL HL

ASL side clearance of 1.0 mm from
92
26.5 250 26.5

303
HL HL
141
156
76
303
ASL ASL
67
132
147
6.5
A
105 20 20 105
460
HL HL
6
Accessories

ø11 M6
HL HL Tapped hole
25
76
ASL
67
25
90 90
125
250
6-83
6
Accessories

Dimensions mm
Frame size Types of molded case circuit Interlock Number
a b c d e f g h k m R R
(A) breakers Order codes of poles
50, 100 E50-SF,E50-CM,E100-SF XLF1 ① 3 100 150 102 26.5 153 52.5 52.5 105 175 99.6 15 8.5
1000 TL-1000NE 3 220 340 129 61.5 343 58 74 132 430 179.6 30 8.5
XLF9 ①
4 290 410 129 61.5 413 58 74 132 570 179.6 30 8.5
1200 TL-1200NE 3 220 340 129 61.5 343 58 74 132 430 179.6 30 8.5
XLF9 ①
4 290 410 129 61.5 413 58 74 132 570 179.6 30 8.5
1250 S1250-NE,S1250-GE T2MSX63SF 3 220 340 135 61.5 343 64 74 138 430 160.5 30 8.5
S1250-NN T2MSX64SF 4 290 410 135 61.5 413 64 74 138 570 160.5 30 8.5
1600 S1600-NE,S1600-NN T2MSX63SF 3 220 340 129 61.5 343 58 74 132 430 180.5 30 8.5
T2MSX64SF 4 290 410 129 61.5 413 58 74 132 570 180.5 30 8.5
2000 XS2000NE 3
XLF10 ① Contact us for the detailed dimensions.
4
Notes:
1 : Please order with the breakers.
(1) The interlock cannot be applied to breakers equipped with a terminal block, UVT controller or OCR controller.
(2) See the outline dimensions of the breaker for the drilling plan.
3P 4P
H
L H
L H
L H
L
R R
g
ASL ASL
h
h
f
d a d d a d
e e
H
L H
L H
L H
L
R R
ASL ASL
C
a a
b b
k k
r Slide knob stroke r Slide knob stroke

H
L H
L H
L H
L
m
6-84
10. Door Flange (D.F)
Door flanges are recommended to be used to cover the cutout of a switchboard panel.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
M3✕0.5 Flat head screw
HL M3✕0.5 Panel drilling plan Breaker outline HL M4✕0.7 Flat head screw
Breaker outline Flat head screw Panel Panel Panel drilling plan
HL
HL
B
B
G
C
L ① C
L ① C
L ①
G
C
E
ASL② ASL② ASL② C
L ① C
L ① C
L ①
E
F
ASL② ASL② ASL②
A
F
A
H ｄ tapped hole
D
ｔ H
K d tapped hole
D ｔ
Dimensions mm
Frame F G H
Types of breakers Order codes Fig. A B C D E K d t
size (A) Min Max Min Max Min Max
E50-SF,E50-CM XAA1 1② 65 65 105 50 92 37 42 37 42 32 45 ― M3×0.5 3
50 S50-SF T2DF25 1① 65 65 105 50 92 37 42 37 42 32 45 ― M3×0.5 2
S50-GF T2DF25 1① 77.5 77.5 105 50 92 37 42 37 42 32 45 ― M3×0.5 2
E100-SF XAA1 1② 65 65 105 50 92 37 42 37 42 32 45 ― M3×0.5 3
S100-NF,S100-GF
100 T2DF25 1① 77.5 77.5 105 50 92 37 42 37 42 32 45 ― M3×0.5 2
S100-NM,S100-NN
H100-NF,L100-NF T2DF25 1① 82.5 82.5 105 50 92 37 42 37 42 32 45 ― M3×0.5 2
S125-SF,S125-SN T2DF25 1① 65 65 105 50 92 37 42 37 42 32 45 ― M3×0.5 2
S125-NF,S125-GF
125 T2DF25 1① 77.5 77.5 105 50 92 37 42 37 42 32 45 ― M3×0.5 2
S125-NN
H125-NF,L125-NF T2DF25 1① 82.5 82.5 105 50 92 37 42 37 42 32 45 ― M3×0.5 2
S225-NF,S225-GF
T2DF25 1① 82.5 82.5 105 50 92 37 42 37 42 32 45 ― M3×0.5 2
S225-NM
225
S225-GE
T2DF25 1① 82.5 82.5 105 50 92 37 42 37 42 32 45 ― M3×0.5 2
H225-NF,L225-NF
E250-SF,S250-SF
250 S250-SN T2DF25 1① 82.5 82.5 105 50 92 37 42 37 42 32 45 ― M3×0.5 2
S250-NF,S250-GF
S400-CF,S400-NF
S400-GF
6
S400-NE,S400-GE T2DF40 2① 130 130 135 95 120 48 56 48 56 57 90 80 M3×0.5 2
400 S400-PF,S400-PE
S400-NN Accessories
H400-NE,L400-NE T2DF40 2① 130 130 135 95 120 48 56 48 56 57 90 80 M3×0.5 2
S630-CF,S630-NF
S630-RF,S630-NE T2DF40 2② 132 141 135 95 120 48 56 48 56 57 90 80 M3×0.5 2
630 S630-RE,S630-GN
H630-NE,L630-NE T2DF40 2② 132 141 135 95 120 48 56 48 56 57 90 80 M3×0.5 2
S800-CF,S800-NF
S800-RF,S800-NE T2DF40 2② 132 141 135 95 120 48 56 48 56 57 90 80 M3×0.5 2
800 S800-RE,S800-NN
H800-NE,L800-NE T2DF40 2② 132 141 135 95 120 48 56 48 56 57 90 80 M3×0.5 2

1000 TL-1000NE TAA5 2② 170 200 150 120 135 51 63.5 51 63.5 85 115 80 M3×0.5 5
1200 TL-1200NE TAA5 2② 170 200 150 120 135 51 63.5 51 63.5 85 115 80 M3×0.5 5
S1250-NE,S1250-GE
1250 T2DFX6 2② 170 200 150 120 135 51 63.5 51 63.5 85 115 80 M3×0.5 2
S1250-NN
1600 S1600-NE,S1600-NN T2DFX6 2② 170 200 150 120 135 51 63.5 51 63.5 85 115 80 M3×0.5 2
2000 XS2000NE,XS2000NN TAA-10 2② 193 257 200 175 175 74 83.5 74 83.5 123 170 150 M4×0.7 5
Notes:
1 : CL Handle centre line is applied.
2 : ASL Arrangement standard line is applied.
6-85
7
¡E50-SF…………………………………………7-2
¡E100-SF ………………………………………7-4
Characteristics and
Outline Dimensions
¡S1250-NE, S1250-GE ………………………7-46
¡S1600-NE ……………………………………7-48
¡S50-SF ………………………………………7-6 ¡E50-CM ………………………………………7-50
¡S125-SF ………………………………………7-8 ¡S100-NM ……………………………………7-52
¡S100-NF, S50-GF, S100-GF …………………7-10 ¡S225-NM ……………………………………7-54
¡S125-NF, S125-GF …………………………7-12 ¡S100-NN ……………………………………7-56
¡S225-NF, S225-GF …………………………7-14 ¡S125-SN ……………………………………7-58
¡E250-SF, S250-SF ……………………………7-16 ¡S125-NN ……………………………………7-60
¡S250-NF, S250-GF …………………………7-18 ¡S250-SN ……………………………………7-62
¡S400-CF, S400-NF, S400-GF, S400-PF ………7-20 ¡S400-NN ……………………………………7-64
¡H100-NF, L100-NF …………………………7-22 ¡S630-GN ……………………………………7-66
¡H125-NF,L125-NF ……………………………7-24 ¡S800-NN ……………………………………7-68
¡H225-NF, L225-NF …………………………7-26 ¡S1250-NN ……………………………………7-70
¡S225-GE ……………………………………7-28 ¡S1600-NN ……………………………………7-72
¡S400-NE, S400-GE, S400-PE ………………7-30 ¡TL-1000NE, TL-1200NE ……………………7-74
¡H400-NE, L400-NE …………………………7-32 ¡XS2000NE ……………………………………7-76
¡S630-CF, S630-NF, S630-RF ………………7-34 ¡XS2000NN……………………………………7-78
¡S630-NE, S630-RE …………………………7-36 ¡TB-5S ………………………………………7-80
¡H630-NE, L630-NE …………………………7-38 ¡TB-5P ………………………………………7-82
¡S800-CF, S800-NF, S800-RF…………………7-40 ¡TB-5D ………………………………………7-84
¡S800-NE, S800-RE …………………………7-42
¡H800-NE, L800-NE …………………………7-44
■ Mounting bases, branching bars and
other accessories ……………………………7-86
7
Motor operators
Characteristics and Outline Dimensions
¡S50-GF, S100, S125 …………………………7-88 ¡S630, S800 …………………………………7-94

¡S225, S250-NF, S250-GF ……………………7-89 ¡H630, H800, L630, L800 ……………………7-95
¡E250-SF, S250-SF, S250-SN…………………7-90 ¡TL-1000NE, TL-1200NE ……………………7-96
¡H100, H125, H225, L100, L125, L225 ………7-91 ¡S1250 ………………………………………7-97
¡S400 …………………………………………7-92 ¡S1600 ………………………………………7-98
¡H400, L400 …………………………………7-93 ¡XS2000 ………………………………………7-99
7-1
7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers （50A Frame）
E50-SF
Time/Current characteristic curves
Ratings and Specifications 3
2
hour
Rated Magnetic trip
Type E50-SF 1 Current (A) current AC (A)
Number of poles 2 3 40 10 150±50
15 225±75
■Ratings 20 20 300±100
10 40 30 450±150
minute
Rated current, A 10 40 600±200
Calibrated at 45°C 15 50 6 50 750±250
20 4
30 2
Max. (15,20,30,40,50Ａ)
1
40
Max.10A
Tripping Time
20
10
Rated insulation voltage〔Ui〕 V AC 690 6
Rated impulse withstand voltage 〔U imp〕 kV 6 4
■Rated breaking capacity, kA Magnetic trip

2 Min.10Ａ setting
NK AC 690V ―
second
1 1000%–2000%
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 10/- !3 0.6 Min.(15,20,
240V 25/- !4 0.4
30,40,50Ａ)
q DC 250V 7.5/- 0.2
IEC60947-2 AC 690V ―
0.1
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 7.5/3.8 0.06
440V 10/5 0.04
415V 10/5 0.02

380V 16/8
0.01
240V 25/13 0.006
100
125
200
300
500
600
800
1000
2000
3000
5000
8000
q DC 250V 7.5/3.8
125V 15/7.5 Percent Rated Current
■Rated short time withstand current, kA ―
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws '
Ambient Compensating Curves
With extension bars ― （10A）
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ○
Flat bar studs ―
250
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○
High-performance (PMB) ― Calibrated
200
Percent current rating
temperature
For distribution boards (PMC) ○
Flush-mounted (FP) ○ Bolt studs
150
Draw-out type (DR) ―
TemPlug70 (PG) ― 125
DIN rail mount ― 100
90
Motor operator ＭＣ ― ●
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ― ●
5 15 25 35 45 55
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ― ●
Ambient temperature (°C)
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ―
Mechanical interlock Slide type ＭＳ ― ●
（15-50A）
Toggle lock ＨＬ ● 140
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ● 130 Calibrated
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ● 15A temperature

Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● 20A
120
Door flange ＤＦ ● 40A
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic7 110
30A
50A
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes 100
CE marking Non 90
Notes:
5 15 25 35 45 55
' : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. ○ : Optional standard. Specify when ordering.
● : “yes” or “available”. ― : “no” or “not available”. 1 : DC rating available on request. Ambient temperature (°C)
7 : Hydraulic-magnetic type for below 10A rating. !3 : at 500V AC. !4 : at 250V AC.
Combinations of Internally Mounted Accessories（Optional）

ＡＸＡＬＳＨＵＶＡＸＡＸＡＸＡＬＡＬＡＸＡＸ
Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under voltage
Auxiliary switch Alarm switch trip ✽ ＡＬＳＨＵＶＳＨＵＶＳＨＵＶ
３
・ ―
４
Left pole NOTE: 2-pole type breaker may incorporate only one combination of AX (max.2C) , AL , SH , UV , AX (max.2C) AL into the right pole.
Toggle
Right pole NOTE: ✽ The UV Controller is installed externally when provided with AC UV.
7-2
ASL : Arrangement Standard Line H
L : Handle Frame Centre Line C
L : Handle Centre Line
Outline dimensions (mm) E50-SF
Front-connected Preparation of conductor Drilling plan (front view)

2P 3P
2P 3P
12.5 HL 37.5 Mounting hole M5✕0.8 screw 24
HL C
L HL
8(max.)
HL
ø5.5
12.5(max.)
ASL max.t5 ASL
111
ASL
111
130
84
M4✕0.7
25 50 27 Mounting screw 25 M4✕0.7
75 61 6 Tapped hole
50 12.5
5 68
87
Rear-connected Drilling plan (front view) Panel cutout (front view)

3P
M4✕0.7 2P M4✕0.7 3P 3P
Insulated bushing 2P
Tapped hole Tapped hole 25 2P
ø12 HL
HL HL HL
ø14
68
6
ASL ASL ASL
111
111
52
27
42
12.5
1
R
ø14
Mounting plate M6 screw M4✕0.7 25 22.5 22.5 50 22.5 24
(max. t3.2) 25 25 Mounting screw
Panel cutout dimensions shown
ø15 for accessory wiring when necessary give an allowance of 1.0mm
around the handle escutcheon.
Plug-in (For Switch board) Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan
75 Preparation (front view)
The mounting plate is not supplied. HL 2P HL 3P
50 of conductor
50 75
10(max.)
HL
3P ø6.5
15
14
22.5
87.5
Detail of
connecting part 18(max.)
ASL ASL
180
110
52
83
80
18
ASL
92.5
22.5
11
10
14
M6 Mounting plate
3 screw 2P
(t=3.2mm min)
ø6
24 68 38 25 M5✕0.8 12.5 25 12.5
12.5 25
Flush-mounted
Mounting screw 50
•Allow a space of 5mm from adjacent breaker when the breaker is fitted with internal accessories.
7
Mounting plate
(t=4max.)
2P 3P
M5✕0.8 2P 3P
HL C
L C
12.5 Mounting screw L CL CL
196
111
140
C CL CL
66
M6 ø6
screw
15 82 68 93
96 121
32 97 78 103
7-3
7
E100-SF
3
2
hour
Rated Magnetic trip
Type E100-SF Current (A) current AC (A)
1 10 150±50
Number of poles ２３ 40 15 225±75
■Ratings 20 300±100
20 30 450±150
minute
Rated current, A 10 40 100 40 600±200
10 Max.
Calibrated at 45°C 15 50 6
50 750±250
(60,75,100A) 60 780±180
20 60 4 75 975±225
30 75 2
100 1300±300
Tripping Time
40
Max.10A
20 Min.
10 10A Max. (15,20,30,40,50A)
6
Rated impulse withstand voltage 〔U imp〕 kV 6 4 Min.
■Rated breaking capacity, kA (60,75,100A)
2
NK AC 690V ―
second
Magnetic trip
1
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 10/- !3 Min.(15,20,30,40,50A) setting
0.6 1000%–2000%
240V 25/- !4 0.4
q DC 250V 7.5/- 0.2
IEC60947-2 AC 690V ―
0.1
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 7.5/3.8
0.06
440V 10/5 0.04
415V 10/5 0.02 Magnetic trip
380V 16/8 setting
0.01 1000%–1600%
240V 25/13
0.006
250V 7.5/3.8
100
125
200
300
500
600
800
1000
2000
3000
5000
8000
q DC
125V 15/7.5
With extension bars ― （10A）
Flat bar studs ― 250
Calibrated
High-performance (PMB) ― 200
temperature
For distribution boards (PMC) ○
Flush-mounted (FP) ○ Bolt studs
150
TemPlug70 (PG) ― 125
90
Motor operator ＭＣ ― ●
5 15 25 35 45 55
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ― ● Ambient temperature (°C)
Externally mounted
（15-100A）
Toggle lock ＨＬ ● 140
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ● 15A Calibrated
130
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ● 40A temperature

60A
120
Door flange ＤＦ ● 20A
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic7 110
75A
Trip button (color) Yes (Red) 50A
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes 100
100A 30A
CE marking Non 90
Notes:
5 15 25 35 45 55
● : “yes” or “available”. ― : “no” or “not available”. 1 : DC rating available on request.
7 : Hydraulic-magnetic type for below 10A rating. !3 : at 500V AC. !4 : at 250V AC.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt Under voltage
Auxiliary switch Alarm switch trip ✽1 trip ✽2 ＡＬＳＨＵＶＳＨＵＶＳＨＵＶ
３ ―
Left pole NOTE: 2-pole type breaker may incorporate only one combination of AX (max.2C) , AL , SH , UV , AX AL into the left pole.
Toggle
Right pole NOTE: ✽1 Shunt trip is provided with anti-burnout switch.
NOTE: ✽2 The UV Controller is installed externally when provided with AC UV.
7-4
Outline dimensions (mm) E100-SF
Front-connected 23.4(10-50A) Preparation of conductor Drilling plan (front view)

2P 24(60-100A)
ON side
8(max.)
3P M5✕0.8 screw(10-50A) 2P 3P
36.7 HL 13.3 Mounting hole
M8 screw(60-100A) CL HL
HL
ø5.5(10-50A)
ø9(60-100A)
15(max.)
ASL ASL ASL
102
110
111
130
64
ø5.5(10-50A)
OFF side ø9(60-100A)
C4.5
8(max.)
56 25
25 50 5 6.5 15(max.)
66 11.7 M4✕0.7
50 75
5 68 M4✕0.7 Tapped hole
87 Mounting screw

2P 3P 3P
M4✕0.7 M4✕0.7 25 2P
ø15 2P
Tapped hole Tapped hole HL HL
HL
ø17
68
ASL ASL ASL
111
110
110
6.5
52
B1
12.5
A1
1
R
B2
A2
C screw ø17
Mounting plate 22.5 25 22.5 50 22.5 24
25 25 M4✕0.7
Mounting screw Panel cutout dimensions
Rated Current (A) A1 A2 B1 B2 C shown give an allowance of
ø15 for accessory wiring when necessary
10-50 45 80 30 65 M6 1.0mm around the handle
60-100 52.1 87.1 32.1 67.1 M8 escutcheon.
Plug-in (For Switch board) Mounting base (rear view) Preparation of conductor Drilling plan (front view)
75
2P 3P HL
50
The mounting plate is not supplied. 50 HL 75
10(max.)
HL
3P ø6.5
15
14
22.5
87.5
Detail of connecting part

18(max.)
ASL ASL
180
110
52
83
80
18
ASL
92.5
22.5
11
10
14
M6 screw
3 2P
68 38 25 M5✕0.8 12.5 25 12.5 Mounting plate
2 24 (t=3.2mm min) 11.7 25 ø6
Flush-mounted
Mounting screw
Left and right poles

50
7
Mounting plate Drilling plan (front view)
(Left pole for 2P)A1
(t=4max.)
C M5✕0.8 CL Left and right poles 2P 3P
2P L HL 3P
11.7 Mounting screw (Left pole for 2P)B1 CL CL
160
CL
110
140
C CL
66
93 118 ø6
C screw
15 Center pole(Right pole for 2P)B2 68 93

Rated Current (A) A1 A2 B1 B2 C 33.2 Center pole(Right pole for 2P)A2 78 103
10-50 98.8 133.8 83.8 118.8 M6
60-100 105.9 140.9 85.9 120.9 M8
7-5
7
S50-SF
3
2
hour
Rated Magnetic trip
Type S50-SF Current (A) current AC (A)
1 15 600±120
Number of poles ２３ 40 20 600±120
30 30 600±120
■Ratings 20 40 600±120
15
minute
Rated current, A 50 600±120
10
30 4
40 2
50 1
40 Max.
Tripping Time
30
20
10
■Rated breaking capacity, kA 2
Min.
NK AC 690V ― 1
second
15A
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 25/13 0.6 50A
240V 50/25 0.4
q DC 250V 25/13 0.2
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 6/3 0.1
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 12/6 0.06
0.04
440V 25/13
415V 30/15 0.02
380V 30/15 0.01
240V 50/25 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
q DC 250V 25/13
125V 40/20 Percent Rated Current
With extension bars ○（BAR）
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― 140
Flat bar studs ○ 20A
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ― ○ 130 Calibrated
30A
temperature
For distribution boards (PMC) ○ 120 15A
110
TemPlug70 (PG) ― 40A
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― 50A
DIN rail mount ― ○⑪ 100
■Accessories (optional) Symbol 90
Motor operator ＭＣ ―
5 15 25 35 45 55
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ― ●
Externally mounted
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ●
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●③
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic
CE marking Yes
Notes:
3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) !1 : Provided with DIN rail adaptor.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
Auxiliary switch Alarm switch voltage trip ＡＬＳＨＵＶＳＨＵＶＳＨＵＶ
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-6
Outline dimensions (mm) S50-SF
Front-connected Preparation of With extension bars Drilling plan

Interpole barrier conductor (optional) (front view)
(removable)
2P 3P 2P 3P
HL HL
Mounting hole
M5✕0.8 screw ø9 2P 3P
50
50
12.5 24 HL C HL
22 L
9(max.)
16.5
102
111
130
130
45
114
C
L C
L C
L C
L
M4✕0.7
47 69 Mounting screw
36.5
25 50 25 17 M4✕0.7
52 7.7 12.5 25
50 75 6.5 72 50 .3 Tapped hole
ø8
8.5
95 25 25
Rear-connected
A A Drilling plan (front view) Panel cutout (front view)
Detail of
B
connecting part 3P
E
2P
2P 3P 2P 3P
C D C D
HL HL C
L HL
HL C
L HL
Mounting plate 12.5 37.5
(max. t3.2)
4
R1
111
102
114
114
7.7
47
47
45
C
L C
L C
L C
L
M4✕0.7
52
Mounting screw
102
ø20
Studs are horizontal 25 25 12 12
direction only M4✕0.7 24 24
72 52
50 Tapped hole
95 102 25 25
Rated current (A) A B C D E

15-50 10.5 6.5 4 13 16
Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance
of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon.
Plug-in (Standard) Mounting base Drilling plan

(rear view) (front view)
Detail of Preparation of 3P
connecting part conductor HL HL
34 25 25 25 75
15 Mounting plate
(t=3.2mm min)
Conductor 3 20
12(max.)
15
48.5
14
ø6.5 25
180
102
114
83
52
45
C C C
52
80
L L L
17(max.)
M6 screw
48.5
14
M6
102 M5✕0.8 75 25
6.5 106 Mounting screw
129
Flush-mounted Detail of connecting part Drilling plan (front view)

7
Mounting plate
2P 3P (t=4max) A A 2P 3P
B
HL C
L C
L C
L C
L
E
12.5 M5✕0.8
Mounting screw
C D C D
4
196
140
114
C C C C C
66
L L L L L
15 107 68 93
96 121
40 157 78 103
Rated current (A) A B C D E

15-50 10.5 6.5 4 13 16
7-7
7
S125-SF
3
2 Rated Magnetic trip
hour
Type S125-SF Current (A) current AC (A)
1 15 600±120
Number of poles ２３４２３４ 40 20 600±120
30 30 600±120
■Ratings 20
40 600±120
15 50 125
minute
Rated current, A 50 600±120
10
60 1000±200
75 1000±200
30 75 4 100 1500±300
40 100 2 125 1500±300
1
40 Max.
Tripping Time
30
20
10
Min.
NK AC 690V ― ― 1
second
15A
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 25/13 25/13 0.6 50A, 125A
240V 50/25 50/25 0.4
q DC 250V 25/13 25/13 0.2
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 6/3 6/3 0.1
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 12/6 12/6 0.06
0.04
440V 25/13 25/13
415V 30/15 30/15 0.02
380V 30/15 30/15 0.01
240V 50/25 50/25 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
q DC 250V 25/13 25/13
125V 40/20 40/20 Percent Rated Current
■Rated short time withstand current, kA ― ―
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ' '
With extension bars ○（BAR） ○（BAR）
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ― 140
Flat bar studs ○ ○ 40A, 60A
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ― ○ ― ― ○ ― Percent current rating 130 20A Calibrated
temperature
High-performance (PMB) ― ― 75A
For distribution boards (PMC) ○ ― ○ ― 120 30A
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ ― ○ ― 15A
Draw-out type (DR) ― ―
110
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ―
50A, 100A
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ―
DIN rail mount ― ○⑪ ― ○⑪ 100
125A
Clip-in chassis mount ― ―
Motor operator ＭＣ ― ―
5 15 25 35 45 55
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ― ● ― ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ― ● ― ●
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ― ―
Mechanical interlock Slide type ＭＳ ― ● ― ●
Toggle holder ＨＨ ● ●
Toggle lock ＨＬ ● ●
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ●
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ● ●
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●③ ●③
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● ●
Door flange ＤＦ ● ●
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button (color) Yes (Red) Yes (Red)
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes Yes
Suitability for isolation Yes Yes
CE marking Yes Yes
Notes:
3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) !1 : Provided with DIN rail adaptor.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-8
Outline dimensions (mm) S125-SF

Interpole barrier conductor (optional) (front view)
2P (removable) 3P 4P 2P 3P
M5✕0.8 screw (15-50A)
HL HL HL
Mounting hole
M8 screw (60-125A) ø9 2P 3P 4P
50
22
50
12.5 24 HL C HL HL
L
9(max.)
16.5
102
111
130
130
45
C
L 114 C
L C
L C
L
47 69 69 M4✕0.7
Mounting screw
36.5
25 50 75 25 17
52 7.7 12.5 25 25 M4✕0.7
50 75 100 6.5 72 50 .3 Tapped hole
ø8
8.5
95 25 25 25
4P
Rear-connected
A A 4P Drilling plan (front view) Panel cutout (front view)
Detail of
B
connecting part 3P
E
4P
2P
2P 3P 4P 2P 3P
C DC D
HL HL C
L HL
HL C
L HL HL
Mounting plate 12.5 37.5
(max. t3.2)
F
R1
111
102
114
114
7.7
47
47
C
45
L C
L C
L C
L
M4✕0.7
52
Mounting screw
102
ø20
25 25 25 12 12
Studs are horizontal M4✕0.7 24 24
72 52 direction only 50 25 25 25 Tapped hole
95 102 25 25 25
Rated current (A) A B C D E F

15-50 10.5 6.5 4 13 16 4
60-125 12.5 8.5 4 13 16 5

3P
Detail of Preparation of HL
HL
connecting part conductor
34 25 25 25 75
15 Mounting plate
3 20 (t=3.2mm min)
Conductor
12(max.)
15
48.5
14
ø6.5 25
180
102
114
83
52
45
C C C
52
80
L L L
17(max.)
M6 screw
48.5
14
M6
102 M5✕0.8 75 25
6.5 106 Mounting screw
129
Flush-mounted Detail of connecting part Drilling plan (front view)

7
Mounting plate
2P 3P (t=4max) A A 2P 3P
B
HL C
L C
L C
L C
L
E
12.5 M5✕0.8
Mounting screw
C DC D
F
196
140
114
C C C C C
66
L L L L L
15 107 68 93
96 121
40 157 78 103
Rated current (A) A B C D E F

15-50 10.5 6.5 4 13 16 4
60-125 12.5 8.5 4 13 16 5
7-9
7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers （100A・50A Frame）
S100-NF, S50-GF, S100-GF

3
hour
2
Type S100-NF S50-GF S100-GF 1
Number of poles ２３４３４２３４ 40
30
■Ratings 20
15 50 15
minute
Rated current, A 15 60 10 Max.(40–50A)
Calibrated at 45°C 20 60 20 20 75 6
30 75 30 30 100 4
40 100 40 40 2
Max.(60–100A)
50 50 1
40
30
Tripping Time
20 Max.(15–30A)
10
4
2 Min.(40–100A)
NK AC 690V 6/6 6/6 6/6 1
second
0.6 Min.(15–30A) Magnetic trip
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 25/25 50/25 50/25 setting
0.4
240V 50/50 85/85 85/85 960%–1440%
0.2
q DC 250V 25/19 40/40 40/40
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 6/6 6/6 6/6 0.1
0.06
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 22/22 25/22 25/22 0.04
440V 25/25 50/25 50/25 0.02
415V 30/30 65/33 65/33
0.01
380V 30/30 65/33 65/33
240V 50/50 85/85 85/85 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
q DC 250V 25/19 40/40 40/40
125V 40/30 40/40 40/40
■Rated short time withstand current, kA ― ― ―
With extension bars ○（BAR） ○（BAR） ○（BAR）
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ― ― 140 Calibrated
Flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ 15A temperature
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ― ○ ― ○ ― ― ○ ― 130
100A,60A

High-performance (PMB) ○ ○ ○
For distribution boards (PMC) ― ○ ― ○ ― ― ○ ― 120 50A
Draw-out type (DR) ― ― ―
110
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ○ ― 75A,40A
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― ― 20A
DIN rail mount ― ○⑪ ○⑪ ― ○⑪ 100
30A
Motor operator ＭＣ ― ● ● ― ●
Calibrated at 45°C 5 15 25 35 45 55
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ― ● ● ― ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ― ● ● ― ●
Externally mounted
Mechanical interlock Slide type ＭＳ ― ● ● ― ●
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● ●
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●③ ●e ●e
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Suitability for isolation Yes Yes Yes
Notes:
● : “yes” or “available”. ― : “no” or “not available”. 1 : DC rating available on request. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are
supplied as standard. (Front connection only) !1 : Provided with DIN rail adaptor.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Toggle
Right pole
7-10
Outline dimensions (mm) S100-NF, S50-GF, S100-GF
Front-connected
Preparation of conductor With extension bars (optional) Drilling plan (front view)
ø9
8.5(max.)
2P 3P 4P 3P 27.2
Interpole barrier Mounting ø8.5 16 3.2 2P 3P 4P
20.5
(removable) hole 24
8
M8screw
47
15 HL C
L H
L H
L 17(max.) H
LCL H
L H
L
max.t5
55 84 84
102
134
155
132
45
C
L C
L C
L C
L
M4✕0.7
22 Mounting screw
30 60 30 45 8 M4✕0.7
15 30 30
60 90 90 61 30 30 30 3.2 Tapped hole
120 4 72 27.2
92 4P
Rear-connected Detail of connecting part

Drilling plan (front view) Panel cutout (front view)
13.5 Conductor overlap, max 4P
3P 4P
Mounting plate 11.5 2P 3P 4P 3P
2P 2P
(max. t3.2) H HC H
L HC H H 15 L L 45 L
16
15 L L L L
8.5
5
3 13.5
R1
3 13.5
8
134
132
134
C
52
48
C
L L C
L
16
M4✕0.7 12 12
30 30 30 Mounting screw 30 30 30 ø18
72 52 Stud can be 24 24
60 30 30 30 M4✕0.7
92 102 turned 45° or 90° Tapped hole Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance
Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. of 1.0mm or more around the handle escutcheon.
Plug-in (Standard) Detail of connecting part Preparation of conductor

ø6.5
10(max.)
Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view)
M6screw
3 15(max.)
3P Conductor 3P 3P
24
18.5
Mounting hole HL HL HL
ø6
13
25
11
84
30
107
194
134
100
134
155
102
75
75
45
CL CL CL CL
27
22
13
25
11
Mounting plate
18.5
60 35 22 2 M5✕0.8 30 30 M6 30
90 4 112 Mounting screw 89 86
132
Plug-in Detail of connecting part Preparation of conductor

(High-performance) ø6.5
10(max.)
M6screw
Mounting base (rear view) 15(max.) Drilling plan (front view)
5.2 20 Conductor
24.2 2P 3P 4P
2P 3P 4P 90
Mounting H 2P only 30 60 30 2P 3P 4P
H
LCL H
L hole L 27 43
HL HL HL LC
H L HL HL ø6
55 84 84
35 47.5 22.5 7
190
108
160
155
170
134
75
40
75
C
L C
L C
L C
L
50
37.5
22
15 15 10 14 14 21 14
120 27 60 90 120
60 4.5 90 120 22.5
Mounting plate
M5✕0.8 M6 35 70
Mounting screw ø18 for accessory wiring when necessary
Flush-mounted Detail of connecting part Panel cutout (front view)

2P 3P 4P
M5✕0.8 13.5 Conductor overlap, max 4-ø6
2P 3P 4P
H
LCL Mounting screw CL LC
H L Mounting plate 11.5 Mounting hole
15 15 (max. t4) C
L C
L C
L
16
5
8.5
3 13.5
3 13.5
192
181
45
134
C C
66
L L C
L
16
122 157 192 Left and right poles 91 126 161

15 (Left pole for 2P)107 Stud can be 101 136 171
Center pole, Neutral pole turned 45° or 90°
37 (Left pole for 2P)157
Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides.
7-11
7
S125-NF, S125-GF
3
2
hour
Type S125-NF S125-GF 1
Number of poles ２３４２３４ 40
30
■Ratings 20
125 125
minute
Rated current, A
10
Calibrated at 45°C 6
4
2
1
40 Max.
Tripping Time
30
20
10
Min.
NK AC 690V 6/6 6/6 1
second
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 25/25 50/25 0.6
0.4 Magnetic trip
240V 50/50 85/85 setting
q DC 250V 25/19 40/40 0.2 800%–1200%
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 6/6 6/6 0.1
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 22/22 25/22 0.06
0.04
440V 25/25 50/25
415V 30/30 65/33 0.02
380V 30/30 65/33 0.01
240V 50/50 85/85 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
q DC 250V 25/19 40/40
■Rated short time withstand current, kA − −
Flat bar studs ○ ○
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ― ○ ― ― ○ ― 130 Calibrated
temperature
High-performance (PMB) ○ ○
For distribution boards (PMC) ― ○ ― ― ○ ― 120

Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ ○
110
TemPlug70 (PG) ○ ○ ― ○ ○ ―
100
DIN rail mount ― ○⑪ ― ○⑪
Clip-in chassis mount − ―
Motor operator ＭＣ ― ● ― ●
5 15 25 35 45 55
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ― ● ― ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ― ● ― ●
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ − ―
Mechanical interlock Slide type ＭＳ ― ● ― ●
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●③ ●e
CE marking Yes Yes
Notes:
supplied as standard. (Front connection only) !1 : Provided with DIN rail adaptor.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Toggle
Right pole
7-12
Outline dimensions (mm) S125-NF, S125-GF
Front-connected
ø9
8.5(max.)
2P 3P 4P 3P 27.2
Interpole barrier Mounting ø8.5 16 3.2 2P 3P 4P
20.5
(removable) hole 24
8
M8screw
47
15 HL C
L H
L H
L 17(max.) H
LCL H
L H
L
max.t5
55 84 84
102
134
155
132
45
C
L C
L C
L C
L
M4✕0.7
22 Mounting screw
30 60 30 45 8 M4✕0.7
15 30 30
60 90 90 61 30 30 30 3.2 Tapped hole
120 4 72 27.2
92 4P

3P 4P
Mounting plate 11.5 2P 3P 4P 3P
2P 2P
(max. t3.2) H HC H
L HC H H 15 L L 45 L
16
15 L L L L
8.5
5
3 13.5
R1
3 13.5
8
134
132
134
C
52
48
C
L L C
L
16
M4✕0.7 12 12
30 30 30 Mounting screw 30 30 30 ø18
72 52 Stud can be 24 24
60 30 30 30 M4✕0.7
92 102 turned 45° or 90° Tapped hole Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance

ø6.5
10(max.)
M6screw
3 15(max.)
3P Conductor 3P 3P
24
18.5
ø6
13
25
11
84
30
107
194
134
100
134
155
102
75
75
45
CL CL CL CL
27
22
13
25
11
Mounting plate
18.5
60 35 22 2 M5✕0.8 30 30 M6 30
132
Plug-in Detail of connecting part Preparation of conductor

(High-performance) ø6.5
10(max.)
M6screw
Mounting base (rear view) 15(max.) Drilling plan (front view)
5.2 20 Conductor
24.2 2P 3P 4P
2P 3P 4P 90
Mounting H 2P only 30 60 30 2P 3P 4P
H
LCL H
L hole L 27 43
HL HL HL LC
H L HL HL ø6
55 84 84
35 47.5 22.5 7
190
108
160
155
170
134
75
40
75
C
L C
L C
L C
L
50
37.5
22
15 15 10 14 14 21 14
120 27 60 90 120
60 4.5 90 120 22.5
Mounting plate
M5✕0.8 M6 35 70
Flush-mounted Detail of connecting part Panel cutout (front view)

2P 3P 4P
M5✕0.8 13.5 Conductor overlap, max 4-ø6
2P 3P 4P
H
LCL Mounting screw CL LC
H L Mounting plate 11.5 Mounting hole
15 15 (max. t4) C
L C
L C
L
16
5
8.5
3 13.5
3 13.5
192
181
45
134
C C
66
L L C
L
16
122 157 192 Left and right poles 91 126 161

15 (Left pole for 2P)107 Stud can be 101 136 171
Center pole, Neutral pole turned 45° or 90°
37 (Left pole for 2P)157
7-13
7
S225-NF, S225-GF
3
hour
2
Number of poles 2＊ 3 4 2＊ 3 4 40
30
■Ratings 20
125 200 125
minute
Rated current, A 10
Calibrated at 45°C 150 225 150 6
175 175 4
200 2
225 1
40 Max.
30
Tripping Time
20
4
Min.
1 Magnetic trip
NK AC 690V 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5
second
setting
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 25/25 50/25 0.6
1040%–1560%
0.4
240V 65/65 85/85
0.2
q DC 250V 40/40 40/40
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 0.1
0.06
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 25/25 25/25 0.04
440V 25/25 50/25
0.02
415V 35/35 65/35
0.01
380V 35/35 65/35
240V 65/65 85/85 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
q DC 250V 40/40 40/40

175A
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ― ○ ― ― ○ ― Percent current rating 130 Calibrated
High-performance (PMB) ○ ○ temperature
200A
For distribution boards (PMC) ― ― 120
110
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ○ ― ― ○ ― 225A,125A
DIN rail mount ― ― 100
150A
Motor operator ＭＣ ● ●
5 15 25 35 45 55
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ● ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ●
Externally mounted
Mechanical interlock Slide type ＭＳ ● ●
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●3 ●3
CE marking Yes Yes
Notes:
supplied as standard. (Front connection only)

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-14
Front-connected Preparation of conductor H With extension bars (optional) Drilling plan (front view)
L
3P 4P ø9
10(max.)
120
Interpole barrier Mounting hole 97
(removable) 28
100
11.5
23 23 4 3P 4P
M8screw 24 25(max.)
H
L H
L H H
23
30.5
max.t7 L L
ø11
98 98
102
126
C
144
165
45
C
L C
L M4✕0.7 C
L L L
22 Mounting screw 22
19
30.5
70 35 45 8 35 35 M4✕0.7
105 105 61 23 4 Tapped hole
11.5
140 4 72 ø11 35 35 35 28
92 Conductor overlap, max

4P 4P
Mounting plate 3P 4P 3P
3P
(max. t3.2) H H ø24 H HL
L L L 52.5
6
R1
144
C C C
48
L L L
126
144
Conductor
8
22 overlap, max
20
ø9 15 15 35 35 M4✕0.7 12
M4✕0.7
71 35 35 35 Mounting screw 35 35 35 35 35 Tapped hole 24
72 106 Stud can be turned
45°or 90° Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance
Plug-in (Standard) Detail of connecting part 18 27 26.5 Mounting plate

15
16.5(max.)
3P Conductor width, max.25 3P 3P

Mounting hole HL M8 screw HL HL
ø6
13
18
Auxiliary
98 circuit terminals 30
100
144
165
102
180
144
62
75
CL CL CL CL
45
75
22
18
4 95 57 Mounting plate
70 M5✕0.8 35 35 30
115 M8
Mounting screw
105 105 86
Plug-in (High-performance) Detail of connecting part

27
15.5 (max.)
5 Mounting base Preparation of conductor Drilling plan

15.5(max.)
ø9
3P 4P
Conductor width, max.22 105
3P Mounting 4P 24 70 35 22(max.) 3P 4P
H hole H M8 screw H H
L L L L HL HL
ø6
98 98
7
15
35 52.5 17.5
165
180
144
75
CL CL CL
50
75
200
108
180
CL
37.5
22
15
120 27 M8 Mounting plate

105 140 105 140 15 17.5 15
M5✕0.8 35 70
Mounting screw
Flush-mounted Panel cutout (front view)

3P 4P
3P 4P
CL M5✕0.8 H
LC L Mounting plate
Mounting screw 17.5 4-ø6Mounting hole CL CL
(max. t4)
6
144
192
181
45
66
CL CL Conductor CL
22 overlap, max
20
Stud can be turned 126 161

157 192 ø9 15 15
45° or 90° 136 171
15 Left and right poles126
37 Center pole, Neutral pole161
7-15
7
E250-SF, S250-SF
3
2
hour
Type E250-SF S250-SF 1
Number of poles 2＊３ 2＊３ 2＊ 3 4 2＊ 3 4 40
30
■Ratings 20
125 250 125 250
minute
Rated current, A
10
175 175 4
200 200 2
225 225 1 Max.
40
30
Tripping Time
20
Rated insulation voltage〔Ui〕 V AC 690 690 690 690 6
Rated impulse withstand voltage 〔U imp〕 kV 8 8 8 8 4
Magnetic trip
■Rated breaking capacity, kA 2 Min. setting 250A
NK AC 690V ― ― ― ― 880%–1320%
1
second
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 15/12 15/12 30/15 30/15 0.6 Magnetic trip setting
0.4 125A–225A
240V 35/27 35/27 85/43 85/43
1040%–1560%
q DC 250V ― ― 25/13 25/13 0.2
IEC60947-2 AC 690V ― ― 4/2 4/2 0.1
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 10/7.5 10/7.5 25/13 25/13 0.06
0.04
440V 15/12 15/12 30/15 30/15
415V 25/19 25/19 40/20 40/20 0.02
380V 25/19 25/19 40/20 40/20 0.01
240V 35/27 35/27 85/43 85/43 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
q DC 250V 15/12 15/12 25/13 25/13
125V 25/19 25/19 40/20 40/20 Percent Rated Current
Weight (' marked standard type) kg 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.9 1.5 1.5 1.9
With extension bars ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR) ○（BAR） ○（BAR）
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ― ― ― 140
Flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ ○ 125A
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ― ○ ― Percent current rating 130 Calibrated
250A temperature
High-performance (PMB) ― ― ― ―
For distribution boards (PMC) ― ― ― ― 175A
120 225A
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ ○
Draw-out type (DR) ― ― ― ―
110 200A
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ― ○ ―
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― ― ― 150A
DIN rail mount ― ― ― ― 100
Clip-in chassis mount ― ― ― ―
Motor operator ＭＣ ● ● ● ●
5 15 25 35 45 55
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ● ● ● ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ● ● ●
Externally mounted
Mechanical interlock Slide type ＭＳ ● ● ● ●
Toggle holder ＨＨ ● ● ● ●
Toggle lock ＨＬ ● ● ● ●
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● ● ●
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●③ ●③ ●③ ●③
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● ● ● ●
Door flange ＤＦ ● ● ● ●
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Suitability for isolation Yes Yes Yes Yes
CE marking Yes Yes Yes Yes
Notes:
3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only)

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-16
Outline dimensions (mm) E250-SF, S250-SF

conductor (optional) (front view)
Interpole barrier Mounting hole
3P 4P ø9 3P 4P
11(max.)
HL (removable) HL
Interpole barrier Conductor
(removable) Conductor overlap, max
overlap, max
101
101
25(max.) 35 35 35 35 35
11.5
11.5
3P 4P
24 max.t7 23 23
Mounting hole M8 screw
HL HL HL HL
30.5
30.5
19
19
98 98 98 98
144
165
102
126
165
C C C C
45
L L L L
M4✕0.7
30.5
30.5
70 35 46 7 M4✕0.7
23
23
6.5 35 35
105 105 60 Tapped hole
23 23 6.8 23
11.5
11.5
140 72
95 97 48.5 48.5 48.5 ✽ For the extension bars, straight bars or
ø11 ø11 spread bars can be supplied.
120 169
Rear-connected
Mounting plate 4P 4P
Detail of 3P 4P
(max. t3.2) 3P 3P
connecting part ø24
HL HL HL HL
6
R1
102
144
126
144
45
C C C
47
L Conductor L L
overlap, max
7
25 22 ø9
20
M4✕0.7 M4✕0.7
9
6 13 16 Stud can be turned Mounting screw 35 35 Tapped hole 12

45° or 90° 24
60 72 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35
72 107 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an
allowance of 1.0mm around the handle
escutcheon.
Plug-in (Standard)
Mounting base Drilling plan
M5✕0.8 (rear view) (front view)
Detail of connecting part Mounting screw 3P 3P
Auxiliary HL HL
Mounting plate circuit terminals ø6
18 27 26.5 13
Conductor width,
18
15
max.25
30
16.5(max.)
144
100
102
180
75
45
75
C C C
62
L L L
18
M8 screw
(60) 57 35 35 M8 30 Mounting plate

6.5 95 105 86
118
Flush-mounted
7
3P 4P
M5✕0.8 C HL C 4-ø6 3P 4P
Mounting screw L L Mounting plate Mounting hole C C
17.5 (max.t4) L L
6
181
Conductor
144
192
45
C C C
66
L L L
overlap, max
25 22
ø9
20
9
6 13 16 Stud can be turned

157 192 126 161
15 127 45° or 90°
136 171
40 162
7-17
7
S250-NF, S250-GF
3
2
hour
Number of poles 2＊ 3 4 2＊ 3 4 40
30
■Ratings 20
250 250
minute
Rated current, A
10
4
2
1
40 Max.
30
Tripping Time
20
■Rated breaking capacity, kA 2 Min.
NK AC 690V 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 1
second
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 25/25 50/25 0.6 Magnetic trip
0.4 setting
240V 65/65 85/85
800%–1200%
q DC 250V 40/40 40/40 0.2
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 0.1
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 25/25 25/25 0.06
0.04
440V 25/25 50/25
415V 35/35 65/35 0.02
380V 35/35 65/35 0.01
240V 65/65 85/85 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
q DC 250V 40/40 40/40
■Rated short time withstand current, kA − ―
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ― ○ ― ― ○ ― 130 Calibrated
High-performance (PMB) ○ ○ temperature

110
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ○ ― ― ○ ―
5 15 25 35 45 55
Externally mounted
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●③ ●e
CE marking Yes Yes
Notes:
supplied as standard. (Front connection only)

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-18
Front-connected Preparation of conductor H With extension bars (optional) Drilling plan (front view)
L
3P 4P ø9
10(max.)
120
Interpole barrier Mounting hole 97
(removable) 28
100
11.5
23 23 4 3P 4P
M8screw 24 25(max.)
H
L H
L H H
23
30.5
max.t7 L L
ø11
98 98
102
126
C
144
165
45
C
L C
L M4✕0.7 C
L L L
19
30.5
70 35 45 8 35 35 M4✕0.7
105 105 61 23 4 Tapped hole
11.5
140 4 72 ø11 35 35 35 28
92 Conductor overlap, max

4P 4P
3P
(max. t3.2) H H ø24 H HL
L L L 52.5
6
R1
144
C C C
48
L L L
126
144
Conductor
8
22 overlap, max
20
ø9 15 15 35 35 M4✕0.7 12
M4✕0.7
71 35 35 35 Mounting screw 35 35 35 35 35 Tapped hole 24
45°or 90° Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance
Plug-in (Standard) Detail of connecting part 18 27 26.5 Mounting plate

15
16.5(max.)
3P Conductor width, max.25 3P 3P

Mounting hole HL M8 screw HL HL
ø6
13
18
Auxiliary
98 circuit terminals 30
100
144
165
102
180
144
62
75
CL CL CL CL
45
75
22
18
4 95 57 Mounting plate
70 M5✕0.8 35 35 30
115 M8
Mounting screw
105 105 86

27
15.5 (max.)
5 Mounting base Preparation of conductor Drilling plan

15.5(max.)
ø9
3P 4P
3P Mounting 4P 24 70 35 22(max.) 3P 4P
H hole H M8 screw H H
L L L L HL HL
ø6
98 98
7
15
35 52.5 17.5
165
180
144
75
CL CL CL
50
75
200
108
180
CL
37.5
22
15
120 27 M8 Mounting plate

105 140 105 140 15 17.5 15
M5✕0.8 35 70
Mounting screw

3P 4P
3P 4P
CL M5✕0.8 H
LC L Mounting plate
Mounting screw 17.5 4-ø6Mounting hole CL CL
(max. t4)
6
144
192
181
45
66
CL CL Conductor CL
22 overlap, max
20

157 192 ø9 15 15
45° or 90° 136 171
7-19
7
S400-CF, S400-NF, S400-GF, S400-PF

3
hour
2
Type S400-CF S400-NF S400-GF S400-PF 1
Number of poles ３４３４３４３４ 40
30
■Ratings 20
125 250 125 250 125 250 250
minute
Rated current, A 10
Calibrated at 45°C 150 300 150 300 150 300 300 6 Max.(300–400A)
175 350 175 350 175 350 350 4
200 400 200 400 200 400 400 2 Max.(125–250A)
225 225 225 1
40
Tripping Time
30
20
10 Min.(300–400A)
4
Rated impulse withstand voltage 〔U imp〕 kV 8 8 8 8 Min.(125–250A)
NK AC 690V 15/15 20/15 20/15 20/15 1
second
0.6 Setting tolerance(X6) Setting tolerance(X12)
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 30/30 45/45 65/50 80/80
0.4
240V 50/50 85/85 100/85 100/85 X12
0.2 Adjustable setting
q DC 250V 40/40 ― ― ― X6
0.1 range of magnetic
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 15/15 20/15 20/15 20/15 trip(Notes:2.)
0.06
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 22/22 30/30 30/30 30/30 0.04
440V 30/30 45/45 65/50 80/80
0.02
415V 36/36 50/50 70/50 85/85
0.01
380V 36/36 50/50 70/50 85/85
240V 50/50 85/85 100/85 100/85 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
q DC 250V 40/40 40/40 40/40 40/40
125V 40/40 40/40 40/40 40/40 Percent Rated Current

With extension bars ○（BAR） ○（BAR） ○（BAR） ○（BAR）
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ― ― ― 140 125A
Flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ ○ 175A
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ― Calibrated
Percent current rating 130 300A
temperature
High-performance (PMB) ○ ○ ○ ○ 200A
For distribution boards (PMC) ― ― ― ― 120
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ ○
Draw-out type (DR) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
110
TemPlug70 (PG) ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― 350A
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― ― ―
100 225A
DIN rail mount ― ― ― ―
Clip-in chassis mount ― ― ― ― 400,250,150A
Motor operator ＭＣ ● ● ● ●
5 15 25 35 45 55
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ● ● ● ●
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ● ● ●
Externally mounted
Mechanical interlock⑨ Slide type ＭＳ ● ● ● ●
Magnetic trip pickup current
● ● ● ●
Toggle lock ＨＬ Rated current Magnetic trip pickup current
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● ● ● (A) Adjustable range (A)
In × 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
125 1500 1375 1250 1125 1000 875 750
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●③ ●e ●e ●e
150 1800 1650 1500 1350 1200 1050 900
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● ● ● ● 175 2100 1925 1750 1575 1400 1225 1050
Door flange ＤＦ ● ● ● ● 200 2400 2200 2000 1800 1600 1400 1200
■Standard specifications 225 2700 2475 2250 2025 1800 1575 1350
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic 250 3000 2750 2500 2250 2000 1750 1500
300 3600 3300 3000 2700 2400 2100 1800
350 4200 3850 3500 3150 2800 2450 2100
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes Yes Yes Yes 400 4800 4400 4000 3600 3200 2800 2400
Suitability for isolation Yes Yes Yes Yes Notes:
CE marking Yes Yes Yes Yes 1. Setting tolerance: ±20%.
Notes: 2. The protection characteristic curves assume that the magnetic
' : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. ○ : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. trip current is adjustable.
▲ : Semi-standard. ● : “yes” or “available”. ― : “no” or “not available”. 1 : DC rating available on request. 3. Unless otherwise stated when ordering, the selector dial is
3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) factory set to position “12”.
9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). 4. The trip pickup current of DC models is not adjustable; the dial
position corresponding to the trip pickup current is marked with a
white point.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-20
Outline dimensions (mm) S400-CF, S400-NF, S400-GF, S400-PF
Front-connected Preparation of conductor With extension bars (optional) Drilling plan (front view)
HL HL ON side:36
ø1
ø11 148
Interpole barrier
4
OFF side:35
(removable) Mounting 120
110
30 14.5
30 14.5
hole M10 screw 8 36
(max.)
25 HL 28 3P 4P
12
(max.)
44.5
44.5
HL HL
116 116
102
228
260
90
CL
349
260
214
M6 CL CL CL
Trip button (red)
85.3 14.7
44.5
97 45 45 M6
90 45 45 45 4 107 Tapped hole
140 70 115 127.5 52.5 8 35
185 145 60 60 60
81.5 126.5
Rear-connected Stud can be turned 45° or 90°

HL
Mounting plate Groove for dissipating heat 4P
3P 4P generated by eddy current CL
HL HL 3P
8
CL
8
103
R1
102
90
CL
228
260
70
214
228
39
92
110
CL CL
15
39
30
45
overlap, max
45
3
15
Conductor
ø1
30 45 45 45
overlap, max
ø1
97
Conductor
53
3
8
4 107
127.5 M6
ø3
145 90 45 45 45
6
Tapped hole Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance
Plug-in (Standard) Detail of connecting part Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view)
M8Mounting screw
20 Conductor 130 72 10
H
L H H
L
width, max. 35 L
5
20 54
116 M10screw
40
25
23 47 35 40
102
260
228
134
134
C C
90
282
282
282
84
L L L C
L
Auxiliary circuit 60
terminals 60
25
51
54 20
2✕2-ø9 Mounting plate

120
140 4 130 90
148 150 148
168
M5Mounting screw
Plug-in Detail of connecting part 16
Conductor width, max. 30
(High-performance) Preparation of conductor
20(max.)
ø11
20(max.)

3P 4P M10screw 3P 4P 3P 4P
HL HL 5 43 20 36 HL HL HL HL
30(max.)
20 48 20
116 116
40
25
40
7
260
286
315
228
276
315
140
140
90
CL CL CL CL CL
70 70 10 70 10 70
25
51 51
48 20
ø6
2-
2✕
20
70 115 30.5 30.5 Mounting angle

140 185 155 52 4 90 45 45 45

CL
CL HL Mounting plate
3P 4P 22.5
4t max.
3P C
L 4P HC
LL 2✕2-ø7
8
Mounting hole
343
CL
228
127
333
C
L C
L
3
ø1
30
223 268
M6 40 158 Stud can be turned 45° or 90°
181 226
Mounting screw 57 198
200 245
7-21
7
H100-NF, L100-NF
3
hour
2
Type H100-NF L100-NF 1
Number of poles ３４３４ 40
30
■Ratings 20
15 50 15 50
minute
Rated current, A 10 Max.(40–100A)
Calibrated at 45°C 20 60 20 60 6
30 75 30 75 4
40 100 40 100 2 Max.(15–30A)
1
40
Tripping Time
30
20
10
4
Rated impulse withstand voltage 〔U imp〕 kV 8 8 Min.(40–100A)
Min.(15–30A)
NK AC 690V 20/15 25/20 1
second
0.6 Magnetic trip
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 120/80 180/135 setting
0.4
240V 150/150 200/150#1 960%–1440%
0.2
q DC 250V ― ―
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 20/15 25/20 0.1
0.06
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 45/45 65/65 0.04
440V 120/80 180/135
0.02
415V 125/85 200/150
0.01
380V 125/85 200/150
240V 150/150 200/150 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
q DC 250V 40/40 40/40
Weight (' marked standard type) kg 2.4 3.2 2.4 3.2
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ― 140 75A Calibrated
Flat bar studs ○ ○ temperature
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ― ○ ― 40A
Percent current rating 130
60A,100A
110
TemPlug70 (PG) ▲ ― ― 15A,50A
100
DIN rail mount ― ― 30A
Clip-in chassis mount ― ― 20A
5 15 25 35 45 55
Externally mounted
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●e ●e
CE marking Yes Yes
Notes:
▲ : Semi-standard. ● : “yes” or “available”. ― : “no” or “not available”. 1 : DC rating available on request.
#1 : Also applicable to AC415V.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-22
Outline dimensions (mm) H100-NF, L100-NF

120
Front-connected 97 With extension bars (optional) Drilling plan (front view)
3P Interpole barrier 4P 23
Mounting hole
(removable) 3P
Preparation of conductor
11.5
HL
63
100 ø9 4
23
30.5
M8 screw 59 3P 4P
H
L H
L HL HL
10(max.)
Mounting hole
25(max.)
98 98 max.t7 98
126
144
165
102
102
45
45
CL CL CL CL CL
22
M4✕0.7 M4✕0.7
70 35 80 8 Mounting screw Mounting screw 35 35 M4✕0.7
30.5
105 105 96 80 8 Tapped hole
140 4 107 23 96
11.5
127 ø11 103
35 35 35 4 107
140 127
Rear-connected 4P Drilling plan (front view) Panel cutout (front view)

3P 4P
Mounting plate HL 3P
3P 4P
(max. t3.2) ø24 H
HL HL 52.5 L
6
1
R
144
102
126
144
45
48
CL CL CL
Conductor
8
22 overlap, max
20
Stud can be turned M4✕0.7

ø9 15 15 Mounting screw 35 35 M4✕0.7 12
45° or 90°
96 71 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 Tapped hole 24
4 107 106
127 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance
of 1.0mm or more around the handle escutcheon.
Plug-in Detail of connecting part

18 27 26.5
15
Mounting plate
16.5 (max.)
(Standard) Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view)

3P 3P 3P
Mounting hole HL Conductor width, max.25 HL HL
M8 screw ø6
13
18
98 30
144
100
144
165
102
180
75
62
75
45
CL CL CL CL
22
18
Mounting plate
70 4 130 57 M5✕0.8 35 35 M8 30
105 150 Mounting screw 105 86

27
15.5 (max.)
5
Mounting base Preparation of conductor Drilling plan
15.5(max.)
ø9
3P 4P
3P Mounting 4P 70 35 3P 4P
24 M8 screw HL
HL hole HL HL HL HL
22(max.) ø6
15
98 98
35 52.5 17.5
7
108
180
102
200
165
180
144
50
75
15 75
45
CL CL CL C
L
37.5
22
M8 Mounting plate
105 140 4 155 27 105 140 15 17.5 15
M5✕0.8 35 70
175
Mounting screw

3P 4P
4-ø6 3P 4P
CL M5✕0.8 HL CL Mounting plate Mounting hole
17.5 CL CL
Mounting hole (max.t4)
6
181
45
66
CL
192
144
CL
Conductor
22 overlap, max
20

157 192 ø9 15 15 45° or 90°
136 171
7-23
7
H125-NF,L125-NF
3
2
hour
30
■Ratings 20
minute
4
2
1
Tripping Time
40 Max.
30
20
10
■Rated breaking capacity, kA 2 Min.
NK AC 690V 20/15 25/20 1
second
Magnetic trip
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 120/80 180/135 0.6 setting
240V 150/150 200/150 0.4 960%–1440%
q DC 250V ― ― 0.2
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 20/15 25/20 0.1
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 45/45 65/65 0.06
0.04
440V 120/80 180/135
415V 125/85 200/150 0.02
380V 125/85 200/150 0.01
240V 150/150 200/150 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
q DC 250V 40/40 40/40
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs − − 140
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ― ○ ―
130
Calibrated
temperature
For distribution boards (PMC) − ― 120
Draw-out type (DR) − ―
110
TemPlug70 (PG) ▲ ― ―
5 15 25 35 45 55
Externally mounted
CE marking Yes Yes
Notes:

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-24
Outline dimensions (mm) H125-NF,L125-NF

120
Mounting hole
(removable) 3P
11.5
HL
63
100 ø9 4
23
30.5
M8 screw 59 3P 4P
H
L H
L HL HL
10(max.)
Mounting hole
25(max.)
98 98 max.t7 98
126
144
165
102
102
45
45
CL CL CL CL CL
22
M4✕0.7 M4✕0.7
30.5
105 105 96 80 8 Tapped hole
140 4 107 23 96
11.5
127 ø11 103
35 35 35 4 107
140 127

3P 4P
3P 4P
(max. t3.2) ø24 H
HL HL 52.5 L
6
1
R
144
102
126
144
45
48
CL CL CL
Conductor
8
22 overlap, max
20

45° or 90°
96 71 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 Tapped hole 24
4 107 106

18 27 26.5
15
Mounting plate
16.5 (max.)

3P 3P 3P
M8 screw ø6
13
18
98 30
144
100
144
165
102
180
75
62
75
45
CL CL CL CL
22
18
Mounting plate
70 4 130 57 M5✕0.8 35 35 M8 30

27
15.5 (max.)
5
15.5(max.)
ø9
3P 4P
24 M8 screw HL
HL hole HL HL HL HL
22(max.) ø6
15
98 98
35 52.5 17.5
7
108
180
102
200
165
180
144
50
75
15 75
45
CL CL CL C
L
37.5
22
M8 Mounting plate
105 140 4 155 27 105 140 15 17.5 15
M5✕0.8 35 70
175
Mounting screw

3P 4P
4-ø6 3P 4P
17.5 CL CL
6
181
45
66
CL
192
144
CL
Conductor
22 overlap, max
20

157 192 ø9 15 15 45° or 90°
136 171
7-25
7
H225-NF, L225-NF
3
hour
2
30
■Ratings 20
125 125
minute
Rated current, A 10
175 175 4
200 200 2
225 225 1
40 Max.
Tripping Time
30
20
10
4
Min.
NK AC 690V 20/15 25/20 1
second
0.6 Magnetic trip
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 120/80 180/135 setting
0.4
240V 150/150 200/150#1 1040%–1560%
0.2
q DC 250V ― ―
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 20/15 25/20 0.1
0.06
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 45/45 65/65 0.04
440V 120/80 180/135
0.02
415V 125/85 200/150
0.01
380V 125/85 200/150
240V 150/150 200/150 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
q DC 250V 40/40 40/40

Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ― 140 125A
Flat bar studs ○ ○ 175A
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ― ○ ― Percent current rating 130 200A Calibrated
temperature
110
TemPlug70 (PG) ▲ ― ― 150A
100 225A
DIN rail mount ― ―
5 15 25 35 45 55
Externally mounted
CE marking Yes Yes
Notes:
#1 : Also applicable to AC415V.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-26
Outline dimensions (mm) H225-NF, L225-NF

120
Mounting hole
(removable) 3P
11.5
HL
63
100 ø9 4
23
30.5
M8 screw 59 3P 4P
H
L H
L HL HL
10(max.)
Mounting hole
25(max.)
98 98 max.t7 98
126
144
165
102
102
45
45
CL CL CL CL CL
22
M4✕0.7 M4✕0.7
30.5
105 105 96 80 8 Tapped hole
140 4 107 23 96
11.5
127 ø11 103
35 35 35 4 107
140 127

3P 4P
3P 4P
(max. t3.2) ø24 H
HL HL 52.5 L
6
1
R
144
102
126
144
45
48
CL CL CL
Conductor
8
22 overlap, max
20

45° or 90°
96 71 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 Tapped hole 24
4 107 106

18 27 26.5
15
Mounting plate
16.5 (max.)

3P 3P 3P
M8 screw ø6
13
18
98 30
144
100
144
165
102
180
75
62
75
45
CL CL CL CL
22
18
Mounting plate
70 4 130 57 M5✕0.8 35 35 M8 30

27
15.5 (max.)
5
15.5(max.)
ø9
3P 4P
24 M8 screw HL
HL hole HL HL HL HL
22(max.) ø6
15
98 98
35 52.5 17.5
7
108
180
102
200
165
180
144
50
75
15 75
45
CL CL CL C
L
37.5
22
M8 Mounting plate
105 140 4 155 27 105 140 15 17.5 15
M5✕0.8 35 70
175
Mounting screw

3P 4P
4-ø6 3P 4P
17.5 CL CL
6
181
45
66
CL
192
144
CL
Conductor
22 overlap, max
20

157 192 ø9 15 15 45° or 90°
136 171
7-27
7
S225-GE
3
hour
2 T IR
Ip
Type S225-GE 1
40 tR
Number of poles ３４ tp
30
■Ratings 20 Ig Isd
tsd
minute
Rated current, A (Adjustable) 10 tg Ii
Calibrated at 45°C 125 6 I
150 4
175 2
200 1 5
225 40
Tripping Time
30
20
10
4
2 2
NK AC 690V 7.5/7.5 ⑫ 1 5
second
0.6
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 50/25 ⑫
0.4
240V 85/85 ⑫
0.2
DC 250V ― 3
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 7.5/7.5 0.1
0.06
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 25/25 0.04
4
440V 50/25 4
0.02 1,2 3
415V 65/35
0.01
380V 65/35
240V 85/85 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
DC 250V ―
125V ―
Flat bar studs ○
High-performance (PMB) ○
Draw-out type (DR) ― Overcurrent tripping characteristics
TemPlug70 (PG) ▲ ―
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― Characteristics No. 1 2 3 4 5
DIN rail mount ― Long time-delay pick-up CT rated current : (ICT) = 250A
current (A) : (IR) 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
■Accessories (optional) Symbol 11 21 21 5 7.5
Long time-delay time
at 200%×(IR) at 600%×(IR)
Motor operator ＭＣ ● settings (s) : (tR)
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ● Setting tolerance ±20%
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● Short time-delay (IR)× 2.5 2.5 5 10 10

pick-up current (A) : (Isd)
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ― Setting tolerance ±15%
Mechanical interlock Slide type ＭＳ ● 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2

Short time-delay time
Toggle holder ＨＨ ● settings (s) : (tsd) Total clearing time +50ms, resettable time –20ms
Instantaneous trip pick-up (I )×1400% Max: (ICT)×1300%
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● current (A) : (Ii)
R
Preferential trip alarm
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●e Pick-up current (A) : (Ip) (IR)×80% Setting tolerance ±10%
Time-settings (s) : (tp) Definite time-delay characteristic, 40sec.
Option
Door flange ＤＦ ● Setting tolerance ±10%

■Standard specifications Neutral protection
Overcurrent trip mechanism Electronic ⑳ Pick-up current (A) : (IN) (IR)×100%
Trip button (color) Yes (Red) Time-settings (s) : (tN) (tN)=(tR) Same as Long time-delay time settings
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes Note: Characteristic No.4 will be applied as standard setting unless otherwise
Suitability for isolation Yes specified.
CE marking Yes
Notes:
▲ : Semi-standard. ● : “yes” or “available”. ― : “no” or “not available”.
!2 : Being or will be applied. @0 : Optional pretrip alarm function available on request.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-28
Outline dimensions (mm) S225-GE

120
Mounting hole
(removable) 3P
11.5
HL
63
100 ø9 4
23
30.5
M8 screw 59 3P 4P
H
L H
L HL HL
10(max.)
Mounting hole
25(max.)
98 98 max.t7 98
126
144
165
102
102
45
45
CL CL CL CL CL
22
M4✕0.7 M4✕0.7
30.5
105 105 96 80 8 Tapped hole
140 4 107 23 96
11.5
127 ø11 103
35 35 35 4 107
140 127

3P 4P
3P 4P
(max. t3.2) ø24 H
HL HL 52.5 L
6
1
R
144
102
126
144
45
48
CL CL CL
Conductor
8
22 overlap, max
20

45° or 90°
96 71 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 Tapped hole 24
4 107 106

18 27 26.5
15
Mounting plate
16.5 (max.)

3P 3P 3P
M8 screw ø6
13
18
98 30
144
100
144
165
102
180
75
62
75
45
CL CL CL CL
22
18
Mounting plate
70 4 130 57 M5✕0.8 35 35 M8 30

27
15.5 (max.)
5
15.5(max.)
ø9
3P 4P
24 M8 screw HL
HL hole HL HL HL HL
22(max.) ø6
15
98 98
35 52.5 17.5
7
108
180
102
200
165
180
144
50
75
15 75
45
CL CL CL C
L
37.5
22
M8 Mounting plate
105 140 4 155 27 105 140 15 17.5 15
M5✕0.8 35 70
175
Mounting screw

3P 4P
4-ø6 3P 4P
17.5 CL CL
6
181
45
66
CL
192
144
CL
Conductor
22 overlap, max
20

157 192 ø9 15 15 45° or 90°
136 171
7-29
7
S400-NE, S400-GE, S400-PE

3
hour
2 T IR
Ip
Type S400-NE S400-GE S400-PE 1
40 tR
Number of poles ３４３４３４ tp
30
tsd
minute
Rated current, A (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) 10 7 tg Ii
Calibrated at 45°C 125 175 125 175 125 175 6 I
150 200 150 200 150 200 4 6
175 225 175 225 175 225 2
200 250 200 250 200 250 1 5
225 300 225 300 225 300 40
Tripping Time
30
350 350 350 20
400 400 400 10
4
2 2
NK AC 690V 20/15 20/15 20/15 1 5,6,7
second
0.6
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 45/45 65/50 80/80
0.4
240V 85/85 100/85 100/85
0.2
DC 250V ― ― ― 3
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 20/15 20/15 20/15 0.1
0.06
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 30/30 30/30 30/30 0.04
4
440V 45/45 65/50 80/80 4
0.02 1,2 3
415V 50/50 70/50 85/85
0.01
380V 50/50 70/50 85/85
240V 85/85 100/85 100/85 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
DC 250V ― ― ―
125V ― ― ―
■Rated short time withstand current, kA 5（0.3sec） 5（0.3sec） 5（0.3sec）
With extension bars ○（BAR） ○（BAR） ○（BAR）
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ― ―
Flat bar studs ○ ○ ○
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ― ○ ― ―
For distribution boards (PMC) ― ― ―
Draw-out type (DR) ▲ ▲ ▲ Overcurrent tripping characteristics
TemPlug70 (PG) ○ ― ○ ― ○ ―
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― ― Characteristics No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIN rail mount ― ― ― CT rated current : (ICT) = 250A
Long time-delay pick-up 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
current (A) : (IR)
■Accessories (optional) Symbol CT rated current : (ICT) = 400A
175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
11 21 21 5 10 19 29
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ● ● ● Long time-delay time
at 200%×(IR) at 600%×(IR)
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ● ● settings (s) : (tR)
Externally mounted

Short time-delay (IR)× 2.5 2.5 5 10 10 10 10
Mechanical interlock⑨ Slide type ＭＳ ● ● ●
pick-up current (A) : (Isd) Setting tolerance ±15%
● ● ● 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2
Toggle lock ＨＬ Short time-delay time
settings (s) : (tsd)
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● ● Total clearing time +50ms, resettable time –20ms
R
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●e ●e ●e current (A) : (Ii) Setting tolerance ±20%
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● ● ● Preferential trip alarm
Door flange ＤＦ ● ● ● Pick-up current (A) : (Ip) (IR)×80% Setting tolerance ±10%
Overcurrent trip mechanism Electronic !6 Electronic !6 Electronic !6 Setting tolerance ±10%
Trip button (color) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Ground falut trip
Option
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes Yes Yes Pick-up current (A) : (Ig) (ICT)×20% Setting tolerance ±15% 1
Suitability for isolation Yes Yes Yes Time-settings (s) : (tg) Difinite time-delay characteristic, 0.2sec.
CE marking Yes Yes Yes Total tripping time +50ms, resettable time –20ms.
Neutral protection
Notes:
Pick-up current (A) : (IN) (IR)×100% or 50% selectable 2
Time-settings (s) : (tN) (tN)=(tR) Same as Long time-delay time settings
3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) Note:
1. Ground fault trip is not available when (ICT) is 250A.
9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). 2. In case of (IR)＜(ICT), the setting tolerance becomes big when (IN) is set
!6 : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. at (IR)×50%.
Characteristic No.4 will be applied as standard setting unless otherwise
specified.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-30
Outline dimensions (mm) S400-NE, S400-GE, S400-PE
HL HL ON side:36
ø1
Interpole barrier ø11 148
4
Mounting OFF side:35
(removable) 120
110
hole
30 14.5
30 14.5
M10 screw 8 36
(max.)
25 HL 28 3P 4P
12
(max.)
44.5
44.5
HL HL
116 116
102
228
260
90
CL
349
260
214
M6 CL CL CL
Trip button (red)
85.3 14.7
44.5
97 45 45 M6
90 45 45 45 4 107 Tapped hole
140 70 115 127.5 52.5 8 35
185 145 60 60 60
81.5 126.5

HL
HL HL 3P
8
CL
8
103
R1
102
90
CL
228
260
70
214
228
39
92
110
CL CL
15
39
30
45
Conductor overlap, max
45
3
15
ø1
30 45 45 45
overlap, max
ø1
97
Conductor
53
3
8
4 107 M6
127.5 Tapped hole
ø3
145 90 45 45 45 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance
6
M8 Mounting screw
20 130 72 10
H Conductor H
L
L width, max. 35 H
L
5
20 54
116 M10screw
40
25
23 47 35 40
102
260
228
134
134
C C
90
282
282
282
84
L L L C
L
terminals 60
25
51
54 20

120
140 4 130 90
148 150 148
168

M5 Mounting screw
20(max.)
ø11
20(max.)

30(max.)
20 48 20
116 116
40
25
40
7
260
286
315
228
276
315
140
140
90
CL CL CL CL CL
70 70 10 70 10 70
25
51 51
48 20
ø6
2-
2✕
20
70 115 30.5 30.5

140 185 155 52 4 90 45 45 45 Mounting angle

C
3P CL 4P L L 22.5
H Mounting plate
4t max.
3P C
L 4P HC
LL 2✕2-ø7
8
Mounting hole
343
CL
228
127
333
C
L C
L
3
ø1
30
223 268
40 158 Stud can be turned 45° or 90°
181 226
M6 Mounting screw 57 198
200 245
7-31
7
H400-NE, L400-NE
3
hour
2 T IR
Ip
Type H400-NE L400-NE 1
40 tR
Number of poles ３４３４ tp
30
tsd
minute
Rated current, A (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) 10 7 tg Ii
Calibrated at 45°C 125 175 125 175 6 I
150 200 150 200 4 6
175 225 175 225 2
200 250 200 250 1 5
225 300 225 300 40
Tripping Time
30
350 350 20
400 400 10
4
2 2
NK AC 690V 35/35 50/50 1 5,6,7
second
0.6
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 120/80 180/135
0.4
240V 150/150 200/150 #1
0.2
DC 250V ― ― 3
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 35/35 50/50 0.1
0.06
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 45/45 65/65 0.04
4
440V 120/80 180/135 4
0.02 1,2 3
415V 125/85 200/150
0.01
380V 125/85 200/150
240V 150/150 200/150 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
DC 250V ― ―
125V ― ―
■Rated short time withstand current, kA 5（0.3sec） 5（0.3sec）
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ―
For distribution boards (PMC) ― ―
Draw-out type (DR) ▲ ▲ Overcurrent tripping characteristics
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― Characteristics No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIN rail mount ― ― CT rated current : (ICT) = 250A
Long time-delay pick-up 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
current (A) : (IR)
■Accessories (optional) Symbol CT rated current : (ICT) = 400A
175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
11 21 21 5 10 19 29
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ● ● Long time-delay time
at 200%×(IR) at 600%×(IR)
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ● settings (s) : (tR)
Externally mounted
Short time-delay (IR)× 2.5 2.5 5 10 10 10 10
Mechanical interlock⑨ Slide type ＭＳ ● ●
pick-up current (A) : (Isd) Setting tolerance ±15%
● ● 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2
Toggle lock ＨＬ Short time-delay time
settings (s) : (tsd)
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● Total clearing time +50ms, resettable time –20ms
R
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●e ●e current (A) : (Ii) Setting tolerance ±20%
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● ● Preferential trip alarm
Door flange ＤＦ ● ● Pick-up current (A) : (Ip) (IR)×80% Setting tolerance ±10%
Overcurrent trip mechanism Electronic !6 Electronic !6 Setting tolerance ±10%
Trip button (color) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Ground falut trip
Option
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes Yes Pick-up current (A) : (Ig) (ICT)×20% Setting tolerance ±15% 1
Suitability for isolation Yes Yes Time-settings (s) : (tg) Difinite time-delay characteristic, 0.2sec.
CE marking Yes Yes Total tripping time +50ms, resettable time –20ms.
Neutral protection
Notes:
Pick-up current (A) : (IN) (IR)×100% or 50% selectable 2
Time-settings (s) : (tN) (tN)=(tR) Same as Long time-delay time settings
3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) Note:
1. Ground fault trip is not available when (ICT) is 250A.
9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). 2. In case of (IR)＜(ICT), the setting tolerance becomes big when (IN) is set
!6 : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. at (IR)×50%.
#1 : Also applicable to AC415V. Characteristic No.4 will be applied as standard setting unless otherwise
specified.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-32
Outline dimensions (mm) H400-NE, L400-NE
Front-connected Preparation of conductor With extension bars (optional)

ø1
HL HL 148
4
ON side:75 120
Interpole barrier Mounting OFF side:72 ø11
30 14.5
HL28 8 75
110
(removable) hole 3P 4P
M10 screw HL HL
44.5
(max.)
25
12
(max.)
116 116
228
260
102
214
90
CL CL CL CL CL
M6
Mounting screw Trip button
51 51 (red)
122.3 17.7 45 45 M6
134 52.5 Tapped hole
90 45 45 45 4 144 8 72
140 70 115 60 60 60
164.5
185 81.5 126.5
182
Rear-connected Drilling plan (front view)

Groove for dissipating heat Panel cutout (front view)
Stud can be turned 45° or 90° HL 3P 4P generated by eddy current 4P
Mounting plate HL HL
C
L
8
3P
C
8
L
140
R1
214
228
CL CL
102
228
260
90
92
CL
70
45 45
30
39
110
Conductor
15
39
overlap, max
30
8
3
ø1
45 45 45
15
134
ø1
3
ø3
4 144 M6 53
90 45 45 45
6
182 Tapped hole
Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon.
Plug-in (Standard) Detail of connecting part

M8 Mounting screw Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view)
HL 20 Conductor 167 72 10 HL HL
width, max. 35
5
20 54
116 M10 screw
40
25
23 47 35 40
102
134
228
134
260
282
282
282
90
CL CL CL CL
84
terminals 60
25
51
54 20

157
140 90
4 167
148 187.5 148
205

M5 Mounting screw
20(max.)
ø11
20(max.)

5 43 20 36 M10 screw
3P 4P
HL HL 3P HL 4P HL 30(max.) 3P HL 4P H
L
5
20 48 20
40
116 116
7
90 25
40
140
228
276
315
260
286
315
CL CL
140
CL C
L CL CL
70 70 10 70 10 70
25
51 51
20 48 20
ø6
2-
2✕
70 115 30.5 30.5

140 185 192 52 4 90 45 45 45 Mounting angle

C Mounting plate
L 4t max.
3P C 4P H
L 22.5 3P C
L 4P C
L LL
H
2✕2-ø7
8
Mounting hole
228
127
C
L C C
L
343
L
333
3
ø1
30
223 268 40 195 181 226

57 235 200 245
M6 Stud can be turned 45° or 90°
Mounting screw
7-33
7
S630-CF, S630-NF, S630-RF

3
2
hour
Type S630-CF S630-NF S630-RF 1
Number of poles ３４３４３４ 40
30
■Ratings 20
minute
10
630 630 630 4
Max.
2
1
40
30
Tripping Time
20
10
Rated insulation voltage〔Ui〕 V AC 690 690 690 6 Min.
NK AC 690V 10/10 20/20 25/20 !2 1
second
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 30/30 50/50 65/50 !2 0.6 Setting tolerance(X5) Setting tolerance(X10)
240V 50/50 85/85 100/75 !2 0.4
q DC 250V ― ― ― 0.2
Adjustable setting
X5 X10
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 10/10 20/20 25/20 0.1 range of magnetic
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 15/15 30/30 45/34 0.06 trip
0.04
440V 30/30 45/45 65/50
415V 36/36 50/50 70/50 0.02
380V 36/36 50/50 70/50 0.01
240V 50/50 85/85 100/75 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
q DC 250V 50/50 50/50 50/50
125V 50/50 50/50 50/50 Percent Rated Current
With extension bars ' ' '
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ― ― 140
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― 130
Calibrated
temperature
For distribution boards (PMC) ― ― ― 120 500A
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ ○ ○ 600A
Draw-out type (DR) ▲ ▲ ▲
110
TemPlug70 (PG) ○ ― ○ ― ○ ―
100
Motor operator ＭＣ ● ● ● Calibrated at 45°C 5 15 25 35 45 55
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ● ● Ambient temperature (°C)
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ● ● ●
● ● ●
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● ● (A) Adjustable range (A)
In × 10 9 8 7 6 5
500 5000 4500 4000 3500 3000 2500
600 6000 5400 4800 4200 3600 3000
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● ● ● 630 6300 5670 5040 4410 3780 3150
Door flange ＤＦ ● ● ● Notes:
■Standard specifications 1. Setting tolerance: ±20%.
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) Thermal-magnetic 2. Unless otherwise stated when ordering, the selector dial is
Trip button (color) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) Yes (Red) factory set to position “10”.
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes Yes Yes 3. The trip pickup current of DC models is not adjustable; the dial
Suitability for isolation Yes Yes Yes position corresponding to the trip pickup current is marked with a
CE marking Yes Yes Yes white point.
Notes:
3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not
applicable to the draw-out type (DR). !2 : Being or will be applied.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-34
Outline dimensions (mm) S630-CF, S630-NF, S630-RF
Front-connected Interpole barrier

3P (removable) 4P Mounting hole Drilling plan (front view)
HL 3 HL 8 32
ø1
13 Toggle extension
3P 4P
110
(removable) HL HL
80
170 170
141
126
46.5 55.5
273
90
ASL ASL ASL ASL
117
132
Trip button (red) 28 13
51 51
15 32 25
70 70 M8
80
M8 Tapped hole
70 70 70 8 34 Mounting screw
40
Conductor 4 107
140 105 175 overlap, max
210 280 127.5
80.5 145

Groove for dissipating heat
Stud can be 3P 4P
Toggle extension generated by eddy current
turned 90° HL ø15 for accessory wiring
8
3P 4P 3P
ø4
(removable) when necessary HL HL HL
10
5
103
13
136
30.5
126
126
ASL
92
ASL ASL
122
20 32 25
M8
8
117
117
28 13 Tapped hole
127
70 70 70
42
ø13
Conductor
5
4 107 70 70
M8 overlap, max 53
127.5 43 70 70 43 43 70 70 70 43
Mounting screw
80.5 145
18 21

M16 screw (rear view) (front view)
47 45 Conductor width, max.40
Toggle extension
3P 3P 3P
(removable) Auxiliary circuit terminals
HL HL HL
30
M10 Mounting screw

5
32
25
170
18
40
141
156
126
90
76
32 67 76
40
ASL ASL ASL
90
ASL
303
67
117
132
147
51
18
25
2✕2-ø11
30
210 Trip button (red) 4 107 140 90

127.5 18 62 30 210
80.5 145 80
Plug-in (High-performance) Detail of connecting part and Preparation of conductor

23
3
ø1
40
27
[max.]
26.5

M8 (rear view) (front view)
71.5 43.5 M12 screw Mounting screw
3P 4P Mounting hole Toggle extension 3P 4P 3P 4P

HL HL (removable) HL HL HL HL
21
ø9
7
63
70.5 79.5 15
158.5
170 170
132 273 141
126
100 170
70.5 79.5
46.5 55.5
182
90
ASL ASL ASL ASL ASL

149.5
117
51 51
15
50
63
4 107 40.5
21
210 105 175 127.5 51.6 100 170

70 70 70 70 70
280 116
Trip button 80.5 145
(red)
Flush-mounted Drilling plan

Toggle extension (front view)
3P 4P Mounting hole 3P 4P
HL CL (removable)
CL CL CL
Stud can be turned 90°
ø9
10
121.5
4.5
CL
127
333
343
CL CL
ASL
121.5
42
35 226 296
268 338 18 245 315
80.5 57 210
Trip button (red)
7-35
7
S630-NE, S630-RE
3
hour
2 T IR
Type S630-NE S630-RE Ip
1
Number of poles ３４３４ 40 tR
30 tp
tsd
Rated current, A (Adjustable) (Adjustable)
minute
10 7 tg Ii
Calibrated at 45°C 250 500 250 500 6 I
300 600 300 600 4 6
350 630 350 630 2
400 400 1 5
40
30
Tripping Time
20
10
2 2
NK AC 690V 20/20 25/20 ⑫ 1 5,6,7
second
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 50/50 65/50 ⑫ 0.6
0.4
240V 85/85 100/75 ⑫
DC 250V ― ― 0.2
3
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 20/20 25/20 0.1
0.06
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 30/30 45/34
0.04
440V 45/45 65/50 4 4
0.02 1,2 3
415V 50/50 70/50
380V 50/50 70/50 0.01
240V 85/85 100/75 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
DC 250V ― ―
125V ― ― Percent Rated Current
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ― ―
Overcurrent tripping characteristics
With extension bars ' ' Characteristics No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ― Long time-delay pick-up CT rated current : (ICT) = 630A
Flat bar studs ○ ○ current (A) : (IR) 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 630
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ― ○ ― 11 21 21 5 10 19 29
High-performance (PMB) ○ ○ settings (s) : (tR)
at 200%×(IR) at 600%×(IR)
For distribution boards (PMC) ― ― Setting tolerance ±20%
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ ○ Short time-delay (IR)× 2.5 2.5 5 10 10 10 10
Draw-out type (DR) ▲ ▲ pick-up current (A) : (Isd) Setting tolerance ±15%
TemPlug70 (PG) ○ ― ○ ― 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― settings (s) : (tsd) Total clearing time +50ms, resettable time –20ms
Clip-in chassis mount ― ― Instantaneous trip pick-up (I )×1400%
R Max: (ICT)×1200%
current (A) : (Ii) Setting tolerance ±20%
Pick-up current (A) : (Ip) (IR)×80% Setting tolerance ±10%
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ● Time-settings (s) : (tp) Definite time-delay characteristic, 40sec.
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ● ●
Ground falut trip
Option
Mechanical interlock⑨ Slide type ＭＳ ● ● Pick-up current (A) : (Ig) (ICT)×20% Setting tolerance ±15%
● ● Time-settings (s) : (tg) Difinite time-delay characteristic, 0.2sec.
Toggle lock ＨＬ Total tripping time +50ms, resettable time –20ms.
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● Neutral protection
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ● ● Pick-up current (A) : (IN) (IR)×100% or 50% selectable 2
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●e ●e Time-settings (s) : (tN) (tN)=(tR) Same as Long time-delay time settings
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● ● Characteristic No.4 will be applied as standard setting unless otherwise
Door flange ＤＦ ● ● specified.
■Standard specifications Note:
2. In case of (IR)＜(ICT), the setting tolerance becomes big when (IN) is set
Overcurrent trip mechanism Electronic !6 Electronic !6 at (IR)×50%.
CE marking Yes Yes
Notes:
▲ : Semi-standard. ● : “yes” or “available”. ― : “no” or “not available”. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as
standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).
!2 : Being or will be applied. !6 : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-36
Outline dimensions (mm) S630-NE, S630-RE

Interpole barrier
Front-connected (removable)
4P Mounting hole
3P Drilling plan (front view)
HL ø13 HL 8 32
13 Toggle extension 3P 4P
110
80
(removable) HL HL
170 170
141
126
46.5 55.5
273
90
ASL ASL ASL ASL
117
132
51 Trip button (red) 28 13
51
15 32 25
M8 70 70 M8
80
8
Mounting screw Tapped hole
40 70 70 70 8 36
140 105 175 Conductor 4 107
210 overlap, max 127.5
280
80.5 145

4P
Stud can be Groove for dissipating heat
Toggle extension 3P 4P
(removable) generated by eddy current
turned 90° HL ø15 for accessory wiring 3P
8
4P 3P
ø4
when necessary HL HL HL
10
5
103
13
30.5
136
126
126
ASL
92
ASL ASL
20 32 25
122
M8
8
117
117
127
28 13 Tapped hole
70 70 70
42
ø13
Conductor 70 70
5
4 107 overlap, max 53
M8 43 70 70 43 43 70 70 70 43
127.5
Mounting screw
80.5 145 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance
18 21

Toggle extension
3P 3P 3P
HL HL HL
30
M10 Mounting screw

5
32
25
170
18
40
141
156
126
90
76
32 67 76
40
ASL ASL ASL
90
ASL
303
67
117
132
147
51
18
25
2✕2-ø11
30
210 Trip button (red) 4 107 140 90

127.5 18 62 30 210
80.5 145 80

23
3
ø1
40
27
[max.]
26.5

3P 4P Mounting hole 3P 4P 3P 4P
HL HL Toggle extension HL HL HL HL
21
(removable)
ø9
7
63
70.5 79.5 15
158.5
170 170
132 273 141
126
100 170
70.5 79.5
46.5 55.5
182
90
ASL ASL ASL ASL ASL

117
149.5
51 51
50
63
15
4 107 40.5
210 105 175
21
127.5 51.6 100 170

70 70 70 70 70
280 116
(red)

Toggle extension (front view)
Mounting hole
3P 4P (removable) 3P 4P
CL HL CL CL CL
ø9
10
121.5
4.5
CL
127
333
343
CL CL
ASL
121.5
42
35 226 296
268 338 18 245 315
80.5 57 210
Trip button (red)
7-37
7
H630-NE, L630-NE
3
hour
2 T IR
Type H630-NE L630-NE Ip
1
Number of poles ３４３４ 40 tR
30 tp
tsd
minute
10 7 tg Ii
Calibrated at 45°C 250 500 250 500 6 I
300 600 300 600 4 6
350 630 350 630 2
400 400 1 5
40
30
Tripping Time
20
10
2 2
NK AC 690V 25/20 25/20 1 5,6,7
second
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 125/94 180/135 0.6
0.4
240V 150/150 200/150
DC 250V ― ― 0.2
3
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 25/20 25/20 0.1
0.06
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 45/34 45/34
0.04
440V 125/94 180/135 4 4
0.02 1,2 3
415V 125/94 200/150
380V 125/94 200/150 0.01
240V 150/150 200/150 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
DC 250V ― ―
at 200%×(IR) at 600%×(IR)
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ― 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2
R Max: (ICT)×1200%
Externally mounted
Ground falut trip
Option
CE marking Yes Yes
Notes:
!6 : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-38

Front-connected 3P
ø13 (removable)
4P
10 69 Drilling plan (front view)
H
L H
L
110
(removable)
80
HL HL
170 170
126
46.5 55.5
273
90
ASL ASL ASL ASL
117
51 Trip button (red) 51 65 15
15 32 25
M8 70 70 M8
8
80
40 70 70 70 4 10 73
140 105 175 Conductor 144
210 280 overlap, max 164.5
80.5 182
Rear-connected 4P Drilling plan (front view) Groove for dissipating Panel cutout (front view)
Stud can be 3P heat generated by eddy
ø15 for accessory wiring 4P
Toggle extension turned 90° H
L 3P 4P ø48 current 3P
(removable) when necessary
H
L H
L H
L
10
5
30.5
136
126
126
13
ASL
92
ASL
M8
32 25
Tapped hole
122
117
117
65 15
127
8
42
Conductor
20
ø13
5
4 70 70 70 overlap, max 70 53
70
144 M8 43 70 70 70 43
43 70 70 43 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an
164.5 Mounting screw
80.5 182
Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. escutcheon.
18 21

3P (removable) Auxiliary circuit terminals H HL
H L
L
M10 Mounting screw
32 30
25
170
18
156
141
40
90
126
76
30 32 67 76
40
303
90
ASL ASL ASL ASL
67
117
132
147
51
18
25
4 2✕2-ø11
210 140
164.5 18 62 30
80.5 182 80 210
Detail of connecting part and Preparation of conductor

Plug-in (High-performance) 23 [max.]
40 ø13
[max.]
27
26.5

71.5 43.5 M12 screw (rear view) (front view)
3P 4P Mounting hole M8 3P 4P 3P 4P
H H Mounting screw H H H H
L L L L L L
21
ø9
63
7
15
170 170
158.5
141
126
100 170
15 70.5 79.5
70.5 79.5
182
ASL ASL ASL ASL ASL

149.5
117
132
51 51
50
63
4
21
210 105 175 144 40.5

164.5 51.6 100 170
Trip button 280 70 70 70 70 70
80.5 182 116
(red)

3P 4P Mounting hole
3P 4P
CL H
L CL Toggle extension C
L C
L
(removable) Stud can be turned 90°
ø9
10
121.5
4.5
CL
343
333
127
C
L C
L
ASL
121.5
42
35 18 226 296
268 338 80.5 57 247 245 315
Trip button (red) Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides.
7-39
7
S800-CF, S800-NF, S800-RF

3
2
hour
Type S800-CF S800-NF S800-RF 1
Number of poles ３４３４３４ 40
30
■Ratings 20
minute
10
4 Max.
2
1
40
30
Tripping Time
20
10 Min.
NK AC 690V 10/10 20/20 25/20 ⑫ 1 Setting tolerance(X5) Setting tolerance(X10)
second
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 30/30 50/50 65/50 ⑫ 0.6
240V 50/50 85/85 100/75 ⑫ 0.4
Adjustable setting
q DC 250V ― ― ― 0.2
X5 X10 range of magnetic
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 10/10 20/20 25/20 0.1 trip
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 15/15 30/30 45/34 0.06
0.04
440V 30/30 45/45 65/50
415V 36/36 50/50 70/50 0.02
380V 36/36 50/50 70/50 0.01
240V 50/50 85/85 100/75 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
q DC 250V 50/50 50/50 50/50
125V 50/50 50/50 50/50 Percent Rated Current
With extension bars ' ' '
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― ― ― 140
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ― ○ ― ○ ― 130
Calibrated
temperature
For distribution boards (PMC) ― ― ― 120 700A
Draw-out type (DR) ▲ ▲ ▲
110
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ― ―
100
Calibrated at 45°C 5 15 25 35 45 55
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ● ● Ambient temperature (°C)
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ● ● ●
● ● ●
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ● ● ● (A) Adjustable range (A)
In × 10 9 8 7 6 5
700 7000 6300 5600 4900 4200 3500
800 8000 7200 6400 5600 4800 4000
Notes:
1. Setting tolerance: ±20%.
2. Unless otherwise stated when ordering, the selector dial is
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) Thermal-magnetic(adjustable)
factory set to position “10”.
3. The trip pickup current of DC models is not adjustable; the dial
position corresponding to the trip pickup current is marked with a
Suitability for isolation Yes Yes Yes white point.
Notes:
3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not
applicable to the draw-out type (DR). !2 : Being or will be applied.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-40
Outline dimensions (mm) S800-CF, S800-NF, S800-RF

(removable)
3P 4P Mounting hole Drilling plan (front view)
3 HL 10 32
HL ø1 Toggle extension
13 (removable) 3P 4P
110
80
HL HL
170 170
141
126
46.5 55.5
273
90
ASL ASL ASL ASL
117
132
32 25
70 70 M8
80
8
Tapped hole
M8
15
40 70 70 70 10 35 Mounting screw
Conductor 4 107
140 105 175 overlap, max 127.5
210 280
80.5 145
Rear-connected 4P
Stud can be 3P generated by eddy current 4P
Toggle extension turned 90° HL ø15 for accessory wiring 3P 4P
8
(removable) 3P
ø4
10
5
103
13
30.5
126
136
126
ASL
92
ASL ASL
20 32 25
122
M8
8
117
117
28 13 Tapped hole
127
70 70 70
42
ø13
Conductor
overlap, max 70 70
5
4 107 M8 53
127.5 Mounting screw 43 70 70 43 43 70 70 70 43
80.5 145
18 21

Toggle extension
3P 3P 3P
HL HL HL
30
M10 Mounting screw

5
32
25
170
18
40
141
156
126
90
76
32 67 76
40
ASL ASL ASL
90
ASL
303
67
117
132
147
51
18
25
2✕2-ø11
30
210 Trip button (red) 4 107 140 90

127.5 18 62 30 210
80.5 145 80

23
3
ø1
40
27
[max.]
26.5
M8
Mounting screw (rear view) (front view)
71.5 43.5 M12 screw
21
ø9
7
63
15
158.5
170 170
132 273 141
126
100 170
70.5 79.5
70.5 79.5
46.5 55.5
182
90
ASL ASL ASL ASL ASL

117
149.5
51 51
50
15
63
4 107
210 105 175 40.5

21
127.5 51.6 100 170

70 70 70 70 70
280 116
80.5 145
Trip button
(red)

Mounting hole Toggle extension (front view)
CL HL CL CL CL
ø9
10
121.5
4.5
CL
127
333
343
CL CL
ASL
121.5
42
35 226 296
268 338 18 245 315
80.5 57 210
Trip button (red)
7-41
7
S800-NE, S800-RE
3
hour
2 T IR
Type S800-NE S800-RE Ip
40 tR
■Ratings 30 tp
20 Ig Isd
Rated current, A (Adjustable) (Adjustable) tsd
minute
Calibrated at 45°C 350 600 350 600 10 7 tg Ii
6 I
400 700 400 700 4 6
450 800 450 800
2
500 500 5
1
40
30
Tripping Time
20
10
■Rated breaking capacity, kA 2 2
NK AC 690V 20/20 25/20 ⑫ 1 5,6,7
second
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 50/50 65/50 ⑫ 0.6
240V 85/85 100/75 ⑫ 0.4
DC 250V ― ― 0.2
3
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 20/20 25/20 0.1
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 30/30 45/34 0.06
440V 45/45 65/50 0.04
4 4
415V 50/50 70/50 0.02 1,2 3
380V 50/50 70/50 0.01
240V 85/85 100/75 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
DC 250V ― ―
at 200%×(IR) at 600%×(IR)
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ― 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2
R Max: (ICT)×1200%
Externally mounted
Ground falut trip
Option
CE marking Yes Yes
Notes:

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-42
Outline dimensions (mm) S800-NE, S800-RE
Interpole barrier
Front-connected (removable) Mounting hole
3P 4P
HL 13 HL 10 32 Drilling plan (front view)
ø
Toggle extension
13 3P 4P
110
(removable) HL HL
80
170 170
141
126
46.5 55.5
273
90
ASL ASL ASL ASL
117
28 13
132
51 Trip button (red) 51
15 32 25
M8 70 70 M8
80
8
Tapped hole
Mounting screw
40 70 70 70 10 36
140 105 175 Conductor 4 107
210 280 overlap, max
127.5
80.5 145

Stud can be 3P 4P
generated by eddy current
Toggle extension turned 90° HL ø15 for accessory wiring
8
3P 4P 3P
ø4
(removable) when necessary HL HL HL
10
5
103
13
30.5
136
126
126
ASL
92
ASL ASL
122
32 25
M8
8
117
117
28 13 Tapped hole
127
20
70 70 70
42
ø13
Conductor 70 70
5
M8 43 70 70 43 43 70 70 70 43
127.5
Mounting screw
80.5 145
18 21

Toggle extension
3P 3P 3P
HL HL HL
30
M10 Mounting screw

5
32
25
170
18
40
141
156
126
90
76
32 67 76
40
ASL ASL ASL
90
ASL
303
67
117
132
147
51
18
25
2✕2-ø11
30
210 Trip button (red) 4 107 140 90

127.5 18 62 30 210
80.5 145 80

23
3
ø1
40
27
[max.]
26.5

21
ø9
7
63
70.5 79.5 15
158.5
170 170
132 273 141
126
100 170
70.5 79.5
46.5 55.5
182
90
ASL ASL ASL ASL ASL

117
149.5
51 51
15
50
63
4 107
210 105 175 40.5

21
127.5 51.6 100 170

70 70 70 70 70
280 116
80.5 145
Trip button
(red)

Mounting hole Toggle extension (front view)
CL HL CL CL CL
ø9
10
121.5
4.5
CL
333
127
343
CL CL
ASL
121.5
42
35 226 296
268 338 18 245 315
80.5 57 210
Trip button (red)
7-43
7
H800-NE, L800-NE
3
hour
2 T IR
Type H800-NE L800-NE Ip
40 tR
■Ratings 30 tp
20 Ig Isd
minute
6 I
400 700 400 700 4 6
450 800 450 800
2
500 500 5
1
40
30
Tripping Time
20
10
NK AC 690V 25/20 25/20 1 5,6,7
second
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 125/94 180/135 0.6
240V 150/150 200/150 0.4
DC 250V ― ― 0.2
3
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 25/20 25/20 0.1
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 45/34 45/34 0.06
440V 125/94 180/135 0.04
4 4
415V 125/94 200/150 0.02 1,2 3
380V 125/94 200/150 0.01
240V 150/150 200/150 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
DC 250V ― ―
at 200%×(IR) at 600%×(IR)
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ― 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2
R Max: (ICT)×1200%
Externally mounted
Ground falut trip
Option
CE marking Yes Yes
Notes:

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-44

Front-connected 3P
ø13 (removable)
4P
10 69 Drilling plan (front view)
H
L H
L
110
(removable)
80
HL HL
170 170
126
46.5 55.5
273
90
ASL ASL ASL ASL
117
15 32 25
M8 70 70 M8
8
80
40 70 70 70 4 10 74
140 105 175 Conductor
overlap, max 144
210 280 164.5
80.5 182
Drilling plan (front view) Groove for dissipating Panel cutout (front view)
Rear-connected Stud can be 3P
4P
heat generated by eddy
ø15 for accessory wiring 4P
Toggle extension turned 90° H
L 3P 4P ø48 current 3P
(removable) when necessary
H
L H
L H
L
10
5
30.5
136
126
126
13
ASL
92
ASL
M8
32 25
Tapped hole
122
117
117
65 15
127
8
42
20
ø13 Conductor
5
4 M8 70 70 70 overlap, max 70 53
70
144 Mounting screw 43 70 70 70 43
164.5 allowance of 1.0mm around the handle
80.5 182
Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. escutcheon.
18 21

M16 screw
3P (removable) Auxiliary circuit terminals H HL
H L
L
M10 Mounting screw
32 30
25
170
18
156
141
40
90
126
76
30 32 67 76
40
303
90
ASL ASL ASL ASL
67
117
132
147
51
18
25
4 2✕2-ø11
210 140
164.5 18 62 30
80.5 182 80 210

23 [max.]
40 ø13
[max.]
27
26.5

71.5 43.5 M12 screw (rear view) (front view)
3P 4P Mounting hole M8 3P 4P 3P 4P
H H Mounting screw H H H H
L L L L L L
21
ø9
63
7
15
170 170
158.5
141
126
100 170
15 70.5 79.5
70.5 79.5
182
ASL ASL ASL ASL ASL

149.5
117
132
51 51
50
63
4
21
210 105 175 144 40.5

164.5 51.6 100 170
Trip button 280 70 70 70 70 70
80.5 182 116
(red)
Flush-mounted Mounting Drilling plan

3P 4P hole (front view)
3P 4P
CL H
L CL Toggle extension C
L C
L
(removable) Stud can be turned 90°
ø9
10
121.5
4.5
CL
343
333
127
C
L C
L
ASL
121.5
42
35 18 226 296
268 338 80.5 57 247 245 315
Trip button (red) Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides.
7-45
7
S1250-NE, S1250-GE
3
hour
2 T IR
Type S1250-NE S1250-GE Ip
40 tR
■Ratings 30 tp
20 Ig Isd
minute
6 I
600 1200 600 1200 4 6
700 1250 700 1250
2
800 800 5
1
40
30
Tripping Time
20
10
NK AC 690V 25/20 ⑫ 45/34 ⑫ 1 5,6,7
second
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 65/50 ⑫ 85/65 ⑫ 0.6
240V 100/75 ⑫ 125/94 ⑫ 0.4
DC 250V ― ― 0.2
3
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 25/20 45/34 0.1
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 45/34 65/50 0.06
440V 65/50 85/65 0.04
4 4
415V 70/50 85/65 0.02 1,2 3
380V 85/65 100/75 0.01
240V 100/75 125/94 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
DC 250V ― ―
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ○ 11 21 21 5 10 19 29
High-performance (PMB) ― ― settings (s) : (tR)
at 200%×(IR) at 600%×(IR)
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ― 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2
R Max: (ICT)×1200%
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ● @4 ● @4
Ground falut trip
Option
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ― ― Pick-up current (A) : (IN) (IR)×100% or 50% selectable 2
CE marking Yes Yes
Notes:

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-46
Outline dimensions (mm) S1250-NE, S1250-GE
Front-connected Drilling plan

Interpole barrier 3P 4P Mounting hole 14 31 (front view)
3
ø1
(removable) HL HL 4P
13 3P
110
Toggle extension
80
(removable) HL
170
200
190 190
184
47.5
370
95
ASL ASL ASL ASL
154
140
170
78 78 28 18
Trip button (red) ø9
25
M8
80
Mounting screw 70
32
15 14 29
45
70 70 70 112
Conductor
140 105 175 overlap, max 10 127
210 280 80 171

M8
Mounting plate Mounting screw 4P
4P 3P
3P 3P 4P
HL
Toggle extension Insulating plate HL HL ø9 HL
(removable)
12
73
184
144
127
226 296
120
101
13 113
258
ASL ASL
98
ASL ASL
15 32 20
21 140
71
114
111
19
8
154
73
ø13
45
Conductor
70 70 81
Soft plastic tubing ø50 to be provided on 230 300

28 18
center pole and neutral pole of vertical
10 127 terminal type for insulation. ø15 for accessory wiring when necessary
80 171

Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. give an allowance of 1.5mm around
the handle escutcheon.
Plug-in (Standard) Mounting base Drilling plan (front view)

4P (rear view) 4P
3P 3P 4P 3P
Mounting angle HL HL
HL
HL
26
Toggle extension
(removable)
15
58
15
199
21
Auxiliary
40
144
circuit terminals
94
94
40
ASL ASL ASL ASL ø11
M10 Mounting
64
13
64
screw 90 90
114
147
21
169
15 32 30
15
8
58
45
7
26
140
ø1
70 70 70
70 70 70 90
3
145 21 210 175 105

80 189 62 85 Conductor 280
overlap, max
Insulating
Flush-mounted Mounting plate
plate
4P (Max.4t)
3P Max.75
HL CL 3P 4P
HL 35 CL CL
M8 Conductor
Toggle extension
Mounting screw overlap, max
(removable)
12
190 190
129
32.5
420
15
258
410
185
CL CL CL CL CL
95
ASL
ASL
15
140
129
ø13
13
ø9
Trip button (red)
268 338 226 296

20 32 15 245 315
18 8
Soft plastic tubing ø50 to be provided on
80 66 216 center pole and neutral pole of vertical
Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. terminal type for insulation.
7-47
7
S1600-NE
3
hour
2 T IR
Type S1600-NE Ip
Number of poles ３４ 1
40 tR
■Ratings 30 tp
20 Ig Isd
Rated current, A (Adjustable) tsd
minute
Calibrated at 45°C 700 1200 10 7 tg Ii
6 I
800 1400 4 6
900 1500
2
1000 1600 5
1
40
30
Tripping Time
20
10
NK AC 690V 45/34 ⑫ 1 5,6,7
second
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 85/65 ⑫ 0.6
240V 125/94 ⑫ 0.4
DC 250V ― 0.2
3
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 45/34 0.1
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 65/50 0.06
440V 85/65 0.04
4 4
415V 85/65 0.02 1,2 3
380V 100/75 0.01
240V 125/94 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
DC 250V ―
125V ― Percent Rated Current
■Rated short time withstand current, kA 20（0.3sec）
With extension bars ○ Characteristics No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― Long time-delay pick-up CT rated current : (ICT) = 1600A
Flat bar studs ' current (A) : (IR) 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1500, 1600
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ― 11 21 21 5 10 19 29
High-performance (PMB) ― settings (s) : (tR)
at 200%×(IR) at 600%×(IR)
For distribution boards (PMC) ― Setting tolerance ±20%
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ Short time-delay (IR)× 2.5 2.5 5 10 10 10 10
Draw-out type (DR) ○ pick-up current (A) : (Isd) Setting tolerance ±15%
TemPlug70 (PG) ― 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― settings (s) : (tsd) Total clearing time +50ms, resettable time –20ms
DIN rail mount ―
Clip-in chassis mount ― Instantaneous trip pick-up (I )×1400%
R Max: (ICT)×1200%
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● Time-settings (s) : (tp) Definite time-delay characteristic, 40sec.
Externally mounted
Ground falut trip
Option
Mechanical interlock⑨ Slide type ＭＳ ● Pick-up current (A) : (Ig) (ICT)×20% Setting tolerance ±15%
● Time-settings (s) : (tg) Difinite time-delay characteristic, 0.2sec.
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ― Neutral protection
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ― Pick-up current (A) : (IN) (IR)×100% or 50% selectable 2
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●e Time-settings (s) : (tN) (tN)=(tR) Same as Long time-delay time settings
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● Characteristic No.4 will be applied as standard setting unless otherwise
Door flange ＤＦ ● specified.
Overcurrent trip mechanism Electronic !6 at (IR)×50%.
CE marking Yes
Notes:
● : “yes” or “available”. ― : “no” or “not available”. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front
connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). !2 : Being or will be applied.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-48
Outline dimensions (mm) S1600-NE
Front-connected Drilling plan (front view)

Interpole barrier 3P 4P Mounting hole 20 11
(removable) 13
HL ø HL Insulating plate
15(max)
4P
Toggle extension 3P
110
100
(removable) HL
30
190 190
170
200
Mounting angle
184
47.5
370
95
ASL ASL ASL ASL
139(min.)
M8
140
154
170
78 78 28 18 Mounting screw
Trip button (red)
20
ø9
100
70
32
15
45 70 70 70 20 46
140 105 175 Conductor 132
210 280 overlap, max 10 147
80 191
M8 4P 4P 4P
Mounting angle Mounting screw 3P 3P 3P
HL HL
Toggle extension H
L
(removable)
2
ø1
184
R3
30
65
60
98
ASL ASL ASL
139(min)
100
85
15 30
154
30
Conductor
overlap, max 15
70 70 70 Insulation tube
ø9 81
70 15
(ON side Center pole and Neutral pole
OFF side All poles ) 70
85
80 191 130 escutcheon.
Draw-out Draw-out handle Drilling plan (front view)

Breaker fixing screw (removable) 395(draw-out)
Auxiliary 4P
circuit terminals ø12 325(disconnected) 3P
(Automatic connection) 3P 4P Toggle extension 295(test) ø12 112.5 182.5
HL Mounting hole HL (removable) HL 4P
265(connected) Mounting hole 225
Auxiliary 3P 2✕2-ø12 Mounting hole
circuit terminals HL
105
30
(self-engaging)

190 190
200
170
170
50
75
525
Max.45
100 60
ASL ASL ASL ASL

70
120
190
190
78 78
220
220
20
Max.45
15
20
90
Conductor
7
30
28 300(max.) 28 150 220 272 Conductor 200 2-ø12 20 215

28 370(max.) 28 282 overlap, max 3P
Auxiliary 80 316 100 170
circuit terminals 4P
396(connected) Mounting angle
(self-engaging) Auxiliary circuit terminals L50✕50✕6
526(draw-out)
(self-engaging)
Flush-mounted

4P M8 (Max.4t)
3P HL CL 3P 4P
Mounting screw
HL 35 CL CL
Toggle extension
(removable)
2
ø1
190 190
32.5
65
30
45
410
185
420
CL CL CL
95
15
ASL
115
ø9
15
268 338 15 226 296
18 210 245 315
Trip button (red)
Center pole, Neutral pole
80 66 255
7-49
7
E50-CM
3
2 Motor output (kW) and Rated current (A)
hour
Type E50-CM
1 (kW) (kW)
Number of poles ３ (A)
200V 400V
(A)
200V 400V
40
■Ratings 30 0.7 — 0.2 10 2.2 —
Motor rated capacity (kW) 20 1.4 0.2 0.4 12 — 5.5

（kW） 2 — 0.75 16 3.7 7.5
minute
and breaker rated current (A) (A) 10 2.6 0.4 — 25 5.5 11
200/220V 400/440V 6 4 0.75 1.5 32 7.5 15
Calibrated at 45℃
0.7 ― 0.2 4 5 — 2.2 40 — 18.5
8 1.5 3.7 45 11 22
1.4 0.2 0.4 2
2 ― 0.75 1
2.6 0.4 ― 40 Max.(32-45A)
30
4 0.75 1.5
Tripping Time
20 Max.(0.7-25A)
5 ― 2.2
10
8 1.5 3.7 6
10 2.2 ― 4
Min.(0.7-25A)
12 ― 5.5 2
16 3.7 7.5 1 Min.(32-45A)
second
25 5.5 11 0.6
32 7.5 15 0.4
Note: Select an appropriate one depending on the total
40 ― 18.5 0.2
45 11 22 0.1
0.06
Rated insulation voltage〔Ui〕 V AC 690 0.04
Rated impulse withstand voltage〔U imp〕 kV 6 0.02
0.01
NK AC 690V ―
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 2.5/- !3 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
240V 5/- !4
DC 250V ― Percent Rated Current
IEC 60947-2 AC 440V 2.5/1.3

Icu/Ics(sym) 415V 2.5/1.3
380V 2.5/1.3
240V 5/2.5 （0.7-25A）
DC 250V ―
Weight (' marked standard type) kg 0.74
250
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ' Calibrated
200
temperature
With extension bars ―
150
Flat bar studs ―
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ 125
For distribution boards (PMC) ○ 100
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ Bolt studs
90
TemPlug70 (PG) ―
5 15 25 35 45 55
DIN rail mount ―
（32-45A）
Motor operator ＭＣ ―
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ● 140
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ― 130 Calibrated

Mechanical interlock Slide type ＭＳ ● 15A, 45A temperature

Toggle holder ＨＨ ● 20A
120
Toggle lock ＨＬ ● 40A
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ● 110
32A, 50A
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ● 30A
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● 100
■Standard specifications 90
Overcurrent trip mechanism Thermal-magnetic@7
5 15 25 35 45 55
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes Ambient temperature (°C)
CE marking Non
Notes:
● : “yes” or “available”. ― : “no” or “not available”. !3 : at 500V AC. !4 : at 250V AC. @7 : Hydraulic-magnetic type for below 5A rating.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt Under
Auxiliary switch Alarm switch trip ✽1 voltage trip ＡＬＳＨＵＶＳＨＵＶＳＨＵＶ
３ ― ― ― ― ―
Left pole NOTE: ✽1 Shunt trip is provided with anti-burnout switch.

Toggle
Right pole
7-50
Outline dimensions (mm) E50-CM
Front-connected Preparation Drilling plan (front view)

3P of conductor
Mounting hole 3P
HL M5✕0.8 screw 24
HL
8(max.)
ø5.5
12.5(max.)
ASL ASL ASL
111
111
130
max.t5
84
M4✕0.7
27 Mounting screw 25 M4✕0.7
50 61 6 Tapped hole
75 5 68
87

3P
M4✕0.7 3P
ø12 HL Tapped hole 25
HL HL
68
6
ASL ASL
111
ASL
111
52
27
42
1
R
M4✕0.7 ø14
M6 screw 22.5 50 22.5 24
Mounting plate Mounting screw
(max.t3.2) 25 25
ø15 for accessory wiring when necessary Panel cutout dimensions shown
give an allowance of 1.0mm
around the handle escutcheon.
Plug-in (For Switch board 3P) Mounting base Drilling plan (front view)
(rear view) Preparation
75
The mounting plate is not supplied. of conductor HL 3P
50
75
10(max.)
HL
3P ø6.5
15
14
22.5
87.5
Detail of
connecting part 18(max.)
ASL ASL ASL
180
110
52
83
80
18
92.5
11
22.5
14
10
M6 screw
3 Mounting plate
24
68 38 25 M5✕0.8
Mounting screw
(t=3.2mm min)
25
ø6
7
Flush-mounted Mounting plate Drilling plan (front view)
(t=4max.)
M5✕0.8 3P
CL Mounting screw CL
CL
196
111
140
C CL
66
M6 screw ø6
15 82 93
121 103
32 97
7-51
7
S100-NM
3
hour
2
Type S100-NM 1
Number of poles ３ 40
30
■Ratings 20
minute
Motor rated capacity (kW) 10
（kW）
and breaker rated current (A) (A) 6
200/220V 400/440V 4
Calibrated at 40℃
16 3.7 7.5 Max.(32–100A)
2
24 5.5 11
1
32 7.5 15 40
Tripping Time
40 18.5 30
― 20 Max.(16–24A)
45 11 22
10
60 15 30 6 Min.(32–100A)
75 18.5 37 4
90 22 45 2
100 ― 55 1
Note: Select an appropriate one depending on the total Magnetic trip
second
0.6 Min.(16–24A) setting
0.4 960%–1440%
0.2
0.06
■Rated breaking capacity, kA 0.04
NK AC 690V ―
0.02
0.01
240V 50/50
DC 250V ― 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
IEC 60947-2 AC 440V 25/25
Icu/Ics(sym) 415V 30/30 Percent Rated Current
380V 30/30
240V 50/50
DC 250V ―
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ' 140 75A
Calibrated
temperature
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― 40A
130
Flat bar studs ○ 60A,90A,100A
120
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ 110
16A,45A
TemPlug70 (PG) ○ 100
32A
24A
DIN rail mount ○ 90
■Accessories (optional) Symbol 0 10 20 30 40 50
Motor operator ＭＣ ● Ambient temperature (°C)
Externally mounted
Mechanical interlock Slide type ＭＳ ●
CE marking Yes
Notes:

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-52
Outline dimensions (mm) S100-NM
Front-connected
ø9
8.5(max.)
3P Interpole barrier 3P 27.2
(removable) ø8.5 16 3.2 3P
20.5
24
8
Mounting hole 47 M8 screw
H
L 17(max.) H
L
max.t5
84
102
134
155
132
45
C
L C
L CL C
L
M4✕0.7
22 Mounting screw
60 45 8 M4✕0.7
30
90 61 30 30 3.2 Tapped hole
4 72 27.2
92

Mounting plate 13.5 Conductor overlap max
11.5 3P
(max. t3.2) 3P 3P
H H
L H 45 L
16
L
8.5
5
3 13.5
R1
3 13.5
8
134
132
134
C
48
C
L L
16
M4✕0.7 12
30 30 Mounting screw 30 ø18
72 52 24
Stud can be turned 60 M4✕0.7
92 102 45° or 90° Tapped hole Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance

Detail of connecting part
3P 13.5 Conductor overlap, max 4-ø6
C 3P
L M5✕0.8 Mounting plate 11.5 Mounting hole
Mounting screw (max. t4) C
L
16
5
8.5
3 13.5
3 13.5
192
181
45
134
C C
66
L L C
L
16
157 126
15 (Left and right poles) Stud can be turned 136
107 45° or 90°
37 (Center pole)157
7
7-53
7
S225-NM
3
hour
2
Type S225-NM 1
Number of poles ３ 40
30
■Ratings 20
minute
Motor rated capacity (kW) 10
（kW）
and breaker rated current (A) (A) 6
200/220V 400/440V
Calibrated at 40℃ 4
125 30 ―
2
150 37 75
1
175 45 90 40 Max.
Tripping Time
225 55 110 30
20
10
6
4
2 Min.
Note: Select an appropriate one depending on the total 1 Magnetic trip
second
load current of the motor operator. 0.6 setting
0.4 1040%–1560%
0.2
0.06
■Rated breaking capacity, kA 0.04
NK AC 690V ―
0.02
0.01
240V 65/65
DC 250V ― 0.005
100
125
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
8000
IEC 60947-2 AC 440V 25/25
Icu/Ics(sym) 415V 35/35 Percent Rated Current
380V 35/35
240V 65/65
DC 250V ―
Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ' 140 125A
With extension bars ○（BAR） 175A
Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs ― Calibrated
130
Flat bar studs ○ temperature
120
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ 110
150A
TemPlug70 (PG) ○ 100 225A
■Accessories (optional) Symbol 0 10 20 30 40 50
Motor operator ＭＣ ● Ambient temperature (°C)
Externally mounted
CE marking Yes
Notes:

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-54
Outline dimensions (mm) S225-NM
H
L
3P ø9
10(max.)
120
Mounting hole Interpole barrier 97
28
11.5
(removable) 23 23 4 3P
100
M8 screw 24 25(max.)
H
L H
23
30.5
max.t7 L
ø11
98
126
102
C
144
165
C C L C
45
L L M4✕0.7 C
L L
70 45 8 35 M4✕0.7
4 72 35 35 28
92
(max. t3.2) ø24 H
H
L H
L 52.5 L
6
R1
144
126
144
C C C
48
L Conductor L L
8
22 overlap, max
20
ø9 15 15 M4✕0.7 35 M4✕0.7 12
71 35 35 Mounting screw 35 35 Tapped hole 24
72 106 Stud can be turned Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance
45° or 90°

3P
3P
CL M5✕0.8 Mounting plate
4-ø6 Mounting hole CL
Mounting screw (max. t4)
6
192
181
45
66
CL CL CL
144
22
20
Stud can be turned 126

157 ø9 15 15
45° or 90° 136
15 Left and right poles 126
37 Center pole 161
7
7-55
7
S100-NN
Type S100-NN
■Ratings
DC 250
Rated short circuit making capacity, kA peak 3.6
■Performance
Utilization category AC AC-23A
IEC 60947-3 DC DC-22A
Upstream breaker @9 S100-NF
Flat bar studs ○
For distribution boards (PMC) ○ ―
TemPlug70 (PG) ○ ―
DIN rail mount ○
Externally mounted
CE marking Yes
Notes:
' : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified.
○ : Optional standard. Specify when ordering.
● : “yes” or “available”.
― : “no” or “not available”.
@9 : Required for overcurrent protection. Rated conditional short-circuit current [Icc] will be the same as Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity of upstream breaker.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-56
Outline dimensions (mm) S100-NN
Front-connected
ø9
8.5(max.)
3P 4P 3P 27.2
Interpole barrier Mounting ø8.5 16 3.2 3P 4P
20.5
(removable) hole 24
8
M8screw
47
H
L H
L 17(max.) H
L H
L
max.t5
84 84
102
134
155
132
45
C
L C
L C
L
M4✕0.7
22 Mounting screw
60 30 45 8 M4✕0.7
30 30
90 90 61 30 30 30 3.2 Tapped hole
120 4 72 27.2
92 4P

3P 4P
Mounting plate 11.5 3P 4P 3P
(max. t3.2) H H
L H H 45 L
16
L L
8.5
5
3 13.5
R1
3 13.5
8
134
132
134
C
48
C
L L C
L
16
M4✕0.7 12
30 30 30 Mounting screw 30 30 ø18
72 52 24
Stud can be turned 60 30 30 30 M4✕0.7
Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. of 1.0mm or more or more around the handle
ø6.5
10(max.)
M6screw Mounting base (rear view)

3 Conductor Drilling plan (front view)
15(max.)
3P 24 3P 3P
18.5
ø6
13
25
11
84
30
107
194
134
100
134
155
102
75
75
45
CL CL CL CL
27
22
13
25
11
Mounting plate
18.5
60 35 22 2 M5✕0.8 30 30 M6 30
132
Plug-in (High-performance)
Detail of connecting part Preparation of conductor
ø6.5
10(max.)
Mounting base (rear view)

M6screw 3P 4P
15(max.)
3P 4P 5.2 20 Conductor 90
H 60 30 3P 4P
L Mounting HL 24.2
HL HL H H
hole L L ø6
84 84
35 47.5 22.5 7
190
108
160
155
170
134
75
75
C
L C
L C
L C
L
37.5
22
Mounting plate 14 14 21 14
120 27 90 120
90 120 35 22.5
M5✕0.8 M6 70
Detail of connecting part Panel cutout (front view)

3P 4P
13.5 Conductor overlap, 3P 4P
C
L LC
H L M5✕0.8 Mounting plate max 11.5 4-ø6 Mounting hole
15 Mounting screw (max. t4) C
L C
L
16
5
8.5
3 13.5
3 13.5
192
181
45
134
C C
66
L L C
L
16
157 192 126 161

15 (Left and right poles)107 Stud can be turned 136 171
45° or 90°
37 (Center pole, Neutral pole)157
7-57
7
S125-SN
Type S125-SN
Number of poles 3 4 3 4
■Ratings
Rated current, A 100 125
Rated operational voltage V AC 690 690
DC 250 250
Rated short circuit making capacity, kA peak 2.8 2.8
Rated short time withstand current, kA 2（0.3sec） 2（0.3sec）
■Performance
Utilization category AC AC-23A AC-23A
IEC 60947-3 DC DC-22A DC-22A
Upstream breaker @9 S125-SF S125-SF
With extension bars ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR)
High-performance (PMB) ― ―
For distribution boards (PMC) ○ ― ○ ―
DIN rail mount ○⑪ ○⑪
Motor operator ＭＣ ― ―
Externally mounted
Mechanical interlock9 Slide type ＭＳ ● ●
Notes:
9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).
!1 : Provided with DIN rail adaptor.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-58
Outline dimensions (mm) S125-SN

Interpole barrier
(removable) conductor (optional) (front view)
3P 4P 3P
HL HL
Mounting hole
M8 screw ø9 3P 4P
50
22
50
24 HL HL
9(max.)
16.5
102
111
130
130
45
114
C
L C
L C
L C
L
M4✕0.7
36.5
50 75 17 M4✕0.7
52 7.7 25 25
75 100 6.5 72 .3 Tapped hole
ø8
8.5
95 25 25 25
4P
Rear-connected
12.5 12.5 Drilling plan (front view) Panel cutout (front view)
Detail of 4P
8.5
8.5
connecting part 3P
16
4P
3P 4P 3P
4 13 4 13
HL HL
HL HL
Mounting plate 37.5
(max. t3.2)
5
R1
111
102
114
114
47
45
C
L C
L C
L
7.7
M4✕0.7
Mounting screw
ø20
25 25 12
Stud can be turned
72 52 45° or 90° M4✕0.7 24
50 25 25 25
Tapped hole
95 102 25 25 25

Detail of Preparation of 3P
HL
connecting part conductor HL
34 25 25 25 75
15 Mounting plate
3 20 (t=3.2mm min)
Conductor
12(max.)
15
48.5
14
ø6.5 25
180
102
114
83
52
45
C C C
52
80
L L L
17(max.)
M6 screw
48.5
14
M6
102 M5✕0.8 75 25
Mounting screw
6.5 106
129
Flush-mounted
7
Detail of connecting part Drilling plan (front view)
Mounting plate
3P (t=4max) 12.5 12.5 3P

8.5
8.5
C
L C
L
M5✕0.8
16
Mounting screw
4 13 4 13
45
196
140
114
C C C
66
L L L
15 107 93
121
40 157 103
7-59
7
S125-NN
Type S125-NN
■Ratings
DC 250
Rated short circuit making capacity, kA peak 3.6
■Performance
IEC 60947-3 DC DC-22A
Flat bar studs ○
For distribution boards (PMC) ○ ―
DIN rail mount ○
Externally mounted
CE marking Yes
Notes:

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-60
Front-connected
ø9
8.5(max.)
3P 4P 3P 27.2
Interpole barrier Mounting ø8.5 16 3.2 3P 4P
20.5
(removable) hole 24
8
M8screw
47
H
L H
L 17(max.) H
L H
L
max.t5
84 84
102
134
155
132
45
C
L C
L C
L
M4✕0.7
22 Mounting screw
60 30 45 8 M4✕0.7
30 30
90 90 61 30 30 30 3.2 Tapped hole
120 4 72 27.2
92 4P

3P 4P
Mounting plate 11.5 3P 4P 3P
(max. t3.2) H H
L H H 45 L
16
L L
8.5
5
3 13.5
R1
3 13.5
8
134
132
134
C
48
C
L L C
L
16
M4✕0.7 12
30 30 30 Mounting screw 30 30 ø18
72 52 24
Stud can be turned 60 30 30 30 M4✕0.7
Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. of 1.0mm or more or more around the handle
ø6.5
10(max.)
M6screw Mounting base (rear view)

3 Conductor Drilling plan (front view)
15(max.)
3P 24 3P 3P
18.5
ø6
13
25
11
84
30
107
194
134
100
134
155
102
75
75
45
CL CL CL CL
27
22
13
25
11
Mounting plate
18.5
60 35 22 2 M5✕0.8 30 30 M6 30
132
Detail of connecting part Preparation of conductor
ø6.5
10(max.)
Mounting base (rear view)

M6screw 3P 4P
15(max.)
3P 4P 5.2 20 Conductor 90
H 60 30 3P 4P
L Mounting HL 24.2
HL HL H H
hole L L ø6
84 84
35 47.5 22.5 7
190
108
160
155
170
134
75
75
C
L C
L C
L C
L
37.5
22
Mounting plate 14 14 21 14
120 27 90 120
90 120 35 22.5
M5✕0.8 M6 70
Detail of connecting part Panel cutout (front view)

3P 4P
13.5 Conductor overlap, 3P 4P
C
L LC
H L M5✕0.8 Mounting plate max 11.5 4-ø6 Mounting hole
15 Mounting screw (max. t4) C
L C
L
16
5
8.5
3 13.5
3 13.5
192
181
45
134
C C
66
L L C
L
16
157 192 126 161

15 (Left and right poles)107 Stud can be turned 136 171
45° or 90°
37 (Center pole, Neutral pole)157
7-61
7
S250-SN
Type S250-SN
Number of poles ３４３４
■Ratings
Rated current, A 225 250
Rated operational voltage V AC 690 690
DC 250 250
Rated short circuit making capacity, kA peak 6 6
Rated short time withstand current, kA 3（0.3sec） 3（0.3sec）
■Performance
Utilization category AC AC-23A AC-23A
IEC 60947-3 DC DC-22A DC-22A
Upstream breaker @9 S250-SF S250-SF
With extension bars ○ (BAR) ○ (BAR)
TemPlug70 (PG) ○ ― ○ ―
Externally mounted
Notes:

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-62
Outline dimensions (mm) S250-SN
Front-connected Preparation of With extension bars ✽ Drilling plan

conductor (optional) (front view)
3P 4P ø9 3P 4P
11(max.)
(removable)
Interpole barrier Conductor
HL Conductor HL
(removable) overlap, max
overlap, max
101
101
25(max.) 35 35 35 35 35
11.5
11.5
3P 4P
24 max.t7 23 23
Mounting hole M8 screw
HL HL HL HL
30.5
30.5
19
19
98 98 98 98
144
165
102
126
165
C C C C
45
L L L L
M4✕0.7
30.5
30.5
70 35 46 7 M4✕0.7
23
23
6.5 35 35
23 23 6.8 23
11.5
11.5
140 72
95 97 48.5 48.5 48.5 ✽ For the extension bars, straight bars or
ø11 ø11 spread bars can be supplied.
120 169
Rear-connected
(max. t3.2) 3P 4P
3P 3P
ø24
HL HL HL HL
6
R1
102
144
126
144
45
C C C
47
L Conductor L L
overlap, max
7
25 22 ø9
20
M4✕0.7 M4✕0.7
9
Stud can be turned Mounting screw 35 35 Tapped hole 12

6 13 16 45°or 90°
60 72 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 24
72 107 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an
escutcheon.
Plug-in (Standard)
M5✕0.8 (rear view) (front view)
Detail of connecting part Mounting screw 3P 3P
Auxiliary HL HL
Mounting plate circuit terminals ø6
18 27 26.5 13
Conductor width,
18
15
max.25
30
16.5(max.)
144
100
102
180
75
45
75
C C C
62
L L L
18
M8 screw
(60) 57 35 35 M8 30 Mounting plate

6.5 95 105 86
118
Flush-mounted
7
3P 4P
M5✕0.8 C HL C 4-ø6 3P 4P
Mounting screw L L Mounting plate Mounting hole C C
17.5 (max.t4) L L
6
181
Conductor
144
192
45
C C C
66
L L L
overlap, max
25 22
ø9
20
9
6 13 16 Stud can be turned

157 192 126 161
15 127 45° or 90°
136 171
40 162
7-63
7
S400-NN
Type S400-NN
■Ratings
DC 250
■Performance
IEC 60947-3 DC DC-22A
Flat bar studs ○
DIN rail mount ―
Externally mounted
Mechanical interlock9 Slide type ＭＳ ●
CE marking Yes
Notes:
▲ : Semi-standard.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-64
HL HL ON side:36
ø1
Interpole barrier ø11 148
4
Mounting OFF side:35
(removable) 120
110
hole
30 14.5
30 14.5
M10 screw 8 36
(max.)
25 HL 28 3P 4P
12
(max.)
44.5
44.5
HL HL
116 116
102
228
260
90
CL
349
260
214
M6 CL CL CL
Trip button (red)
85.3 14.7
44.5
97 45 45 M6
90 45 45 45 4 107 Tapped hole
140 70 115 127.5 52.5 8 35
185 145 60 60 60
81.5 126.5

HL
HL HL 3P
8
CL
8
103
R1
102
90
CL
228
260
70
214
228
39
92
110
CL CL
15
39
30
45
45
3
15
ø1
30 45 45 45
overlap, max
ø1
97
Conductor
53
3
8
4 107 M6
127.5 Tapped hole
ø3
145 90 45 45 45 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance
6
M8 Mounting screw
20 130 72 10
H Conductor H
L
L width, max. 35 H
L
5
20 54
116 M10screw
40
25
23 47 35 40
102
260
228
134
134
C C
90
282
282
282
84
L L L C
L
terminals 60
25
51
54 20

120
140 4 130 90
148 150 148
168

M5 Mounting screw
20(max.)
ø11
20(max.)

30(max.)
20 48 20
116 116
40
25
40
7
260
286
315
228
276
315
140
140
90
CL CL CL CL CL
70 70 10 70 10 70
25
51 51
48 20
ø6
2-
2✕
20
70 115 30.5 30.5

140 185 155 52 4 90 45 45 45 Mounting angle

C
3P CL 4P L L 22.5
H Mounting plate
4t max.
3P C
L 4P HC
LL 2✕2-ø7
8
Mounting hole
343
CL
228
127
333
C
L C
L
3
ø1
30
223 268
40 158 Stud can be turned 45° or 90°
181 226
M6 Mounting screw 57 198
200 245
7-65
7
S630-GN
Type S630-GN
Number of poles 3 4
■Ratings
DC 250
■Performance
IEC 60947-3 DC DC-22A
Flat bar studs ○
DIN rail mount ―
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ●
●
Toggle lock ＨＬ
Notes:
Combinations of Internally Mounted Accessories

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-66
Outline dimensions (mm) S630-GN

3P
(removable) 4P Mounting hole Drilling plan (front view)
HL 3 HL 8 32
ø1 Toggle extension
110
80
HL HL
170 170
141
126
46.5 55.5
273
90
ASL ASL ASL ASL
117
28 13
132
M8
15 32 25
M8
80
70 70
8
45 70 70 70 8 34
Conductor 4 107
210 280 127.5
80.5 145

4P Groove for dissipating heat
Toggle extension Stud can be generated by eddy current 4P
3P
(removable) turned 90° ø15 for accessory wiring 3P
8
HL 4P 3P
ø4
10
5
103
13
30.5
136
126
126
ASL
92
ASL ASL
20 32 25
122
M8
8
117
117
Tapped hole
127
28 13
70 70 70
42
ø13
Conductor
5
4 107 overlap, max 70 70 53
M8 43 70 70 43 43 70 70 70 43
127.5
Mounting screw
18 21

Toggle extension
3P 3P 3P
HL HL HL
30
M10 Mounting screw

5
32
25
170
18
40
141
156
126
90
76
32 67 76
40
ASL ASL ASL
90
ASL
303
67
117
132
147
51
18
25
2✕2-ø11
30
210 Trip button (red) 4 107 140 90

127.5 18 62 30 210
80.5 145 80

23
3
ø1
40
27
[max.]
26.5


21
ø9
7
63
70.5 79.5 15
158.5
170 170
132 273 141
126
100 170
70.5 79.5
46.5 55.5
182
90
ASL ASL ASL ASL ASL

149.5
117
51 51
15
50
63
4 107 40.5
210 105 175
21
127.5 51.6 100 170

70 70 70 70 70
280 116
(red)

Toggle extension
(front view)
3P 4P Mounting hole
(removable) 3P 4P
CL HL CL CL CL
ø9
10
121.5
4.5
CL
127
333
343
CL CL
ASL
121.5
42
35 226 296
268 338 18 245 315
80.5 57 210
Trip button (red)
7-67
7
S800-NN
Type S800-NN
Number of poles 3 4
■Ratings
DC 250
■Performance
IEC 60947-3 DC DC-22A
Flat bar studs ○
TemPlug70 (PG) ―
DIN rail mount ―
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ●
●
Toggle lock ＨＬ
Notes:

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-68

3P
(removable) 4P Mounting hole Drilling plan (front view)
HL 3 HL 10 32
ø1 Toggle extension
110
80
HL HL
170 170
141
126
46.5 55.5
273
90
ASL ASL ASL ASL
117
28 13
132
M8
15 32 25
M8
80
70 70
8
40 70 70 70 10 35
Conductor 4 107
210 280 127.5
80.5 145

4P Groove for dissipating heat
Toggle extension Stud can be generated by eddy current 4P
3P
(removable) turned 90° ø15 for accessory wiring 3P
8
HL 4P 3P
ø4
10
5
103
13
30.5
136
126
126
ASL
92
ASL ASL
20 32 25
122
M8
8
117
117
Tapped hole
127
28 13
70 70 70
42
ø13
Conductor
5
4 107 overlap, max 70 70 53
M8 43
127.5 43 70 70 43 43 70 70 70
Mounting screw
18 21

Toggle extension
3P 3P 3P
HL HL HL
30
M10 Mounting screw

5
32
25
170
18
40
141
156
126
90
76
32 67 76
40
ASL ASL ASL
90
ASL
303
67
117
132
147
51
18
25
2✕2-ø11
30
210 Trip button (red) 4 107 140 90

127.5 18 62 30 210
80.5 145 80

23
3
ø1
40
27
[max.]
26.5


21
ø9
7
63
70.5 79.5 15
158.5
170 170
132 273 141
126
100 170
70.5 79.5
46.5 55.5
182
90
ASL ASL ASL ASL ASL

149.5
117
51 51
15
50
63
4 107 40.5
210 105 175
21
127.5 51.6 100 170

70 70 70 70 70
280 116
(red)

Toggle extension
(front view)
3P 4P Mounting hole
(removable) 3P 4P
CL HL CL CL CL
ø9
10
121.5
4.5
CL
127
333
343
CL CL
ASL
121.5
42
35 226 296
268 338 18 245 315
80.5 57 210
Trip button (red)
7-69
7
S1250-NN
Type S1250-NN
Number of poles 3 4
■Ratings
DC 250
■Performance
IEC 60947-3 DC DC-22A
Upstream breaker @9 S1250-NE
Flat bar studs ○
TemPlug70 (PG) ―
DIN rail mount ―
Externally mounted
●
Toggle lock ＨＬ
Notes:
@9 : Required for overcurrent protection.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-70
Front-connected Drilling plan

Interpole barrier 3P 4P Mounting hole 14 31 (front view)
3
ø1
(removable) HL HL 4P
13 3P
110
Toggle extension
80
(removable) HL
170
200
190 190
184
47.5
370
95
ASL ASL ASL ASL
154
140
170
78 78 28 18
25
M8
80
Mounting screw 70
32
15 14 29
45
70 70 70 112
Conductor
140 105 175 overlap, max 17 127
210 280 80 171

M8
Mounting plate Mounting screw 4P
4P 3P
3P 3P 4P
HL
Toggle extension Insulating plate HL HL ø9 HL
(removable)
12
73
184
144
127
226 296
120
101
13 113
258
ASL ASL
98
ASL ASL
15 32 20
21 140
71
114
111
19
8
154
73
ø13
45
Conductor
70 70 81
Soft plastic tubing ø50 to be provided on 230 300

28 18
center pole and neutral pole of vertical
10 127 terminal type for insulation. ø15 for accessory wiring when necessary
80 171

give an allowance of 1.5mm around
Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. the handle escutcheon.

4P (rear view) 4P
3P 3P 4P 3P
Mounting angle HL HL
HL
HL
26
Toggle extension
(removable)
15
58
15
199
21
Auxiliary
40
144
circuit terminals
94
94
40
ASL ASL ASL ASL ø11
M10 Mounting
64
13
64
screw 90 90
114
147
21
169
15 32 30
15
8
58
45
7
26
140
ø1
70 70 70
70 70 70 90
3
145 21 210 175 105

80 189 62 85 Conductor 280
overlap, max
Insulating
Flush-mounted Mounting plate
plate
4P (Max.4t)
3P Max.75
HL CL 3P 4P
HL 35 CL CL
M8
Toggle extension Conductor
Mounting screw
(removable) overlap, max
12
190 190
129
32.5
420
15
258
410
185
CL CL CL CL CL
95
ASL
ASL
15
140
129
ø13
13
ø9
Trip button (red)
268 338 226 296

20 32 15 245 315
18 8
Soft plastic tubing ø50 to be provided on
80 66 216 center pole and neutral pole of vertical
Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. terminal type for insulation.
7-71
7
S1600-NN
Type S1600-NN
Number of poles 3 4
■Ratings
DC 250
■Performance
IEC 60947-3 DC DC-22A
Upstream breaker @9 S1600-NE
Flat bar studs '
TemPlug70 (PG) ―
DIN rail mount ―
Externally mounted
●
Toggle lock ＨＬ
Notes:

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
Shunt trip Under
３
・
４
Left pole
Toggle
Right pole
7-72
Front-connected Drilling plan (front view)

Interpole barrier 3P 4P Mounting hole 20 11
(removable) 13
HL ø HL Insulating plate
15(max)
4P
Toggle extension 3P
110
100
(removable) HL
30
190 190
170
200
Mounting angle
184
47.5
370
95
ASL ASL ASL ASL
139(min.)
M8
140
154
170
78 78 28 18 Mounting screw
Trip button (red)
32 ø9
100
70
15
45 70 70 70 20 46
140 105 175 Conductor 132
210 280 overlap, max 17 147
80 191
M8 4P 4P 4P
Mounting angle Mounting screw 3P 3P 3P
HL HL
Toggle extension H
L
(removable)
2
ø1
184
R3
30
65
60
98
ASL ASL ASL
139(min)
100
85
15 30
154
30
Conductor
overlap, max 15
70 70 70 Insulation tube
ø9 81
70 15
OFF side All poles ) 70
85
10 147 115 15
give an allowance of 1.5mm around
80 191 130 the handle escutcheon.
Draw-out Draw-out handle Drilling plan (front view)

Breaker fixing screw (removable) 395(draw-out)
Auxiliary 4P
circuit terminals ø12 325(disconnected) 3P
(Automatic connection) 3P 4P Toggle extension 295(test) ø12 112.5 182.5
HL Mounting hole HL (removable) HL 4P
265(connected) Mounting hole 225
Auxiliary 3P 2✕2-ø12 Mounting hole
circuit terminals HL
105
30
(self-engaging)

190 190
200
170
170
50
75
525
Max.45
100 60
ASL ASL ASL ASL

70
120
190
190
78 78
220
220
20
Max.45
15
20
90
Conductor
7
30
28 300(max.) 28 150 220 272 Conductor 200 2-ø12 20 215

28 370(max.) 28 282 overlap, max 3P
Auxiliary 80 316 100 170
circuit terminals 4P
396(connected) Mounting angle
(self-engaging) Auxiliary circuit terminals L50✕50✕6
526(draw-out)
(self-engaging)
Flush-mounted

4P M8 (Max.4t)
3P HL CL 3P 4P
Mounting screw
HL 35 CL CL
Toggle extension
(removable)
2
ø1
190 190
32.5
65
30
45
410
185
420
CL CL CL
95
15
ASL
115
ø9
15
268 338 15 226 296
18 210 245 315
Trip button (red)
Center pole, Neutral pole
80 66 255
7-73
7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers Electronic （1000A・1200A Frame）
TL-1000NE, TL-1200NE
4
3
hour
Type TL-1000NE TL-1200NE 2
50
■Ratings 40
30
20
Calibrated at 45°C 500 800 600 1000
600 900 700 1200
minute
10
8
700 1000 800 6
5 Curves Based on standard settings
4
3
2
1
50
30
Tripping Time
10
NK AC 690V ― ― 8
6
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 125/―@3 125/― @3 5
4
240V ― ― 3
DC 250V ― ― 2
TL-1200NE
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 45/34 45/34
second
1
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 75/57 75/57 0.8 600A[I1]Setting
0.6
440V 125/65 125/65 0.5
0.4
415V 125/65 125/65 0.3 1200A[I1]Setting
380V 125/65 125/65 0.2
240V 150/113 150/113 0.1

DC 250V ― ― 0.08
0.06
125V ― ― 0.05
TL-1000NE
0.04
■Rated short time withstand current, kA 15（0.3sec） 15（0.3sec） 0.03
1000A[I1]Setting
Weight (' marked standard type) kg 26.0 33.7 26.0 33.7 0.02
■Connections and Mountings 0.01 500A[I1]Setting

Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ― ― 0.008
0.006
With extension bars ' ' 0.005
80
90
100
125
150
200
250
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
8
9
10
12.5
15
20
40
50
Flat bar studs ○ ○ [ICT] × % Percent rated current of base current [ I 1 ]
Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) ○ ○
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ ○ Overcurrent tripping characteristics
Draw-out type (DR) ▲ ▲
Type TL-1000NE TL-1200NE
TemPlug70 (PG) ― ― CT rated current (A) (ICT) 1000 1250
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― ― Long time-delay 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 600, 700, 800, 1000,
DIN rail mount ― ― pick-up current (A) (I1) 1000 1200
Clip-in chassis mount ― ― Long time-delay (5–10–15–20–30) at (I1) x 600% current
■Accessories (optional) Symbol time settings (S) (T1) Setting tolerance ±20%
Motor operator ＭＣ ● ● Short time-delay (I1) x 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000%
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ● ● pick-up current (A) (I2) Setting tolerance ± 15%
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ● Short time-delay Opening time (0.1, 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3) in the definite
time settings (S) (T2) time-delay. Total clearing time is +50ms and resettable
Externally mounted
Toggle extension ＨＡ ● @4 ● @4
time –20ms for the time-delay settings
Mechanical interlock⑨ Slide type ＭＳ ● ●
Instantaneous trip Continuously adjustable from (ICT) x 300 ~ 1200%.
● ● pick-up current (A) (I3) Setting tolerance ±20%
Toggle lock ＨＬ Pre-trip alarm pick-up (I1) x 70, 80, 90, 100%
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ― ― current (A) (IP) (optional) Setting tolerance ±10%
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ― ― Pre-trip alarm time setting 40 fixed definite time-delay.
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ●e ●e (S) (TP) (optional) Setting tolerance ±10%
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● ● Ground fault trip pick-up Continuously adjustable from (ICT) x 10 ~ 40%
Door flange ＤＦ ● ● current (A) (IG) (optional) ^4 Setting tolerance ±15%
■Standard specifications Ground fault trip-time Opening time (0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.8) in the definite
Overcurrent trip mechanism Electronic ⑯ Electronic ⑯ setting (S) (TG) (optional) time- delay. Total clearing time is +50ms and
^4 resettable time –20ms for the time-delay settings
Trip button (color) Yes (Brown) Yes (Brown)
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes Yes NOTE: The underlined values will be applied as standard ratings unless otherwise specified
Suitability for isolation Non Non when ordering
CE marking Non Non
Notes:
' : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. ○ : Optional standard. Specify when
ordering. ▲ : Semi-standard. ● : “yes” or “available”. ― : “no” or “not available”. 3 : Line side interpole
barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to
the draw-out type (DR). !6 : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request.
@3 : at 460V AC. @4 : One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are required.
^4 : Ground fault trip can not be equipped with Pre-trip alarm.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
３
・
４
Left pole NOTE: ✽ The UV Controller is installed externally when provided with AC UV.
Toggle
Right pole
7-74
Outline dimensions (mm) TL-1000NE, TL-1200NE
Front-connected Conductor Drilling plan (front view)

3P Mounting hole 4P 14 31
ø13 overlap, max 4P
HL HL
33 32 15
Toggle extension 3P
13
68
88
(removable) HL
8
200
184
170
N
ASL ASL ASL
370
28 18
140
170
154
8 ø9
88
70
14 46
45 70 70 70
140 105 175 17 140 M8
80 191

18 M8 4P 4P
Mounting screw 3P
3P 4P 3P
Conductor HL ø9
HL HL HL
overlap, max
184
140
12
13
73 71 27 86
40
114 70
ASL ASL ASL
98
111
184
19
140 113
8
75
226 296
32
6
13
154
15
45
Insulating plate
ø13 70 70 70 (Factory fitted)
Mounting plate 70 70 ø9 81
Soft plastic tubing ø50 to be provided on center 230 115
pole and neutral pole of vertical terminal type for
insulation. 300 Panel cutout dimensions shown
give an allowance of 1.5mm
ø15 for accessory wiring when necessary around the handle escutcheon.
Plug-in Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view)

M10
158 Mounting screw 4P 4P
18 3P 4P Mounting angle
Auxiliary 3P 3P
HL HL
circuit terminals
26
HL Mounting angle HL
15
58
25
21
199
144
94
94
13
18
ASL ASL ASL

64
64
90 90
114
21
169
147
25
58
8
85
32
15
26
45 ø11
21
62 85
70
70 70 ø13 140
210
70 70 70
175
280
105
90
7
Flush-mounted Drilling plan (front view)
3P 4P Mounting plate 3P 4P
Soft plastic tubing φ50 to
(t=4max.)
CL HL CL be provided on center pole
M8 Mounting screw and neutral pole of vertical CL CL
35 terminal type for insulation.
12
15
129 55
75
185
CL CL CL
410
420
ASL Conductor overlap, max

140
45
13
8 15
18 32 ø13 226 296
268 338 66 236 245 315 ø9
7-75
7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers Electronic （2000A Frame）
XS2000NE
4
3
hour
Type XS2000NE 2
Number of poles ３４ 1
50
■Ratings 40
30
Rated current, A (Adjustable)
20
1200 1800
minute
10
8
1400 2000 6
5 Curves Based on standard settings
4
3
2
1
50
30
Tripping Time
10
NK AC 690V ― 8
6
Icu/Ics(sym) 450V 85/― !3 5
4
240V ― 3
DC 250V ― 2
IEC60947-2 AC 690V 45/42
second
1
Icu/Ics(sym) 500V 65/50 0.8 2000A[I1]Setting
0.6
440V 85/65 0.5 1000A[I1]Setting
0.4
415V 85/65 0.3
380V 100/75 0.2
240V 125/94 0.1

DC 250V ― 0.08
0.06
125V ― 0.05
0.04
■Rated short time withstand current, kA 42（0.3sec） 0.03
Weight (' marked standard type) kg 54.0 67.0 0.02
■Connections and Mountings 0.01

Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws ― 0.008
0.006
With extension bars ○ 0.005
80
90
100
125
150
200
250
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
8
9
10
12.5
15
20
40
50
Flat bar studs ' [ICT] × % Percent rated current of base current [ I 1 ]
Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs ○ Overcurrent tripping characteristics
CT rated current (A) (ICT) 2000
TemPlug70 (PG) ― Long time-delay 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000
TemPlug45B (PG4) ― pick-up current (A) (I1)
DIN rail mount ― Long time-delay (5–10–15–20–30) at (I1) x 600% current
Clip-in chassis mount ― time settings (S) (T1) Setting tolerance ±20%
■Accessories (optional) Symbol Short time-delay (I1) x 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000%
Motor operator ＭＣ ● pick-up current (A) (I2) Setting tolerance ± 15%
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ― Short time-delay Opening time (0.1, 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3) in the definite
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ― time settings (S) (T2) time-delay. Total clearing time is +50ms and resettable
Externally mounted
time –20ms for the time-delay settings

Instantaneous trip Continuously adjustable from (ICT) x 300 ~ 1200%.
pick-up current (A) (I3) Setting tolerance ±20%
● Pre-trip alarm pick-up (I1) x 70, 80, 90, 100%
Toggle lock ＨＬ current (A) (IP) (optional) Setting tolerance ±10%
Terminal cover For front-connected ＣＦ ― Pre-trip alarm time setting 40 fixed definite time-delay.
For rear-connected and plug-in ＣＲ ― (S) (TP) (optional) Setting tolerance ±10%
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ― Ground fault trip pick-up Continuously adjustable from (ICT) x 10 ~ 40%
Terminal block for lead ＴＦ ● current (A) (IG) (optional) ^4 Setting tolerance ±15%
Door flange ＤＦ ● Ground fault trip-time Opening time (0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.8) in the definite
■Standard specifications setting (S) (TG) (optional) time- delay. Total clearing time is +50ms and
Overcurrent trip mechanism Electronic ⑯ ^4 resettable time –20ms for the time-delay settings
Trip button (color) Yes (Red) NOTE: The underlined values will be applied as standard ratings unless otherwise specified
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Yes when ordering
CE marking Non
Notes:
' : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. ○ : Optional standard. Specify when
ordering. ● : “yes” or “available”. ― : “no” or “not available”. 2 : Supplied as standard.
9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). !3 : at 500V AC.
^4 : Ground fault trip can not be equipped with Pre-trip alarm.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
３
・
４
Toggle
Right pole
7-76
Outline dimensions (mm) XS2000NE
Front-connected
3P 65 4P
Mounting hole 30 ø11
HL 130 28.8 HL
Mounting angle
20
90
30
Toggle extension
(removable)
N 105
257
232
※
450
ASL ASL ASL
30
79
193 M10
302 φ12
20 Mounting screw
90
15 30
10 20 18 ※Use non-magnetic angle

105 105 105 105 110 (SUS 304 etc.)
Conductor 60 225

3P 4P
M10 HL
3P
Mounting screw HL HL
30
Toggle extension
(removable) Mounting angle 105
232
95
ASL ASL ※ ASL
144
30
※
79
160
0
30
R1
65
302 ø12
ø11 20
10 185 20 30 Conductor overlap, max 105 105 110
119
245 130 15 Panel cutout dimensions shown
340 ※Use non-magnetic angle give an allowance of 2mm around
(SUS 304 etc.) the handle escutcheon.
Draw-out Toggle extension

(removable)
Auxiliary 561(draw-out)
Draw-out handle Drilling plan (front view)
circuit terminals 3P 371(disconnected) 4P
(removable)
(Automatic connection) H 341(test) 3P 170(4P) 279(4P)
L
4P 311(connected) Mounting hole ø14
Mounting 334 340(3P) ø14
34
HL HL
hole HL
ø11
314
20
232
65
160 95
15 30 20
ASL
624
ASL ASL
112
310
280
20 °
20
90
30
105105 110
※ Conductor overlap, max
405(max.) ※514(max.) 308 25 290(3P) 268
13 371
466 145(4P) 254(4P)
※Contact TERASAKI if manual connection is required.
Mounting angle
Flush-mounted
Drilling plan (front view) Panel cutout (front view) 7
3P 3P 4P
3P 4P Panel M10
HL HL CL 54.5 Mounting screw HL CL CL
30
Mounting angle 105

200
32
63
466
C
L C
L CL CL CL CL
480
※ ※
111
30
ASL
192
30
65
302 ø12
406 515 ø11

18.5 30
15
75 170 130 350 459
※Use non-magnetic angle
(SUS 304 etc.)
7-77
7
XS2000NN
Type XS2000NN
■Ratings
DC 250
■Performance
Max switching current A AC 12000
IEC 60947-2 Ann.L CBI-Y DC 5000
Endurance Number of operating cycles with current 500
Number of operating cycles without current 2500
Upstream breaker (OCPD) @9 XS2000NE
Flat bar studs '
Flush-mounted (FP) With bolt studs ○
TemPlug70 (PG) ―
DIN rail mount ―
External operating Breaker-mounted ＨＢ ―
handle Door-mounted (variable depth) ＨＰ ● ^3
Externally mounted
●
Toggle lock ＨＬ
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ―
CE marking Non
Notes:
2 : Supplied as standard.
^3 : Fixed depth, not adjustable.

Poles
ＡＬＡＬ
３
・
４
Toggle
Right pole
7-78
Outline dimensions (mm) XS2000NN
Front-connected
3P 65 4P
Mounting hole 30 ø11
HL 130 28.8 HL
Mounting angle
20
90
30
Toggle extension
(removable)
N 105
257
232
※
450
ASL ASL ASL
30
79
193
M10
Mounting screw
302 ø12
20
90
15 30
10 20 ※Use non-magnetic angle

105 105 105 105 110 Conductor 18
overlap, max 60 225 (SUS 304 etc.)
320 429
380

M10 3P 4P
HL
Mounting screw 3P
HL HL
30
Toggle extension
(removable) Mounting angle 105
232
95
ASL ASL ※ ASL
144
30
※
79
160
0
30
R1
65
302 ø12
ø11 20
10 185 20 30 Conductor overlap, max 105 105 110
119 Panel cutout dimensions shown
245 130 15
give an allowance of 2mm around
340 ※Use non-magnetic angle
the handle escutcheon.
(SUS 304 etc.)
Draw-out Toggle extension
(removable)
Auxiliary 561(draw-out)
Draw-out handle Drilling plan (front view)
circuit terminals 3P 371(disconnected) 4P
(removable)
(Automatic connection) H 341(test) 3P 170(4P) 279(4P)
L
4P 311(connected) Mounting hole ø14
Mounting 334 340(3P) ø14
34
HL HL
hole HL
ø11
314
20
232
65
160 95
15 30 20
ASL
624
ASL ASL
112
310
280
20 °
20
90
30
105105 110
※
405(max.) ※514(max.) 308 Conductor overlap, max
25 290(3P) 268
13 371
※Contact TERASAKI if manual 466 145(4P) 254(4P)
connection is required. Mounting angle
Flush-mounted
Drilling plan (front view) Panel cutout (front view) 7
3P 3P 4P
3P 4P Panel M10
HL HL CL 54.5 Mounting screw HL CL CL
30
Mounting angle 105

200
32
63
466
C
L C
L CL CL CL CL
480
※ ※
111
30
ASL
192
30
65
302 ø12
406 515 ø11

18.5 30
15
75 170 130 350 459
※Use non-magnetic angle
(SUS 304 etc.)
7-79
7
TB-5S
3
2
hour
Type TB-5S 1
Number of poles １２３４ 40
■Ratings 20
minute
Rated current, A 10 30 30 10
20 50 4
Rated voltage V AC 265 460 460 460 2
DC 125 125 ― ― 1
Max.
Tripping Time
NK AC 250Ｖ ― 5 $4 ― ― 20
（sym） 125Ｖ ― 42 ― ― 10
DC 125Ｖ ― 5 ― ― 6
Weight kg 0.16 0.34 0.5 0.66 4
■Connecting scheme 2
second
Front-connected both on the line and load sides ● 1
0.6 Min.
Plug-in on the line side and front-connected on the load side ―
0.4
Plug-in both on the line and load sides ―
■Mounting scheme (optional) 0.2
Clip-in chassis ● 0.1
0.06
Mounting base for single-row installation ―
0.04
Mounting base for branched-into-dual-rows installation ―
0.02
Toggle holder ＨＨ ● 0.01
0.006
Toggle lock ＨＬ ● ―
100
125
200
300
500
600
800
1000
2000
3000
5000
8000
Toggle cap ＨＣ ● ―
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ― ● Percent Rated Current
Trip button (color) Non
Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Non
Suitability for isolation Non 130
CE marking Non 15A
10A

40A
Notes: 120 Calibrated
40A 20A temperature
― : “no” or “not available”. 50A
110
$4 : 2.5kA for 10A.
100
90
Calibrated at 45°C 5 15 25 35 45 55
7-80
Outline dimensions (mm) TB-5S
Front-connected
M5✕0.8 screw 32
1 P 2 P 3 P 4 P
ASL
106
120
80
95
90
50
N
3.5
25 50 25 25 25
5 60
25 50 75 100 Clip A
79
77(1P)
Mounting screw
21 46 71 96 M4
ø6
(max.)
61.5
6
13
(max.)
5
(t:4 mm max.)
Clip and Clip-in chassis

Clip-in Chassis, part number TDB-50SG
(12-pieces snap-off chassis)
Clip A 5.5 Mounting screw
Snap-off notch
M4
(not supplied)
ASL
106
ASL
120
ASL
106
ASL
116
50
50
Mounting screw
4.2 M4 12.5 25 Spring Clip
12 (not supplied)
25 62.5
25✕12=300
" NOTE: Clips A are supplied with breakers, 2 pieces/pole. NOTE: 1. Clip-in chassis is notched between every 2. Screw clip-in chassis down at 4 or 5
For multi-pole installation, clip-to-clip distance is 25 mm. two pieces to adjust number of pieces to pole intervals.
number of breaker poles. (Bend once or
twice to snap off.)
7
7-81
7
TB-5P
3
2
hour
Type TB-5P 1
Number of poles １２ 40
■Ratings 20
minute
20 50 4
Rated voltage V AC 265 460 2
DC ― 125 1
Tripping Time
Max.
NK AC 250Ｖ ― 5 $4 20
（sym） 125Ｖ ― 42 10
DC 125Ｖ ― 5 6
4
Weight kg 0.13 0.28
second
Min.
Front-connected both on the line and load sides ― 1
Plug-in on the line side and front-connected on the load side ● 0.6
0.4
Plug-in both on the line and load sides ―
0.2
Clip-in chassis ― 0.1
0.06
Mounting base for single-row installation ● $7 0.04
Mounting base for branched-into-dual-rows installation ● $7
0.02
0.01
0.006
100
125
200
300
500
600
800
1000
2000
3000
5000
8000
Toggle lock ＨＬ ● ―
Toggle cap ＨＣ ● ―
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ― ● Percent Rated Current
15A
CE marking Non

40A 10A
● : “yes” or “available”. 30A 20A temperature
110
$4 : 2.5kA for 10A.
$7 : Specify the branch bars when ordering. See page 7-86, 87 for details.
100
90
Calibrated at 45°C 5 15 25 35 45 55
7-82
Outline dimensions (mm) TB-5P
Front-connected
1P 2P
21 46
36 Line end plug-in terminal
ASL
56.5
74.5
ASL
13(max.)
38.5
(max.)
6
3.5
25 25 5 ø6
M5×0.8 screw 32
50 Load end terminal 5 60
(t: 4 mm max.)
65
77(1P)
79 (2P)
Single mounting base-TDB-50PC

Example 1 Example 2
Type BH-SC
Line blade terminal 19.5 35 Applied branching bars type 1RT-LC
25
(separately sold) 2.3 32 (separately sold) type 1S-LC
CL
t:1 Bus bar
ø10.5 (6×32 max.)
8
Pressure plate-SC
15
for Branching bar mtg. t:1 (not supplied)

Pressure plate-SC
9
16 22
20
36
84
45
140
5
52
27
11 13
ASL ASL
56.5
7
ASL
22
29
ø4.5Mounting hole 21
12 14
19
Clip D Load end terminal

M5×0.8 screw 13 Clip D
Mounting plate Mounting plate
49 Clip D 64 10 (not supplied) (not supplied)
19 92
17(1P)
Double mounting base-TDA-50PC

CL
Clip D Bus bar
(6×32 max.)
Drilling plan
CL M４×0.7 tapped mtg. hole 7
14 12
19
(not supplied)
ASL
56.5
ASL
49
M5×0.8 tapped hole

ø10.5 for Branching bar connecting,

for Branching bar mtg. type 1S-LC
45
5
type 2S-LC
103.5
200
162
CL
20
32
162
C
40
L
45
M5×0.8 tapped hole

5
Pressure plate-DC
19.5 35 11 8 13 for Branching bar connecting,
ASL t:1
type 1RT-L C
49
ASL type 2RT-L C

ø4.5Mounting hole type 1T-L C
12 14
19
Clip D 25
Load end terminal
M5×0.8 screw 1310 Mounting plate 50
(Min. mounting pitch)
19 92
17(1P)
7-83
7
TB-5D
3
2
hour
Type TB-5D 1
Number of poles 2 40
■Ratings 20
minute
20 50 4
Rated voltage V AC 250 2
DC 125 1
Max.
Tripping Time
NK AC 250Ｖ 5 $4 20
（sym） 125Ｖ 42 10
DC 125Ｖ 5 6
4
Weight kg 0.28
second
Min.
Front-connected both on the line and load sides ― 1
Plug-in on the line side and front-connected on the load side ― 0.6
0.4
Plug-in both on the line and load sides ●
0.2
Clip-in chassis ― 0.1
0.06
Mounting base for single-row installation ● $7 0.04
Mounting base for branched-into-dual-rows installation ● $7
0.02
0.01
0.006
100
125
200
300
500
600
800
1000
2000
3000
5000
8000
Toggle lock ＨＬ ―
Toggle cap ＨＣ ―
Interpole barrier ＢＡ ● Percent Rated Current
CE marking Non 15A 10A

40A
● : “yes” or “available”. 20A temperature
110
$4 : 2.5kA for 10A. 50A
$7 : Specify the branch bars when ordering. See page 7-86, 87 for details.
100
90
Calibrated at 45°C 5 15 25 35 45 55
7-84
Outline dimensions (mm) TB-5D
Front-connected
46 Line end plug-in terminal

36
56.5
ASL
74.5
ASL
38.5
3.5
Load end plug-in terminal
25 5 60
50 65
79
Single mounting base-TDB-50DC
Example 1 Example 2
Type BH-SC 19.5 35 Applied branching bars type 1RT-LC

Line blade terminal
(separately sold) 2.3 32 (separately sold) type 1S-LC
CL Bus bar
ø10.5 (6×32 max.)
Pressure plate-SC Pressure plate-SC
8
for Branching
9 15
t:1 t:1 (not supplied)

bar mtg.
16 22
20
36
84
45
5
52
140
11 8 13
27
ASL ASL
56.5
7
ASL
12 14 22
29
ø4.5 Mounting hole 21

6 9 19
15
Mounting plate M5×0.8screw

12 13 10 (not supplied) Load end terminal Mounting plate
M5×0.8 screw
(not supplied)
25 Load end terminal 33
49 19 92
Double mounting base-TDA-50DC

Drilling plan
M5×0.8 screw 33
7
CL Load end terminal
19 9 6
Bus bar M4×0.7 tapped mtg. hole

15
(6×32 max.) CL
14 12
(not supplied)
56.5
ASL ASL
49
M5×0.8 tapped hole

ø10.5 for Branching bar connecting,

for Branching type 1S-LC
45
5
bar mtg. type 2S-LC

103.5
162
200
162
40
32
20
CL CL
45
M5×0.8 tapped hole

5
Pressure plate-DC
19.5 11 8 13 for Branching bar connecting,
t:1 35
type 1RT-LC
49
ASL ASL type 2RT-LC

ø4.5 Mounting hole type 1T-LC
12 14
9 19
25
15
50
Mounting plate
6
M5×0.8 screw (Min. mounting pitch)
25 Load end terminal 32
49 19 92
7-85
7
TB-5P, TB-5D
■Mounting bases, branching bars and other accessories
Mounting bases for dual-row installation (for four circuits)
Type Applicable breaker Outline
Clip D
TDA-50PC TB-5P (Ou

ter
(Inn bus
er b b ar)
(Ou usb
ter ar)
bus
b ar)
Load terminal
TDA-50DC TB-5D (Ou

ter
(Inn bus
er b b ar)
(Ou usb
ter ar)
bus
b ar)
Mounting bases for single-row installation (for two circuits)

Type Applicable breaker Outline
Clip D
TDB-50PC TB-5P
(Inn
er b
(Ou usb
ter ar)
bus
b ar)
(Inner busbar)
TDB-50DC TB-5D
(Inn
er b
(Ou usb
ter ar)
bus
b ar)
Accessories
Name Outline
M3×0.5×6R
Retainer plate DC
t=1mm
Retainer plate DC
M3×0.5×6R
Retainer plate DC
t=1mm
Retainer plate SC
M5×0.8×40R
(Not supplied)
Braided line terminal BH-SC
Square nut
7-86
TB-5P, TB-5D
Branching bars
Application Type Arrangement
M5✕0.8✕8R (Not supplied)
Two branches
2RT-LC
from outer busbar ar)
sb
r bu
ute
(O r)
ba
us
erb
n
(In ar)
sb
bu
(Outer)
(Inner)
(Outer)
uter
(O
M5✕0.8✕40R (Not supplied)
Connecting stud
(B pipe)
Two branches
2S-LC
from inner busbar
ar)
sb
r bu
ute
(O ar)
sb
(Outer)
(Inner)
(Outer)
bu
ner r)
(In ba
us
terb
u
(O
M5✕0.8✕40R
(Not supplied)
Connecting stud
(B pipe)
One branch from

1S-LC r)
inner busbar ba
us
terb
u r)
(O ba
us
erb
(In
n ar)
sb
r bu
ute
(Outer)
(Inner)
(Outer)
(O
M5✕0.8✕8R
(Not supplied)
r)
ba
One branch from us
erb
1RT-LC ut
ba
r)
7
outer busbar (O us
erb
(In
n ar)
sb
bu
u ter
(O
(Outer)
(Inner)
(Outer)
M5✕0.8✕8R
(Not supplied)
ar)
sb
One branch from bu
uter ar)
outer busbar in 1L-LC (O
bu
sb
ner r)
opposite direction (In ba
us
terb
u
(O
(Outer)
(Inner)
(Outer)
7-87
Outline dimensions (mm) (Type T2MC12) S50-GF, S100-NF, S100-GF, S100-NM, S100-NN, S125-NF, S125-GF, S125-NN
Front-connected
Preparation of conductor Drilling plan (front view)
3P 4P ø9
Interpole barrier
8.5(max.)
Mounting hole 154
(removable) 3P 4P
Front Panel t2
24
47
HL HL M8 screw H
L H
L
17(max.)
max.t5
Operating knob
134
155
132
CL
M4✕0.7
45 8 Mounting screw
10
60 30 30 M4✕0.7
14.5 21.5 Connector plug 61
90 Tapped hole
90 45 106
30 30 30 5.5 164.5
45 75 28(max.)
Rear-connected
90
86
HL
154 Mounting plate
(max. t3.2) 3P 4P 4P
Operating Front Panel t2
103.5
knob 3P
H
L H
L H
L
5
R1
61
148
Conductor
155
134
132
134
CL 15 overlap, max CL CL
155
8
16
M4✕0.7 45
ø18
Pad lock ø8.5 15 Mounting screw
15 30 30 30 30 30 90
Connector plug 61 52 M4✕0.7
60 30 30 30
45 106 102 Stud can be turned Tapped hole
45° or 90°
5.5 164.5
28(max.)
Panel cutout dimensions shown give an
allowance of 1.5mm around motor operator.

Mounting base Drilling plan Panel hinge position (hatching area)
M6 Nut (rear view) (front view) (bottom view)
Front Panel
Conductor
194 3 3P 3P
Operating 2t
18.5
knob 23 H
L H
L
ø6
11
13 HL
8.5
25
17
Preparation of
148
30
conductor 154±1
107
194
134
155
100
75
75
CL 13 CL CL
27
10(max.)
ø6.5
100 100
25
150 150
200 200
11
Pad lock Mounting plate

18.5
Connector plug 30 30 M6 30
35 22 1
15(max.)
101 89 86
M5✕0.8
5.5 204.5
28(max.)
Plug-in (High-performance) Detail of Preparation of

connecting part conductor Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view)
3P 4P
ø6.5 90
154 75
10(max.)
M6 Nut 60 30 3P 4P
Front Panel t2 29 HL H
L
Conductor H
L H
L ø6
5 15(max.)
27
15
Operating knob 35 47.5

108
160
134
CL CL CL
75
75
22.5
50
37.5
15
35 15 22.5 15
Connector plug 90 120 70
48 27 M5✕0.8
Mounting screw M6 Mounting plate
45 106
5.5 164.5
28(max.)
7-88
Outline dimensions (mm) (Type T2MC25) S225-NF, S225-GF, S225-NM, S250-NF, S250-GF
Front-connected Preparation of With extension bars (optional) Drilling plan (front view)
3P
Interpole barrier
4P conductor 3P
Mounting hole HL
(removable) ø9
10(max.)
120 Conductor
97 overlap, max
154
100
11.5
23 23 28
Front Panel t2 25(max.) 3P 4P
24
H H max.t7 4 H H
23
L L
30.5
M8 screw L L
ø11
Operating Mounting hole Operating
knob knob
144
155
165
126
C
L C
L C
L C
L
22
M4✕0.7
Mounting screw
5
30.5
70 14.5 21.5 45 8 35 35 M4✕0.7
105 61 23 23 23 Connector plug Tapped hole
11.5
90 Connector plug 45 106 ø11 35 35 35
35 35 35
5.5 164.5 52.5 87.5
52.5 87.5
28(max.) 90
14.5 21.5
Rear-connected
90 Drilling plan (front view) Panel cutout (front view)
86
H
L
154 Mounting plate 4P

3P 4P
103.5
Operating (max. t3.2) 3P

Front Panel t2
knob H ø24 H HL
L L
R1
6
61
148
144
155
8
CL C
155
C L
126
144
Conductor L
22 overlap, max
20
M4✕0.7
Pad lock Mounting screw
ø9 15 15 35 35 45
35 35 35
M4✕0.7
Connector plug 61 71 35 35 35 35 35 Tapped hole 90
106
5.5 164.5 45° or 90°
28(max.)

18 27 26.5 Mounting base Drilling plan Panel hinge position (hatching area)
Front Panel Mounting plate (rear view) (front view)
16.5(max.)
15 (bottom view)
Operating 177
knob 2t 3P 3P
H
L H
L
Conductor ø6
18
13 HL
width,
8.5
max.25 30
17
148
M8 Nut
154±1
155
180
100
144
75
62
75
CL CL CL
100 100
150 150
18
200 200
Mounting plate
Pad lock
(17.5)
Auxiliary 35 35 M8
Connector plug 30
circuit terminals 105
84 57 86
45 129 M5✕0.8
7
5.5 187.5 Mounting screw
28(max.)

15.5(max.)
27 ø9
15.5 (max.)
5 3P 4P
105
154 75 70 35
22(max.) 3P 4P
Front Panel t2 29 H
L H
L H H
L L ø6
Conductor width,
24 max.22
M8 screw
15
Operating knob 35 52.5 17.5

144
75
50
75
C C C
108
180
L L L
37.5
15
15 15
48 27 M8 Mounting
M5✕0.8 105 140 35 17.5
Connector plug plate
Mounting screw 70
45 106
5.5 164.5
28(max.)
7-89
Outline dimensions (mm) (Type T2MC25) E250-SF, S250-SF, S250-SN
3P
Interpole barrier
4P conductor 3P
Mounting hole HL
(removable) ø9
11(max.)
120 Conductor
97 overlap, max
157
101
11.5
23 23 28
Front Panel t2 25(max.) 3P 4P
24
H H max.t7 4 H H
23
L L
30.5
M8 screw L L
ø11
Operating Mounting hole Operating
knob knob
144
155
165
126
C
L C
L C
L C
L
22
M4✕0.7 M4✕0.7
Mounting screw Mounting screw
5
30.5
70 14.5 21.5 46 7 35 35 M4✕0.7
105 60 23 23 23 Connector plug Tapped hole
11.5
90 Connector plug 45 109 ø11 35 35 35
35 35 35
5.5 167.5 52.5 87.5
52.5 87.5
28(max.) 90 ✽ For the extension bars, straight bars or
14.5 21.5 spread bars can be supplied.
Rear-connected
86
H
L
157 4P
107.5
Operating (max. t3.2) 3P

Front Panel t2
knob H ø24 H HL
L L
R1
6
60
148
155
Conductor
7
144
CL C
155
C L
126
144
overlap, max L
25 22 ø9
20
M4✕0.7
Mounting screw
9
Pad lock Stud can be 35 35 45

6 13 16 M4✕0.7
turned 35 35 35 90
Connector plug 60 72 35 35 35 35 35 Tapped hole
45° or 90°
45 109 107
5.5 167.5
28(max.)

18 27 26.5 Mounting base Drilling plan Panel hinge position (hatching area)
Front Panel Mounting plate (rear view) (front view)
16.5(max.)
15 (bottom view)
Operating 180
knob 2t 3P 3P
H
L H
L
Conductor ø6
18
13 HL
width,
8.5
max.25 30
17
148
M8 Nut
157±1
155
180
100
144
75
62
75
CL CL CL
100 100
150 150
18
200 200
Mounting plate
Pad lock
Auxiliary 35 35 M8
30
Connector plug circuit terminals 105
83 57 86
45 132 M5✕0.8
5.5 190.5 Mounting screw
28(max.)
7-90
Outline dimensions (mm) (Type T2MC12, T2MC25) H100, H125, H225, L100, L125, L225
conductor
3P 4P 3P
ø9
10(max.)
Interpole barrier Mounting hole HL
(removable)
120 Conductor
97 overlap, max
189 25(max.)
11.5
100 23 23
Front Panel t2 max.t7 63 3P 4P
59
H H 4 H H
30.5
L L
23
M8 screw L L
ø11
Operating Operating
knob Mounting hole knob
144
155
165
126
C
L CL M4✕0.7 C
L C
L
Mounting screw
22
30.5
5
70 14.5 21.5 80 8 35 35 M4✕0.7

105 96
11.5
90 Connector plug 23 23 23 Tapped hole
45 141 ø11 35 35 35 Connector plug
35 35 35
5.5 199.5 52.5 87.5
52.5 87.5
28(max.) 90
14.5 21.5
Rear-connected
86
H
L
103.5
189 Mounting plate 4P

Operating 3P 4P
Front Panel t2 (max. t3.2) 3P
knob
H ø24 H HL
L L
96
R1
6
148
155
144
126
144
155
C
L C
L C
L
8
Conductor
22 overlap, max
M4✕0.7
20
Mounting screw
Pad lock ø9 15 15 35 35 M4✕0.7 45
96 35 35 35 Tapped hole 90
Connector plug 71 35 35 35 35 35
106
5.5 199.5 45° or 90°
28(max.)

18 27 26.5 (rear view) (front view) (bottom view)
16.5(max.)
Mounting plate 15
212
Front Panel t2
3P 3P
Operating knob Conductor width, HL HL
max.25 HL
ø6
18
8.5
13
17
M8 Nut
30
148
155
144
180
100
189±1
62
75
75
C
L C
L C
L
Auxiliary
circuit terminals
18
Mounting plate 100 100

150 150
Connector plug M5✕0.8 35 35 M8 200 200
Mounting screw 30
119 57 105 86
45 164
5.5
28(max.)
222.5
7
Detail of Preparation of
15.5 (max.)
27
15.5(max.)
ø9
5
3P 4P
105
189 75 70 35 3P 4P
22(max.)
Front Panel t2 29 HL HL HL HL ø6
Conductor width,
24 max.22
15
M8 screw
Operating knob 35 52.5 17.5
144
75
75
C C C
108
180
L L L
37.5
50
15
15 15 Mounting
48 27 M8
M5✕0.8 105 140 35 17.5 plate
Connector plug Mounting screw
45 141 70
5.5 199.5
28(max.)
7-91
Outline dimensions (mm) (Type T2MC40) S400
conductor
ON side: 36 ø11
OFF side: 35
Front Panel
ø1
Interpole barrier 148
(max.)
HL HL 25
4
t2
12
(removable) Manual operating handle (max.) 120 8 36
30 14.5
30 14.5
Mounting hole (removable) HL 28
110
max. t10 3P 4P
M10 screw
44.5
44.5
HL HL
M6
349
260
214
228
260
C CL CL CL
( 18 ) L Mounting screw
( 15.5 )
44.5
Pad lock 45 45
85.3 14.7
90 45 45 45 97 M6
52.5 8 35
140 70 115 ( 19.8 ) 213 12.5 200.5 Tapped hole
60 60 60
185 81.5 126.5
Rear-connected
140
45° or 90°
HL
Mounting plate 4P
15
3P
Manual operating handle 3P 4P HL
(removable) HL
8
213
138
8
103
160
160
214
228
156
228
260
CL CL CL
110
ø13 45 45
30
39
30
15
Connector plug
8
45 45 45 M6
140
overlap, max
ø1
16 137.5 Tapped hole

ø3
Conductor
3
90 45 45 45
6

Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. allowance of 1.5mm around motor operator.

Manual operating handle (rear view) (front view) (bottom view)
(removable) M8 Mounting screw
20
12.5 223.5 72 10 Conductor width,
max.35
Front Panel t2
H
L H
L HL
8
5
20 54
16
M10 Screw
40
200.5 ±2
84 25
23 47 35
160
40
228
282
134
134
282
C C C
156
L L L 60
60
25
54 20
ø9 Mounting angle 100 100

2-
2✕ 150 150
Connector plug 120 90
16 160.5 148 200 200
Auxiliary
236 circuit terminals

M5 Mounting screw
Conductor width,
16 max. 30 ø11
20(max.)
20(max.)
3P 4P 3P 4P
HL HL HL HL
20 48 20
30(max.) 5
5 43 20 36
M10 screw
40
25
40
140
228
276
315
140
CL CL
90
CL
70 70 10 70 10 70
25
48 20
ø6
2-
2✕
30.5 30.5
20
261 52 4 90 45 45 45
Mounting plate
7-92
Outline dimensions (mm) (Type T2MC40) H400, L400
Front-connected
Preparation of
conductor With extension bars (optional) Drilling plan (front view)
ON side: 75 ø11
Front Panel
ø1
Interpole barrier HL HL OFF side: 72 148
4
t2
(removable)
(max.)
Manual operating handle 25 120 8 75
30 14.5
30 14.5
12
Mounting hole 110 (removable) (max.) HL 28 3P 4P
44.5
M10 screw
44.5
max. t10 HL HL
M6
349
260
214
228
260
C CL CL CL
( 18 ) L ( 15.5 ) Mounting screw
44.5
Pad lock 45 45 M6
122.3 17.7
Tapped hole
90 45 45 45 134 52.5 8 72
140 70 115 ( 19.8 ) 250 12.5 237.5
60 60 60
185 81.5 126.5
Rear-connected
140
45° or 90° HL
4P
15
Mounting plate 3P
3P 4P HL
Manual operating handle HL HL
8
(removable)
250
8
175
103
160
160
214
228
156
228
260
CL CL CL
45 45
30
110
ø13
39
Connector plug
8
30 M6
Conductor 15
140
ø1
Tapped hole
overlap, max
16 174.5
ø3
45 45 45
3
90 45 45 45
6


Manual operating handle Mounting screw (bottom view)
(removable) 20
Conductor width,
12.5 260.5 72 10 max.35
Front Panel t2 HL
H
L H
8
L
M10 Screw 5
20 54
16
40
23 47 35
84 25
237.5 ±2
160
40
228
282
134
282
134
C
L C
L C
156
L 60
60
25
54 20
ø9
2- Mounting angle
2✕ 100 100
Connector plug 157 Auxiliary 90 150 150
16 197.5 circuit terminals 148
200 200
273
7
Detail of Preparation of
M5 Mounting screw
16 Conductor width,
max. 30 ø11
20(max.)
20(max.)
3P 4P 3P 4P
30(max.) HL HL HL HL
5
M10 screw
43 20 36
20 48 20
5
40
25
40
140
228
276
315
140
CL CL
90
CL
70 70 10 70 10 70
25
48 20
ø6
2-
2✕
30.5
20
30.5 Mounting plate

298 52 4 90 45 45 45
7-93
Outline dimensions (mm) (Type T2MC80) S630, S800
Front-connected
Interpole barrier Drilling plan (front view)
(removable)
3P 4P Mounting hole 12.5 200.5
3
HL HL t1 L1 M8
ø1
Front Panel
13 Manual operating handle Tapped hole
110
HL
80
(removable) (18)
Pad lock
106.4
126
156
160
273
ASL ASL ASL ASL
M8
117
(15.5)
overlap, max 15 32 25
70
80
8
Connector plug (19.8)

Breaker type t1 t2 L1 L2
40 70 70
70 t2 L2 S630-CF, S630-NF
140 105 175 8 8 32 34
99.5 S630-RF, S630-GN
Conductor
210 280 16 137.5 S630-NE, S630-RE 8 8 32 36

213 S800-CF, S800-NF
10 10 32 35
S800-RF, S800-NN
S800-NE, S800-RE 10 10 32 36
Rear-connected
ø15 for accessory wiring

12.5 200.5 140 when necessary
Stud can be
Front Panel turned 90° 136
HL 3P 4P
5
ø1
HL HL HL
(18)
5
(removable)
10
Pad lock
106.4
106.4
126
156
160
263
243
13
160
103
ASL ASL ASL ASL

26
28 13
117
(15.5)
32 25
122
42
M8 70 70 140
overlap, max 20
Connector plug (19.8) 70 70 70 ø4

99.5 Mounting screw 43 70 70 43 43 70 70 70 43 8
16 137.5
Conductor
213 M8
Tapped hole
Plug-in (Standard) Detail of

connecting part Mounting base Drilling plan Panel hinge position (hatching area)
M10 (rear view) (front view) (bottom view)
Mounting screw Conductor width,
18 21 max.40
3P 3P
12.5 218.5 Auxiliary
H
L H
L HL
Front Panel circuit terminals
100 100
32 30
16
8
47 45
25
18
106.4
126
90
156
160
76
76
200.5
303
ASL ASL ASL

25
67
67
117
18
3032
Connector plug 150 150

2✕2-ø11
18 90 200 200
16 155.5 140
231 62 30 210
Detail of connecting part and
23
[max.] Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view)
40
M8 3P 4P 3P 4P
12.5 252.1
Mounting screw HL HL HL HL
Front Panel
21
ø9
27
26.5

[max.]
63
(removable)
15
H
L
106.4
19.9 44.5
126
M8
70.5 79.5
70.5 79.5
100 170
160
51.6
156
182
ASL ASL ASL ASL ASL

117
(15.5)
15
50
63
Pad lock
(19.8)
21
40.5
Connector plug
16 189.1 70 70 70 70 70 100 170
264.6 64.4
7-94
Outline dimensions (mm) (Type T2MC80) H630, H800, L630, L800
Front-connected
Interpole barrier Drilling plan (front view)
(removable)
Mounting hole 12.5 237.5
3P 4P
3
HL HL 10 69 M8
ø1
Front Panel
Tapped hole
13 110
Manual operating handle HL
80
(removable) (18)
Pad lock
106.4
126
156
160
273
ASL ASL ASL ASL
117
65 15
(15.5)
overlap, max 15 32 25 M8 70
80
8 Connector plug (19.8) Mounting screw
40 70 70
70 10 L2
140 105 175 136.5 Breaker type L2
Conductor
210 280 16 174.5

H630-NE, L630-NE 73
250
H800-NE, L800-NE 74
Rear-connected
Groove for dissipating
ø15 for accessory wiring heat generated
12.5 237.5 140 when necessary by eddy current
Front Panel Stud can be 136
turned 90° HL 3P 4P ø48
Manual operating handle H H
(18) L L HL
(removable)
5
10
Pad lock
30.5
106.4
106.4
136
126
126
156
160
160
ASL ASL
140
ASL M8
13
Tapped hole
117
127
117
65 15
(15.5)
42
32 25
122
5
8
70 70 140
Connector plug M8
(19.8) 136.5 43 70 70 43 43 70 70 70 43
Mounting screw
overlap, max 20
16 174.5 70 70 70
250
Conductor

Plug-in (Standard) Detail of

connecting part Mounting base Drilling plan Panel hinge position (hatching area)
18 21 (rear view) (front view) (bottom view)
Conductor width,
max.40
3P 3P
12.5 255.5 M10
M16 screw
Mounting screw 47 45 H
L Mounting angle H
L HL
Front Panel L40✕40✕5 100 100
16
32 30
8
18
106.4
126
90
25
156
76
76
160
303
237.5
ASL ASL ASL

67
67
117
25
18
30 32
Connector plug
18 2✕2-ø11 150 150
16 192.5 140 90
200 200
268 62 30 210
7
Detail of connecting part and
23
[max.] Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view)
40
3P 4P 3P 4P
M8
12.5 289.1
Mounting screw
27
HL HL HL HL
26.5
Front Panel
21
[max.]
ø9

63
(removable)
15
H
L
19.9 44.5
106.4
126
M8
70.5 79.5
70.5 79.5
100 170
160
51.6
156
182
ASL ASL ASL ASL ASL

(15.5)
117
15
50
63
Pad lock
Connector plug
(19.8)
21
40.5
16 226.1 70 70 70 70 70 100 170
301.6 64.4
7-95
Outline dimensions (mm) (Type XMD9) TL-1000NE, TL-1200NE
Front-connected

Conductor
Mounting hole Mounting hole overlap, max
3P 4P 14 31
ø13 ø13 4P
HL HL
13 13 Pad lock 3P
68
88
HL
31.5
79
166
184
200
N
173.5
40 102
ASL ASL ASL
370
Control circuit
154
170
117.5
terminal
28 18
11(max.) 4.5
32 8
70 ø9
88
M8
Mounting screw
15
45 70 70 70 14 46
70 70 105 175 262.5
210 280 358 (max.)
Rear-connected
4P
3P
4P
HL
3P 4P 3P
18 HL HL
HL
M8 R3
Mounting screw
262.5
184
86
13
90.5
12
19
114 70
ASL ASL ASL

73 71 27
19
113 183
13.5
226
15 32 8
111
140
154
75
11(max.) 4.5
45
Insulating
plate ø13 70 70 70
Mounting plate 70 ø9
40 70
Soft plastic tubing ø50 to be Conductor 230 300 168
262.5 provided on center pole and overlap, max
neutral pole of vertical terminal ø15 for accessory wiring when necessary
type for insulation.

(XDM8)
Auxiliary 4P 4P
circuit terminals 3P 3P
3P 4P
18 HL HL Mounting angle
HL Mounting angle HL
Max.15
15
21 58 26
25
199
144
94
94
ASL ASL
64
26 58 21 64
90 90
114
169
25
30
11(max.) 4.5
147
13
8
32
M10 ø11
21 140 70 70 70 90
Mounting screw
15
210 175 105

45
280.5 62 85
280
70 70 70 Conductor
overlap, max
ø13
7-96
Outline dimensions (mm) (Type T2MCX6) S1250-NE, S1250-GE, S1250-NN
Front-connected
3P 4P 14 31 4P
3
ø1
HL HL 3P
13 HL
80
Pad lock
31.5
79
166
200
184
173.5
40 102
370
ASL ASL ASL ASL
28 18
154
170
117.5
Control circuit
15 32 25
terminal
80
8
ø9
4.5 M8 70
11(max.)
45 70 70 70
Conductor 242.5
338(max.)
210 280
Rear-connected
M8 4P
Mounting screw 4P 3P
Insulating plate 3P HL HL
ø9 HL
12
HL R3
73
184
226 296
144
101
90.5
113
19
242.5
ASL ASL ASL

140
73 71
3
114
13.5
ø1
154
13
15 8 20
11(max.) 4.5
111
Soft plastic tubing ø50 to

32
be provided on center 70 70 168

18 pole and neutral pole of
242.5 230 300
vertical terminal type for 45
insulation.
ø15 for accessory wiring when necessary
Conductor 70 70 70
overlap, max

allowance of 1.0mm around motor
Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. operator.
Plug-in (Standard)
Mounting base Drilling plan (front view)

(rear view)
18 21
M10
Mounting screw
4P
3P 4P
4P
3P
7
3P HL HL Mounting angle H
L
26
Max.15
HL
15
58

21
199
40
144
94
94
40
ASL ASL ASL ASL
64
90
64
13 Mounting angle 90
114
21
169
Max.15
ø1
58
1
11(max.) 4.5
Auxiliary
147
26
15 32 30
circuit terminals 140

8
70 70 70 90
210
260.5 62 85 175 105
45
ø13 Conductor 280
7-97
Outline dimensions (mm) (Type T2MCX6) S1600-NE, S1600-NN
Front-connected
3P 4P 20 11
HL HL 4P
Insulating plate
3P
Pad lock HL
100
15
31.5
30
79
166
Mounting angle
200
184
L40✕40✕5
173.5
40 102
370
ASL ASL ASL ASL
28 18
154
170
117.5
Control circuit
20
terminal
M8
100
25
11(max.) 4.5
ø9
70
32
Mounting screw
15
45
ø13 70 70 70 20 46
140 Conductor
105 175 overlap, max 262.5
210
280 358(max.)
Rear-connected
4P
4P
Mounting angle 4P
3P 3P
3P HL
H
L
M8
Mounting screw HL R3
15
184
65
90.5
30
60
262.5
ASL ASL
139(min.)
13.5
100
154
11(max.) 4.5
ø1
85
ø9
15 30
2
130
70 168
262.5
15 30
Conductor 15 Insulation tube

overlap, max 70 70 70
OFF side All poles )
Draw-out
28-M3.5
Auxiliary 4P
circuit terminals Draw-out handle 517.5 (draw-out) 3P
(Automatic connection) (removable) 447.5 (disconnected) 4P
3P (4P) (4P)
HL 417.5 (test) ø12 3P
4P Breaker fixing screw Mounting hole 112.5 182.5
220 HL 387.5 (connected) 210
HL 225(3P)
105
HL 2
40
ø1
30
2
166 70
ø1
60
200
170
121
50
75
525
452.5
ASL ASL ASL ASL ASL

100
190
52.5
220
11(max.)
°
4.5
90
70
20 25
25
120
30
150 220 ø12 20 215

20
¶300(max.) 265
Mounting hole 15 200(3P)
¶370(max.) Conductor Conductor
overlap, max 70 70 70 overlap, max 100(4P) 170(4P) Mounting angle
L50✕50✕6
¶Contact TERASAKI if manual connection is required.
7-98
Outline dimensions (mm) (Type XMB10) XS2000NE, XS2000NN
Front-connected
65
3P 4P 4P
Mounting hole 30 ø11 HL 28.8
M10 3P
(removable) Mounting screw HL
20
90
105
257
242
232
80
450
ASL ASL ASL
79
95
193
185
20
90
302
15 30
ø12
105 105 105 105 110 Conductor 20 18

overlap, max
320 160 269 306
429 55 351
Rear-connected
4P
3P
M10 276
Mounting screw Mounting angle
HL HL
30
105
232
95
ASL ASL
30
79
¶ ¶
160
30
ø12
65
302
ø11
20
20 15 Conductor overlap, max
30 105 105 110
311
130
¶Use non-magnetic angle

(SUS 304 etc.)
Draw-out
Auxiliary
circuit terminals
(Automatic connection)
3P Draw-out handle
(removable)
687 (draw-out)
497 (disconnected)
Manual operating
4P
3P
7
HL 467 (test) handle (removable)
4P 276 170(4P)279(4P)
ø14
34
334 HL 437 (connected) Mounting hole HL 340(3P) ø14

HL
ø11
314
20
232
65
160 95
ASL ASL ASL ASL

624
15 30 20
280
310
20
°
112
90
30
20
¶405(max.) ¶514(max.) 308 105 105 110 290(3P) 268
Conductor 145(4P) 254(4P)
overlap, max
¶Contact TERASAKI if manual connection is required. Mounting angle
7-99
8 Handling and
maintenance
zTransportation and storage …………………………………………………8-2
xEnvironmental operating conditions ………………………………………8-2
cInstallation and connection …………………………………………………8-2
vMaintenance and inspection ………………………………………………8-4
8
Handling and maintenance
8-1
8
zTransportation and storage xEnvironmental operating conditions cInstallation and connection

zTransportation and storage
■ Storage Precautions ■ Transportation Precautions
• Avoid corrosive gases:
• Handle and transport with care: • Hold by the breaker body:
Do not leave the breakers in an atmosphere of hydrogen
sulfide or ammonia gas.
• Avoid humidity:
Do not leave the breakers in high humidity for a long
period.
• Avoid direct sunlight:
Do not expose the breakers to direct sunlight for a long
period.
• Avoid dust: Do not drop the breakers dur- Be sure to hold the breaker by its
Keep the breakers in the ON position and covered ing transportation. Carefully body during handling and trans-
against dust during storage. pack the breakers before transportation.
• Storage temperature: –20 to +60°C portation. Holding the breaker by a lead wire,
Take due measures against terminal cover, stud or flash plate
moisture and gas absorption of may result in the breaker being
the breakers during long trans- dropped, damaged and/or failed.
portation.
xEnvironmental operating conditions

Use the breakers in the following environmental conditions:
Ambient temperature –5°C to +45°C. The average ambient temperature over a period of 24 hours
must not exceed 35°C.
Humidity 45 to 85% RH
Vibration/Shock No unusual vibration and mechanical shock
Altitude 2,000 m max
No excessive water vapor, oil vapor, dust, salt or corrosive substances.
Atmosphere
No sudden change in temperature. Non-condensing
cInstallation and connection

■ Installation Precautions
• Avoid direct sunlight: • Avoid vibration and shock: • Avoid dust and chippings:
Install the breakers in an area that is not If installing the breakers in an area that is Take measures so that the breakers are not
exposed to direct sunlight. exposed to vibration or shock, use cush- directly exposed to rainwater, oil, dust or
Otherwise, the breakers may malfunction due ions to relieve vibration or shock applied chippings. Pay special attention to electrically
to a temperature rise. to the breakers. conducive particles such as iron chippings that
can enter the breakers. House the breakers in
enclosures during use.
• Do not block the arc gas exhaust ports: • Do not remove the back cover:
Do not block the arc gas exhaust ports. Doing Do not remove the base back cover or
so may deteriorate the breaking capacity. thread locking compound.
Ensure due insulation distance (arc space)
between current carrying parts and grounded
metal members in the vicinity of the exhaust
ports. See page 5-20 for instructions regarding
insulation distance.
8-2
■ Connection Precautions
• Tighten to a proper torque: • Never lubricate threads: • Insulate exposed live parts:
Insulation
tube or tape
Interpole barrier
OIL
Undertightening terminal screws may Do not lubricate screw threads. Electrically and positively insulate
result in overheat or malfunction and Doing so will decrease the frictional bare live parts of front-connected
overtightening in damage to the resistance, resulting in looseness and breakers using interpole barriers, ter-
mold. Tighten the screws to the speci- overheat. minal covers, insulation tube and/or
fied torques. See pages 5-16 to 5-19 insulation tape.
for proper tightening torques. Use
screwdrivers suited to the size and
type of screws.
• Do not deform studs: • Normal connection of power

supply and load is preferable:
Power supply (line) Load
ON ON
OFF OFF
Load Power supply (line)

Normal connection Reverse connection
Tighten the conductor connections of It is preferable in principle that the

rear-connected or plug-in breakers so breaker is in normal connection. If
that the studs do not suffer deforma- reverse connection is necessary, refer
tion due to excessive force. to page 5-22.
• Firmly secure pole conductors Electromagnetic force acted

in parallel with each other: per meter of conductor
Electromagnetic force
Conventional (three-phase short-circuit)
rated current N
kA Conductor Conductor
Insulating support
(Power factor) clearance: clearance:
10 cm 20 cm
10 (0.4) 490 245
18 (0.3) 1880 940
25 (0.2) 4430 2215
35 (0.2) 8690 4345
Install connecting conductors so that
they are in parallel with each other. 42 (0.2) 12520 6260
Firmly secure or tie the conductors by
insulating support in case they are
50 (0.2)
65 (0.2)
17740
29980
8870
14990
8
acted upon by an electromagnetic 85 (0.2) 51270 25635
force, the strength of which depends 100 (0.2) 70960 35480
on the magnitude of fault current. See 125 (0.2) 110870 55435
the table to the right.
8-3
8
vMaintenance and inspection
1. Initial inspection
After installing the breakers, inspect them according to the table shown below before energizing them for the first time.
Make sure that the breakers are not energized before starting the inspection.
Check item Criterion
1. Packing material debris, iron chippings, electrical wire debris or other Must have been completely removed.
electrically conductive foreign matter
2. Cracks of or damage to the cover and base Must not have occurred.
3. Terminal screws and conductor clamping screws Must have been tightened to the torques specified on
pages 5-16 to 5-19.
4. Insulation resistance Must be 5 megohms or higher when measured with a
500V megger.
5. Rated voltage and circuit voltage Must be identical or within the permitted range.
■ Caution on dielectric withstand test voltage

Perform the dielectric withstand test according to the table shown below. Make sure that the test
voltage does not exceed the upper limits specified in the table.
(Units in voltage)
Main circuit Auxiliary or control circuit (Note 1)
Rated insulation voltage Test voltage Rated insulation voltage Test voltage
(ac rms) of operating circuit (ac rms)
Ui≦300 2000 Uis≦60 1000 (Note 2)
300＜Ui≦690 2500 60＜Uis≦600 ２Uis+1000
(1500 min)
Notes: 1. Between terminal group and ground only
2. Isolate DC 24 V motors from the control circuit. Dielectric withstand voltage: AC 500 V.
2. Periodic Inspection
Periodic inspection is needed to maintain the optimum performance of the breakers and prevent malfunctions. Perform
the first inspection one month after the system is put into commission and subsequently, at periodic intervals depending
on the operating conditions.
■ Guidelines for inspection intervals

Operating conditions Installation location Examples Guidelines for inspection intervals
Where the ambient air is Dustproof and air-conditioned Every 2 or 3 years before 10 years since installation
１ always clean and dry. electrical installation rooms Every year after 10 years since installation
Every 6 months after 15 years since installation
Typical
Indoors where dust is low Switchboards or enclosures in electrical Every year before 10 years since installation
２ and corrosive gases are not . installation rooms not dustproof nor Every 6 months after 10 years since installation
present. air-conditioned Every month after 15 years since installation
Where sulfur dioxide, hydrogen Geothermal power plants sewage Every 6 months before 5 years since installation
１ sulfide, chloride and/or high-humidity treatment plants, steelmaking plants, Every month after 5 years since installation
gases are present and dust is low. papermaking plants or pulp making plants
Harsh
Where dust and/or corrosive gases Chemical plants, quarries or mines. Every month
２ are severe, making it impossible for
people to stay in for a long time.
8-4
■ Check items
Make sure that the breakers are not energized before starting the inspection.
Check item Criterion Remedy
1. Terminal screws Must not be loosened. If loosened, retighten to the torque specified
on pages 5-16 to 5-19.
2. Terminals and their vicinities Must be free of dust and oil. If not, clean with a cleaner.
Wipe with a clean cloth.
3. Cracks of or damage to the cover Must not have occurred. If cracks or damage is found, replace.
and base
4. Operating mechanism Must work smoothly. If not, replace or contact us.
5. Discoloration or overheat signs of Must not be present by visual inspection. If present, replace.
terminals and/or base (Discoloration of silver coating to a certain
degree proves no problem).
6. Insulation resistance Must be 5 megohms or higher when If not, replace.
measured with a 500V megger.
3. Inspection and action after interruption of fault current

When a breaker trips to interrupt a fault current, check the breaker to determine if it can be reused or must be replaced.
1. If arc gas exhaust ports are kept clean and no anomaly is found, the breaker can be reused.
2. If arc gas exhaust ports are blackened by soot, the breaker may be reused provided that the insulation resistance is 5
MΩ or higher, live parts including terminals are not overheated during energization and no other anomaly is found.
If the insulation resistance is lower than 5 megohms, perform the dielectric withstand test of the breaker. If the test
shows that the breaker still has the specified dielectric strength, the breaker may be reused provided that live parts
including terminals are not overheated. It is strongly recommended, however, that the breaker be reused for a limited
duration of time and be replaced with new one as early as possible.
• The dielectric withstand test is to be done according to the description on page 8-4.
3. If the handle and arc gas exhaust ports are heavily blackened by soot and molten metal grains are found around the
ports, replace the breaker with new one.
4. Operation durability
The operation durability of breakers depends on their frame size. Larger the frame size is, the lower the operation durabili-
ty is. IEC 60947-2 specifies the operation durability of breakers as shown in the table blow. Breakers are a protection tool
and unlike electromagnetic relays, are originally inappropriate for frequent switching operation.
Admissible number of operation cycles of molded case circuit breakers
1 2 3 4 5
Number of operation Number of operation cycles
Rated current, A (Note 1)
cycles per hour (Note 2) Not energized Energized (Note 3) Total
In ≦ 100 120 8500 1500 10000
100 ＜ In ≦ 315
315 ＜ In ≦ 630
630 ＜ In ≦ 2500
120
60
20
7000
4000
2500
1000
1000
500
8000
5000
3000
8
2500 ＜ In 10 1500 500 2000
Notes: 1. Max value applicable to respective frame size

2. Min value. This may be increased by agreement. If the value is increased, the test report must state so specifically.
3. The breakers must be kept closed at each operation cycle for a duration of time sufficient for the current to be established. The duration, however,
does not need to be longer than two seconds.
8-5
8
vMaintenance and inspection
5. Troubleshooting guide
Take an appropriate action according to the following table when a trouble occurs:
■ Troubles in breakers
Category Symptom Possible cause Remedy/Action
○Overheat of terminals ○Looseness of terminal screws or conductor clamping screws ○Retighten.
○Burnout of terminal ○Increase in contact resistance of contactors ○Replace.
insulation ○Contact failure between stud conductor and terminal (due to looseness of
screws or foreign matter)
Overheat ○Overheat (exceeding ○Increase in contact resistance of contactors ○Replace.
70°C) of breaker molded ○Looseness of interior parts
case ○Increase in current density due to disconnection of braided wire
○High-frequency distortion of load current ○Improve distortion factor.
Continuity ○Abnormal voltage ○Excessive wear of contactors ○Replace.

failure on load side ○Foreign matter between contactors
○Damage to current carrying parts
(due to excessively frequent switching or corrosive gases)
○Closing not allowed ○Breaker is kept in tripped state, i.e., is not reset. ○Reset.
○Resetting not allowed ○UVT is not excited. ○Energize.
○Bimetal is not enough cooled after tripping due to overcurrent. ○Cool down before resetting.
Inoperativeness ○Bimetal is deformed e.g. by corrosion. ○Replace.
○Admissible number of operation cycles is exceeded and service
life has expired. (SHT or UVT was frequently used for tripping).
○Mechanical failure
○Tripping occurring while ○Ambient temperature too high (exceeding 40°C) ○Reduce ambient
rated current is still not temperature e.g. through
reached ventilation.
○Overheat due to looseness of terminal screws ○Retighten.
○Overheat of interior parts ○Replace.
○Vibration and/or shock ○Use cushions or the like to
dampen vibration and
shock.
○Incompatible frequency (for thermal-magnetic breakers with CT) ○Replace to match
frequency.
○High-frequency distortion of load current ○Reduce load current or
Nuisance change current rating.
tripping ○Conductor size smaller than specified ○Use larger size conductors
or change current rating.
○Electromagnetic-induced noise (for electronic breakers) ○Isolate noise source.
○Excessive surge (for electronic breakers) ○Isolate surge source.
○Tripping due to ○Inrush starting current ○Change instantaneous trip
starting current ○Switching operation of star-delta starter pickup current or replace
○Start of inching (resulting in instantaneous tripping) with breaker having
larger current rating.
○Starting current too high (resulting in long-delayed tripping) ○Replace with breaker
○Starting time too long (resulting in long-delayed tripping) having larger current rating.
○Short-circuit in motor ○Repair or replace motor.
○Erroneous connection of control circuit for SHT or UVT ○Check connection.
No response ○No tripping at trip ○Failure in coordination with an upstream current-limiting fuse or breaker ○Review coordination.
to overcurrent pickup current ○Ambient temperature too low ○Check compensation
current.
○Incompatible frequency ○Match frequency.
8-6
■ Troubles in accessories
Category Symptom Possible cause Remedy/Action
○Failure of motor operator ○Wiring mistakes in control circuit ○Check and correct wiring.
○Continuous on/off operations due to wiring mistakes in control circuit
○Voltage drop due to insufficient capacity of power supply cable ○Use larger size cable.
○Insufficient power supply capacity of control circuit ○Increase power supply
capacity.
○Closing/opening/resetting not allowed due to improper stroke adjustment ○Return to Terasaki for
of operation mechanism stroke readjustment.
○Failure of SHT ○Supply-voltage drop due to insufficient current carrying capacity ○Increase current carrying
of control circuit capacity.
○Supply-voltage drop due to insufficient current carrying capacity ○Increase power supply
capacity.
Failure of ○Coil burnout due to continuous excitations, improper coil ratings, failure or ○Return to Terasaki or
accessories fusion of anti-burnout contacts, etc. replace.
○Failure of UVT ○Remanence ○Repair or replace.
○Improper stroke adjustment
○Failure of auxiliary and/or ○Fusion or burnout of microswitch contacts due to their improper ratings ○Return to Terasaki or
alarm switches replace. Load to
microswitch contacts
will be relieved e.g
through auxiliary relays.
○Improper adjustment of microswitches ○Return to Terasaki for
repair.
8
8-7
9 Appendix
zHandle operation and dimensions …………………………………………9-2
xMounting positions for trip button…………………………………………9-3
cStandard arrangement for plug-in type auxiliary circuit terminals
(for high-performance type)…………………………………………………9-4
vStandard arrangement for plug-in type auxiliary circuit terminals
(for standard type) ……………………………………………………………9-5
bInternal resistance and power consumptions of breakers ……………9-8
Appendix
9
9-1
9
Appendix
zHandle operation and dimensions

ON
Plus side
Trip
G G
G
ASL
C
D
Minus side
OFF
E
et
Res
D
E
D
F F
F
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 A

B
Frame Breaker Ref. Operation angle Dimensions Operation effort N

(A) figure ON OFF Trip Reset OFF ON Trip Radius of
rotation
↓ ↓ ↓
α° β° γ° δ° A B C D E F G ON OFF Reset (mm)
50 E50-SF,E50-CM 1 17 7 6.5 12 32.8 87 +3 6 7 10 15.5 19.6 9.8 39.2 54.2
S50-SF 2 12.7 10.4 2 13.2 40.6 95 -2 7.4 7.8 13 22.8 44.1 37.2 78.4 54.5
S50-GF 2 19.2 16.5 4.1 19 26 92 0 6.8 9.3 13 20.4 22.0 28.0 68.0 66.0
100 E100-SF 1 17 7 6.5 12 32.8 87 +3 6 7 10 15.5 19.6 9.8 39.2 54.2
S100-NF,S100-GF 2 19.2 16.5 4.1 19 26 92 0 6.8 9.3 13 20.4 22.0 28.0 68.0 66.0
S100-NM,S100-NN
H100-NF,L100-NF 2 19.2 16.5 4.1 19 61 127 0 6.8 9.3 13 20.4 25.0 36.0 76.0 66.0
125 S125-SF,S125-SN 2 12.7 10.4 2 13.2 40.6 95 -2 7.4 7.8 13 22.8 44.1 37.2 78.4 54.5
S125-NF,S125-GF,S125-NN 2 19.2 16.5 4.1 19 26 92 0 6.8 9.3 13 20.4 22.0 28.0 68.0 66.0
H125-NF,L125-NF 2 19.2 16.5 4.1 19 61 127 0 6.8 9.3 13 20.4 25.0 36.0 76.0 66.0
225 S225-NF,S225-GF,S225-NM 2 19.2 16.5 4.1 19 26 92 0 6.8 9.3 13 20.4 25.0 36.0 76.0 66.0
250 S225-GE,H225-NF,L225-NF 2 19.2 16.5 4.1 19 61 127 0 6.8 9.3 13 20.4 25.0 36.0 76.0 66.0
E250-SF,S250-SF,S250-SN 2 11.8 13.2 3.8 16.2 40.5 95 0 7.4 7.2 13 21.1 53.0 57.0 91.0 54.4
S250-NF,S250-GF 2 19.2 16.5 4.1 19 26 92 0 6.8 9.3 13 20.4 25.0 36.0 76.0 66.0
400 S400-CF,S400-NF 3 19.8 19.3 -3.5 22.5 53.6 145 +2.8 14 9 34 39.5 110 115 125 91.4
S400-NE,S400-NN
S400-GF,S400-GE
S400-PF,S400-PE
H400-NE,L400-NE 3 19.8 19.3 -3.5 22.5 90.6 182 +2.8 14 9 34 39.5 110 115 125 91.4
630 S630-CF,S630-NF,S630-RF 3 20 18 2 22 53.7 145 +5 13 11 40 39.5 140 140 10 91.3
S630-NE,S630-RE,S630-GN
H630-NE,L630-NE 3 20 18 2 22 90.7 145 +5 13 11 40 39.5 140 140 10 91.3
800 S800-CF,S800-NF,S800-RF 3 20 18 2 22 53.7 145 +5 13 11 40 39.5 140 140 10 91.3
S800-NE,S800-RE,S800-GN
H800-NE,L800-NE 3 20 18 2 22 90.7 145 +5 13 11 40 39.5 140 140 10 91.3
1000 TL-1000NE 1 22 4 3 9 93.5 191 -2.8 11 12.5 40 30 157 118 343 98.3
1200 TL-1200NE 1 22 4 3 9 93.5 191 -2.8 11 12.5 40 30 157 118 343 98.3
1250 S1250-NE,S1250-GE,S1250-NN 2 22 4 12 9 73.5 171 -2.8 11 12.5 40 30 157 294 343 98.3
1600 S1600-NE,S1600-NN 2 22 4 12 9 93.5 191 -2.8 11 12.5 40 30 157 294 343 98.3
2000 XS2000NE,XS2000NN 1 18.3 10 7.7 15.3 100 245 +2 20.5 24 60 42.5 382 322 559 146
Unit Operation effort : N
1N≒1/9.8kgf
9-2
9
Appendix
xMounting positions for trip button
HL HL HL
Trip button
Trip button
CL 1
CL CL ASL 2
B
D
B
D
B
D
C C
C
A A Trip button A
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3

HL 2P 2P HL
CL CL
Trip button
øC
Trip button
ASL ASL
ASL ASL
B
B
B
E
B
B
B2
D øC
A Trip button øC
A A A A
Trip button
Minus side Plus side Plus side Minus side

A2
øC Trip button
Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7
HL : Handle Frame Centre Line CL : Handle Centre Line ASL : Arrangement Standard Line
Frame Breaker Ref. Trip button Frame Breaker Ref. Trip button
figure A B C D figure
A B C
50 S50-SF 1 7.6 18.8 6.9 3.4 50 E50-SF,E50-CM 2P 5 -19 28 6
S50-GF 2 13.8 20.4 3.3 4.3 3P 7 -31.5 28 6
100 S100-NF,S100-GF 2 13.8 20.4 3.3 4.3 100 E100-SF 2P 6 +20 28 6
S100-NM,S100-NN 3P 7 -31.5 28 6
H100-NF,L100-NF 2 17.2 20.4 3.3 4.3 1000 TL-1000NE 7 0 72.5 6
125 S125-SF,S125-SN 1 7.6 18.8 6.9 3.4 1200 TL-1200NE 7 0 72.5 6
S125-NF,S125-GF,S125-NN 2 13.8 20.4 3.3 4.3 2000 XS2000NE,XS2000NN 7 +39 126 6
H125-NF,L125-NF 2 17.2 20.4 3.3 4.3
225 S225-NF,S225-GF,S225-NM 2 17.2 20.4 3.3 4.3
250 H225-NF,L225-NF,S225-GE 2 17.2 20.4 3.3 4.3
E250-SF,S250-SF,S250-SN 1 10.9 18.6 6.4 4.8
S250-NF,S250-GF 2 17.2 20.4 3.3 4.3
400 S400-CF,S400-NF 3① 21.6 37.2 5.3 6.6
S400-NE,S400-NN
S400-GF,S400-GE
S400-PF,S400-PE
H400-NE,L400-NE 3① 21.6 37.2 5.3 6.6
Appendix
630 S630-CF,S630-NF,S630-RF 3② 21.8 33 5.3 6.6

S630-NE,S630-RE,S630-GN
H630-NE,L630-NE 3② 21.8 33 5.3 6.6
800 S800-CF,S800-NF,S800-RF 3② 21.8 33 5.3 6.6
S800-NE,S800-RE,S800-GN
H800-NE,L800-NE 3② 21.8 33 5.3 6.6
Frame Breaker Ref. Trip button

figure A B C D E
A2 B2
1250③ S1250-NE,S1250-GE,S1250-NN
1600③ S1600-NE,S1600-NN
Notes: 1. 400AF apply C
4
4
L Handle Centre Line.
30 37.5 31 70.5
30 37.5 31 70.5
6
6
6
6
8
8 9
2. 630AF and 800AF apply ASL Arrangement Standard Line.
3. 2 trip buttons are equipped.
9-3
9
Appendix
cStandard arrangement for plug-in type auxiliary circuit terminals (for high-performance type)
Auxiliary circuit terminals are of self-engaging type.

Shown in the table below are standard terminal arrangements as seen from the front of the plug-
~~~~~~~~~~~
in base for high-performance type.
~~~
Contact us for non-standard arrangements.
Terminal screw M3.5

Suitable compression terminal R1.25–3.5
S400-CF,S400-NF,S400-NE
H100-NF,L100-NF S400-GF,S400-GE,S400-NN
S100-NF S400-PF,S400-PE,H400-NE,L400-NE
S50-GF H125-NF,L125-NF
S100-GF S630-CF,S630-NF,S630-RF
S100-NF,S100-GF,S100-NN S225-NF,S225-GF,H225-NF S630-NE,S630-RE,S630-GN
Breaker S125-NF
S125-NF,S125-GF L225-NF,S225-GE S800-CF,S800-NF,S800-RF
S125-GF
S250-NF,S250-GF S800-NE,S800-RE,S800-NN
H630-NE,L630NE,H800-NE,L800NE
2P 3P, 4P 3P, 4P 3P, 4P
Number of auxiliary
circuit terminals
(Max allowable)
C1 AXa1 AXa2 ALa1 C1 AXa1 AXa2 ALa1 C1 AXa1 AXa2 AXa3 ALa1 C1
Arrangement 1 AXb1 AXb2 ALb1 AXb1 AXb2 ALb1 AXb1 AXb2 AXb3 ALb1
C2 AXc1 AXc2 ALc1 C2 AXc1 AXc2 ALc1 C2 AXc1 AXc2 AXc3 ALc1 C2
D1 AXa1 AXa2 ALa1 D1 AXa1 AXa2 ALa1 D1 AXa1 AXa2 AXa3 ALa1 D1
Arrangement 2 AXb1 AXb2 ALb1 AXb1 AXb2 ALb1 AXb1 AXb2 AXb3 ALb1
D2 AXc1 AXc2 ALc1 D2 AXc1 AXc2 ALc1 D2 AXc1 AXc2 AXc3 ALc1 D2
AXa1 AXa2
Arrangement 3 AXb1 AXb2
AXc1 AXc2
AXa1 ALa1
Arrangement 4 AXb1 ALb1
AXc1 ALc1
9-4
9
Appendix
vStandard arrangement for plug-in type auxiliary circuit terminals (for standard type)
Five auxiliary circuit terminals (self-engaging) constitute a terminal block.

Shown in the table below are standard terminal arrangements as seen from the rear of the plug-in
~~~~~~~~~~~
base for standard type.
~~
S50-SF,S125-SF E250-SF,S250-SF
S50-SF,S125-SF
S125-SN S250-SN
Breaker
2P 3P 3P
Number of
auxiliary circuit
terminals
(Max allowable)
AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 C1 C2 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 C1 C2
Arrangement 1 C1 C2
ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 C1 C2 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 C1 C2
AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 D1 D2 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 D1 D2
Arrangement 2 D1 D2
ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 D1 D2 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 D1 D2
AXc1 AXa1 AXb1
Arrangement 3 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1
Appendix
ALc1 ALa1 ALb1
Arrangement 4
9
9-5
9
Appendix
vStandard arrangement for plug-in type auxiliary circuit terminals (for standard type)
Five auxiliary circuit terminals (self-engaging) constitute a terminal block.

Shown in the table below are standard terminal arrangements as seen from the rear of the plug-in
~~~~~~~~~~~
base for standard type.
~~
✽ If the number of auxiliary circuit terminals (self-engaging) is insufficient for E50-SF,

E50-CM and E100-SF lead wires are to be used along with the auxiliary circuit terminals.
Please state the accessories for which lead wires are used, when ordering.
S50-GF, S100-NF
S100-GF, S100-NN
H100-NF, L100-NF S630-CF,S630-NF,S630-RF,S630-NE
E50-SF S125-NF, S125-GF S400-CF,S400-NF,S400-GF,S400-NN S630-RE,S630-GN,S800-CF,S800-NF
E50-SF
E50-CM S125-NN, H125-NF S400-NE, S400-GE,S400-PF,S400-PE S800-RF,S800-NE,S800-RE,S800-NN TL-1000NE,TL-1200NE
E100-SF
Breaker E100-SF L125-NF, S225-NF H400-NE,L400-NE H630-NE, L630-NE,H800-NE,L800-NE
S225-GF, H225-NF S1250-NE,S1250-GE,S1250-NN
L225-NF, S225-GE
S250-NF, S250-GF
2P 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P, 4P
Number of
auxiliary circuit
terminals
(Max allowable)
AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 U1 U2 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 C1 C2 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 AXc2 AXa2 AXb2 C1 C2 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 OP1 OP2 D1 D2 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 OP1 OP2 U1 U2
}
✽1 ✽1
Arrangement 1
ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 U1 U2 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 C1 C2 AXc2 AXa2 AXb2 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 C1 C2 AXc2 AXa2 AXb2 PALc PALa AXc2 AXa2 AXb2 PALc PALa
U1 U2 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 P1 P2 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 D1 D2 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 AXc2 AXa2 AXb2 D1 D2 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 OP1 OP2 C1 C2 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 OP1 OP2 P1 P2
}
}
✽2 ✽1 ✽1 ✽2
Arrangement 2
P1 P2 ALc1 AXa1 AXb1 P1 P2 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 D1 D2 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 D1 D2 AXc2 AXa2 AXb2 PALc PALa AXc2 AXa2 AXb2 PALc PALa
}
✽2
Appendix
AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 S1 S2 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 PALa PALb OP1 OP2 C1 C2 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 OP1 OP2 S1 S2
}
✽1 ✽2
Arrangement 3 S1 S2
ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 S1 S2 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 PALa PALb OP1 OP2 C1 C2 AXc2 AXa2 AXb2 PALc PALa
✽1：If the OCR controller is installed separately, substitute OS1 and OS2 for OP1 and OP2 and connect these terminals to the controller terminals having the same numbers.
✽2：If the UVT controller is installed separately, substitute UC1 and UC2 for P1 and P2 and connect these terminals to the controller terminals having the same numbers.
9
9-6 9-7
9
Appendix
bInternal resistance and power consumptions of breakers
■Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Internal resistance, Power consumption, Internal resistance, Power consumption,
MΩ (Note 1) W (Note 2) MΩ (Note 1) W (Note 2)
Frame • Per pole • Per pole Frame • Per pole • Per pole
Breaker Breaker
(A) (A)
Rated Front- Front- Rated Front- Front-
Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in
current, A connected connected current, A connected connected
50 E50-SF 10 15.9 16.2 1.6 1.6 400 S400-CF,S400-NF 125 0.49 0.54 7.66 8.44
15 5.7 6 1.3 1.4 S400-GF 150 0.49 0.54 11.03 12.15
20 4.7 5 1.9 2 175 0.24 0.29 7.35 8.88
30 3.5 3.8 3.2 3.4 200 0.24 0.29 9.6 11.6
40 2 2.3 3.2 3.7 225 0.24 0.29 12.15 14.68
50 1.6 1.9 4 4.8 250 0.24 0.29 15 18.13
S50-SF 15 8.63 8.75 1.94 1.97 300 0.14 0.19 12.6 17.1
20 8.63 8.75 3.45 3.5 350 0.14 0.19 17.15 23.28
30 3.18 3.3 2.86 2.97 400 0.14 0.19 22.4 30.4
40 2.72 2.84 4.35 4.54 S400-PF 250 0.24 0.29 15 18.13
50 2.69 2.81 6.73 7.03 300 0.14 0.19 12.6 17.1
S50-GF 15 15 15.3 3.38 3.44 350 0.14 0.19 17.15 23.28
20 15 15.3 6.0 6.12 400 0.14 0.19 22.4 30.4
30 8 8.27 7.2 7.44 S400-NE,S400-GE 125 0.13 0.18 2.03 2.8
40 1.8 2.07 2.88 3.31 S400-PE 150 0.13 0.18 2.93 4.1
50 1.8 2.07 4.5 5.18 175 0.13 0.18 3.98 5.5
100 E100-SF 10 15.9 16.2 1.6 1.6 200 0.13 0.18 5.2 7.2
15 5.7 6 1.3 1.4 225 0.13 0.18 6.58 9.1
20 4.7 5 1.9 2 250 0.13 0.18 8.13 11.3
30 3.5 3.8 3.2 3.4 300 0.13 0.18 11.7 16.2
40 2 2.3 3.2 3.7 350 0.13 0.18 15.93 22.1
50 1.6 1.9 4 4.8 400 0.13 0.18 20.8 28.8
60 1.2 1.5 4.3 5.4 H400-NE,L400-NE 250 0.19 0.23 11.9 14.4
75 1.1 1.4 6.2 7.9 300 0.19 0.23 17.1 20.7
100 1 1.3 10 13 350 0.19 0.23 23.2 28.2
S100-NF,S100-GF 15 15 15.3 3.38 3.44 400 0.19 0.23 30.4 36.8
20 15 15.3 6 3.44 630 S630-CF,S630-NF,S630-RF 500 0.11 0.12 27.5 30
30 8.0 8.27 7.2 6.12 600 0.11 0.12 39.6 43.2
40 1.8 2.07 2.88 7.44 630 0.11 0.12 43.7 47.6
50 1.8 2.07 4.5 3.31 S630-NE,S630-RE 250 0.08 0.09 5 5.63
60 1.3 1.57 4.68 5.18 300 0.08 0.09 7.2 8.1
75 0.8 1.07 4.5 5.65 350 0.08 0.09 9.8 11
100 0.8 1.07 8 6.02 400 0.08 0.09 12.8 14.4
H100-NF,L100-NF 15 23.5 23.6 5.29 5.31 500 0.08 0.09 20 22.5
20 23.5 23.6 9.4 9.44 600 0.08 0.09 28.8 32.4
30 11.9 12 10.7 10.8 630 0.08 0.09 31.8 35.7
40 1.99 2.13 3.18 3.41 H630-NE,L630-NE 250 0.1 0.12 6.3 7.5
50 1.99 2.13 4.98 5.33 300 0.1 0.12 9 10.8
60 1.62 1.76 5.83 6.34 350 0.1 0.12 12.3 14.7
75 0.97 1.11 9.7 6.24 400 0.1 0.12 16 19.2
100 0.97 1.11 9.7 11.1 500 0.1 0.12 25 30.0
S100-NM 16 15 − 3.84 − 600 0.1 0.12 36 43.2
24 8 − 4.61 − 630 0.1 0.12 39.69 47.6
32 1.8 − 1.84 − 800 S800-CF,S800-NF,S800-RF 700 0.09 0.11 44.1 53.9
40 1.8 − 2.88 − 800 0.09 0.11 57.6 70.4
50 1.8 − 3.65 − S800-NE,S800-RE 350 0.08 0.1 9.8 12.3
60 1.3 − 4.68 − 400 0.08 0.1 12.8 16
75 0.8 − 4.5 − 450 0.08 0.1 16.2 20.3
90 0.8 − 6.48 − 500 0.08 0.1 20 25
100 0.8 − 8 − 600 0.08 0.1 28.8 36
125 S125-SF 15 8.63 8.75 1.94 1.97 700 0.08 0.1 39.2 49
20 8.63 8.75 3.45 3.5 800 0.08 0.1 51.2 64
30 3.18 3.3 2.86 2.97 H800-NE,L800-NE 350 0.1 0.12 12.3 14.7
40 2.72 2.84 4.35 4.54 400 0.1 0.12 16 19.2
50 2.69 2.81 6.73 7.03 450 0.1 0.12 20.3 24.3
60 2.14 2.26 7.70 8.14 500 0.1 0.12 25 30
75 1.42 1.54 7.99 8.66 600 0.1 0.12 36 43.2
100 0.93 1.05 9.3 10.5 700 0.1 0.12 49 58.8
125 0.84 0.96 13.13 15 800 0.1 0.12 64 76.8
S125-NF,S125-GF 125 0.8 1.07 12.5 16.7 1000 TL-1000NE 500 0.045 0.06 11.3 15
H125-NF,L125-NF 125 0.97 1.11 15.2 17.3 600 0.045 0.06 16.2 21.6
225 S225-NF,S225-GF 125 0.47 0.61 7.34 9.53 700 0.045 0.06 22.1 29.4
150 0.47 0.61 10.58 13.73 800 0.045 0.06 28.8 38.4
175 0.26 0.4 7.96 12.25 900 0.045 0.06 36.5 48.6
200 0.26 0.4 10.4 16 1000 0.045 0.06 45 60
225 0.26 0.4 13.16 20.25 1200 TL-1200NE 600 0.045 0.06 16.2 21.6
S225-GE 125 0.35 0.49 5.47 7.66 700 0.045 0.06 22.1 29.4
150 0.35 0.49 7.88 11 800 0.045 0.06 28.8 38.4
175 0.35 0.49 10.7 15 1000 0.045 0.06 45 60
200 0.35 0.49 14 19.6 1200 0.045 0.06 64.8 86.4
225 0.35 0.49 17.7 24.8 1250 S1250-NE,S1250-GE 500 0.04 0.053 10 13.3
H225-NF,L225-NF 125 0.57 0.71 8.91 11.09 600 0.04 0.053 14.4 19.1
150 0.57 0.71 12.83 15.98 700 0.04 0.053 19.6 26
175 0.36 0.5 11.03 15.31 800 0.04 0.053 25.6 33.9
200 0.36 0.5 14.4 20 1000 0.04 0.053 40 53
225 0.36 0.5 18.23 25.31 1200 0.04 0.053 57.6 76.3
S225-NM 125 0.47 − 7.34 − 1250 0.04 0.053 62.5 82.8
150 0.47 − 10.58 − 1600 S1600-NE 700 0.022 0.039 (Note 3) 10.8 19.1 (Note 3)
175 0.26 − 7.96 − 800 0.022 0.039 (Note 3) 14.1 25 (Note 3)
225 0.26 − 13.16 − 900 0.022 0.039 (Note 3) 17.8 31.6 (Note 3)
250 E250-SF 125 0.45 0.59 7.03 9.22 1000 0.022 0.039 (Note 3) 22 39 (Note 3)
150 0.45 0.59 10.13 13.28 1200 0.022 0.039 (Note 3) 31.7 56.2 (Note 3)
175 0.35 0.49 10.72 15.01 1400 0.022 0.039 (Note 3) 43.1 76.4 (Note 3)
200 0.35 0.49 14.00 19.60 1600 0.022 0.039 (Note 3) 56.3 99.8 (Note 3)
225 0.26 0.4 13.16 20.25 2000 XS2000NE 1000 0.017 0.022 (Note 3) 17 22 (Note 3)
250 0.26 0.4 16.25 25.00 1200 0.017 0.022 (Note 3) 24.5 31.7 (Note 3)
S250-SF 125 0.45 0.59 7.03 9.22 1400 0.017 0.022 (Note 3) 33.3 43.1 (Note 3)
150 0.45 0.59 10.13 13.28 1600 0.017 0.022 (Note 3) 43.5 56.3 (Note 3)
175 0.35 0.49 10.72 15.01 1800 0.017 0.022 (Note 3) 55.1 74.5 (Note 3)
200 0.35 0.49 14.00 19.60 2000 0.017 0.022 (Note 3) 68 92 (Note 3)
225 0.26 0.4 13.16 20.25
Notes: 1. The resistance values shown above are for reference purpose only.
250 0.26 0.4 16.25 25.00
S250-NF,S250-GF 250 0.26 0.4 16.3 25 2. The power consumptions shown above are calculated on the basis of
the dc internal resistance.
3. Applicable to draw-out type.
9-8
TERASAKI TERASAKI ELECTRIC (EUROPE) LTD. TERASAKI ESPAÑA, S.A.U. TERASAKI ITALIA s.r.l.
SKANDINAVISKA AB (United Kingdom) (Spain) (Italy)
(Sweden)
TERASAKI Global Network
TERASAKI ELECTRIC CO., LTD. TERASAKI ELECTRIC TERASAKI CIRCUIT TERASAKI ELECTRIC CO.,
(Head Quarters, Japan) (M) SDN. BHD. BREAKERS (S) PTE. LTD. (FAR EAST) PTE. LTD.
(Malaysia) (Singapore) (Singapore)
Since 1971 when we

established TERASAKI
ELECTRIC Europe, our first
&
overseas subsidiary, in the
UK, we have assembled a
global network of 10
overseas subsidiaries and
TERASAKI ELECTRIC TERASAKI ELECTRIC TERASAKI DO BRASIL LTDA. 58 agents to provide sales
(SHANGHAI) CO., LTD. (CHINA) LTD. (Brazil) and technical supports to
(China) (China) customers worldwide.
! Safety Notice
Carefully read instruction manual to ensure proper installation,
connection, operation, handling and maintenance of the product.
10–!43Ec
Head Office : 7-2-10 Hannancho, Abenoku, Osaka, JAPAN

Circuit Breaker Division : 7-2-10 Kamihigashi, Hiranoku, Osaka, JAPAN
Telephone : 81-6-6791-9323 / Fax : 81-6-6791-9274
E-mail : int-sales@terasaki.co.jp
http://www.terasaki.co.jp/
SEP. 2010-0.5K Catalogue No. ’10–!43Ec

Ratings and specifications are subject to change without notice.

(Catalogue) TB2 MCCB Marine Sept'10 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

(Catalogue) TB2 MCCB Marine Sept'10 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

&

The Ultimate Safety Breaker

Molded Case Circuit Breaker

2. Ratings and Specifications …………………………………………………………………………………………………2-1

4. Special Breakers ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………4-1

5. Mounting and Connection ……………………………………………………………………………………………………5-1

7. Characteristics and Outline Dimensions …………………………………………………………………………………7-1

Approvals by ship classification societies

NK NIPPON KAIJI KYOKAI

LR Lloyd’s Register of Shipping

ABS The American Bureau of Shipping

CCS China Classification Society

KR Korean Register of Shipping

RINA Registro Italiano Navale

IEC 60947-2 International Electrotechnical Commission

EN 60947-2 European Standard

The isolation capability means that, as long as the main contact

2 Direct Opening Action

Under the heading “Measures to minimize the risk in the event of

2 Safety lock for Plug-in versions

MCCB is locked to the base

when the toggle is ON. It cannot

[For distribution boards]

The risk of touching live parts has been minimized by design.

2 Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics)

[225AF Standard series]

Icu / Ics=25/13kA Icu / Ics=25/25kA

13kA Icu Ics

Smaller size and higher breaking capacity,

• Smaller in size than existing models

TL-100C L100-NF TL-225B L225-NF TL-400 L400-NE

Molded Case Frame size (A)

Economical series E50-SF E100-SF E250-SF

Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic

S50-GF S100-GF S125-GF S225-GF S250-GF S400-GF S630-RF S800-RF

Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic

Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic

Electronic Electronic Electronic

Motor protection series E50-CM S100-NM S225-NM

Non-automatic trip breakers XS2000NN

S125-SN S250-SN S630-GN S800-NN S1250-NN S1600-NN

④ AC450V Icu(NK) AC450V Ics (NK)

Ratings and Specifications

Frame size (A) 50 100 250

＊center pole omitted

Frame size (A) 50 100 125 125 225 250

＊center pole omitted

Ratings and Specifications

Frame size (A) 800 800 800 1250 1600 2000

Rated insulation voltage〔Ui〕 V AC 690 690 690 690 690 690

Ratings and Specifications

Ratings and Specifications

Frame size (A) 100 125 225 400 630 800

Ratings and Specifications

Frame size (A) 50 100 225

Rated insulation voltage〔Ui〕 V AC 690 690 690

Frame size (A) 100 125 125 250 400 630

Ratings and Specifications

Frame size (A) 800 1250 1600

Frame size (A) 2000

Ratings and Specifications

Frame size (A) 50 50 50

Frame size (A) 1250